ATST Support and Operations Facilities Completion Package ...

ATST Support and Operations Facilities Completion Package M3-PN09077 November 2, 2012

Page 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS NUMBER TITLE OF PAGES

VOLUME I DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01000 Special Provisions................................................................................... 13 01010 Summary of Work .................................................................................... 1 01027 Applications for Payment ......................................................................... 4 01035 Modification Procedures .......................................................................... 2 01040 Coordination ............................................................................................. 3 01050 Field Engineering ..................................................................................... 3 01095 Reference Standards and Definitions ....................................................... 3 01200 Project Meetings ....................................................................................... 3 01300 Submittals ................................................................................................. 7 01400 Quality Control ......................................................................................... 3 01405 IAQ and Cleanliness Management Plan ................................................... 2 01410 Statement of Special Inspections ............................................................ 11 01600 Materials and Equipment .......................................................................... 4 01635 Substitution Procedures ............................................................................ 4 01700 Contract Closeout ..................................................................................... 5 01740 Warranties ................................................................................................. 3 01840 Schedule of Drawings ............................................................................. 13 ATST SPEC-0030 Conditions for Working at the ATST Project Site and Safety and Health Specifications for Contractors (Rev C) ..................... 53 DIVISION 2 – SITE WORK Section 02220 Demolition and Removal .......................................................................... 4 02230 Site Preparation ........................................................................................ 3 02300 Earthwork ................................................................................................. 6 02315 Utility Trench Excavation and Backfill .................................................... 7 02630 Storm Drainage System ............................................................................ 4 02740 Asphaltic Concrete Paving ....................................................................... 4 02760 Pavement Markings .................................................................................. 3 DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete ........................................................................... 23 03410 Plant-Precast Structural Concrete ........................................................... 16 03481 Precast Concrete Stair Treads ................................................................... 5 DIVISION 4 – MASONRY *Not Included in this Submittal


Page 2

DIVISION 5 – METALS Section 05120 Structural Steel ....................................................................................... 12 05310 Steel Deck ...................................................................................................... 7 05500 Metal Fabrications .................................................................................. 12 05511 Metal Stairs and Steel Pipe and Tube Railings ...................................... 10 05530 Gratings .................................................................................................... 8 05811 Architectural Joint Systems ...................................................................... 8 DIVISION 6 – WOOD & PLASTICS Section 06160 Sheathing .................................................................................................. 3 06411 Wood-Veneer-Faced Architectural Cabinets............................................ 7 06417 Plastic-Laminate-Clad Countertops .......................................................... 5 DIVISION 7 – THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07210 Building Insulation ................................................................................... 5 07227 Fall Protection Devices ............................................................................. 4 07411 Metal Roof Panels .................................................................................. 13 07413 Insulated-Core Metal wall Panels ........................................................... 13 07570 Foamed-In-Place Coated Insulation .......................................................... 6 07720 Roof Accessories ...................................................................................... 4 07811 Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials.............................................................. 6 07841 Through-Penetration Firestop Systems .................................................... 7 07910 Special Seals ............................................................................................. 2 07920 Joint Sealants ............................................................................................ 9 DIVISION 8 – DOORS & WINDOWS Section 08110 Steel Doors and Frames .......................................................................... 10 08311 Access Doors and Frames ......................................................................... 5 08331 Overhead Coiling Doors ......................................................................... 12 08520 Aluminum Windows (Impact Resistant) .................................................. 8 08710 Door Hardware ....................................................................................... 25 08800 Glazing .................................................................................................... 11 DIVISION 9 – FINISHES Section 09111 Non-Load-Bearing Steel Framing ............................................................ 5 09250 Gypsum Board .......................................................................................... 7 09265 Gypsum Board Shaft-Wall Assemblies .................................................... 6 09310 Ceramic Tile ............................................................................................. 8 09511 Acoustical Panel Ceilings ......................................................................... 9 09651 Resilient Floor Tile ................................................................................... 5 09653 Resilient Wall Base and Accessories ....................................................... 7 09661 Static-Control Resilient Floor Coverings ................................................. 6 09770 FRP Wall Panels ....................................................................................... 6 09841 Bonded Acoustical Cotton Panels ............................................................ 4 09911 Exterior Painting ....................................................................................... 8 09912 Interior Painting ........................................................................................ 7 09960 High-Performance Coatings ..................................................................... 9


Page 3

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES Section 10155 Toilet Compartment .................................................................................. 5 10213 Fixed Louvers ................................................................................................ 7 10434 Panel Signage................................................................................................. 3 10523 Fire Extinguishers .......................................................................................... 3 10801 Toilet and Bath Accessories .......................................................................... 5 DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT *Not Included in this Submittal DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS Section 12491 Horizontal Louver Blinds ......................................................................... 5 12494 Roller Shades (Blackout Shades) ............................................................. 7 DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION Section 13042 Cleanroom Flush Filtered Ceiling Grid and Plenum System ....................... 7 13100 Lightning Protection ...................................................................................... 4 13848 Network Lighting Controls ......................................................................... 15 13852 Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System .................................................... 17 DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING SYSTEMS Section 14210 Electric Traction Elevators ..................................................................... 14 14220 Limited Use / Limited Application Elevators........................................... 9 14550 Vertical Reciprocating Conveyor.................................................................. 6 14630 Top Running Single Girder Bridge Crane .................................................... 8 14631 Top Running Double Girder Bridge Crane .................................................. 7 14632 Monorail Hoist and Trolley ........................................................................... 7


Page 4

VOLUME II DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL Section 15057 Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment ............................ 3 15058 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment ................................ 3 15061 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment ...................... 11 15062 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment .......................... 10 15073 Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment ........ 5 15074 Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equip. ................. 10 15076 Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment ...................................... 4 15077 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment .......................................... 4 15085 Plumbing Piping Insulation ......................................................................... 16 15086 Duct Insulation ........................................................................................... 16 15087 HVAC Equipment Insulation ........................................................................ 9 15088 HVAC Piping Insulation ............................................................................ 18 15092 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping ............................................. 4 15093 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping ................................................. 3 15097 Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping ................................................................. 2 15098 Escutcheons for HVAC Piping ..................................................................... 2 15111 General Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping ................................................... 7 15112 General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping ....................................................... 8 15126 Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping ........................................................ 6 15127 Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping ............................................................ 7 15140 Domestic Water Piping ............................................................................... 12 15145 Domestic Water Piping Specialties ............................................................... 9 15150 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping ................................................................. 10 15155 Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties .............................................................. 11 15181 Hydronic Piping ........................................................................................... 14 15185 Hydronic Pumps ............................................................................................ 6 15189 HVAC Water Treatment ............................................................................... 5 15192 Facility Fuel-Oil Piping ............................................................................... 13 15211 General-Service Compressed-Air Piping .................................................... 10 15251 General-Service Packaged Air Compressors and Receivers .................... 5 15412 Emergency Plumbing Fixtures ...................................................................... 6 15414 Residential Plumbing Fixtures ...................................................................... 4 15415 Drinking Fountains ....................................................................................... 3 15417 Commercial Urinals....................................................................................... 4 15421 Commercial Lavatories ................................................................................. 6 15422 Commercial Sinks.......................................................................................... 6 15441 Domestic Water Pumps ................................................................................. 5 15450 Potable-Water Storage Tanks ........................................................................ 3 15471 Water Treatment Equipment ......................................................................... 5 - (Attached Lab Report for Cistern at Mees – Pural Water Specialty Co.) 15485 Electric Water Heaters .................................................................................. 6 15627 Reciprocating Water Chillers ...................................................................... 10 15629 Scroll Water Chillers ................................................................................... 10 15635 Refrigerant Detection and Alarm .................................................................. 5 15710 Hydronic Heat Exchangers............................................................................ 4 15726 Custom Air Handling Units........................................................................... 8 15762 Unit Heaters .................................................................................................. 4


Page 5

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL (cont.) 15763 Fan-Coil Units ............................................................................................... 6 15815 Metal Ducts ................................................................................................. 12 15820 Duct Accessories ......................................................................................... 10 15821 Duct Sound Attenuators ................................................................................ 3 15837 Centrifugal Fans ............................................................................................ 5 15855 Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles ................................................................... 2 15900 HVAC Instrumentation and Controls ......................................................... 16 15950 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing .............................................................. 17 DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL Section 16000 General Electrical Requirements for Electrical Work ............................... 16 16060 Grounding and Bonding ............................................................................... 6 16073 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems ............................................... 5 16074 Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical .............................................. 8 16075 Electrical Identification ................................................................................. 9 16091 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling .................. 4 16120 Conductors and Cables ............................................................................. 4 16130 Raceways and Boxes ................................................................................... 11 16136 Cable Trays for Communications Systems ................................................... 7

16140 Wiring Devices .............................................................................................. 8 16145 Lighting Control Devices .............................................................................. 6 16215 Electrical Power Monitoring and Control................................................... 20 16231 Packaged Engine Generators ....................................................................... 15

16264 Static Uninterruptible Power Supply .......................................................... 14 16269 Variable Frequency Controllers .................................................................. 14 16289 Surge Protection for Low-Voltage Electrical Power Circuits ...................... 5 16410 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers ...................................................... 7 16415 Transfer Switches .......................................................................................... 7 16420 Enclosed Controller ....................................................................................... 9 16441 Switchboards ............................................................................................... 13 16442 Panelboards .................................................................................................... 9 16461 Low-Voltage Transformers ........................................................................... 7 16491 Fuses .............................................................................................................. 4 16511 Interior Lighting........................................................................................... 11 16711 Pathways for Communications Systems ..................................................... 10 16714 Communications Equipment Room Fittings................................................. 6


COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 15057 - 1

SECTION 15057 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose, horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the following:

1. Motor controllers. 2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load. 3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence. 4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.

B. Comply with IEEE 841 for severe-duty motors.

2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS

A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 30 deg C and at altitude of 10,000 feet (3,048 m) above sea level.

B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.



2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS

A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.

B. Efficiency: Energy efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.

C. Service Factor: 1.15.

D. Mulitspeed Motors: Separate winding for each speed.

E. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.

F. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

G. Temperature Rise: Class B rating.

H. Insulation: Class F.

I. Code Letter Designation:

1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G. 2. Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer’s standard starting characteristic.

J. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor frame sizes smaller than 324T.

2.4 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box, suited to control method.

B. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.

1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by pulse-width modulated inverters.

2. Energy- and Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation. 3. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation. 4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected

motors.

C. Severe-Duty Motors: Comply with IEEE 841, with 1.15 minimum service factor.

2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS

A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application:



1. Permanent-split capacitor. 2. Split phase. 3. Capacitor start, inductor run. 4. Capacitor start, capacitor run.

B. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

C. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.

D. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)

END OF SECTION 15057


COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 15058 - 1

SECTION 15058 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose, horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the following:

1. Motor controllers. 2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load. 3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence. 4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.

B. Comply with IEEE 841 for severe-duty motors.

2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS

A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 30 deg C and at altitude of 10,000 feet (3,048m) above sea level.

B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.



2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS

A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.

B. Efficiency: Energy efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.

C. Service Factor: 1.15.

D. Multispeed Motors: Separate winding for each speed.

E. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.

F. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

G. Temperature Rise: Class B rating.

H. Insulation: Class F.

I. Code Letter Designation:

1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G. 2. Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.

J. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor frame sizes smaller than 324T.

2.4 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box, suited to control method.

B. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.

1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by pulse-width modulated inverters.

2. Energy- and Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation. 3. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation. 4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected

motors.

C. Severe-Duty Motors: Comply with IEEE 841, with 1.15 minimum service factor.

2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS

A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application:



1. Permanent-split capacitor. 2. Split phase. 3. Capacitor start, inductor run. 4. Capacitor start, capacitor run.

B. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

C. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.

D. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)



HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 15061 - 1

SECTION 15061 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Metal pipe hangers and supports. 2. Trapeze pipe hangers. 3. Metal framing systems. 4. Thermal-hanger shield inserts. 5. Fastener systems. 6. Pipe positioning systems. 7. Equipment supports.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 05500 "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze hangers for pipe and equipment supports.

2. Section 15073 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for vibration isolation devices.

3. Section 15123 "Expansion Fittings and Loops for Plumbing Piping" for pipe guides and anchors.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Delegated Design: Design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for plumbing piping and equipment shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7-05 and IBC 2006 as applicable.



1. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.

3. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment and obtain approval from authorities having jurisdiction.

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer registered in the State of Hawaii. Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following; include Product Data for components:

1. Trapeze pipe hangers. 2. Metal framing systems. 3. Pipe stands. 4. Equipment supports.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For trapeze hangers indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Detail fabrication and assembly of trapeze hangers. 2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for designing trapeze hangers.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Welding certificates.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

1. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and that certification is current.

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX.

1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31, “Code for Pressure Piping.” 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes

involved and that certification is current.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. 2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped. 3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner. 4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to

support bearing surface of piping. 5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel or stainless

steel.

B. Copper Pipe Hangers:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-coated-steel, factory-fabricated components.

2. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of copper-coated steel or stainless steel.

2.2 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS

A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.

2.3 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. MFMA Manufacturer Metal Framing Systems:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc. c. Flex-Strut Inc. d. GS Metals Corp. e. Thomas & Betts Corporation. f. Unistrut Corporation; Tyco International, Ltd. g. Wesanco, Inc.

2. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly for supporting multiple parallel pipes.

3. Standard: MFMA-4. 4. Channels: Continuous slotted steel channel with inturned lips.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456808509&mf=95&src=wd









5. Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped steel nuts or other devices designed to fit into channel slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel.

6. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel or stainless steel.

7. Metallic Coating: Galvanized. (Not required over stainless steel.)

2.4 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. 2. Clement Support Services. 3. ERICO International Corporation. 4. National Pipe Hanger Corporation. 5. PHS Industries, Inc. 6. Pipe Shields, Inc.; a subsidiary of Piping Technology & Products, Inc. 7. Piping Technology & Products, Inc. 8. Rilco Manufacturing Co., Inc. 9. Value Engineered Products, Inc.

B. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig (688-kPa) minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier.

C. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig (688-kPa) minimum compressive strength.

D. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.

E. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.

F. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches (50 mm) beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature.

2.5 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, stainless-steel anchors, for use in hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

C. Coordinate location and application with structural requirements.












2.6 PIPE POSITIONING SYSTEMS

A. Description: IAPMO PS 42, positioning system of metal brackets, clips, and straps for positioning piping in pipe spaces; for plumbing fixtures in commercial applications.

2.7 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbon-steel shapes.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building structure.

B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping, and support together on field-assembled metal framing systems.

D. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.

E. Fastener System Installation:



1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.

2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Pipe Positioning-System Installation: Install support devices to make rigid supply and waste piping connections to each plumbing fixture.

G. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.

H. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.

I. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

J. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

K. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

L. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

M. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

N. Insulated Piping:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation.

b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.



3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.


4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN 8 to DN 90): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.048 inch (1.22 mm) thick.

b. NPS 4 (DN 100): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.06 inch (1.52 mm) thick.

5. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.


A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth.

C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.

3.3 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding; appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so

contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches (40 mm).



3.5 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05 mm).

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish.

D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.

E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports, metal trapeze pipe hangers and metal framing systems and attachments for general service applications.

F. Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper attachments for copper piping and tubing.

G. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.

H. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 (DN 15 to DN 750).

2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of up to 1050 deg F (566 deg C), pipes NPS 4 to NPS 24 (DN 100 to DN 600), requiring up to 4 inches (100 mm) of insulation.

3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 36 (DN 20 to DN 900), requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches (100 mm) of insulation.

4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 24 (DN 15 to DN 600) if little or no insulation is required.

5. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 15 to DN 100), to allow off-center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.



6. Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 8 (DN 20 to DN 200).

7. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8 (DN 15 to DN 200).

8. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8 (DN 15 to DN 200).

9. Adjustable, Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8 (DN 15 to DN 200).

10. Split Pipe Ring with or without Turnbuckle Hangers (MSS Type 11): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 8 (DN 10 to DN 200).

11. Extension Hinged or Two-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 3 (DN 10 to DN 80).

12. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 (DN 15 to DN 750).

13. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or contraction.

14. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36 (DN 100 to DN 900), with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate.

15. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36 (DN 100 to DN 900), with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate, and with U-bolt to retain pipe.

16. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36 (DN 65 to DN 900) if vertical adjustment is required, with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.

17. Single-Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes NPS 1 to NPS 30 (DN 25 to DN 750), from two rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.

18. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 24 (DN 65 to DN 600), from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.

19. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 42 (DN 50 to DN 1050) if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary.

20. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 24 (DN 50 to DN 600) if small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur and vertical adjustment is not necessary.

21. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 30 (DN 50 to DN 750) if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required in addition to expansion and contraction.

I. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 (DN 24 to DN 600).

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 (DN 20 to DN 600) if longer ends are required for riser clamps.



J. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches (150 mm) for heavy loads.

2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232 deg C) piping installations.

3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings. 4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of

building attachments. 5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232 deg C) piping

installations.

K. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.

2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape.

3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles.

4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. 5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads

are considerable and rod sizes are large. 6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. 7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to

flange edge. 8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams. 9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I-

beams for heavy loads. 10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I-

beams for heavy loads, with link extensions. 11. Malleable-Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to

structural steel. 12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above

by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:

a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb (340 kg). b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb (680 kg). c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb (1360 kg).

13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams. 14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required. 15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear

horizontal movement where headroom is limited.

L. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:



1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.

M. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement. 2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed

1-1/4 inches (32 mm). 3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41, roll hanger with

springs. 4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal

expansion in piping systems. 5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability

factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger. 6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit

variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from base support.

7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from trapeze support.

8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability. These supports include the following types:

a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally. b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically. c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze member.

N. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

O. Comply with MFMA-103 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

P. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction. Coordinate with structural.

Q. Use pipe positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to support supply and waste piping for plumbing fixtures.



HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 15062 - 1

SECTION 15062 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Metal pipe hangers and supports. 2. Trapeze pipe hangers. 3. Metal framing systems. 4. Thermal-hanger shield inserts. 5. Fastener systems. 6. Equipment supports.


1. Section 15074 "Vibration and Seismic Controls" for vibration isolation devices. 2. Section 15815 "Metal Ducts" for duct hangers and supports.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.


A. Delegated Design: Design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for HVAC piping and equipment shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.

3. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment and obtain approval from authorities having jurisdiction.





B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following; include Product Data for components:

1. Trapeze pipe hangers. 2. Metal framing systems. 3. Equipment supports.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For trapeze hangers indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Detail fabrication and assembly of trapeze hangers. 2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for designing trapeze hangers.




A. Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. 2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped. 3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner. 4. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.

B. Copper Pipe Hangers:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-coated-steel, factory-fabricated components.

2. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of copper-coated steel.



2.2 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS

A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.

2.3 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. MFMA Manufacturer Metal Framing Systems:


a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc. c. Flex-Strut Inc. d. Unistrut Corporation; Tyco International, Ltd.

2. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly for supporting multiple parallel pipes.

3. Standard: MFMA-4. 4. Channels: Continuous slotted steel channel with inturned lips. 5. Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped steel nuts or other devices designed to fit into channel

slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel. 6. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel. 7. Metallic Coating: Hot-dipped galvanized.

2.4 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS


1. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. 2. ERICO International Corporation. 3. National Pipe Hanger Corporation. 4. PHS Industries, Inc. 5. Rilco Manufacturing Co., Inc. 6. Value Engineered Products, Inc.

B. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig (862-kPa) minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier.

C. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig (862-kPa) minimum compressive strength.

D. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.













E. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.

F. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches (50 mm) beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature.

2.5 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel anchors, for use in hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.


A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbon-steel shapes.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building structure.

B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe hangers.



2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping, and support together on field-assembled metal framing systems.

D. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.

E. Fastener System Installation:

1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.

2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.

G. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.

H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

I. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

J. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

K. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

L. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

M. Insulated Piping:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation.

b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.



2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.


3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.


4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN 8 to DN 90): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.048 inch (1.22 mm) thick.

b. NPS 4 (DN 100): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.06 inch (1.52 mm) thick. c. NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN 125 and DN 150): 18 inches (457 mm) long and 0.06 inch

(1.52 mm) thick. d. NPS 8 to NPS 14 (DN 200 to DN 350): 24 inches (610 mm) long and 0.075 inch

(1.91 mm) thick.

5. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.


A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth.

C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.

3.3 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding; appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately.



4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches (40 mm).

3.5 PAINTING


1. Apply paint by brush to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05 mm).

B. Touchup: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Section 09911 "Exterior Painting"

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish.

D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.

E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports, metal trapeze pipe hangers, and metal framing systems and attachments for general service applications.

F. Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper attachments for copper piping and tubing.

G. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.

H. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:



1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 (DN 15 to DN 750).

2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of up to 1050 deg F (566 deg C), pipes NPS 4 to NPS 24 (DN 100 to DN 600), requiring up to 4 inches (100 mm) of insulation.

3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 36 (DN 20 to DN 900), requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches (100 mm) of insulation.

4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 24 (DN 15 to DN 600) if little or no insulation is required.

5. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 15 to DN 100), to allow off-center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.

6. Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 8 (DN 20 to DN 200).

7. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 (DN 15 to DN 750).

8. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36 (DN 100 to DN 900), with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate.

9. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36 (DN 65 to DN 900) if vertical adjustment is required, with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.

10. Single-Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes NPS 1 to NPS 30 (DN 25 to DN 750), from two rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.

11. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 24 (DN 65 to DN 600), from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.

12. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 42 (DN 50 to DN 1050) if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary.

13. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 24 (DN 50 to DN 600) if small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur and vertical adjustment is not necessary.

14. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 30 (DN 50 to DN 750) if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required in addition to expansion and contraction.

I. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 (DN 24 to DN 600).

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 (DN 20 to DN 600) if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

J. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:



1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches (150 mm) for heavy loads.

2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232 deg C) piping installations.

3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings. 4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of

building attachments. 5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232 deg C) piping

installations.

K. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.

2. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles.

3. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. 4. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads

are considerable and rod sizes are large. 5. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. 6. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to

flange edge. 7. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams. 8. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I-

beams for heavy loads. 9. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I-

beams for heavy loads, with link extensions. 10. Malleable-Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to

structural steel. 11. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above

by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:

a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb (340 kg). b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb (680 kg). c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb (1360 kg).

12. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams. 13. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear

horizontal movement where headroom is limited.

L. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.



M. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement. 2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed

1-1/4 inches (32 mm). 3. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal

expansion in piping systems. 4. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability

factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger.

N. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

O. Comply with MFMA-103 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

P. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction.



VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 15073 - 1

SECTION 15073 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Delegated design of vibration and seismic controls. 2. Steel and inertia, vibration isolation equipment bases.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. IBC: International Building Code.

B. ICC-ES: ICC-Evaluation Service.


A. Seismic-Restraint Loading:

1. Site Class as Defined in the IBC: D.

a. Component Importance Factor: Per ASCE 7-05, Chapter 13. b. Component Response Modification Factor: Per ASCE 7-05, Chapter 13. c. Component Amplification Factor: Per ASCE 7-05, Chapter 13.

2. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods (0.2 Second): As indicated on Structural GSN.

3. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at 1-Second Period: As indicated on Structural GSN.


A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation device.



2. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each type and size of seismic-restraint component used.

a. Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report numbers and rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

b. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with requirements.

3. Interlocking Snubbers: Include ratings for horizontal, vertical, and combined loads.

B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For vibration isolation and seismic-restraint details indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer (registered in the State of Hawaii) responsible for their preparation.

1. Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading due to equipment weight and operation, seismic forces required to select vibration isolators, seismic restraints, and for designing vibration isolation bases.

2. Riser Supports: Include riser diagrams and calculations showing anticipated expansion and contraction at each support point, initial and final loads on building structure, spring deflection changes, and seismic loads. Include certification that riser system has been examined for excessive stress and that none will exist.

3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail overall dimensions, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and rails, base weights, equipment static loads, power transmission, component misalignment, and cantilever loads.

4. Seismic-Restraint Details:

a. Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic restraints. Include calculations of combined tensile and shear loads.

b. Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraints to the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment locations, methods, and spacings. Identify components, list their strengths, and indicate directions and values of forces transmitted to the structure during seismic events. Indicate association with vibration isolation devices.

c. Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: By an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum ratings of restraint items and the basis for approval (tests or calculations).


A. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of seismic bracing for plumbing piping and equipment with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and seismic restraints.

B. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency.

C. Welding certificates.



D. Field quality-control test reports.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are more stringent.

C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

D. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall bear anchorage preapproval OPA number from OSHPD, preapproved by ICC-ES, or preapproved by another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum seismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic-restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT BASES

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 2. California Dynamics Corporation. 3. Isolation Technology, Inc. 4. Kinetics Noise Control. 5. Mason Industries. 6. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. 7. Vibration Isolation. 8. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.

B. Steel Base: Factory-fabricated, welded, structural-steel bases and rails.

1. Design Requirements: Lowest possible mounting height with not less than 1-inch (25-mm) clearance above the floor. Include equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary motor slide bases or rails.

2. Structural Steel: Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M. Bases shall have shape to accommodate supported equipment.











3. Support Brackets: Factory-welded steel brackets on frame for outrigger isolation mountings and to provide for anchor bolts and equipment support.

C. Inertia Base: Factory-fabricated, welded, structural-steel bases and rails ready for placement of cast-in-place concrete.

1. Design Requirements: Lowest possible mounting height with not less than 1-inch (25-mm) clearance above the floor. Include equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary motor slide bases or rails.

2. Structural Steel: Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M. Bases shall have shape to accommodate supported equipment.

3. Support Brackets: Factory-welded steel brackets on frame for outrigger isolation mountings and to provide for anchor bolts and equipment support.

4. Fabrication: Fabricate steel templates to hold equipment anchor-bolt sleeves and anchors in place during placement of concrete. Obtain anchor-bolt templates from supported equipment manufacturer.

2.2 FACTORY FINISHES

A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested equipment before shipping.

1. Powder coating on springs and housings. 2. All hardware shall be galvanized. Hot-dip galvanize metal components for exterior use. 3. Baked enamel or powder coat for metal components on isolators for interior use. 4. Color-code or otherwise mark vibration isolation and seismic-control devices to indicate

capacity range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control devices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 VIBRATION-CONTROL AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Install vibration-control and seismic-restraint devices as required by design documents.



3.3 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION

A. Install flexible connections in piping where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different structural elements, and where the connections terminate with connection to equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from the one supporting the connections as they approach equipment

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Schedule test with ATST POC, before connecting anchorage device to restrained component (unless postconnection testing has been approved), and with at least seven days' advance notice.

3. Obtain ATST POC’s approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide temporary load-spreading members.

4. Test at least one of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by Architect.

5. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device. 6. Measure isolator restraint clearance. 7. Measure isolator deflection. 8. Verify snubber minimum clearances. 9. If a device fails test, modify all installations of same type and retest until satisfactory

results are achieved.

C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight.

B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation.

C. Adjust active height of sprint isolators.

D. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.



VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC 15074 - 1

SECTION 15074 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Elastomeric isolation pads. 2. Housed-restrained-spring isolators. 3. Spring hangers. 4. Snubbers. 5. Restraint channel bracings. 6. Restraint cables. 7. Seismic-restraint accessories. 8. Mechanical anchor bolts. 9. Adhesive anchor bolts.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. IBC: International Building Code.


C. OSHPD: Office of Statewide Health Planning & Development (for the State of California).


A. Product Data: For each type of product.


2. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each type and size of vibration isolation device and seismic-restraint component required.



Sharon

Line

Sharon

Text Box

Addendum 11, 5-23-13



3. Interlocking Snubbers: Include ratings for horizontal, vertical, and combined loads.

B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For each vibration isolation and seismic-restraint device.

1. Include design calculations and details for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints, and vibration isolation bases complying with performance requirements, design criteria, and analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer (registered in the State of Hawaii) responsible for their preparation.

2. Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading due to equipment weight, operation, and seismic forces required to select vibration isolators and seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.

a. Coordinate design calculations with wind load calculations required for equipment mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in other Sections for equipment mounted outdoors.

3. Seismic-Restraint Details:





A. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of vibration isolation device installation and seismic bracing for HVAC piping and equipment with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and restraints, if any.



D. Field quality-control reports.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7 and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

Sharon

Line

Sharon

Text Box





C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

D. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall bear anchorage preapproval OPA number from OSHPD, preapproval by ICC-ES, or preapproval by another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum seismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are unavailable, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic-restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



1. Site Class as Defined in the IBC: D. 2. Seismic Design Category: D.

a. Component Importance Factor: 1.0. b. Component Response Modification Factor: 2.5. c. Component Amplification Factor: 2.5.

3. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods (0.2 Second): 1.017g. 4. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at 1.0-Second Period: 0.264g. 5. Rated strengths, features, and applications shall be as defined in reports by an agency

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

a. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which they are subjected.

2.2 ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION PADS

A. Elastomeric Isolation Pads:


a. Ace Mountings Co., Inc. b. California Dynamics Corporation. c. Isolation Technology, Inc. d. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.





Sharon

Text Box


Sharon

Line

Sharon

Line

Sharon

Text Box


Sharon

Text Box

0.75g

Sharon

Line

Sharon

Text Box

0.33g

Sharon

Text Box

a, b: Addendum 11, 5-23-13

Sharon

Text Box

Manufacturer shall indicate on Shop Drawings the direction and magnitude of loading and identify whether loads being provided are at service or strength level.

Sharon

Text Box

b. Component anchorage forces shall be developed in accordance with ASCE 7-05, Section 13.4.



e. Mason Industries, Inc. f. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.

2. Fabrication: Single or multiple layers of sufficient durometer stiffness for uniform loading over pad area.

3. Size: Factory or field cut to match requirements of supported equipment. 4. Pad Material: Oil and water resistant with elastomeric properties. 5. Surface Pattern: Waffle pattern.

2.3 HOUSED-RESTRAINED-SPRING ISOLATORS

A. Freestanding, Steel, Open-Spring Isolators with Vertical-Limit Stop Restraint in Two-Part Telescoping Housing.


a. Ace Mountings Co., Inc. b. California Dynamics Corporation. c. Isolation Technology, Inc. d. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. e. Mason Industries, Inc. f. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.

2. Two-Part Telescoping Housing: A steel top and bottom frame separated by an elastomeric material and enclosing the spring isolators. Housings are equipped with adjustable snubbers to limit vertical movement.

a. Drilled base housing for bolting to structure with an elastomeric isolator pad attached to the underside. Bases shall limit floor load to 500 psig (3447 kPa).

b. Threaded top housing with adjustment bolt and cap screw to fasten and level equipment.

3. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load.

4. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 5. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 6. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without

deformation or failure.

2.4 SPRING HANGERS

A. Combination Coil-Spring and Elastomeric-Insert Hanger with Spring and Insert in Compression.












a. Ace Mountings Co., Inc. b. California Dynamics Corporation. c. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. d. Mason Industries, Inc. e. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.

2. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.



deformation or failure. 7. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-reinforced

cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame. 8. Self-centering hanger-rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support

spring coil.

2.5 SNUBBERS


1. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 2. Mason Industries, Inc. 3. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.

B. Description: Factory fabricated using welded structural-steel shapes and plates, anchor bolts, and replaceable resilient isolation washers and bushings.

1. Anchor bolts for attaching to concrete shall be seismic-rated, drill-in, and stud-wedge or female-wedge type.

2. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene. 3. Maximum 1/4-inch (6-mm) air gap, and minimum 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick resilient

cushion.

2.6 RESTRAINT CHANNEL BRACINGS


1. Cooper B-Line, Inc.












2. Hilti, Inc. 3. Mason Industries, Inc. 4. Unistrut.

B. Description: MFMA-4, shop- or field-fabricated bracing assembly made of slotted steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end and other matching components and with corrosion-resistant coating; rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces.

2.7 RESTRAINT CABLES


1. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 2. Loos & Co., Inc. 3. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.

B. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 492 stainless-steel cables. End connections made of steel assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement.

2.8 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT ACCESSORIES


1. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 3. Mason Industries, Inc. 4. TOLCO.

B. Hanger-Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally bolted connections to hanger rod.

C. Hinged and Swivel Brace Attachments: Multifunctional steel connectors for attaching hangers to rigid channel bracings and restraint cables.

D. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor Bolts: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchor bolts and studs.

E. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of attachment devices used.

F. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant neoprene, with a flat washer face.













2.9 MECHANICAL ANCHOR BOLTS


1. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2. Hilti, Inc. 3. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 4. Mason Industries, Inc.

B. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.

2.10 ADHESIVE ANCHOR BOLTS


1. Hilti, Inc. 2. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 3. Mason Industries, Inc.

B. Adhesive Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and capsule anchor system containing PVC or urethane methacrylate-based resin and accelerator, or injected polymer or hybrid mortar adhesive. Provide anchor bolts and hardware with zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control devices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.



3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Multiple Pipe Supports: Secure pipes to trapeze member with clamps approved for application by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.










B. Hanger-Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger-rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces.

C. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength is adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within specified loading limits.

3.3 VIBRATION CONTROL AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate the location of embedded connection hardware with supported equipment attachment and mounting points and with requirements for concrete reinforcement and formwork specified in Section 03300 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

B. Installation of vibration isolators must not cause any change of position of equipment, piping, or ductwork resulting in stresses or misalignment.

C. Equipment Restraints:

1. Install seismic snubbers on HVAC equipment mounted on vibration isolators. Locate snubbers as close as possible to vibration isolators and bolt to equipment base and supporting structure.

2. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).

3. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that provides required submittals for component.

D. Piping Restraints:

1. Comply with requirements in MSS SP-127. 2. Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet (12 m) o.c., and longitudinal supports a

maximum of 80 feet (24 m) o.c. 3. Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet (3.7 m).

E. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.

F. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that provides required submittals for component.

G. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base.

H. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.

I. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.



J. Drilled-in Anchors:

1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid pre-stressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.

2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength.

3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened.

4. Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air pockets in the adhesive.

5. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench. 6. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior

applications.


A. Install flexible connections in piping where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different structural elements, and where the connections terminate with connection to equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from the one supporting the connections as they approach equipment. Comply with requirements in Section 15181 "Hydronic Piping" for piping flexible connections.





2. Schedule test with ATST POC before connecting anchorage device to restrained component (unless post connection testing has been approved), and with at least seven days' advance notice.

3. Obtain ATST POC’s approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide temporary load-spreading members.

4. Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by Architect.

5. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device. 6. Measure isolator restraint clearance. 7. Measure isolator deflection. 8. Verify snubber minimum clearances.





3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight.

B. Adjust limit stops on restrained-spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation.



IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 15076 - 1

SECTION 15076 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Equipment labels. 2. Pipe labels. 3. Valve tags.



B. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed content for each label.

C. Valve numbering scheme.

D. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Metal Labels for Equipment:



1. Material and Thickness: Brass, 0.032-inch (0.8-mm), Stainless steel, 0.025-inch (0.64-mm) or anodized aluminum, 0.032-inch (0.8-mm) minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.

2. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm).

3. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830 mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

4. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. 5. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

Adhesive shall only be used where rivets or screws are not possible.

B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.

C. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (A4) bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2.2 PIPE LABELS

A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction.

B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.

C. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.

2. Lettering Size: As outlined in ANSI Standard A13.1.

2.3 VALVE TAGS

A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-inch (13-mm) numbers.

1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch (0.8-mm), Stainless steel, 0.025-inch (0.64-mm) or anodized aluminum, 0.032-inch (0.8-mm) minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.

2. Fasteners: Brass or stainless-steel wire-link or beaded chain; or S-hook.



B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (A4) bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.

1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.

3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.

Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed

piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 40 feet (12 m) along each run. Reduce intervals to

15 feet (4.6 m) in areas of congested piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.

B. Pipe Label Color Schedule: As outlined in ANSI A13.1.

1. Low-Pressure, Compressed-Air Piping:

a. Background Color: Blue. b. Letter Color: White.



2. Domestic Water Piping:

a. Background Color: Green. b. Letter Color: White.

3. Sanitary Waste and Storm Drainage Piping:

a. Background Color: White. b. Letter Color: Black.

3.4 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within factory-fabricated equipment units; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn-watering hose connections; and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.

B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:

1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape:

a. Water: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), round. b. Compressed Air: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), square.

2. Valve-Tag Color: Natural.



IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 15077 - 1

SECTION 15077 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Equipment labels. 2. Pipe labels. 3. Valve tags.



B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification material and device.

C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed content for each label.

D. Valve numbering scheme.

E. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Metal Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Stainless steel, 0.025-inch (0.64-mm) minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.

2. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm).

3. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830 mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

4. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.

C. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (A4) bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2.2 PIPE LABELS

A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction.

B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.

C. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.

2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) high.

2.3 VALVE TAGS

A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-inch (13-mm) numbers.

1. Tag Material: Stainless steel, 0.025-inch (0.64-mm) minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.



2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain; or S-hook.

B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (A4) bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.

1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.

3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.

Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed

piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) along each run. Reduce intervals to

25 feet (7.6 m) in areas of congested piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.

B. Pipe Label Color Schedule:

1. Chilled-Water Piping:

a. Background Color: Green. b. Letter Color: White.



2. Heating Water Piping:

a. Background Color: Yellow. b. Letter Color: Black.

3.4 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Install 2 inches (50 mm) round tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within factory-fabricated equipment units; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn-watering hose connections; and HVAC terminal devices and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.



PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 15085 - 1

SECTION 15085 - PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating the following plumbing piping services:

1. Domestic cold-water piping. 2. Domestic hot-water piping. 3. Domestic recirculating hot-water piping. 4. Sanitary waste piping exposed to freezing conditions. 5. Supplies and drains for handicap-accessible lavatories and sinks. 6. HVAC condensate piping.


1. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Equipment Insulation."


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory- and field-applied, if any).


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests and test methods employed.

C. Field quality-control reports.




A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less.

2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less.

C. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous components:

1. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application. Before preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.

C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.

1.8 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results.

B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Piping Insulation Schedule," "Outdoor, Aboveground Piping Insulation Schedule," and "Outdoor, Underground Piping Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795.

E. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200. b. Johns Manville; Micro-Lok. c. Knauf Insulation; 1000-Degree Pipe Insulation. d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley-K. e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.

2. Type I, 850 Deg F (454 Deg C) Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ-SSL. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

F. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe Insulation Wicking System: Preformed pipe insulation complying with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with absorbent cloth factory-applied to the entire inside surface of preformed pipe insulation and extended through the longitudinal joint to outside surface of insulation under insulation jacket. Factory apply a white, polymer, vapor-retarder jacket with self-sealing adhesive tape seam and evaporation holes running continuously along the longitudinal seam, exposing the absorbent cloth.


a. Knauf Insulation; Permawick Pipe Insulation. b. Owens Corning; VaporWick Pipe Insulation.

2.2 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=3200&mf=95&src=wd





B. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.


a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-127.

b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 225. c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller

Company; 85-60/85-70. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.

2.3 MASTICS

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II.

1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services.


a. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 30-80/30-90.

b. Vimasco Corporation; 749.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm (0.009 metric perm) at 43-mil (1.09-mm) dry film thickness.

3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F (Minus 29 to plus 82 deg C). 4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight. 5. Color: White.

C. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for outdoor use on below-ambient services.


a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; Encacel.


Company; 60-95/60-96.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm (0.033 metric perm) at 30-mil (0.8-mm) dry film thickness.

3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 220 deg F (Minus 46 to plus 104 deg C).



4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 33 percent by volume and 46 percent by weight. 5. Color: White.

2.4 SEALANTS

A. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:




Company; 95-44. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05.

2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 121 deg C). 5. Color: Aluminum.

B. ASJ Flashing Sealants:



2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 121 deg C). 5. Color: White.

2.5 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:

1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.



2.6 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal Jacket:


a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; Metal Jacketing Systems.

b. ITW Insulation Systems; Aluminum and Stainless Steel Jacketing. c. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate.

2. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005, Temper H-14.

a. Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules. b. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil- (0.075-mm-) thick, heat-

bonded polyethylene and kraft paper or 2.5-mil- (0.063-mm-) thick polysurlyn. c. Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers:

1) Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket. 2) Preformed 2-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius

elbows. 3) Tee covers. 4) Flange and union covers. 5) End caps. 6) Beveled collars. 7) Valve covers. 8) Field fabricated fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting covers are not

available.

C. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.


a. Johns Manville; Zeston. b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series. c. Proto Corporation; LoSmoke. d. Speedline Corporation; SmokeSafe.

2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer. 3. Color: White. 4. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate.








a. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges, unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and supply covers for lavatories.

2.7 TAPES

A. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.


a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 488 AWF. b. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0800. c. Compac Corporation; 120. d. Venture Tape; 3520 CW.

2. Width: 2 inches (50 mm). 3. Thickness: 3.7 mils (0.093 mm). 4. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch (1.1 N/mm) in width. 5. Elongation: 5 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/inch (6.2 N/mm) in width.

B. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive; suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.


a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 370 White PVC tape. b. Compac Corporation; 130. c. Venture Tape; 1506 CW NS.

2. Width: 2 inches (50 mm). 3. Thickness: 6 mils (0.15 mm). 4. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch (0.7 N/mm) in width. 5. Elongation: 500 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/inch (3.3 N/mm) in width.

2.8 SECUREMENTS

A. Bands:


a. ITW Insulation Systems; Gerrard Strapping and Seals. b. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate Strapping and Seals.







2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or Type 316; 0.015 inch (0.38 mm) thick, 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide with wing seal or closed seal.

3. Aluminum: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch (0.51 mm) thick, 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide with wing seal or closed seal.

B. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) wide, stainless steel or Monel.

C. Wire: 0.062-inch (1.6-mm) soft-annealed, stainless steel.


a. C & F Wire.

2.9 PROTECTIVE SHIELDING GUARDS

A. Protective Shielding Pipe Covers:


a. Engineered Brass Company. b. Plumberex. c. Truebro; a brand of IPS Corporation. d. Zurn Industries, LLC; Tubular Brass Plumbing Products Operation.

2. Description: Manufactured plastic wraps for covering plumbing fixture hot- and cold-water supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) requirements.

B. Protective Shielding Piping Enclosures:


a. Truebro; a brand of IPS Corporation. b. Zurn Industries, LLC; Tubular Brass Plumbing Products Operation.

2. Description: Manufactured plastic enclosure for covering plumbing fixture hot- and cold-water supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with ADA requirements.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects. 2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.

B. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.

C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.

3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.



J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor

legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.

L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide strips, of same material as

insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches (100 mm) o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches (50 mm) o.c.

a. For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.

M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.

O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches (100 mm) beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.

P. For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:

1. Vibration-control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. 4. Cleanouts.



3.4 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface

and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches (50 mm).

4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

D. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.

1. Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers.

E. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations. 2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Division 7

Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."

3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.

B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:

1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated.

2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation. Exception: do not block vent holes on wicking insulation.



3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.

4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Seal joints, seams, and irregular surfaces.

5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Seal joints, seams, and irregular surfaces. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.

6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.

7. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape.

8. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union." Match size and color of pipe labels.

C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes.

D. Install removable insulation covers where required. Installation shall conform to the following:

1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation.

2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.

3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.

4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches (50 mm) over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.



3.6 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION

A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.

2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.

3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the

thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of

adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation. 4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least

1 inch (25 mm), and seal joints with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available.

2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.

D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:


2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body.

3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.

4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.

3.7 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION

A. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch (50-mm) overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. and at end joints.



B. PVC Jacket: Where PVC jackets are indicated, install as recommended by manufacturer. Overlap longitudinal seams to shed water. Secure jacket using manufacturer’s recommended solvent adhesive or PVC sealing tape.

3.8 FINISHES

A. Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Division 9 painting Sections.

1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.

a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.

B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.

C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work.




1. Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe, three locations of threaded fittings, three locations of welded fittings, two locations of threaded strainers, two locations of welded strainers, three locations of threaded valves, and three locations of flanged valves for each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule, General" Article.

C. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements.

3.10 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:

1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces. 2. Underground piping. 3. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.



3.11 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Domestic Cold Water:

1. Insulation shall be the following:

a. Mineral-Fiber, Preinsulatoin Wicking System: 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick.

B. Domestic Hot and Recirculated Hot Water:

1. NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) and Smaller: Insulation shall be the following:

a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick.

2. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Larger: Insulation shall be the following:

a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch (25 mm) thick.

C. Exposed Sanitary Drains, Domestic Water, Domestic Hot Water, and Stops for Plumbing Fixtures for People with Disabilities:

1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following:

a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1/2 inch (13 mm) minimum thick.

D. Sanitary Waste Piping Where Heat Tracing Is Installed:


a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) thick.

E. Floor Drains, Traps, and Sanitary Drain Piping within 10 Feet (3 m) of Drain Receiving Condensate, Equipment Drain Water below 60 Deg F (16 Deg C), and HVAC Condensate:


a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick.

3.12 INDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE

A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.

B. Piping: Above-ambient temperature service:

1. PVC.

C. Piping: Below-ambient temperature service:



1. Factory-applied jacket only. No field-applied jacket shall be applied to wicking insulation.

3.13 OUTDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE


B. Piping, Concealed:

1. Painted Aluminum, Stucco Embossed: 0.032 inch (0.81 mm) thick.

C. Piping, Exposed:

1. Painted Aluminum, Stucco Embossed with Z-Shaped Locking Seam: 0.032 inch (0.81 mm) thick.



DUCT INSULATION 15086 - 1

SECTION 15086 - DUCT INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating the following duct services:

1. Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air. 2. Indoor, exposed supply and outdoor air. 3. Indoor, concealed return located in unconditioned space. 4. Indoor, exposed return located in unconditioned space. 5. Indoor, concealed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior. 6. Indoor, exposed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior.


1. Section 15087 "HVAC Equipment Insulation." 2. Section 15088 "HVAC Piping Insulation." 3. Section 15815 "Metal Ducts" for duct liners.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory- and field-applied if any).

B. Samples: For each type of insulation and jacket indicated. Identify each Sample, describing product and intended use. Sample sizes are as follows:

1. Sheet Form Insulation Materials: 12 inches (300 mm) square. 2. Sheet Jacket Materials: 12 inches (300 mm) square. 3. Manufacturer's Color Charts: For products where color is specified, show the full range

of colors available for each type of finish material.



B. Field quality-control reports.





B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.





1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Section 15062 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with duct Installer for duct insulation application. Before preparing ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.


1.8 SCHEDULING





PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Comply with requirements in "Duct Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Duct and Plenum Insulation Schedule," and "Aboveground, Outdoor Duct and Plenum Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.


C. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.

D. Flexible Elastomeric Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type II for sheet materials.


a. Aeroflex USA, Inc.; Aerocel. b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex. c. K-Flex USA; Insul-Sheet, K-Flex Gray Duct Liner, and K-FLEX LS.

E. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type III with factory-applied FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.


a. CertainTeed Corp.; SoftTouch Duct Wrap. b. Johns Manville; Microlite. c. Knauf Insulation; Friendly Feel Duct Wrap. d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap. e. Owens Corning; SOFTR All-Service Duct Wrap.

F. Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum applications, provide insulation with factory-applied FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.


a. CertainTeed Corp.; Commercial Board. b. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; FBX. c. Johns Manville; 800 Series Spin-Glas. d. Knauf Insulation; Insulation Board. e. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Board.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=3062&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=95&src=wd

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456825834&mf=04&&mf=95&src=wd

















f. Owens Corning; Fiberglas 700 Series.

G. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Semirigid board material with factory-applied FSK jacket complying with ASTM C 1393, Type II or Type IIIA Category 2, or with properties similar to ASTM C 612, Type IB. Nominal density is 2.5 lb/cu. ft. (40 kg/cu. m) or more. Thermal conductivity (k-value) at 100 deg F (55 deg C) is 0.29 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F (0.042 W/m x K) or less. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.


a. CertainTeed Corp.; CrimpWrap. b. Johns Manville; MicroFlex. c. Knauf Insulation; Pipe and Tank Insulation. d. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Flex. e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe and Tank Insulation.

2.2 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flexible Elastomeric Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.


a. Aeroflex USA, Inc.; Aeroseal. b. Armacell LLC; Armaflex 520 Adhesive. c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller

Company; 85-75.K-Flex USA; R-373 Contact Adhesive.

2. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

C. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.


a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-127.Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 225.

b. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 85-03/11-70.Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.
























D. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.




Company; 85-50.Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.


2.3 MASTICS


1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.


a. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 30-03/11-90.

b. Vimasco Corporation; 749.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm (0.009 metric perm) at 43-mil (1.09-mm) dry film thickness.


C. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for outdoor use on below ambient services.




Company; 60-03/11-96.






















D. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services.




Company; 46-50. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-50. e. Vimasco Corporation; WC-1/WC-5.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 1.8 perms (1.2 metric perms) at 0.0625-inch (1.6-mm) dry film thickness.

3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F (Minus 29 to plus 82 deg C). 4. Solids Content: 60 percent by volume and 66 percent by weight. 5. Color: White.

2.4 SEALANTS

A. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:


a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-76.Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 405.

b. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 95-44.

c. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05.

2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 121 deg C). 5. Color: Aluminum.























B. Metal Jacket:





a. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing. b. Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.

2.7 TAPES

A. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136.


a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 491 AWF FSK. b. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0827. c. Compac Corporation; 110 and 111. d. Venture Tape; 1525 CW NT, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW/SQ.

2. Width: 3 inches (75 mm). 3. Thickness: 6.5 mils (0.16 mm). 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch (1.0 N/mm) in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch (7.2 N/mm) in width. 7. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.

B. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.


a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 488 AWF.














b. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0800. c. Compac Corporation; 120. d. Venture Tape; 3520 CW.


2.8 SECUREMENTS

A. Bands:


a. ITW Insulation Systems; Gerrard Strapping and Seals. b. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate Strapping, Seals, and Springs.

2. Aluminum: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch (0.51 mm) thick, 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide with wing seal.

B. Insulation Pins and Hangers:

1. Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.135-inch- (3.5-mm-) diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1) AGM Industries, Inc.; CWP-1. 2) GEMCO; CD. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; CD. 4) Nelson Stud Welding; TPA, TPC, and TPS.

2. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.135-inch- (3.5-mm-) diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) galvanized carbon-steel washer.


1) AGM Industries, Inc.; CHP-1. 2) GEMCO; Cupped Head Weld Pin. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Cupped Head. 4) Nelson Stud Welding; CHP.



















3. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- (0.41-mm) thick, galvanized-steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in diameter.


1) AGM Industries, Inc.; RC-150. 2) GEMCO; R-150. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; WA-150. 4) Nelson Stud Welding; Speed Clips.

b. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.

C. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) wide, stainless steel or Monel.

D. Wire: 0.062-inch (1.6-mm) soft-annealed, stainless steel.


a. C & F Wire.

2.9 CORNER ANGLES

A. Aluminum Corner Angles: 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch (25 by 25 mm), aluminum according to ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects. 2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.











3.2 PREPARATION



A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings.

B. Install insulation materials, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of duct system as specified in insulation system schedules.




F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

G. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

H. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

I. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor

legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.


J. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.

K. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:





3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches (100 mm) o.c.

a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.


5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings.

L. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

M. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.

N. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches (100 mm) beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.

3.4 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

B. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches (50 mm).

1. Comply with requirements in Section 07841 "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers.

C. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1. Duct: For penetrations through fire-rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match adjacent duct insulation. Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2 inches (50 mm).

2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 07841 "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."

3.5 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION

A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.




A. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 50 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.

2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions.

3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows:

a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches (450 mm) and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches (400 mm) o.c.

b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches (450 mm), place pins 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. each way, and 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.

c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers. f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with

insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.

4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches (50 mm) from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch (13-mm) outward-clinching staples, 1 inch (25 mm) o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.

a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-barrier seal.

b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F (10 deg C) at 18-foot (5.5-m) intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches (75 mm).

5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) on longitudinal seams and end joints. At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches (450 mm) o.c.

6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.



7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch- (150-mm-) wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.

B. Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 50 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.

2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions.

3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows:

a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches (450 mm) and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches (400 mm) o.c.

b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches (450 mm), space pins 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. each way, and 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.

c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with

insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.

4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches (50 mm) from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch (13-mm) outward-clinching staples, 1 inch (25 mm) o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.

a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-barrier seal.

b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F (10 deg C) at 18-foot (5.5-m) intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches (75 mm).

5. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and inside radius of elbows. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.

6. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch- (150-mm-) wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.




A. Where glass-cloth jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation or insulation with factory-applied jackets.

1. Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch (50-mm) overlap at seams and joints. 2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick coats of lagging adhesive. 3. Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation.

B. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:

1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight. 2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket. 3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- (75-mm-)

wide joint strips at end joints. 5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation

with vapor-barrier mastic.

C. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch (25-mm) overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints; for horizontal applications, install with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks and vessels. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge.

D. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch (50-mm) overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. and at end joints.

3.8 FIRE-RATED INSULATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Where fire-rated insulation system is indicated, secure system to ducts and duct hangers and supports to maintain a continuous fire rating.

B. Insulate duct access panels and doors to achieve same fire rating as duct.

C. Install firestopping at penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Fire-stop systems are specified in Section 07841 "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."

3.9 FINISHES

A. Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Section 09911 "Exterior Painting" and Section 09912 "Interior Painting."

1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.



a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.

B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.

C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work.

D. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.


A. Tests and Inspections:

1. Inspect ductwork, randomly selected by ATST POC, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to one location for each duct system defined in the "Duct Insulation Schedule, General" Article.

B. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements.

3.11 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation:

1. Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air. 2. Indoor, exposed supply and outdoor air. 3. Indoor, concealed return located in unconditioned space. 4. Indoor, exposed return located in unconditioned space. 5. Indoor, concealed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior. 6. Indoor, exposed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior. 7. Outdoor, concealed supply and return. 8. Outdoor, exposed supply and return.

B. Items Not Insulated:

1. Fibrous-glass ducts. 2. Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and

ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. 3. Factory-insulated flexible ducts. 4. Factory-insulated plenums and casings. 5. Flexible connectors. 6. Vibration-control devices. 7. Factory-insulated access panels and doors.





B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

C. Ducts and Plenums, Concealed:

1. Aluminum, Stucco Embossed: 0.024 inch (0.61 mm) thick.



HVAC EQUIPMENT INSULATION 15087 - 1

SECTION 15087 - HVAC EQUIPMENT INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating the following HVAC equipment that is not factory insulated:

1. Heat exchangers. 2. Chilled-water pumps. 3. Heating, hot-water pumps. 4. Expansion/compression tanks. 5. Air separators. 6. Thermal storage tanks.


1. Section 15086 "Duct Insulation." 2. Section 15088 "HVAC Piping Insulation."


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory- and field-applied if any).

B. Samples: For each type of insulation and jacket indicated. Identify each Sample, describing product and intended use. Sample sizes are as follows:

1. Preformed Pipe Insulation Materials: 12 inches (300 mm) long by NPS 2 (DN 50). 2. Sheet Form Insulation Materials: 12 inches (300 mm) square. 3. Sheet Jacket Materials: 12 inches (300 mm) square. 4. Manufacturer's Color Charts: For products where color is specified, show the full range






B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests and test methods employed.




B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.



C. Mockups: Before installing insulation, build mockups for each type of insulation and finish listed below to demonstrate quality of insulation application and finishes. Build mockups in the location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. Use materials indicated for the completed Work.

1. Equipment Mockups:

a. One chilled-water pump and one heating-hot-water pump. b. One tank or vessel.

2. For each mockup, fabricate cutaway sections to allow observation of application details for insulation materials, adhesives, mastics, attachments, and jackets.

3. Notify ATST POC seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed.

4. Obtain ATST POC's approval of mockups before starting insulation application. 5. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract

Documents contained in mockups unless ATST POC specifically approves such deviations in writing.

6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work.

7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed.





1.7 COORDINATION


B. Coordinate clearance requirements with equipment Installer for equipment insulation application.

1.8 SCHEDULING



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Comply with requirements in "Breeching Insulation Schedule" and "Equipment Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.




E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.

F. Flexible Elastomeric Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.


a. Aeroflex USA, Inc.; Aerocel.





b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex. c. K-Flex USA; Insul-Sheet and K-FLEX LS.

2.2 ADHESIVES


B. Flexible Elastomeric Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.


a. Aeroflex USA, Inc.; Aeroseal. b. Armacell LLC; Armaflex 520 Adhesive. c. K-Flex USA; R-373 Contact Adhesive.



B. Metal Jacket:





a. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing. b. Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules. c. Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers:

1) Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket. 2) Preformed two-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius

elbows. 3) Tee covers. 4) Flange and union covers. 5) End caps. 6) Beveled collars. 7) Valve covers. 8) Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting covers are not

available.













2.4 TAPES

A. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.


a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 488 AWF. b. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0800. c. Compac Corporation; 120. d. Venture Tape; 3520 CW.


2.5 SECUREMENTS

A. Bands:




3. Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat and slotted to accept metal bands. Spring size determined by manufacturer for application.

B. Wire: 0.062-inch (1.6-mm) soft-annealed, stainless steel.


a. C & F Wire.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION














1. Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects.

2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.


3.2 PREPARATION



A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of equipment as specified in insulation system schedules.




F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

G. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

H. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

I. Apply adhesives and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.

J. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

K. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.

L. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:

1. Vibration-control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. 4. Manholes.



5. Handholes. 6. Cleanouts.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT, TANK, AND VESSEL INSULATION

A. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation Installation for Tanks and Vessels: Install insulation over entire surface of tanks and vessels.

1. Apply 100 percent coverage of adhesive to surface with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

2. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints.

B. Insulation Installation on Pumps:

1. Fabricate metal boxes lined with insulation. Fit boxes around pumps and coincide box joints with splits in pump casings. Fabricate joints with outward bolted flanges. Bolt flanges on 6-inch (150-mm) centers, starting at corners. Install 3/8-inch- (10-mm-) diameter fasteners with wing nuts. Alternatively, secure the box sections together using a latching mechanism.

2. Fabricate boxes from stainless steel, at least 0.050 inch (1.3 mm) thick. 3. For below ambient services, install a vapor barrier at seams, joints, and penetrations.

Seal between flanges with replaceable gasket material to form a vapor barrier.


A. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch (50-mm) overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. and at end joints.

3.6 FINISHES

A. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.

B. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.


A. Testing Agency: ATST POC will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Perform tests and inspections.



C. Tests and Inspections: Inspect field-insulated equipment, randomly selected by ATST POC, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to two locations for each type of equipment defined in the "Equipment Insulation Schedule" Article. For large equipment, remove only a portion adequate to determine compliance.

D. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements.

3.8 EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are identified below. If more than one material is listed for a type of equipment, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

B. Insulate indoor and outdoor equipment that is not factory insulated.

C. Heat-exchanger (water-to-water for cooling service) insulation shall be the following:

1. Flexible Elastomeric: Two layers of 1.5 inch (38 mm) thick insulation with staggered joints.

D. Chilled-water pump insulation shall be the following:

1. Flexible Elastomeric: Two layers of 1.5 inch (38 mm) thick.

E. Heating-hot-water pump insulation shall be the following:

1. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch (25 mm) thick.

F. Expansion/compression tank insulation shall be the following:

1. Flexible Elastomeric: 2 inches (50 mm) thick.

G. Air-separator insulation shall be the following:


H. Piping system filter-housing insulation shall be the following:


3.9 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE




B. Equipment, Exposed:

1. Aluminum, Stucco Embossed: 0.032 inch (0.81 mm) thick.



HVAC PIPING INSULATION 15088 - 1

SECTION 15088 - HVAC PIPING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating the following HVAC piping systems:

1. Condensate drain piping, indoors. 2. Chilled-water and brine piping, indoors and outdoors. 3. Condenser-water piping, indoors. 4. Heating hot-water piping, indoors.


1. Section 02551 "Underground Hydronic Piping" for loose-fill pipe insulation in underground piping outside the building.

2. Section 02555 "Steam Distribution" for loose-fill pipe insulation in underground piping outside the building.

3. Section 15086 "Duct Insulation." 4. Section 15087 "HVAC Equipment Insulation."


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied if any).

B. Samples: For each type of insulation and jacket indicated. Identify each Sample, describing product and intended use.

1. Preformed Pipe Insulation Materials: 12 inches (300 mm) long by NPS 2 (DN 50). 2. Sheet Form Insulation Materials: 12 inches (300 mm) square. 3. Jacket Materials for Pipe: 12 inches (300 mm) long by NPS 2 (DN 50). 4. Sheet Jacket Materials: 12 inches (300 mm) square. 5. Manufacturer's Color Charts: For products where color is specified, show the full range









B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.



C. Mockups: Before installing insulation, build mockups for each type of insulation and finish listed below to demonstrate quality of insulation application and finishes. Build mockups in the location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by ATST POC. Use materials indicated for the completed Work.

1. Piping Mockups:

a. One 10-foot (3-m) section of NPS 2 (DN 50) straight pipe. b. One each of a 90-degree threaded, welded, and flanged elbow. c. One each of a threaded, welded, and flanged tee fitting. d. One NPS 2 (DN 50) or smaller valve, and one NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) or larger valve. e. Four support hangers including hanger shield and insert. f. One threaded strainer and one flanged strainer with removable portion of

insulation. g. One threaded reducer and one welded reducer. h. One pressure temperature tap. i. One mechanical coupling.

2. For each mockup, fabricate cutaway sections to allow observation of application details for insulation materials, adhesives, mastics, attachments, and jackets.

3. Notify ATST POC seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed.

4. Obtain ATST POC’s approval of mockups before starting insulation application. 5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for

judging the completed Work. 6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed.





1.7 COORDINATION


B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application. Before preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.


1.8 SCHEDULING



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Piping Insulation Schedule," "Outdoor, Aboveground Piping Insulation Schedule," and "Outdoor, Underground Piping Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.




E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.



F. Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with annealed, rigid, hermetically sealed cells. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.


a. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Foamglas.

2. Block Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type I. 3. Special-Shaped Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type III. 4. Board Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type IV. 5. Preformed Pipe Insulation without Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 1. 6. Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585.

G. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:


a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200. b. Johns Manville; Micro-Lok. c. Knauf Insulation; 1000-Degree Pipe Insulation. d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley-K. e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.

2. Type I, 850 deg F (454 deg C) Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

H. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe Insulation Wicking System: Preformed pipe insulation complying with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with absorbent cloth factory-applied to the entire inside surface of preformed pipe insulation and extended through the longitudinal joint to outside surface of insulation under insulation jacket. Factory apply a white, polymer, vapor-retarder jacket with self-sealing adhesive tape seam and evaporation holes running continuously along the longitudinal seam, exposing the absorbent cloth.


a. Knauf Insulation; Permawick Pipe Insulation. b. Owens Corning; VaporWick Pipe Insulation.

I. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Semirigid board material with factory-applied ASJ complying with ASTM C 1393, Type II or Type IIIA Category 2, or with properties similar to ASTM C 612, Type IB. Nominal density is 2.5 lb/cu. ft. (40 kg/cu. m) or more. Thermal conductivity (k-value) at 100 deg F (55 deg C) is 0.29 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F (0.042 W/m x K) or less. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.















a. CertainTeed Corp.; CrimpWrap. b. Johns Manville; MicroFlex. c. Knauf Insulation; Pipe and Tank Insulation. d. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Flex. e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe and Tank Insulation.

2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS

A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195.


a. Ramco Insulation, Inc.; Super-Stik.

B. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449.


a. Ramco Insulation, Inc.; Ramcote 1200 and Quik-Cote.

2.3 ADHESIVES


B. Cellular-Glass Adhesive: Two-component, thermosetting urethane adhesive containing no flammable solvents, with a service temperature range of minus 100 to plus 200 deg F (minus 73 to plus 93 deg C).


a. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 81-84.

C. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.



b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 225.


















c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 85-60/85-70.

d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.

D. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.





E. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.


a. Dow Corning Corporation; 739, Dow Silicone. b. Johns Manville; Zeston Perma-Weld, CEEL-TITE Solvent Welding Adhesive. c. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; Welding Adhesive. d. Speedline Corporation; Polyco VP Adhesive.

2.4 MASTICS


B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services.






3. Service Temperature Range: 0 to 180 deg F (Minus 18 to plus 82 deg C). 4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 44 percent by volume and 62 percent by weight. 5. Color: White.



















C. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for outdoor use on below-ambient services.




Company; 60-95/60-96.



D. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above-ambient services.




Company; 46-50. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-50. e. Vimasco Corporation; WC-1/WC-5.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 1.8 perms (1.2 metric perms) at 0.0625-inch (1.6-mm) dry film thickness.

3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F (Minus 29 to plus 82 deg C). 4. Solids Content: 60 percent by volume and 66 percent by weight. 5. Color: White.

2.5 SEALANTS

A. Joint Sealants:

1. Joint Sealants for Cellular-Glass, Phenolic, and Polyisocyanurate Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:



Company; 30-45.

















d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05. e. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Pittseal 444.

B. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:



2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 121 deg C). 5. Color: White.



1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.


4. FSP Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with polyethylene backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.

5. Vinyl Jacket: White vinyl with a permeance of 1.3 perms (0.86 metric perms) when tested according to ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure A, and complying with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.

2.7 FIELD-APPLIED FABRIC-REINFORCING MESH

A. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric: Approximately 2 oz./sq. yd. (68 g/sq. m) with a thread count of 10 strands by 10 strands/sq. in. (4 strands by 4 strands/sq. mm) for covering pipe and pipe fittings.


a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; Chil-Glas Number 10.











B. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.


a. Johns Manville; Zeston. b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series. c. Proto Corporation; LoSmoke. d. Speedline Corporation; SmokeSafe.

2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer. 3. Color: White. 4. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate.

a. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges, unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and supply covers for lavatories.

C. Vapor barrier Jacket for Pipes Operating Below 40 deg F (5 deg C): 50-mil- (1.27-mm-) thick, barrier film with a permeance at 0.002 perms (0.003 metric perms) when tested according to ASTM E 96/E 96M.


a. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation: Pittwrap IW50

2.9 TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136.


a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 428 AWF ASJ. b. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0836. c. Compac Corporation; 104 and 105. d. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ.

2. Width: 3 inches (75 mm). 3. Thickness: 11.5 mils (0.29 mm). 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch (1.0 N/mm) in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch (7.2 N/mm) in width. 7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.














B. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive; suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.


a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 370 White PVC tape. b. Compac Corporation; 130. c. Venture Tape; 1506 CW NS.

2. Width: 2 inches (50 mm). 3. Thickness: 6 mils (0.15 mm). 4. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch (0.7 N/mm) in width. 5. Elongation: 500 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/inch (3.3 N/mm) in width.

2.10 SECUREMENTS

A. Bands:




3. Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat and slotted to accept metal bands. Spring size determined by manufacturer for application.

B. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) wide, stainless steel or Monel.

C. Wire: 0.062-inch (1.6-mm) soft-annealed, stainless steel.


a. C & F Wire.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION













1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects. 2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating, apply a corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows:

1. Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature between 0 and 300 deg F (-17and 149 deg C) with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range.

B. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.

C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.


A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.




F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.



2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.


4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.

L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:



3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches (100 mm) o.c.

a. For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.


5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.

M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.

O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches (100 mm) beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.

P. For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:

1. Vibration-control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. 4. Manholes. 5. Handholes. 6. Cleanouts.



3.4 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface

and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches (50 mm).

4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

C. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.

1. Comply with requirements in Section 07841 "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers.

D. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations. 2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in

Section 07841 "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."

3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.

B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:

1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated.

2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.

3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.

4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe



insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.

5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.

6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.

7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.

8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape.

9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union." Match size and color of pipe labels.

C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.

D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the following:

1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation.

2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.

3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.

4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches (50 mm) over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.



5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF CELLULAR-GLASS INSULATION


1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.


3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient services, secure laps with outward-clinched staples at 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient services, do not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.




adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of cellular-glass block insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation.

4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch (25 mm), and seal joints with flashing sealant.


1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. When preformed sections of insulation are not available, install mitered sections of cellular-glass insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.


1. Install preformed sections of cellular-glass insulation to valve body. 2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without

disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.



1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.




3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward-clinched staples at 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.




adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation. 4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least

1 inch (25 mm), and seal joints with flashing sealant.



2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.



2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body.

3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.

4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.


A. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch (25-mm) overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints; for horizontal applications. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge.

B. Where PVDC jackets are indicated, install as follows:

1. Apply three separate wraps of filament tape per insulation section to secure pipe insulation to pipe prior to installation of PVDC jacket.



2. Wrap factory-presized jackets around individual pipe insulation sections with one end overlapping the previously installed sheet. Install presized jacket with an approximate overlap at butt joint of 2 inches (50 mm) over the previous section. Adhere lap seal using adhesive or SSL, and then apply 1-1/4 circumferences of appropriate PVDC tape around overlapped butt joint.

3. Continuous jacket can be spiral-wrapped around a length of pipe insulation. Apply adhesive or PVDC tape at overlapped spiral edge. When electing to use adhesives, refer to manufacturer's written instructions for application of adhesives along this spiral edge to maintain a permanent bond.

4. Jacket can be wrapped in cigarette fashion along length of roll for insulation systems with an outer circumference of 33-1/2 inches (850 mm) or less. The 33-1/2-inch- (850-mm-) circumference limit allows for 2-inch- (50-mm-) overlap seal. Using the length of roll allows for longer sections of jacket to be installed at one time. Use adhesive on the lap seal. Visually inspect lap seal for "fishmouthing," and use PVDC tape along lap seal to secure joint.

5. Repair holes or tears in PVDC jacket by placing PVDC tape over the hole or tear and wrapping a minimum of 1-1/4 circumferences to avoid damage to tape edges.


A. Testing Agency: ATST POC will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.


1. Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by ATST POC, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe, three locations of threaded fittings, three locations of welded fittings, two locations of threaded strainers, two locations of welded strainers, three locations of threaded valves, and three locations of flanged valves for each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule, General" Article.

C. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements.

3.10 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

3.11 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Condensate and Equipment Drain Water below 60 Deg F (16 Deg C):




a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch (25 mm) thick.

B. Chilled Water and Brine, 40 Deg F (5 Deg C) and below:

1. NPS 8 (DN 200) and Smaller: Insulation shall be the following:

a. Cellular Glass: 2 inches (50 mm) thick with vapor barrier jacket.

C. Chilled Water and Brine, above 40 Deg F (5 Deg C):


a. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe Insulation Wicking System: 1 inch (25 mm) thick.

D. Condenser and Heating-Hot-Water Supply and Return, 200 Deg F (93 Deg C) and Below:


a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I: 1 inch (25 mm) thick.

3.12 OUTDOOR, ABOVEGROUND PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Chilled Water and Brine:


a. Cellular Glass: 3 inches (75 mm) thick.



B. Piping, Exposed:

1. PVC: 30 mils (0.8 mm) thick.

3.14 OUTDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE


1. PVC: 30 mils (0.8 mm) thick.



SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 15092 - 1

SECTION 15092 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Sleeves. 2. Stack-sleeve fittings. 3. Sleeve-seal systems. 4. Grout.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Cast-Iron Wall Pipes: Cast or fabricated of cast or ductile iron and equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.

B. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, with plain ends.

C. PVC-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.

D. Molded-PE or -PP Sleeves: Removable, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

2.2 STACK-SLEEVE FITTINGS


1. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.




2. Zurn Specification Drainage Operation; Zurn Plumbing Products Group.

B. Description: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring, bolts, and nuts for membrane flashing.

1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with setscrews.

2.3 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS


1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. 2. CALPICO, Inc. 3. Metraflex Company (The). 4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. 5. Proco Products, Inc.

B. Description: Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling annular space between piping and sleeve.

1. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

2. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. 3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating or Stainless

steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.

2.4 GROUT

A. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.

B. For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large enough to provide 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between piping and concrete slabs and walls.









1. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

C. Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs and walls are constructed.

1. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes in slabs formed by molded-PE or -PP sleeves.

2. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.

3. Using grout, seal the space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without sleeve-seal system.

D. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. 2. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space

between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. 3. Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint sealants

appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements for sealants specified in Section 07920 "Joint Sealants."

E. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements for firestopping specified in Section 07841 "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."

3.2 STACK-SLEEVE-FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install stack-sleeve fittings in new slabs as slabs are constructed.

1. Install fittings that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.

2. Secure flashing between clamping flanges for pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing. Comply with requirements for flashing specified in Section 07620 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

3. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.

4. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.

5. Using grout, seal the space around outside of stack-sleeve fittings.

B. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements for firestopping specified in Section 07841 "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."



3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at service piping entries into building.

B. Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and size and for sleeve ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping in penetration, assemble sleeve-seal system components, and install in annular space between piping and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make a watertight seal.

3.4 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE

A. Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications:

1. Exterior Concrete Walls above Grade:

a. Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves or removable molded sleeves. b. Penetrations of fire-rated assemblies shall maintain the intended rating.

2. Exterior Concrete Walls below Grade:

a. PVC-pipe wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system or galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system.

1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.

b. Piping through Concrete Grounding Ring, All Sizes: PVC sleeves with no seal required.

3. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade:

a. Cast-iron wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system or galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system.

1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.

4. Concrete Slabs above Grade:

a. Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves. b. Penetration of fire-rated assemblies shall maintain the intended rating.

5. Interior Partitions:

a. Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves. b. Penetrations of fire-rated assemblies shall maintain the intended rating.



SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING 15093 - 1

SECTION 15093 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Sleeves. 2. Sleeve-seal systems. 3. Grout.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, with plain ends.

B. Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.



1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. 2. CALPICO, Inc. 3. Metraflex Company (The). 4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. 5. Proco Products, Inc.








B. Description: Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling annular space between piping and sleeve.

1. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

2. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. 3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, of length

required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.

2.3 GROUT





PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.

B. For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large enough to provide 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between piping and concrete slabs and walls.

1. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

C. Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs and walls are constructed.

1. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes in slabs formed by molded-PE or -PP sleeves.


a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.

3. Using grout, seal the space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without sleeve-seal system.

D. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.




2. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.

3. Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements for sealants specified in Section 07920 "Joint Sealants."

E. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements for firestopping specified in Section 07841 "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."


A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at service piping entries into building.

B. Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and size and for sleeve ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping in penetration, assemble sleeve-seal system components, and install in annular space between piping and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make a watertight seal.

3.3 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE

A. Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications:

1. Concrete Slabs above Grade and Walls:

a. Piping Smaller than NPS 6 (DN 150): Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.

2. Interior Partitions:

a. Piping Smaller than NPS 6 (DN 150): Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.



ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 15097 - 1

SECTION 15097 - ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Escutcheons. 2. Floor plates.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ESCUTCHEONS

A. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.

B. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish, concealed hinge, and spring-clip fasteners.

2.2 FLOOR PLATES

A. Split-Casting Floor Plates: Cast brass with concealed hinge.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors.

B. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and with OD that completely covers opening.


ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 15097 - 2

1. Escutcheons:

a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type. b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass or split-casting brass type with

polished, chrome-plated finish. c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type or split-plate, stamped-steel type

with concealed hinge. d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,

stamped-steel type or split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge. e. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel

type or split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge. f. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type or split-

plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge. g. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type or split-plate,

stamped-steel type with concealed hinge.

C. Install floor plates for piping penetrations of equipment-room floors.

D. Install floor plates with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD that completely covers opening.


A. Replace broken and damaged escutcheons and floor plates using new materials.



ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING 15098 - 1

SECTION 15098 - ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Escutcheons. 2. Floor plates.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ESCUTCHEONS

A. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.

B. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish, concealed hinge, and spring-clip fasteners.

2.2 FLOOR PLATES

A. One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for fasteners.

B. Split-Casting Floor Plates: Cast brass with concealed hinge.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors.


ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING 15098 - 2

B. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD that completely covers opening.

1. Escutcheons for New Piping:

a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type. b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass or split-casting brass type with

polished, chrome-plated finish. c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type or split-plate, stamped-steel type

with concealed hinge. d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,

stamped-steel type or split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge. e. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel

type or split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge. f. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type or split-

plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge. g. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type or split-plate,

stamped-steel type with concealed hinge.

C. Install floor plates for piping penetrations of equipment-room floors.

D. Install floor plates with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD that completely covers opening.


A. Replace broken and damaged escutcheons and floor plates using new materials.



GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 15111 - 1

SECTION 15111 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Brass ball valves. 2. Bronze swing check valves. 3. Stainless-steel ball valves. 4. Iron butterfly valves.


1. Section 02510 "Water Distribution" for valves applicable only to this piping. 2. Section 15076 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and

schedules. 3. Section 15140 "Domestic Water Piping" for valves applicable only to this piping. 4. Section 15155 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties" for valves applicable only to this

piping. 5. Section 15211 "General-Service Compressed-Air Piping" for valves applicable only to

this piping.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CWP: Cold working pressure.

B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber.

C. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber.

D. PTFE: Poly tetra fluoroethylene.


A. Product Data: PolyTetra Fluoroethylene, or Teflon.




A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer.

B. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.

C. MSS Compliance: MSS SP-67, Type I for butterfly valves.

D. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service.


A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends. 3. Set ball valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces. 4. Block check valves in either closed or open position.

B. Use the following precautions during storage:

1. Maintain valve end protection. 2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature. If

outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.

C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 No Buna-N (Nitrile) materials shall be used on site.

2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES

A. Refer to valve schedule articles for applications of valves.

B. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures.

C. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

D. Valve Actuator Types:

1. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 (DN 150) and smaller.



2. Extended Actuators: For valves in buried piping.

E. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch (50-mm) stem extensions and the following features:

1. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing insulation.

F. Valve-End Connections:

1. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.

G. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.

2.3 BRASS BALL VALVES

A. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Brass Ball Valves with Brass Trim:


a. Apollo valves; a division of Conbraco Industries. b. Jamesbury; a subsidiary of Metso Automation. c. Milwaukee Valve Company. d. NIBCO INC.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110. b. SWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). c. CWP Rating: 600 psig (4140 kPa). d. Body Design: Two piece. e. Body Material: Forged brass. f. Ends: Threaded. g. Seats: PTFE or TFE. h. Stem: Brass. i. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. j. Port: Full.

2.4 BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Class 125, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc:


a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.









b. Milwaukee Valve Company. c. NIBCO INC. d. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 3. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). c. Body Design: Horizontal flow. d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze. e. Ends: Threaded. f. Disc: Bronze.

2.5 STAINLESS-STEEL BALL VALVES

A. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Stainless-Steel Ball Valves:


a. Apollo valves; a division of Conbraco Industries. b. Jamesbury; a subsidiary of Metso Automation. c. Milwaukee Valve Company. d. NIBCO INC.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110. b. SWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). c. CWP Rating: 600 psig (4140 kPa). d. Body Design: Two piece. e. Body Material: Stainless steel. f. Ends: Threaded. g. Seats: PTFE or TFE. h. Stem: Stainless steel. i. Ball: Stainless steel. j. Port: Full.

2.6 IRON, SINGLE-FLANGE BUTTERFLY VALVES

A. 200 CWP, Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with Elastomeric Seat and Aluminum-Bronze Disc:












a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group. c. NIBCO INC. d. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-67, Type I. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). c. Body Design: Lug type; suitable for bidirectional dead-end service at rated

pressure without use of downstream flange. d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, cast iron or ASTM A 536, ductile iron. e. Seat: EPDM. f. Stem: One- or two-piece stainless steel. g. Disc: Aluminum bronze.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.

B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations.

C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.

E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.

D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

E. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:






1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level. 2. Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb.

F. Install buried valves with extended actuators to grade.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.

3.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:

1. Shutoff Service:

a. Buried Piping: Butterfly valves. b. Above-Ground Piping: Ball valves.

2. Pump-Discharge Check Valves:

a. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze swing check valves with bronze disc.

B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.

C. Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections:

1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.

2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.

3. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded ends. 4. For Grooved-End Copper Tubing and Steel Piping: Valve ends may be grooved.

3.5 LOW-PRESSURE, COMPRESSED-AIR VALVE SCHEDULE (150 PSIG (1035 kPa) OR LESS)

A. Pipe NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller:

1. Ball Valves: Two piece, full port, brass with brass trim.

3.6 DOMESTIC, HOT- AND COLD-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE


1. Ball Valves: Two piece, full port, brass with brass trim.



2. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125, bronze disc.

3.7 PUMPED WASTE VALVE SCHEDULE


1. Ball Valves: Two piece, full port, brass with brass trim. 2. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125, bronze disc.

3.8 DEIONIZED WATER VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Ball Valves: Two-piece, full port, with stainless steel ball and PTFE seats.

3.9 RAW-WATER COLLECTION VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Butterfly Valves: Iron body, with aluminum-bronze disc and elastomeric trim.

3.10 OTHER SERVICES

A. Refer to the relevant piping Specifications.



GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 15112 - 1

SECTION 15112 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Bronze ball valves. 2. Iron ball valves. 3. Iron, single-flange butterfly valves. 4. Bronze swing check valves. 5. Chainwheels.


1. Section 15077 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and schedules.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CWP: Cold working pressure.

B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber.

C. SWP: Steam working pressure.


A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated.


A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer.

B. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria.



2. ASME B31.1 for power piping valves. 3. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.


A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends. 3. Set ball valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces. 4. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open. 5. Block check valves in either closed or open position.

B. Use the following precautions during storage:

1. Maintain valve end protection. 2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature. If

outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.

C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES

A. Refer to HVAC valve schedule articles for applications of valves.

B. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures.

C. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

D. Valve Actuator Types:

1. Gear Actuator: For quarter-turn valves NPS 8 (DN 200) and larger. 2. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 (DN 150) and smaller. 3. Chainwheel: Device for attachment to valve handwheel, stem, or other actuator; of size

and with chain for mounting height, as indicated in the "Valve Installation" Article.

E. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch (50-mm) stem extensions and the following features:

1. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing insulation.

2. Butterfly Valves: With extended neck.



F. Valve-End Connections:

1. Flanged: With flanges according to ASME B16.1 for iron valves. 2. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.

G. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.

2.2 BRONZE BALL VALVES

A. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Stainless-steel Trim:


a. Hammond Valve. b. Milwaukee Valve Company. c. NIBCO, Inc. d. Watts Regulator Co.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110. b. SWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). c. CWP Rating: 600 psig (4140 kPa). d. Body Design: Two piece. e. Body Material: Bronze. f. Ends: Threaded. g. Seats: PTFE or TFE. h. Stem: Stainless steel. i. Ball: Stainless Steel. j. Port: Full.

2.3 IRON BALL VALVES

A. Class 125, Iron Ball Valves:


a. American Valve, Inc. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves. c. Kitz Corporation. d. Sure Flow Equipment Inc. e. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.












2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-72. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). c. Body Design: Split body. d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron. e. Ends: Flanged. f. Seats: PTFE or TFE. g. Stem: Stainless steel. h. Ball: Stainless steel. i. Port: Full.

2.4 IRON, SINGLE-FLANGE BUTTERFLY VALVES

A. 150 CWP, Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with EPDM Seat and Stainless-Steel Disc:


a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. c. NIBCO INC. d. Tyco Valves & Controls; a unit of Tyco Flow Control. e. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-67, Type I. b. CWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). c. Body Design: Lug type; suitable for bidirectional dead-end service at rated

pressure without use of downstream flange. d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, cast iron or ASTM A 536, ductile iron. e. Seat: EPDM. f. Stem: One- or two-piece stainless steel. g. Stem O-ring Seal: EPDM. h. Disc: Stainless steel.

2.5 BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Class 125, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc:


a. American Valve, Inc. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.












c. Hammond Valve. d. Milwaukee Valve Company. e. NIBCO INC. f. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 3. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). c. Body Design: Horizontal flow. d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze. e. Ends: Threaded. f. Disc: Bronze.

2.6 IRON SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Class 125, Iron Swing Check Valves with Metal Seats:


a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. b. Hammond Valve. c. Milwaukee Valve Company. d. NIBCO INC. e. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-71, Type I. b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12 (DN 65 to DN 300), CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). c. NPS 14 to NPS 24 (DN 350 to DN 600), CWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). d. Body Design: Clear or full waterway. e. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. f. Ends: Flanged. g. Trim: Bronze. h. Gasket: Asbestos free.

2.7 CHAINWHEELS


1. Babbitt Steam Specialty Co. 2. Roto Hammer Industries. 3. Trumbull Industries.

















B. Description: Valve actuation assembly with sprocket rim, brackets, and chain.

1. Brackets: Type, number, size, and fasteners required to mount actuator on valve. 2. Attachment: For connection to ball and butterfly valve stems. 3. Sprocket Rim with Chain Guides: Ductile or cast iron, of type and size required for

valve. 4. Chain: Hot-dip, galvanized steel, of size required to fit sprocket rim.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.

B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations.

C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.

E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.


A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.

D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

E. Install chainwheels on operators for ball and butterfly valves NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger and more than 96 inches (2400 mm) above floor. Extend chains to 60 inches (1520 mm) above finished floor.

F. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:

1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level. 2. Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb.



3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.

3.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:

1. Shutoff Service: Ball or butterfly valves. 2. Butterfly Valve Dead-End Service: Single-flange (lug) type. 3. Throttling Service except Steam: Globe valves. 4. Pump-Discharge Check Valves:

a. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze swing check valves with bronze or nonmetallic disc.

b. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Iron swing check valves with lever and weight or with spring or iron, center-guided, metal-seat check valves.

B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.

C. Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections:

1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded ends. 2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Flanged ends except where

threaded valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below. 3. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded ends. 4. For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Flanged ends except where

threaded valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below. 5. For Steel Piping, NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: Flanged ends.

3.5 CHILLED-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE


1. Ball Valves: Two piece, full port, bronze with stainless-steel trim. 2. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125, bronze disc.

B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger:

1. Iron Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): May be provided with threaded ends instead of flanged ends.

2. Iron Ball Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 10 (DN 65 to DN 250): Class 150. 3. Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12 (DN 65 to DN 300):

200 CWP, EPDM seat, disc. 4. Iron Swing Check Valves: Class 125, metal seats.



3.6 HEATING-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE


1. Ball Valves: Two piece, full port, bronze with stainless-steel trim. 2. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125, bronze disc.

B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger:

1. Iron Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): May be provided with threaded ends instead of flanged ends.

2. Iron Ball Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 10 (DN 65 to DN 250): Class 150. 3. Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12 (DN 65 to DN 300):

200 CWP, EPDM seat, stainless-steel disc. 4. Iron Swing Check Valves: Class 125 metal seats.



METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 15126 - 1

SECTION 15126 - METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Bimetallic-actuated thermometers. 2. Thermowells. 3. Dial-type pressure gages. 4. Gage attachments. 5. Test-plugs. 6. Water meters.


1. Section 15140 "Domestic Water Piping."




A. Product Certificates: For each type of meter and gage, from manufacturer.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For meters and gages to include in operation and maintenance manuals.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BIMETALLIC-ACTUATED THERMOMETERS


1. Ashcroft Inc. 2. Ernst Flow Industries. 3. Marsh Bellofram. 4. Miljoco Corporation. 5. Nanmac Corporation. 6. Noshok. 7. Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group. 8. REOTEMP Instrument Corporation. 9. Tel-Tru Manufacturing Company. 10. Trerice, H. O. Co. 11. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 12. Weiss Instruments, Inc. 13. WIKA Instrument Corporation - USA. 14. Winters Instruments - U.S.

B. Standard: ASME B40.200.

C. Case: Sealed type; stainless steel with 3-inch (76-mm) nominal diameter.

D. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings and scales in deg F and deg C.

E. Connector Type(s): Union joint, adjustable angle, with unified-inch screw threads.

F. Connector Size: 1/2 inch (13 mm), with ASME B1.1 screw threads.

G. Stem: 0.25 or 0.375 inch (6.4 or 9.4 mm) in diameter; stainless steel.

H. Window: plastic.

I. Ring: Stainless steel.

J. Element: Bimetal coil.

K. Pointer: Dark-colored metal.

L. Accuracy: Plus or minus 2 percent of scale range.

















2.2 THERMOWELLS

A. Thermowells:

1. Standard: ASME B40.200. 2. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting. 3. Material for Use with Copper Tubing: CNR or CUNI. 4. Material for Use with Steel Piping: CRES. 5. Type: Stepped shank unless straight or tapered shank is indicated. 6. External Threads: NPS 1/2, NPS 3/4, or NPS 1, (DN 15, DN 20, or NPS 25,)

ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads. 7. Internal Threads: 1/2, 3/4, and 1 inch (13, 19, and 25 mm), with ASME B1.1 screw

threads. 8. Bore: Diameter required to match thermometer bulb or stem. 9. Insertion Length: Length required to match thermometer bulb or stem. 10. Lagging Extension: Include on thermowells for insulated piping and tubing. 11. Bushings: For converting size of thermowell's internal screw thread to size of

thermometer connection.

B. Heat-Transfer Medium: Mixture of graphite and glycerin.

2.3 PRESSURE GAGES

A. Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages:


a. AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge. b. Ashcroft Inc. c. Ernst Flow Industries. d. Flo Fab Inc. e. Marsh Bellofram. f. Miljoco Corporation. g. Noshok. h. Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group. i. REOTEMP Instrument Corporation. j. Tel-Tru Manufacturing Company. k. Trerice, H. O. Co. l. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. m. Weiss Instruments, Inc. n. WIKA Instrument Corporation - USA. o. Winters Instruments - U.S.

2. Standard: ASME B40.100. 3. Case: Liquid-filled type; cast aluminum or drawn steel; 2-1/2-inch (64-mm) nominal

diameter. 4. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated.


















5. Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/4 (DN 8), ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type is indicated.

6. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer. 7. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in psi

and kPa. 8. Pointer: Dark-colored metal. 9. Window: Plastic. 10. Ring: Metal. 11. Accuracy: Grade A.

2.4 GAGE ATTACHMENTS

A. Valves: Brass ball, with NPS 1/4 (DN 8), ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.

2.5 TEST PLUGS


1. Flow Design, Inc. 2. Miljoco Corporation. 3. National Meter, Inc. 4. Peterson Equipment Co., Inc. 5. Sisco Manufacturing Company, Inc. 6. Trerice, H. O. Co. 7. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 8. Weiss Instruments, Inc.

B. Description: Test-station fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting.

C. Body: Brass or stainless steel with core inserts and gasketed and threaded cap. Include extended stem on units to be installed in insulated piping.

D. Thread Size: NPS 1/2 (DN 15), ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.

E. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 500 psig at 200 deg F (3450 kPa at 93 deg C).

F. Core Inserts: EPDM self-sealing rubber.

2.6 WATER METERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Daniel L. Jerman Co.











b. Badger Meter, Inc. c. Neptune Technology Group Inc. d. Sensus Metering Systems.

B. Multijet-Type Water Meters:

1. Description: With bronze main case.

a. Standard: AWWA C708. b. Registration: Magnetic drive; flow in gallons (liters).

C. Pulse Output: Dry contact reed switch output.

D. Refer to plans and schedules per size and capacity of meters.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install thermowells with socket extending one-third of pipe diameter and in vertical position in piping tees.

B. Install thermowells of sizes required to match thermometer connectors. Include bushings if required to match sizes.

C. Install thermowells with extension on insulated piping.

D. Fill thermowells with heat-transfer medium.

E. Install direct-mounted thermometers in thermowells and adjust vertical and tilted positions.

F. Install direct-mounted pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at the most readable position.

G. Install valve piping for each pressure gage for fluids.

H. Install thermometers in the following locations:

1. Inlet and outlet of each water heater. 2. Junction of domestic hot water supply and return piping.

I. Install pressure gages in the following locations:

1. Discharge of domestic water treatment unit. 2. Inlet to fluid cooler evaporator.

J. Install water meters in according with manufacturer’s written instruction.

1. Include full-sized shutoff valves on inlet and outlet of meter.






3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and maintenance of meters, gages, machines, and equipment.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.

3.4 THERMOMETER SCHEDULE

A. Thermometers shall be the following:

1. Sealed, bimetallic-actuated type.

B. Thermometer stems shall be of length to match thermowell insertion length.

3.5 THERMOMETER SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE

A. Scale Range for Domestic Cold-Water Piping: 0 to 100 deg F and minus 20 to plus 50 deg C.

B. Scale Range for Domestic Hot-Water Piping: 30 to 240 deg F and 0 to plus 115 deg C.

3.6 PRESSURE-GAGE SCHEDULE

A. Pressure gage at discharge of domestic water treatment unit shall be the following:

1. Liquid-filled, direct-mounted, metal case.

B. Pressure gages at inlet to fluid cooler evaporator system (as shown on plans) shall be the following:

1. Test plug with EPDM self-sealing rubber inserts.

3.7 PRESSURE-GAGE SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE

A. Scale Range for Domestic Water Piping: 0 to 160 psi and 0 to 1100 kPa.



METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING 15127 - 1

SECTION 15127 - METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Liquid in glass thermometers. 2. Thermowells. 3. Dial-type pressure gages. 4. Gage attachments. 5. Test plugs. 6. Test-plug kits. 7. Ultrasonic, thermal-energy meters.


1. Section 15184 "Steam and Condensate Piping Specialties" for steam and condensate meters.

2. Section 15195 "Facility Natural-Gas Piping" for gas meters.



B. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Product Certificates: For each type of meter and gage, from manufacturer.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For meters and gages to include in operation and maintenance manuals.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS

A. Metal-Case, Industrial-Style, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers:


a. Flo Fab Inc. b. Miljoco Corporation. c. Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group. d. Trerice, H. O. Co. e. Winters Instruments - U.S.

2. Standard: ASME B40.200. 3. Case: Cast aluminum; 7-inch (178-mm) nominal size unless otherwise indicated. 4. Case Form: Adjustable angle unless otherwise indicated. 5. Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and blue or red organic liquid. 6. Tube Background: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings

graduated in deg F and deg C. 7. Window: Glass or plastic. 8. Stem: Aluminum and of length to suit installation.

a. Design for Air-Duct Installation: With ventilated shroud. b. Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem.

9. Connector: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm), with ASME B1.1 screw threads. 10. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range or one scale division, to a maximum of

1.5 percent of scale range.

2.2 THERMOWELLS

A. Thermowells:

1. Standard: ASME B40.200. 2. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting. 3. Material for Use with Copper Tubing: CNR. 4. Material for Use with Steel Piping: CSA. 5. Type: Stepped shank unless straight or tapered shank is indicated. 6. External Threads: NPS 1/2, NPS 3/4, or NPS 1, (DN 15, DN 20, or NPS 25,)

ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads. 7. Internal Threads: 1/2, 3/4, and 1 inch (13, 19, and 25 mm), with ASME B1.1 screw

threads. 8. Bore: Diameter required to match thermometer bulb or stem. 9. Insertion Length: Length required to match thermometer bulb or stem. 10. Lagging Extension: Include on thermowells for insulated piping and tubing.








11. Bushings: For converting size of thermowell's internal screw thread to size of thermometer connection.

B. Heat-Transfer Medium: Mixture of graphite and glycerin.

2.3 PRESSURE GAGES

A. Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages:


a. Ashcroft Inc. b. Miljoco Corporation. c. Noshok. d. Winters Instruments - U.S.

2. Standard: ASME B40.100. 3. Case: Solid-front, pressure relief type; cast aluminum or drawn steel; 4-1/2-inch

(114-mm) nominal diameter. 4. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated. 5. Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2 (DN 8 or DN 15), ASME B1.20.1

pipe threads and bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type is indicated. 6. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer. 7. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in psi

and kPa. 8. Pointer: Dark-colored metal. 9. Window: Glass. 10. Ring: Stainless steel. 11. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half of scale range.

2.4 GAGE ATTACHMENTS

A. Snubbers: ASME B40.100, brass; with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2 (DN 8 or DN 15), ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and porous-metal-type surge-dampening device. Include extension for use on insulated piping.

B. Valves: Brass ball, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2 (DN 8 or DN 15), ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.

2.5 TEST PLUGS


1. Flow Design, Inc. 2. Peterson Equipment Co., Inc.









3. Trerice, H. O. Co. 4. Weiss Instruments, Inc.

B. Description: Test-station fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting.

C. Body: Brass or stainless steel with core inserts and gasketed and threaded cap. Include extended stem on units to be installed in insulated piping.

D. Thread Size: NPS 1/4 (DN 8) or NPS 1/2 (DN 15), ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.

E. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 500 psig at 200 deg F (3450 kPa at 93 deg C).

F. Core Inserts: EPDM self-sealing rubber.

2.6 TEST-PLUG KITS


1. Flow Design, Inc. 2. Peterson Equipment Co., Inc. 3. Trerice, H. O. Co. 4. Weiss Instruments, Inc.

B. Furnish one test-plug kit containing one thermometer, one pressure gage and adapter, and carrying case. Thermometer sensing elements, pressure gage, and adapter probes shall be of diameter to fit test plugs and of length to project into piping.

C. Thermometer: Small, bimetallic insertion type with 1- to 2-inch- (25- to 51-mm-) diameter dial and tapered-end sensing element. Dial range shall be at least 0 to 220 deg F (minus 18 to plus 104 deg C).

D. Pressure Gage: Small, Bourdon-tube insertion type with 2- to 3-inch- (51- to 76-mm-) diameter dial and probe. Dial range shall be at least 0 to 200 psig (0 to 1380 kPa).

E. Carrying Case: Metal or plastic, with formed instrument padding.

2.7 THERMAL-ENERGY METERS

A. Ultrasonic, Thermal-Energy Meters:


a. EMCO Flow Systems; a division of Spirax Sarco, Inc. b. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.











2. Description: Meter with flow sensor, temperature sensors, transmitter, indicator, and connecting wiring.

3. Flow Sensor: Transit-time ultrasonic type with transmitter. 4. Temperature Sensors: Insertion-type or strap-on transducer. 5. Indicator: Solid-state, integrating-type meter with integral battery pack.

a. Data Output: Six-digit electromechanical counter with readout in kilowatts per hour or British thermal units (joules).

b. Battery Pack: Five-year lithium battery.

6. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent. 7. Display: Visually indicates total fluid volume in gallons (liters) and thermal-energy flow

in kilowatts per hour or British thermal units (joules). 8. Operating Instructions: Include complete instructions with each thermal-energy meter

system. 9. External Communication: Modbus RTU over RS485 communication with BacNet/IP

communication protocols.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install thermowells with socket extending one-third of pipe diameter and in vertical position in piping tees.

B. Install thermowells of sizes required to match thermometer connectors. Include bushings if required to match sizes.

C. Install thermowells with extension on insulated piping.

D. Fill thermowells with heat-transfer medium.

E. Install direct-mounted thermometers in thermowells and adjust vertical and tilted positions.

F. Install direct-mounted pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at the most readable position.

G. Install valve and snubber in piping for each pressure gage for fluids (except steam).

H. Install test plugs in piping tees.

I. Assemble and install connections, tubing, and accessories between flow-measuring elements and flowmeters according to manufacturer's written instructions.

J. Install flowmeter elements in accessible positions in piping systems.

K. Install permanent indicators on walls or brackets in accessible and readable positions.

L. Install connection fittings in accessible locations for attachment to portable indicators.



M. Mount thermal-energy meters on wall if accessible; if not, provide brackets to support meters.

N. Install thermometers in the following locations:

1. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic zone. 2. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic boiler. 3. Two inlets and two outlets of each chiller. 4. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic coil in air-handling units. 5. Two inlets and two outlets of each hydronic heat exchanger. 6. Inlet and outlet of each thermal-storage tank.

O. Install pressure gages in the following locations:

1. Discharge of each pressure-reducing valve. 2. Inlet and outlet of each chiller chilled-water and condenser-water connection. 3. Suction and discharge of each pump.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and maintenance of meters, gages, machines, and equipment.

B. Connect flowmeter-system elements to meters.

C. Connect flowmeter transmitters to meters.

D. Connect thermal-energy meter transmitters to meters.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. After installation, calibrate meters according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.

3.4 THERMOMETER SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE

A. Scale Range for Chilled-Water Piping: Minus 40 to plus 110 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 40 deg C).

B. Scale Range for Condenser Heating, Hot-Water Piping: 20 to 150 deg F (-5 to 80 deg C).

3.5 PRESSURE-GAGE SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE

A. Scale Range for Hydronic Piping: 0 to 100 psi (0 to 600 kPa).



3.6 THERMAL-ENERGY METER SCHEDULE

A. Thermal-Energy Meters for Hydronic Piping: Ultrasonic type. See plans and control drawing for locations.



DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 15140 - 1

SECTION 15140 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Under-building-slab and aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, and fittings inside buildings.

2. Stainless-steel tubing for deionized water service. 3. Encasement for piping.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Division 2 Section "Facility Water Distribution Piping" for water-service piping and water meters outside the building from source to the point where water-service piping enters the building.


A. Product Data: For transition fittings and dielectric fittings.


A. System purging and disinfecting activities report.


1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Interruption of Existing Water Service: Do not interrupt water service to facilities occupied by ATST POC or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary water service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify ATST POC no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of water service.

2. Do not interrupt water service without ATST POC's written permission.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

B. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 14 and NSF 61. Plastic piping components shall be marked with "NSF-pw."

C. Buna-N (Nitrile) shall not be used on the Site.

2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K (ASTM B 88M, Type A) water tube, annealed temper.

B. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B88, Type L (ASTM B88M, Type B) water tube, drawn temper.

C. Cast-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings.

D. Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings.

E. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends.

F. Copper Unions:

1. MSS SP-123. 2. Cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body. 3. Ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces. 4. Solder-joint or threaded ends.

2.3 STAINLESS STEEL TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Stainless Steel Tube: ASTM A 269.

B. Fittings: Compression or swaged pressure fittings.

C. Unions: Stainless steel with threaded ends.

2.4 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS

A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials:

1. AWWA C110/A21.10, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick or ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free unless otherwise indicated.

2. Full-face or ring type unless otherwise indicated.



B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.

C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys.

D. Flux: ASTM B 813, water flushable.

E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing unless otherwise indicated.

2.5 ENCASEMENT FOR PIPING

A. Standard: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105/A21.5.

B. Form: tube.

C. Color: Black or natural.

2.6 TRANSITION FITTINGS

A. General Requirements:

1. Same size as pipes to be joined. 2. Pressure rating at least equal to pipes to be joined. 3. End connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting.

C. Sleeve-Type Transition Coupling: AWWA C219.


a. Cascade Waterworks Manufacturing. b. Dresser, Inc.; Piping Specialties Products. c. Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The). d. Viking Johnson.

2.7 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Dielectric Unions:




a. Hart Industries International, Inc. b. Jomar International. c. Matco-Norca. d. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. e. Wilkins; a Zurn company.

2. Standard: ASSE 1079. 3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum at 180 deg F (82 deg C). 4. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

C. Dielectric Flanges:


a. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. b. Wilkins; a Zurn company.

2. Standard: ASSE 1079. 3. Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly. 4. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum at 180 deg F (82 deg C). 5. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder-joint

copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

D. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:


a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges. 3. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa)]. 4. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic. 5. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene. 6. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.

E. Dielectric Nipples:




a. Elster Perfection Corporation. b. Grinnell Mechanical Products; Tyco Fire Products LP. c. Matco-Norca. d. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. e. Victaulic Company.

2. Standard: IAPMO PS 66. 3. Electroplated steel nipple complying with ASTM F 1545. 4. Pressure Rating and Temperature: 300 psig (2070 kPa) at 225 deg F (107 deg C). 5. End Connections: Male threaded or grooved. 6. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Comply with requirements in Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.

B. Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

C. Install underground copper tube in PE encasement according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105/A21.5.

D. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve inside the building at each domestic water-service entrance. Comply with requirements for pressure gages in Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" and with requirements for drain valves and strainers in Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."

E. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.

F. Install domestic water piping level with 0.25 percent slope downward toward drain and plumb.

G. Rough-in domestic water piping for water-meter installation according to utility company's requirements.

H. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices in Division 15 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

I. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.



J. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

K. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and coordinate with other services occupying that space.

L. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

M. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher than the system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

N. Install piping free of sags and bends.

O. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

P. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and specialty.

Q. Install pressure gages on suction and discharge piping for each plumbing pump and packaged booster pump. Comply with requirements for pressure gages in Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."

R. Install thermostats in hot-water circulation piping. Comply with requirements for thermostats in Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Pumps."

S. Install thermometers on inlet and outlet piping from each water heater. Comply with requirements for thermometers in Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."

T. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Division 15 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

U. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 15 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

V. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 15 Section "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."

3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly.

C. Brazed Joints for Copper Tubing: Comply with CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed Joints" chapter.



D. Soldered Joints for Copper Tubing: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

E. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate asbestos-free, nonmetallic gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for domestic water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9.

F. Joints for Dissimilar-Material Piping: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems.

G. Joints for Stainless Steel Tubing: Comply with fitting manufacturer’s instructions.

3.4 TRANSITION FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install transition couplings at joints of dissimilar piping.

3.5 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.

B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Use dielectric unions.

C. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Use dielectric flanges.


A. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices in Division 15 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger, support products, and installation in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42 clamps. 2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:

a. 100 Feet (30 m) and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer than 100 Feet (30 m): MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. c. Longer than 100 Feet (30 m) if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet (30 m) or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

D. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch (10 mm).



E. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 3/4 (DN 20) and smaller: 60 inches (1500 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4 (DN 25 and DN 32): 72 inches (1800 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm)

rod. 3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 96 inches (2400 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm)

rod. 4. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): 108 inches (2700 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 5. NPS 3 to NPS 5 (DN 80 to DN 125): 10 feet (3 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.

F. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet (3 m).

G. Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.7 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. When installing piping adjacent to equipment and machines, allow space for service and maintenance.

C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect to the following:

1. Domestic Water Booster Pumps: Cold-water suction and discharge piping. 2. Water Heaters: Cold-water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not

smaller than sizes of water heater connections. 3. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller

than that required by plumbing code. Comply with requirements for connection sizes in Division 15 plumbing fixture Sections.

4. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

3.8 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification materials and installation in Division 15 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Label pressure piping with system operating pressure.




A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Piping Inspections:

a. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

b. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction:

1) Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing in after roughing in and before setting fixtures.

2) Final Inspection: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified in "Piping Tests" Subparagraph below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

c. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

d. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Piping Tests:

a. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of water.

b. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

c. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

d. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig (345 kPa) above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow it to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

e. Repair leaks and defects with new materials, and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained.

f. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.

B. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.10 ADJUSTING

A. Perform the following adjustments before operation:



1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs. 2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position. 3. Open throttling valves to proper setting. 4. Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate flow.

a. Manually adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide hot-water flow in each branch.

b. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated.

5. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during installation.

6. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs. 7. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for

application where used and are clean and ready for use. 8. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.

3.11 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:

1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using.

2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below:

a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets.

b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:

1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm (50 mg/L) of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.

2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm (200 mg/L) of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.

c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the standing time.

d. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination. e. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Clean non-potable domestic water piping as follows:

1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using.

2. Use purging procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or; if methods are not prescribed, follow procedures described below:

a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets.



b. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.

C. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities. Include copies of water-sample approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

3.12 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. All materials installed in air plenum must be plenum-rated.

B. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

C. Flanges and unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise indicated.

D. Fitting Option: Brazed joints may be used on aboveground copper tubing.

E. Under-building-slab, domestic water, building-service piping, shall be the following:

1. Soft copper tube, ASTM B88, Type K; wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and brazed joints. Minimize number of joints.

F. Underground raw-water piping shall be the following:

1. Soft copper tube, ASTM B88, Type K; wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and brazed joints. Minimize number of joints.

G. Aboveground domestic water piping, shall be one of the following:

1. Soft or hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and brazed or soldered joints.

H. Aboveground raw water piping, shall be the following:

1. Soft or hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and brazed or soldered joints.

I. Deionized Water Piping Shall Be The Following:

1. Stainless-steel tubing; compression or waged fittings.

3.13 VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply:



1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball valves for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. Use butterfly or ball valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

2. Throttling Duty: Use ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. Use butterfly or ball valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

3. Hot-Water Circulation Piping, Balancing Duty: Calibrated balancing valves. 4. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.

B. Use check valves to maintain correct direction of domestic water flow to and from equipment.



DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 15145 - 1

SECTION 15145 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Balancing valves. 2. Temperature-actuated, water mixing valves. 3. Strainers. 4. Hose bibbs. 5. Wall hydrants. 6. Drain valves. 7. Water-hammer arresters. 8. Air vents. 9. Trap-seal primer valves. 10. Trap-seal primer systems. 11. Specialty valves. 12. Flexible connectors.


1. Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for thermometers, pressure gages, and flow meters in domestic water piping.

2. Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping" for water meters. 3. Division 15 Section "Emergency Plumbing Fixtures" for water tempering equipment. 4. Division 15 Section "Pressure Water Coolers" for water filters for water coolers. 5. Division 15 Section "Water Filtration Equipment" for water filters in domestic water

piping.



B. Shop Drawings: For domestic water piping specialties.

1. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.




A. Field quality-control reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water piping specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 61 and NSF 14 Mark "NSF-pw" on plastic piping components.

B. Buna-N (Nitrile) materials shall not be used on site.


A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig (860 kPa) unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 BALANCING VALVES

A. Copper-Alloy Calibrated Balancing Valves:


a. Armstrong International, Inc. b. ITT Corporation; Bell & Gossett Div. c. NIBCO Inc. d. TACO Incorporated. e. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company.

2. Type: Ball or Y-pattern globe valve with two readout ports and memory-setting indicator.

3. Body: Brass or bronze. 4. Size: Same as connected piping, but not larger than NPS 2 (DN 50). 5. Accessories: Meter hoses, fittings, valves, differential pressure meter, and carrying case.

B. Accessories: Meter hoses, fittings, valves, differential pressure meter, and carrying case.

C. Memory-Stop Balancing Valves:




a. Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. c. Griswold Controls. d. Hammond Valve. e. Milwaukee Valve Company.

2. Standard: MSS SP-110 for two-piece, copper-alloy ball valves. 3. Pressure Rating: 400-psig (2760-kPa) minimum CWP. 4. Size: NPS 2 (DN 50) or smaller. 5. Body: Copper alloy. 6. Port: Standard or full port. 7. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. 8. Seats and Seals: Replaceable. 9. End Connections: Solder joint or threaded. 10. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel with memory-setting device.

2.4 TEMPERATURE-ACTUATED, WATER MIXING VALVES

A. Water-Temperature Limiting Devices:


a. Armstrong International, Inc. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc. c. Powers; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. d. Symmons Industries, Inc. e. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products.

2. Standard: ASSE 1017. 3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa). 4. Type: Thermostatically controlled, water mixing valve. 5. Material: Bronze body with corrosion-resistant interior components. 6. Connections: Threaded union inlets and outlet. 7. Accessories: Check stops on hot- and cold-water supplies, and adjustable, temperature-

control handle.

B. Individual-Fixture, Water Tempering Valves:


a. Cash Acme; a division of Reliance Worldwide Corporation.



b. Conbraco Industries, Inc. c. Honeywell International Inc. d. Lawler Manufacturing Company, Inc. e. Leonard Valve Company. f. Powers; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. g. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company. h. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products.

2. Standard: ASSE 1016, thermostatically controlled, water tempering valve. 3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum unless otherwise indicated. 4. Body: Bronze body with corrosion-resistant interior components. 5. Temperature Control: Adjustable. 6. Inlets and Outlet: Threaded. 7. Finish: Rough or chrome-plated bronze.

2.5 OUTLET BOXES

A. Icemaker Outlet Boxes:


a. Acorn Engineering Company. b. IPS Corporation. c. Oatey. d. Plastic Oddities.

2. Mounting: Recessed. 3. Material and Finish: Enameled-steel, epoxy-painted-steel, or plastic box and faceplate. 4. Faucet: Valved fitting complying with ASME A112.18.1. Include NPS 1/2 (DN 15) or

smaller copper tube outlet. 5. Supply Shutoff Fitting: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) gate, globe, or ball valve and NPS 1/2 (DN 15)

copper, water tubing.

2.6 HOSE BIBBS

A. Hose Bibbs:

1. Standard: ASME A112.18.1 for sediment faucets. 2. Body Material: Bronze. 3. Seat: Bronze, replaceable. 4. Supply Connections: NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4 (DN 15 or DN 20) threaded or solder-joint

inlet. 5. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7. 6. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa). 7. Vacuum Breaker: Integral nonremovable, drainable, hose-connection vacuum breaker

complying with ASSE 1011.



8. Include operating key with each operating-key hose bibb.

2.7 WALL HYDRANTS

A. Nonfreeze Wall Hydrants:


a. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. b. Watts Drainage Products. c. Woodford Manufacturing Company; a division of WCM Industries, Inc. d. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Products.

2. Standard: ASME A112.21.3M for self-draining wall hydrants. 3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa). 4. Operation: Loose key. 5. Casing and Operating Rod: Of length required to match wall thickness. Include wall

clamp. 6. Outlet: Integral vacuum breaker and garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7.

2.8 DRAIN VALVES

A. Ball-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves:

1. Standard: MSS SP-110 for standard-port, two-piece ball valves. 2. Pressure Rating: 400-psig (2760-kPa) minimum CWP. 3. Size: NPS 3/4 (DN 20). 4. Body: Copper alloy. 5. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. 6. Seats and Seals: Replaceable. 7. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel. 8. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint. 9. Outlet: Threaded, short nipple with garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7

and cap with brass chain.

2.9 WATER-HAMMER ARRESTERS

A. Water-Hammer Arresters:


a. AMTROL, Inc. b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.



c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. e. Watts Drainage Products.

2. Standard: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201. 3. Type: Copper tube with piston. 4. Size: ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A through F, or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A through F.

2.10 AIR VENTS

A. Automatic Air Vents:

1. Body: Bronze or stainless steel. 2. Pressure Rating and Temperature: 125-psig (860-kPa) minimum pressure rating at 140

deg F (60 deg C). 3. Float: Replaceable, corrosion-resistant metal. 4. Mechanism and Seat: Stainless steel. 5. Size: NPS 3/8 (DN 10) minimum inlet. 6. Inlet and Vent Outlet End Connections: Threaded.

2.11 TRAP-SEAL PRIMER DEVICE

A. Supply-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Device:


a. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. b. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. d. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company.

2. Standard: ASSE 1018. 3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum. 4. Body: Bronze. 5. Inlet and Outlet Connections: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) threaded, union, or solder joint. 6. Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) threaded or solder joint. 7. Finish: Chrome plated, or rough bronze for units used with pipe or tube that is not

chrome finished.

2.12 TRAP-SEAL PRIMER SYSTEMS

A. Trap-Seal Primer Systems:




a. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.

2. Standard: ASSE 1044. 3. Piping: NPS 3/4, ASTM B 88, Type L (DN 20, ASTM B 88M, Type B); copper, water

tubing. 4. Cabinet: Steel box with stainless-steel cover. 5. Electric Controls: 24-hour timer, solenoid valve, and manual switch for 120-V ac power.

a. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

6. Vacuum Breaker: ASSE 1001.

2.13 SPECIALTY VALVES

A. Comply with requirements for general-duty metal valves in Division 15 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."

2.14 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS


1. Flex-Hose Co., Inc. 2. Flexicraft Industries. 3. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. 4. Metraflex, Inc. 5. Unaflex.

B. Bronze-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-bronze tubing with bronze wire-braid covering and ends brazed to inner tubing.

1. Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum 200 psig (1380 kPa). 2. End Connections NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded copper pipe or plain-end copper

tube. 3. End Connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged copper alloy.

C. Stainless-Steel-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-stainless-steel tubing with stainless-steel wire-braid covering and ends welded to inner tubing.

1. Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum 200 psig (1380 kPa). 2. End Connections NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded steel-pipe nipple. 3. End Connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged steel nipple.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install balancing valves in locations where they can easily be adjusted.

B. Install temperature-actuated, water mixing valves with check stops or shutoff valves on inlets and with shutoff valve on outlet.

1. Install cabinet-type units recessed in or surface mounted on wall as specified.

C. Install Y-pattern strainers for water on supply side of each pump.

D. Install outlet boxes recessed in wall or surface mounted on wall. Install 2-by-4-inch (38-by-89-mm) fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking, wall reinforcement between studs. Comply with requirements for fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking in Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry."

E. Install water-hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI-WH 201.

F. Install air vents at high points of water piping.

G. Install supply-type, trap-seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for proper flow.

H. Install trap-seal primer systems with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust system for proper flow.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Comply with requirements for ground equipment in Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."

C. Fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking is specified in Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables" for electrical connections.

3.3 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved or stamped noncorroding metal equipment nameplate or tag on each of the following:

1. Calibrated balancing valves. 2. Thermostatic, water mixing valves. 3. Supply-type, trap-seal primer valves.



4. Trap-seal primer systems.

B. Distinguish among multiple units. Nameplates and signs are specified in Division 15 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."


A. Domestic water piping specialties will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

B. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable flow set points of balancing valves.

B. Set field-adjustable temperature set points of temperature-actuated, water mixing valves.



SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 15150 - 1

SECTION 15150 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Pipe, tube, and fittings. 2. Specialty pipe fittings. 3. Encasement for underground metal piping.


1. Division 2 Section "Sanitary Sewerage" for sanitary sewerage piping and structures outside the building.


A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure unless otherwise indicated:

1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water (30 kPa). 2. Pumped Waste Piping: 50 psig (345 kPa).

B. Seismic Performance: Soil, waste, and vent piping and support and installation shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.




A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For waste and vent piping, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.



2. Detailed description of piping anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.



A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Interruption of Existing Sanitary Waste Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by ATST POC or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify ATST POC no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of sanitary waste service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of sanitary waste service without ATST POC's written permission.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

B. Buna-N (Nitrile) shall not be used on the Site.

2.2 HUBLESS, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.

B. Heavy-Duty, Hubless-Piping Couplings:


a. ANACO-Husky. b. Clamp-All Corp. c. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co. d. MIFAB, Inc.



2. Standards: ASTM C 1277 and ASTM C 1540. 3. Description: Stainless-steel shield with stainless-steel bands and tightening devices; and

ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.

2.3 GALVANIZED-STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Galvanized-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Standard Weight class. Include square-cut-grooved or threaded ends matching joining method.

B. Steel Pipe Pressure Fittings:

1. Galvanized-Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M or ASTM A 106/A 106M, Schedule 40, seamless steel pipe. Include ends matching joining method.

2. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Class 150; hexagonal-stock body with ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal, bronze seating surface; and female threaded ends.

3. Galvanized-Gray-Iron, Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard pattern.

2.4 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS

A. Transition Couplings:

1. General Requirements: Fitting or device for joining piping with small differences in OD's or of different materials. Include end connections same size as and compatible with pipes to be joined.

2. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting.

3. Shielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings:

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1) ANACO-Husky 2) Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. 3) Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc.

b. Standard: ASTM C 1460. c. Description: Elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, corrosion-resistant

outer shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.

2.5 ENCASEMENT FOR UNDERGROUND METAL PIPING

A. Standard: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105/A 21.5.



B. Material: Linear low-density polyethylene film of 0.008-inch (0.20-mm) or high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene film of 0.004-inch (0.10-mm) minimum thickness.

C. Form: tube.

D. Color: Black or natural.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTH MOVING

A. Comply with requirements for excavating, trenching, and backfilling specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."


A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.

B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

E. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

F. Install piping at indicated slopes.

G. Install piping free of sags and bends.

H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

I. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

J. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Division 15 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."



K. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if two fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

L. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.

M. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes unless otherwise indicated:

1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 (DN 80) and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger.

2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow. 3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.

N. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."

1. Install encasement on underground piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105/A 21.5.

O. Install steel piping according to applicable plumbing code.

P. Install underground, force-main piping inside building between wall and floor penetrations and connection to sanitary sewer piping outside building with restrained joints. Anchor pipe to wall or floor. Install thrust-block supports at vertical and horizontal offsets.

1. Install encasement on piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105/A 21.5.

Q. Install force mains at elevations indicated.

R. Plumbing Specialties:

1. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building sanitary sewers in sanitary drainage gravity-flow piping. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in sanitary drainage force-main piping. Comply with requirements for cleanouts specified in Division 15 Section "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."



2. Install drains in sanitary drainage gravity-flow piping. Comply with requirements for drains specified in Division 15 Section "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."

S. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

T. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Division 15 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

U. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 15 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

V. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 15 Section "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."


A. Join hubless, cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for hubless-piping coupling joints.

B. Flanged Joints: Align bolt holes. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Torque bolts in cross pattern.

3.4 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Transition Couplings:

1. Install transition couplings at joints of piping with small differences in OD's. 2. In Drainage Piping: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings. 3. In Aboveground Force Main Piping: Fitting-type transition couplings. 4. In Underground Force Main Piping:

a. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller: Fitting-type transition couplings. b. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Larger: Pressure transition couplings.


A. General valve installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."

B. Check Valves: Install swing check valve, between pump and shutoff valve, on each sewage pump discharge.




A. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Division 15 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger and support devices and installation specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

1. Install pipe hangers for horizontal piping. 2. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. 3. Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs:

a. 100 Feet (30 m) and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer than 100 Feet (30 m): MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. c. Longer than 100 Feet (30 m) if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

4. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet (30 m) or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

5. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

C. Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches (300 mm) of each fitting and coupling.

D. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

E. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum rods.

F. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.

2. NPS 3 (DN 80): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 3. NPS 4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 5/8-inch (16-mm)

rod. 4. Spacing for 10-foot (3-m) lengths may be increased to 10 feet (3 m). Spacing for fittings

is limited to 60 inches (1500 mm).

G. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet (4.5 m).

H. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.7 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.



C. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:

1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code.

2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code.

4. Install test tees (wall cleanouts) in conductors near floor and floor cleanouts with cover flush with floor.

5. Comply with requirements for cleanouts and drains specified in Division 15 Section "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."

6. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve if indicated and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

D. Connect force-main piping to the following:

1. Sanitary Sewer: To exterior force main. 2. Sewage Pump: To sewage pump discharge.

E. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance of equipment.

F. Make connections according to the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

3.8 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify exposed sanitary waste and vent piping. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 15 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."


A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.



C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:

1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping except outside leaders on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water (30 kPa). From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks.

4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent-stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg (250 Pa). Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks.

5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained.

6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

E. Test force-main piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:

1. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced force-main piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

2. Cap and subject piping to static-water pressure of 50 psig (345 kPa) above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

3. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained.

4. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

3.10 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.



D. Exposed PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with two coats of water-based latex paint.

3.11 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. All materials installed in a plenum space must be plenum-rated.

B. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping unless otherwise indicated.

C. Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and smaller shall be the following:

1. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings heavy-duty hubless-piping couplings; and coupled joints.

D. Aboveground, vent piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and smaller shall be the following:

1. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; heavy-duty hubless-piping couplings; and coupled joints.

E. Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and smaller shall be the following:

1. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; heavy-duty, cast-iron hubless-piping couplings; and coupled joints.

F. Pumped Waste Piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and smaller shall be the following:

1. Galvanized-steel pipe, pressure fittings, and threaded joints.

G. Aboveground, Indoor Roof Drainage Piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and smaller shall be the following:

1. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; heavy-duty, hubless-piping couplings; and coupled joints.



SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 15155 - 1

SECTION 15155 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Cleanouts. 2. Floor drains. 3. Trench drains. 4. Through-penetration firestop assemblies. 5. Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties. 6. Flashing materials. 7. Waste water treatment systems


1. Division 2 Section "Storm Drainage" for storm drainage piping and piping specialties outside the building.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. HDPE: High-density polyethylene plastic.

B. PE: Polyethylene plastic.

C. PP: Polypropylene plastic.

D. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and accessories for the following:

1. Waste water treatment systems

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for frost-resistant vent terminals.



1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Field quality-control test reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For drainage piping specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.

B. Coordinate size and location of roof penetrations.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Additives: Provide additives (if any) recommended by manufacturer of waste water treatment system equal to 3 months’ supply (minimum).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 No Buna-N (Nitrile) materials shall be used on the Site.



2.2 CLEANOUTS

A. Exposed Metal Cleanouts:


a. Josam Company. b. MIFAB, Inc. c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. e. Watts Drainage Products Inc. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group.

2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for cast iron or ASME A112.3.1 for stainless steel for cleanout test tee.

3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping 4. Body Material: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe test tee or Stainless-steel tee with side

cleanout as required to match connected piping. 5. Closure: Countersunk plug. 6. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size.

B. Metal Floor Cleanouts:


a. Josam Company. b. Oatey. c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. e. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. f. Watts Drainage Products Inc. g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group.

2. Size: Same as connected branch. 3. Frame and Cover Shape: Round. 4. Top Loading Classification: Heavy Duty. 5. Riser: Drainage pipe fitting and riser to cleanout.

C. Cast-Iron Wall Cleanouts:


a. Josam Company. b. MIFAB, Inc.



c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. e. Watts Drainage Products Inc. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M. Include wall access. 3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping. 4. Body: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe test tee as required to match connected piping. 5. Closure: drilled-and-threaded plug. 6. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size. 7. Wall Access: Round, flat, chrome-plated brass or stainless-steel cover plate with screw. 8. Wall Access: Round wall-installation frame and cover.

2.3 FLOOR DRAINS

A. Cast-Iron Floor Drains:


a. Commercial Enameling Co. b. Josam Company. c. MIFAB, Inc. d. Prier Products, Inc. e. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. f. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. g. Watts Drainage Products Inc. h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group.

2. Body Material: Gray iron. 3. Outlet: Bottom. 4. Coating on Interior and Exposed Exterior Surfaces: Acid-resistant enamel. 5. Top or Strainer Material: Nickel bronze or Stainless steel.

2.4 TRENCH DRAINS

A. Trench Drains:


a. Josam Company. b. MIFAB, Inc. c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. e. Watts Drainage Products Inc.



f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

2. Standard: ASME A112.6.3 for trench drains. 3. Material: Ductile or gray iron.

2.5 ROOF FLASHING ASSEMBLIES

A. Roof Flashing Assemblies:


a. Acorn Engineering Company; Elmdor/Stoneman Div. b. Thaler Metal Industries Ltd.

B. Description: Manufactured assembly made of 4.0-lb/sq. ft. (20-kg/sq. m), 0.0625-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick, lead flashing collar and skirt extending at least 6 inches (150 mm) from pipe, with galvanized-steel boot reinforcement and counterflashing fitting.

1. Open-Top Vent: Without cap.

2.6 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP ASSEMBLIES

A. Through-Penetration Firestop Assemblies:


a. ProSet Systems Inc.

2. Standard: UL 1479 assembly of sleeve and stack fitting with firestopping plug. 3. Size: Same as connected soil, waste, or vent stack. 4. Sleeve: Molded PVC plastic, of length to match slab thickness and with integral nailing

flange on one end for installation in cast-in-place concrete slabs. 5. Stack Fitting: ASTM A 48/A 48M, gray-iron, hubless-pattern, wye branch with neoprene

O-ring at base and gray-iron plug in thermal-release harness. Include PVC protective cap for plug.

6. Special Coating: Corrosion resistant on interior of fittings.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Floor-Drain, Trap-Seal Primer Fittings:

1. Description: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap-seal primer valve connection.

2. Size: Same as floor drain outlet with NPS 1/2 (DN 15) side inlet.



B. Air-Gap Fittings:

1. Standard: ASME A112.1.2, for fitting designed to ensure fixed, positive air gap between installed inlet and outlet piping.

2. Body: Bronze or cast iron. 3. Inlet: Opening in top of body. 4. Outlet: Larger than inlet. 5. Size: Same as connected waste piping and with inlet large enough for associated indirect

waste piping.

C. Sleeve Flashing Device:

1. Description: Manufactured, cast-iron fitting, with clamping device, that forms sleeve for pipe floor penetrations of floor membrane. Include galvanized-steel pipe extension in top of fitting that will extend 2 inches (51 mm) above finished floor and galvanized-steel pipe extension in bottom of fitting that will extend through floor slab.

2. Size: As required for close fit to riser or stack piping.

D. Stack Flashing Fittings:

1. Description: Counterflashing-type, cast-iron fitting, with bottom recess for terminating roof membrane, and with threaded or hub top for extending vent pipe.

2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack.

2.8 FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper bearing, with the following minimum weights and thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated:

1. General Use: 4.0-lb/sq. ft. (20-kg/sq. m), 0.0625-inch (1.6-mm) thickness. 2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 3.0-lb/sq. ft. (15-kg/sq. m), 0.0469-inch (1.2-mm) thickness. 3. Burning: 6-lb/sq. ft. (30-kg/sq. m), 0.0938-inch (2.4-mm) thickness.

B. Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with 0.20 percent copper content and 0.04-inch (1.01-mm) minimum thickness, unless otherwise indicated. Include G90 (Z275) hot-dip galvanized, mill-phosphatized finish for painting if indicated.

C. Elastic Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 4068, flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 40-mil (1.01-mm) minimum thickness.

D. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened.

E. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed.

F. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloy.

G. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic.



2.9 WASTE WATER TREATMENT SYSTEM

A. Waste water treatment system:


a. Bio-Microbics, Inc. b. JET, Inc. c. Norweco, Inc.

2. Treatment Standards

a. NSF Standard 40, Class I b. Hawai’i State Administrative Rules, Title 11, chapter 62

3. Inlet and outlet flows: demand gravity flow. 4. Capacity: 900 gallons (3407 L) per day peak flow. 5. Treatment: Aeration / enhanced biodegradation. 6. Media: Any media required shall be noncorroding and shall include no moving or

wearing parts. 7. Blower: Aeration blower shall be sized and supplied by the system manufacturer. Include

air inlet filter(s), enclosure, weather hood, or any other required appurtenances. 8. Dosing pump: If required by process treatment package shall include chemical reservoir

tank, dosing pump, injection fittings and lines. 9. Power: System shall operate on 120-V ac, single phase, 60 HZ power. 10. Controls: Provide control panel to be located in utility building. Panel will supply power

and control to the blower as well as any dosing pumps or other electrical equipment required. Provide visual alarm of system failure.

11. Location: Unit to be installed exposed to weather, in ground at 10,000 feet (3048 M) elevation. Ambient temperatures can range from 30 deg F to 80 deg F (-1 deg C to 27 deg C).

12. Access: Provide service access cover(s) as required.

2.10 MOTORS

A. General requirements for motors are specified in Division 15 Section "Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment."

1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.

2. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Electrical devices and connections are specified in Division 16 Sections.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Mounting: Install waste water treatment systems as specified by manufacturer.

1. Coordinate location and elevation with plumbing waste piping.

B. Install backwater valves in building drain piping. For interior installation, provide cleanout deck plate flush with floor and centered over backwater valve cover, and of adequate size to remove valve cover for servicing.

C. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4 (DN 100). Use NPS 4 (DN 100) for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated.

2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. 3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) for piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and smaller

and 100 feet (30 m) for larger piping. 4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.

D. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor.

E. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.

F. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance. 2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage.

Set with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii:

a. Radius, 30 Inches (750 mm) or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than 1/4-inch (6.35-mm) total depression.

b. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches (750 to 1500 mm): Equivalent to 1 percent slope. c. Radius, 60 Inches (1500 mm) or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not

greater than 1-inch (25-mm) total depression.

3. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.

4. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Install trench drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with finished surface, unless otherwise indicated.



H. Assemble and install ASME A112.3.1, stainless-steel channel drainage systems according to ASME A112.3.1. Install on support devices so that top will be flush with surface.

I. Assemble non-ASME A112.3.1, stainless-steel channel drainage system components according to manufacturer's written instructions. Install on support devices so that top will be flush with adjacent surface.

J. Install flashing fittings on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof.

K. Install deep-seal traps on floor drains and other waste outlets, if indicated.

L. Install floor-drain, trap-seal primer fittings on inlet to floor drains that require trap-seal primer connection.

1. Exception: Fitting may be omitted if trap has trap-seal primer connection. 2. Size: Same as floor drain inlet.

M. Install air-gap fittings on draining-type backflow preventers and on indirect-waste piping discharge into sanitary drainage system.

N. Install sleeve flashing device with each riser and stack passing through floors with waterproof membrane.

O. Install frost-resistant vent terminals on each vent pipe passing through roof. Maintain 1-inch (25-mm) clearance between vent pipe and roof substrate.

P. Install expansion joints on vertical stacks and conductors. Position expansion joints for easy access and maintenance.

Q. Assemble components of waste water treatment system. Install according to manufacturer’s instructions and authorities having jurisdiction. Install additive reservoir, metering pump, timer, and controls, tubing between reservoir, metering pump, and injection point where such are part of the system. Install control panel in utility building.

R. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is indicated.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

C. Waste Water Treatment System: Connect inlet and outlet to unit, connect air piping between blower and unit, and connect piping between unit and chemical injector (if required) per manufacturer’s instructions. Connect electrical power.

D. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."



E. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."

3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are required. Join flashing according to the following if required:

1. Lead Sheets: Burn joints of lead sheets 6.0-lb/sq. ft. (30-kg/sq. m), 0.0938-inch (2.4-mm) thickness or thicker. Solder joints of lead sheets 4.0-lb/sq. ft. (20-kg/sq. m), 0.0625-inch (1.6-mm) thickness or thinner.

2. Copper Sheets: Solder joints of copper sheets.

B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors and roofs with waterproof membrane.

1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches (250 mm), and skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches (200 mm) around pipe.

2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches (200 mm) around sleeve.

3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches (200 mm) around specialty.

C. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.

D. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.

E. Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counterflashing or commercially made flashing fittings, according to Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

F. Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into pipe.

G. Fabricate and install flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes.


A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved noncorroding metal equipment nameplate or sign on or near each of the following:

1. Waste Water Treatment System.

B. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Division 15 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."


A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.



1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled waste water treatment system and their installation, including piping and electrical connections, and to assist in testing.


1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train ATST POC's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain waste water treatment system. Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training."



HYDRONIC PIPING 15181 - 1

SECTION 15181 - HYDRONIC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes pipe and fitting materials, joining methods, special-duty valves, and specialties for the following:

1. Hot-water heating piping. 2. Chilled-water piping. 3. Makeup-water piping. 4. Condensate-drain piping. 5. Air-vent piping. 6. Safety-valve-inlet and -outlet piping.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 15 Section "Hydronic Pumps" for pumps, motors, and accessories for hydronic piping.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene.


A. Hydronic piping components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure and temperature:

1. All Hydronic Piping: 125 psig (865 kPa) at 200 deg F (93 deg C). 2. Makeup-Water Piping: 80 psig (552 kPa) at 150 deg F (66 deg C). 3. Air-Vent Piping: 200 deg F (93 deg C). 4. Safety-Valve-Inlet and -Outlet Piping: Equal to the pressure of the piping system to

which it is attached.


A. Product Data: For each type of the following:



1. Valves. Include flow and pressure drop curves based on manufacturer's testing for calibrated-orifice balancing valves and automatic flow-control valves.

2. Air control devices. 3. Chemical treatment. 4. Hydronic specialties.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Welding certificates.

C. Field quality-control test reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air control devices, hydronic specialties, and special-duty valves to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Water-Treatment Chemicals: Furnish enough chemicals for initial system startup and for preventive maintenance for one year from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Differential Pressure Meter: For each type of balancing valve and automatic flow control valve, include flowmeter, probes, hoses, flow charts, and carrying case.


A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.

1. Comply with provisions in ASME B 31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes

involved and that certification is current.

C. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B 31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Drawn-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B).

B. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B 16.22.


a. Anvil International, Inc. b. S. P. Fittings; a division of Star Pipe Products. c. Victaulic Company.

2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel with plain ends; type, grade, and wall thickness as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.

B. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B 16.3, Classes 150.

C. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B 16.39; Classes 150.

D. Wrought-Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, wall thickness to match adjoining pipe.

E. Wrought Cast- and Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASTM A 105, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings:

1. Material Group: 1.1. 2. End Connections: Butt welding. 3. Facings: Raised face.

2.3 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents.

1. ASME B 16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.

a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face. b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face.

B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 193, Grade B7, alloy steel bolt studs, threaded full length with heavy hex nuts unless otherwise indicated.



C. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8 BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for joining copper with copper; or Bag-1, silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel

D. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.





a. Central Plastics Company. b. Hart Industries International, Inc. c. Matco-Norca, Inc. d. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Standard: ASSE 1079. b. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum at 180 deg F (82 deg C). c. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

C. Dielectric Flanges:


a. Central Plastics Company. b. Matco-Norca, Inc. c. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. d. Wilkins; a Zurn company.

2. Description:

a. Standard: ASSE 1079. b. Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly. c. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum at 180 deg F (82 deg C. d. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder-

joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.



D. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:


a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Central Plastics Company. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges. b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). c. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic. d. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene. e. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.

E. Dielectric Nipples:


a. Elster Perfection. b. Grinnell Mechanical Products. c. Matco-Norca, Inc. d. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. e. Victaulic Company.

2. Description:

a. Standard: IAPMO PS 66 b. Electroplated steel nipple. complying with ASTM F 1545. c. Pressure Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa) at 225 deg F (107 deg C). d. End Connections: Male threaded or grooved. e. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.

2.5 VALVES

A. Gate, Globe, Check, Ball, and Butterfly Valves: Comply with requirements specified in Division 15 Section "Valves."

B. Automatic Temperature-Control Valves, Actuators, and Sensors: Comply with requirements specified in Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls."



C. Diaphragm-Operated Safety Valves:


a. Amtrol, Inc. b. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries. c. Conbraco Industries, Inc. d. Spence Engineering Company, Inc.

2. Body: Bronze or brass. 3. Disc: Glass and carbon-filled PTFE. 4. Seat: Brass. 5. Stem Seals: EPDM O-rings. 6. Diaphragm: EPT. 7. Wetted, Internal Work Parts: Brass and rubber. 8. Valve Seat and Stem: Noncorrosive. 9. Valve Size, Capacity, and Operating Pressure: Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Code: Section IV, and selected to suit system in which installed, with operating pressure and capacity factory set and field adjustable.

D. Automatic Flow-Control Valves:


a. Flow Design Inc. b. Griswold Controls.

2. Body: Brass or ferrous metal. 3. Piston and Spring Assembly: Stainless steel, tamper proof, self cleaning, and removable. 4. Combination Assemblies: Include bonze or brass-alloy ball valve. 5. Identification Tag: Marked with zone identification, valve number, and flow rate. 6. Size: Same as pipe in which installed. 7. Performance: Maintain constant flow, plus or minus 5 percent over system pressure

fluctuations. 8. Minimum CWP Rating: 175 psig (1207 kPa). 9. Maximum Operating Temperature: 200 deg F (93 deg C).

2.6 AIR CONTROL DEVICES


1. Amtrol, Inc. 2. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. 3. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries.



4. Spirotherm, Inc. 5. Taco.

B. Manual Air Vents:

1. Body: Bronze. 2. Internal Parts: Nonferrous. 3. Operator: Screwdriver or thumbscrew. 4. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2 (DN 15). 5. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/8 (DN 6). 6. CWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 225 deg F (107 deg C).

C. Automatic Air Vents:

1. Body: Bronze or cast iron. 2. Internal Parts: Nonferrous. 3. Operator: Noncorrosive metal float. 4. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2 (DN 15). 5. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/4 (DN 8). 6. CWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F (116 deg C).

D. Bladder-Type Expansion Tanks:

1. Tank: Welded steel, rated for 150-psig (1035-kPa) working pressure and 375 deg F (191 deg C) maximum operating temperature. Factory test with taps fabricated and supports installed and labeled according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

2. Bladder: Securely sealed into tank to separate air charge from system water to maintain required expansion capacity.

3. Air-Charge Fittings: Schrader valve, stainless steel with EPDM seats.

E. Air Purgers:

1. Body: Steel with internal coalescing media, integrated automatic air vent, drain plug. 2. Maximum Working Pressure: 150 psig (1035 kPa). 3. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F (121 deg C).

2.7 CHEMICAL TREATMENT

A. Bypass Chemical Feeder: Welded steel construction; 125-psig (860-kPa) working pressure; 5-gal. (19-L) capacity; with fill funnel and inlet, outlet, and drain valves.

1. Chemicals: Specially formulated, based on analysis of makeup water, to prevent accumulation of scale and corrosion in piping and connected equipment.



B. Heat Transfer-Fluid: Industrial grade Dynalene HC-20 with corrosion inhibitors and environmental-stabilizer additives provided by factory. Heat transfer fluid shall be shipped from the factory at concentration needed; no on-site mixing or dilution of heat transfer fluid.

2.8 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Y-Pattern Strainers:

1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection. 2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged ends for

NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger. 3. Strainer Screen: 60-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50

percent free area. 4. CWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa).

B. Spherical, Rubber, Flexible Connectors:

1. Body: Fiber-reinforced rubber body. 2. End Connections: Steel flanges drilled to align with Classes 150 flanges. 3. Performance: Capable of misalignment. 4. CWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). 5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F (121 deg C).

C. Expansion fittings are specified in Division 15 Section "Pipe Expansion Fittings and Loops."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Each hydronic system shall be either all copper pipe or all steel pipe; no mixing of piping materials.

B. Hydronic piping, aboveground, NPS 2 1/2 (DN 65) and smaller, shall be any of the following:

1. Type L (B), drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints. 2. Schedule 40 steel pipe; Class 150, malleable-iron fittings; forged flanges and flange

fittings; and threaded joints.

C. Hydronic, aboveground, NPS 3 (DN 75) and larger, shall be any of the following:

1. Type L (B), drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings and soldered joints. 2. Schedule 40 steel pipe, wrought-steel fittings and forged-steel flanges and flange fittings,

and welded and flanged joints.

D. Makeup-water piping installed aboveground shall be the following:

1. Type L (B), drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints.



E. Air-Vent Piping:

1. Inlet: Same as service where installed with metal-to-plastic transition fittings for plastic piping systems according to the piping manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Outlet: Type K (A), annealed-temper copper tubing with soldered joints.

F. Safety-Valve-Inlet and -Outlet Piping for Hot-Water Piping: Same materials and joining methods as for piping specified for the service in which safety valve is installed with metal-to-plastic transition fittings for plastic piping systems according to the piping manufacturer's written instructions.

3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Install shutoff-duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, and at supply connection to each piece of equipment.

B. Install automatic flow-control valves in the return pipe of each heating or cooling terminal.

C. Install check valves at each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to control flow direction.

D. Install safety valves at hot-water generators and elsewhere as required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Install drip-pan elbow on safety-valve outlet and pipe without valves to the outdoors; and pipe drain to nearest floor drain or as indicated on Drawings. Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1, for installation requirements.

3.3 PIPING INSTALLATIONS

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicate piping locations and arrangements if such were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

B. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.



E. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

F. Install piping at indicated slopes.

G. Install piping free of sags and bends.

H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.



I. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

J. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

K. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves.

L. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 (DN 20) ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 (DN 20) threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage.

M. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow.

N. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up.

O. Install branch connections to mains using tee fittings in main pipe, with the branch connected to the top of the main pipe.

P. Install valves according to Division 15 Section "Valves."

Q. Install unions in piping, NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.

R. Install flanges in piping, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger, at final connections of equipment and elsewhere as indicated.

S. Install strainers on inlet side of each control valve, pressure-reducing valve, solenoid valve, in-line pump, and elsewhere as indicated. Install NPS 3/4 (DN 20) nipple and ball valve in blowdown connection of strainers NPS 2 (DN 50) and larger. Match size of strainer blowoff connection for strainers smaller than NPS 2 (DN 50).

T. Install expansion loops, expansion joints, anchors, and pipe alignment guides as specified in Division 15 Section "Pipe Expansion Fittings and Loops."

U. Identify piping as specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification."

V. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Division 15 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping."

W. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 15 Section "Escutcheons for HVAC Piping."

3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports." Comply with the following requirements for maximum spacing of supports.

B. Seismic restraints are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls."



C. Install the following pipe attachments:

1. Provide copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with copper pipe.

D. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 3/4 (DN 20): Maximum span, 7 feet (2.1 m); minimum rod size, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm). 2. NPS 1 (DN 25): Maximum span, 7 feet (2.1 m); minimum rod size, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm). 3. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40): Maximum span, 9 feet (2.7 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10

mm). 4. NPS 2 (DN 50): Maximum span, 10 feet (3 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm). 5. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): Maximum span, 11 feet (3.4 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10

mm). 6. NPS 3 (DN 80): Maximum span, 12 feet (3.7 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm). 7. NPS 4 (DN 100): Maximum span, 14 feet (4.3 m); minimum rod size, 1/2 inch (13 mm). 8. NPS 6 (DN 150): Maximum span, 17 feet (5.2 m); minimum rod size, 1/2 inch (13 mm).

E. Install hangers for drawn-temper copper piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 3/4 (DN 20): Maximum span, 5 feet (1.5 m); minimum rod size, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm). 2. NPS 1 (DN 25): Maximum span, 6 feet (1.8 m); minimum rod size, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm). 3. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40): Maximum span, 8 feet (2.4 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10

mm). 4. NPS 2 (DN 50): Maximum span, 8 feet (2.4 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm). 5. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): Maximum span, 9 feet (2.7 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10

mm). 6. NPS 3 (DN 80): Maximum span, 10 feet (3 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm).

F. Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 10-foot (3-m) intervals between floors.

3.5 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 15 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

D. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS’s “Brazing Handbook,” “Pipe and Tube” Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.

E. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:



1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

F. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.

G. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

3.6 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION

A. Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for system air venting.

B. Install automatic air vents at high points of system piping in mechanical equipment rooms only. Manual vents at heat-transfer coils and elsewhere as required for air venting.

C. Install piping from air separator, or air purger to expansion tank with a 2 percent upward slope toward tank.

D. Install in-line air separators in pump suction. Install drain valve on air separators NPS 2 (DN 50) and larger.

E. Install bypass chemical filter feeders in each hydronic system where indicated, in upright position with top of funnel not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) above the floor. Install feeder in minimum NPS 1 (DN 25) bypass line, from main with full-size, full-port, ball valve in the main between bypass connections. Install NPS 3/4 (DN 20) pipe from chemical feeder drain, to nearest equipment drain and include a full-size, full-port, ball valve.

F. Install expansion tanks on the floor. Vent and purge air from hydronic system, and ensure tank is properly charged with air to suit system Project requirements.

3.7 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. Sizes for supply and return piping connections shall be the same as or larger than equipment connections.

B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment.

C. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If parallel control valves are installed, only one bypass is required.

D. Install ports for pressure gages and thermometers at coil inlet and outlet connections according to Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages."



3.8 CHEMICAL TREATMENT

A. Fill system with fresh water and add liquid alkaline compound with emulsifying agents and detergents to remove grease and petroleum products from piping. Circulate solution for a minimum of 24 hours, drain, clean strainer screens, and fill system with Dynalene HC-20.

B. Add initial chemical treatment and maintain water quality in ranges noted above for the first year of operation.

C. Fill all systems indicated to have heat transfer solution:


A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows:

1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test. 2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test

pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing. 3. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water; then remove and clean or replace

strainer screens. 4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be

capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment.

5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test.

B. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping:

1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be used.

2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release air. Use drains installed at low points for complete draining of test liquid.

3. Isolate expansion tanks and determine that hydronic system is full of water. 4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the

system's working pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength or 1.7 times "SE" value in Appendix A in ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping."

5. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.

6. Prepare written report of testing.

C. Perform the following before operating the system:

1. Open manual valves fully. 2. Inspect pumps for proper rotation.



3. Set makeup pressure-reducing valves for required system pressure. 4. Inspect air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and operating

freely (automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type). 5. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow. 6. Inspect and set operating temperatures of hydronic equipment, such as chillers, fluid

cooler, to specified values. 7. Verify lubrication of motors and bearings.



HYDRONIC PUMPS 15185 - 1

SECTION 15185 - HYDRONIC PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Close-coupled, in-line centrifugal pumps. 2. Separately coupled, base-mounted, end-suction centrifugal pumps. 3. Automatic condensate pump units.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Buna-N: Nitrile rubber.

B. EPT: Ethylene propylene terpolymer.


A. Product Data: For each type of pump. Include certified performance curves and rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, final impeller dimensions, and accessories for each type of product indicated. Indicate pump's operating point on curves.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For pumps to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.



1. Mechanical Seals: One mechanical seal(s) for each pump.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SEPARATELY COUPLED, BASE-MOUNTED, END-SUCTION CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS


1. Armstrong Pumps Inc. 2. Crane Pumps & Systems. 3. Flowserve Corporation. 4. ITT Corporation; Bell & Gossett. 5. Peerless Pump Company. 6. TACO Incorporated.

B. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, centrifugal, overhung-impeller, separately coupled, end-suction pump as defined in HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3; designed for base mounting, with pump and motor shafts horizontal.

C. Pump Construction:

1. Casing: Radially split, cast iron, with replaceable bronze wear rings, threaded gage tappings at inlet and outlet, drain plug at bottom and air vent at top of volute, and flanged connections. Provide integral mount on volute to support the casing, and provide attached piping to allow removal and replacement of impeller without disconnecting piping or requiring the realignment of pump and motor shaft.

2. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, keyed to shaft, and secured with a locking cap screw. For pumps not frequency-drive controlled, trim impeller to match specified performance.

3. Pump Shaft: Stainless steel. 4. Seal: Mechanical seal consisting of carbon rotating ring against a ceramic seat held by a

stainless-steel spring, and EPT bellows and gasket. 5. Seal: Packing seal consisting of stuffing box with a minimum of four rings of graphite-

impregnated braided yarn with bronze lantern ring between center two graphite rings, and bronze packing gland.

6. Pump Bearings: Grease-lubricated ball bearings in cast-iron housing with grease fittings.

D. Shaft Coupling: Molded-rubber insert and interlocking spider capable of absorbing vibration. Couplings shall be drop-out type to allow disassembly and removal without removing pump shaft or motor. EPDM coupling sleeve for variable-speed applications.

E. Coupling Guard: Dual rated; ANSI B15.1, Section 8; OSHA 1910.219 approved; steel; removable; attached to mounting frame.

F. Mounting Frame: Welded-steel frame and cross members, factory fabricated from ASTM A 36/A 36M channels and angles. Fabricate to mount pump casing, coupling guard, and motor.

G. Motor: Single speed, secured to mounting frame, with adjustable alignment.









1. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 15058 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

a. Enclosure: Totally enclosed, fan cooled. b. Enclosure Materials: Cast iron. c. Motor Bearings: Permanently lubricated ball bearings. d. Unusual Service Conditions:

1) Ambient Temperature: 30 deg C. 2) Altitude: 10,000 feet (3050 meters) above sea level. 3) High humidity.

e. Efficiency: Premium efficient. f. Service Factor: 1.15.

2.2 AUTOMATIC CONDENSATE PUMP UNITS


1. Beckett Corporation. 2. Hartell Pumps Div.; Milton Roy Co. 3. Little Giant Pump Co. 4. Mepco, LLC.

B. Description: Packaged units with corrosion-resistant pump, plastic tank with cover, and automatic controls. Include factory- or field-installed check valve and a 72-inch- (1800-mm-) minimum, electrical power cord with plug.

2.3 PUMP SPECIALTY FITTINGS

A. Suction Diffuser:

1. Angle pattern. 2. 175-psig (1204-kPa) pressure rating, cast-iron body and end cap, pump-inlet fitting. 3. Bronze startup and bronze or stainless-steel permanent strainers. 4. Bronze or stainless-steel straightening vanes. 5. Drain plug. 6. Factory-fabricated support.

B. Triple-Duty Valve:

1. Angle or straight pattern. 2. 175-psig (1204-kPa) pressure rating, cast-iron body, pump-discharge fitting.







3. Drain plug and bronze-fitted shutoff, balancing, and check valve features. 4. Brass gage ports with integral check valve and orifice for flow measurement.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine equipment foundations and anchor-bolt locations for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before pump installation.

C. Examine foundations and inertia bases for suitable conditions where pumps are to be installed.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PUMP INSTALLATION

A. Comply with HI 1.4.

B. Install pumps to provide access for periodic maintenance including removing motors, impellers, couplings, and accessories.

C. Independently support pumps and piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps and weight of pumps is not supported by piping.

D. Automatic Condensate Pump Units: Install units for collecting condensate and extend to open drain.

E. Equipment Mounting: Install base-mounted pumps on cast-in-place concrete equipment bases. Comply with requirements for equipment bases specified in Section 03300 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

1. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. 2. Construct bases to withstand, without damage to equipment, seismic force required by

code. 3. Construct concrete bases 4 inches (100 mm) high and extend base not less than 6 inches

(150 mm) in all directions beyond the maximum dimensions of base-mounted pumps unless otherwise indicated or unless required for seismic-anchor support.

4. Minimum Compressive Strength: 5000 psi (34.5 MPa) at 28 days.

F. Equipment Mounting: Install base-mounted pumps on concrete floor.

1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to equipment.



3.3 ALIGNMENT

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform alignment service.

B. Comply with requirements in Hydronics Institute standards for alignment of pump and motor shaft. Add shims to the motor feet and bolt motor to base frame. Do not use grout between motor feet and base frame.

C. Comply with pump and coupling manufacturers' written instructions.

D. After alignment is correct, tighten foundation bolts evenly but not too firmly. Completely fill baseplate with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout while metal blocks and shims or wedges are in place. After grout has cured, fully tighten foundation bolts.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Where installing piping adjacent to pump, allow space for service and maintenance.

B. Connect piping to pumps. Install valves that are same size as piping connected to pumps.

C. Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles.

D. Install triple-duty valve on discharge side of pumps.

E. Install suction diffuser and shutoff valve on suction side of pumps.

F. Install flexible connectors on suction and discharge sides of base-mounted pumps between pump casing and valves.

G. Install pressure gages on pump suction and discharge or at integral pressure-gage tapping, or install single gage with multiple-input selector valve.

H. Install check valve and gate or ball valve on each condensate pump unit discharge.

I. Ground equipment according to Section 16060 "Grounding and Bonding."

J. Connect wiring according to Section 16120 "Conductors and Cables."

3.5 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Check piping connections for tightness. 3. Clean strainers on suction piping. 4. Perform the following startup checks for each pump before starting:

a. Verify bearing lubrication.



b. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot liquid is free to rotate with pump hot and cold. If pump is bound or drags, do not operate until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.

c. Verify that pump is rotating in the correct direction.

5. Start motor. 6. Open discharge valve slowly.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train ATST POC's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain hydronic pumps.



HVAC WATER TREATMENT 15189 - 1

SECTION 15189 - HVAC WATER TREATMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following HVAC water-treatment systems:

1. Chemical treatment test equipment. 2. HVAC water-treatment chemicals. 3. Filter Feeders.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. TDS: Total dissolved solids.


A. Water quality for HVAC systems shall minimize corrosion, scale buildup, and biological growth for optimum efficiency of HVAC equipment without creating a hazard to operating personnel or the environment.

B. Base HVAC water treatment on HVAC system equipment material characteristics and functional performance characteristics, operating personnel capabilities, and requirements and guidelines of authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Closed hydronic systems which have Dynalene HC-20 shall have the following brine qualities:

1. pH: Maintain a value within 9.0 to 11. 2. Fluid Concentration: 36 to 38%. 3. Specific Gravity: 1.234 ± 0.010.


A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories for the following products:

1. Bypass feeders. 2. Chemical test equipment.



3. Chemical material safety data sheets. 4. Bag- or cartridge-type filters.



B. Other Informational Submittals:

1. Brine-Treatment Program: Written sequence of operation on an annual basis for the application equipment required to achieve water quality defined in the "Performance Requirements" Article above.


A. HVAC Water-Treatment Service Provider Qualifications: An experienced HVAC water-treatment service provider capable of analyzing water qualities, installing water-treatment equipment, and applying water treatment as specified in this Section.

1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Scope of Maintenance Service: Provide chemicals and service program to maintain water conditions required above to inhibit corrosion, scale formation, and biological growth for hydronic piping and equipment. Services and chemicals shall be provided for a period of one year from date of Substantial Completion, and shall include the following:

1. Startup assistance for Contractor to flush the systems, clean with detergents, and initially fill systems with required chemical treatment prior to operation.

2. Periodic field service and consultation. 3. Customer report charts and log sheets. 4. Laboratory technical analysis from heat transfer fluid manufacturer. 5. Analyses and reports of all chemical items concerning safety and compliance with

government regulations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


2.2 CHEMICAL TREATMENT TEST EQUIPMENT

A. Test Kit: Manufacturer-recommended equipment and chemicals in a wall-mounting cabinet for testing pH, TDS, inhibitor, chloride, alkalinity, and hardness; sulfite.



B. Corrosion Test-Coupon Assembly: Constructed of PVC pipe complete with piping, valves, mounting hardware, and mild steel and copper coupons. Locate copper coupon downstream from mild steel coupon in the test-coupon assembly.

1. Four-station rack for closed-loop systems.

2.3 CHEMICALS

A. Chemicals shall be as recommended by water-treatment system manufacturer that are compatible with piping system components and connected equipment, and that can attain water quality specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article.

B. Initial fill of hydronic systems shall use Dynalene HC-20 chemicals shipped directly from the factory. No on-site dilution shall be allowed.

2.4 FILTRATION FEEDER EQUIPMENT

A. Filters Feeder:


a. Neptune, a Dover Company.

B. Filter Feeders: Floor-mounted housing with filter bags for removing particles from water, corrosion-resistant exterior coating, minimum 3-1/2-inch (89-mm) fill opening in the top, and NPS 3/4 (DN 20) bottom inlet and top side outlet. Quarter turn or threaded fill cap with gasket seal and diaphragm to lock the top on the feeder when exposed to system pressure in the vessel.

1. Capacity: 5 gal. (19 L). 2. Minimum Working Pressure: 125 psig (860 kPa). 3. Bag: Replaceable: Of shape to fit housing. 4. Capacities and Characteristics:

a. Filter Design:

1) Water Flow Rate: 18 gpm (L/s). 2) Filtration Efficiency: 98 percent. 3) Particle Size: 1 microns and larger. 4) Clean Pressure Loss: 2 psig (14 kPa). 5) Pressure Loss at Replacement: 6 psig (41 kPa).

b. Housing:

1) Material: Carbon steel. 2) Pressure Rating: 150 psig (kPa). 3) Seal Material: NBR. 4) Bag Support Basket Material: Stainless steel.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WATER ANALYSIS

A. Perform an analysis of supply water to determine quality of water available at Project site.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install chemical application equipment on concrete bases, level and plumb. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices that require servicing are accessible.

B. Install water testing equipment on wall near water chemical application equipment.

C. Bypass Filter Feeders: Install in all closed hydronic systems, and equipped with the following:

1. Install bypass filter feeder in a bypass circuit around circulating pumps, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

2. Install test-coupon assembly in bypass circuit around circulating pumps, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

3. Install a full-port ball isolation valves on inlet, outlet, and drain below feeder inlet. 4. Install a swing check on inlet after the isolation valve.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.


C. Make piping connections between HVAC water-treatment equipment and dissimilar-metal piping with dielectric fittings. Dielectric fittings are specified in Section 15181 "Hydronic Piping."

D. Install shutoff valves on HVAC water-treatment equipment inlet and outlet. Metal general-duty valves are specified in Section 15112 "General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping."



1. Inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and electrical connections.

2. Inspect piping and equipment to determine that systems and equipment have been cleaned, flushed, and are fully operational before introducing chemicals for water-treatment system.



3. Test for leaks and defects. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

4. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, and replaced water piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or concealed before it has been tested and approved.

5. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig (345 kPa) above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow test pressure to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects.

6. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping until no leaks exist.

B. At eight-week intervals following Substantial Completion, perform separate water analyses on hydronic systems to show systems are maintaining water quality as specified by the heat transfer solution provider section. Submit written reports of water analysis advising ATST POC of changes necessary to adhere to Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article.

C. Comply with ASTM D 3370 and with the following standards:

1. Acidity and Alkalinity: ASTM D 1067. 2. Iron: ASTM D 1068. 3. Water Hardness: ASTM D 1126.



FACILITY FUEL-OIL PIPING 15192 - 1

SECTION 15192 - FACILITY FUEL-OIL PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes diesel-fuel-oil distribution systems and the following:

1. Pipes, tubes, and fittings. 2. Piping and tubing joining materials. 3. Piping specialties. 4. Valves. 5. Leak-detection and monitoring system.


1. Section 16231 "Packaged Engine Generators" for engine-generator sets supplied with fuel transfer systems and leak-detection annunciators.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. AST: Aboveground storage tank.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.

D. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

E. FPM: Vinylidene fluoride-hexafluoropropylene copolymer rubber.

F. FRP: Glass-fiber-reinforced plastic.




A. Maximum Operating-Pressure Ratings: 3-psig (21-kPa) fuel-oil supply pressure at oil-fired appliances.

B. Seismic Performance: Factory-installed support attachments for AST shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, and dimensions of individual components and profiles. Also include, where applicable, rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

1. Piping. 2. Fuel-oil storage tank and piping specialties. 3. Valves: Include pressure rating, capacity, settings, and electrical connection data of

selected models. 4. Leak-detection and monitoring system.


A. Brazing certificates.




A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuel-oil equipment and accessories to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Brazing: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.

B. Steel Support Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."



C. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

E. Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for fuel-oil piping materials, installation, testing, and inspecting.

F. Comply with requirements of the EPA and of state and local authorities having jurisdiction. Include recording of fuel-oil storage tanks and monitoring of tanks and piping.


A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

B. Store pipes and tubes with protective PE coating to avoid damaging the coating and to protect from direct sunlight.

C. Store PE pipes and valves protected from direct sunlight.


A. Interruption of Existing Fuel-Oil Service: Do not interrupt fuel-oil service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary fuel-oil supply according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify ATST POC no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of fuel-oil service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of fuel-oil service without ATST POC’s written permission.

1.11 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

1.12 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of piping and related equipment that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Flexible, Double-Containment Piping and Related Equipment:



a. Failures due to defective materials or workmanship for materials installed together, including piping, dispenser sumps, entry boots, and sump mounting adapters.

b. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS

A. See Part 3 piping schedule articles for where pipes, tubes, fittings, and joining materials are applied in various services.

B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B.

1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern. 2. Wrought-Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, for butt and socket welding. 3. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint,

and threaded ends. 4. Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, minimum Class 150,

including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings:

a. Material Group: 1.1. b. End Connections: Threaded or butt welding to match pipe. c. Lapped Face: Not permitted underground. d. Gasket Materials: Asbestos free, ASME B16.20 metallic, or ASME B16.21

nonmetallic, gaskets compatible with fuel oil. e. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, cadmium-plated steel.

2.2 DOUBLE-CONTAINMENT PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Flexible, Double-Containment Piping: Comply with UL 971, or UL 971A.


a. APT/Franklin Fueling Systems. b. Environ Products, Inc. c. Omega Flex, Inc. d. OPW.

2. Pipe Materials: Fuel-resistant carrier pipe with mechanical couplings to seal carrier, and UV- and fuel-resistant containment piping.

3. Watertight entry boots, pipe adapters with test ports and tubes, coaxial fittings, and couplings.

4. Minimum Operating Pressure Rating: 10 psig (69 kPa).



5. Pipe Transition Fittings: Factory-fabricated fittings with ends matching or compatible with carrier piping, and steel pipe end complying with ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B.

6. Include design and fabrication of double-containment pipe and fitting assemblies with provision for field installation of leak-detection system in annular space between carrier and containment piping.

2.3 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Flexible Connectors: Comply with UL 567.

1. Metallic Connectors:


1) American Flexible Hose Co., Inc. 2) Flexicraft Industries. 3) Metraflex Company (The). 4) Tru-Flex Metal Hose Corp. 5) Unaflex.

b. Listed and labeled for aboveground applications by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

c. Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze or stainless-steel, wire-reinforcing protective jacket.

d. Minimum Operating Pressure: 150 psig (1035 kPa). e. End Connections: Socket, flanged, or threaded end to match connected piping. f. Maximum Length: 30 inches (762 mm). g. Swivel end, 50-psig (345-kPa) maximum operating pressure.

2. Nonmetallic Connectors:


1) American Flexible Hose Co., Inc. 2) Flexicraft Industries. 3) Hose Master, Inc. 4) Metraflex Company (The). 5) Tru-Flex Metal Hose Corp.

b. Listed and labeled for underground applications by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

c. PFTE bellows with woven, flexible, bronze or stainless-steel, wire-reinforcing protective jacket.

d. Minimum Operating Pressure: 150 psig (1035 kPa).



e. End Connections: Socket, flanged, or threaded end to match connected piping. f. Maximum Length: 30 inches (762 mm). g. Swivel end, 50-psig (345-kPa) maximum operating pressure.


A. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for fuel oil.

B. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

C. Brazing Filler Metals: Alloy with melting point greater than 1000 deg F (540 deg C) complying with AWS A5.8/A5.8M. Brazing alloys containing more than 0.05 percent phosphorus are prohibited.

D. Other Materials: As recommended by piping system manufacturer.

2.5 MANUAL FUEL-OIL SHUTOFF VALVES

A. See valve schedule in Part 3 for where each valve type is applied in various services.

B. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller for Liquid Service: Comply with UL 842.

1. CWP Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa). 2. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1. 3. Dryseal Threads on Flare Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.3. 4. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in the valve schedule. 5. Service Mark: Initials "WOG" shall be permanently marked on valve body.

2.6 SPECIALTY VALVES

A. Oil Safety Valves: Comply with UL 842.


a. Anderson Greenwood; Division of Tyco Flow Control. b. Suntec Industries Incorporated. c. Webster Fuel Pumps & Valves; a division of Capital City Tool, Inc.

2. Listed and labeled for fuel-oil service by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Body: Brass, bronze, or cast steel. 4. Springs: Stainless steel. 5. Seat and Diaphragm: Nitrile rubber. 6. Orifice: Stainless steel, interchangeable.



7. Factory-Applied Finish: Baked enamel. 8. Manual override port.

B. Emergency Shutoff Valves: Comply with UL 842.


a. Ameron International; Fiberglass Pipe Group. b. Conley Corporation. c. EMCO Wheaton; a Gardner Denver Company. d. Environ Products, Inc. e. OPW.

2. Listed and labeled for fuel-oil service by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Poppet valve. 4. Body: ASTM A 126, cast iron. 5. Disk: FPM. 6. Poppet Spring: Stainless steel. 7. Stem: Plated brass. 8. O-Ring: FPM. 9. Packing Nut: PTFE-coated brass. 10. Fusible link to close valve at 165 deg F (74 deg C). 11. Thermal relief to vent line pressure buildup due to fire. 12. Air test port. 13. Maximum Operating Pressure: 0.5 psig (3.45 kPa).

2.7 LEAK-DETECTION AND MONITORING SYSTEM

A. Extend existing fuel-oil piping leak detection system to include new piping where indicated on plans.

B. Provide new fuel-oil piping leak detectors located where indicated on plans. Comply with UL 1238.


a. Containment Solutions, Inc. b. EBW, Inc. c. Veeder-Root; a Danaher Corporation Company. d. Ronan Engineering Company; Leak Detection Measurements Division.

2. Leak-detection and monitoring probes and sensors shall interface with system provided with generator. Coordinate with Specification 16231.

3. Include fittings and devices required for testing.






4. Controls: Electrical, operating on 120-V ac.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine new and existing fuel-oil piping system to verify actual locations of piping connections before equipment installation.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off fuel oil to premises or piping section.

B. Comply with NFPA 30 and NFPA 31 requirements for prevention of accidental ignition.

3.3 OUTDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Steel Piping with Protective Coating:

1. Apply joint cover kits to pipe after joining, to cover, seal, and protect joints. 2. Repair damage to coating on pipe as recommended in writing by protective coating

manufacturer. Review protective coating damage with ATST POC prior to repair.

B. Install double-containment, fuel-oil pipe at a minimum slope of 1 percent downward toward leak detection sensors.

C. Assemble and install entry boots for pipe penetrations through enclosures for liquid-tight joints.

D. Install metal pipes and tubes, fittings, valves, and flexible connectors at piping connections to existing fuel-oil system and new generator.

E. Install fittings for changes in direction in rigid pipe.

F. Install system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

3.4 INDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

B. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, sleeves, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.





E. Install piping free of sags and bends.

F. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

G. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

H. Comply with requirements for equipment specifications in Division 15 Sections for roughing-in requirements.

I. Prohibited Locations:

1. Do not install fuel-oil piping in or through circulating air ducts, clothes or trash chutes, chimneys or gas vents (flues), ventilating ducts, or dumbwaiter or elevator shafts.

2. Do not install fuel-oil piping in solid walls or partitions.

J. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side down.

K. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.

L. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller at final connection to each piece of equipment and elsewhere as indicated. Unions are not required on flanged devices.

M. Do not use fuel-oil piping as grounding electrode.

N. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Division 15 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping."

O. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 15 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping."

P. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 15 Section "Escutcheons for HVAC Piping."


A. Install manual fuel-oil shutoff valves on branch connections to fuel-oil appliance.

B. Install valves in accessible locations.

C. Protect valves from physical damage.

D. Install metal tag attached with metal chain indicating fuel-oil piping systems.



E. Identify valves as specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification."

F. Install oil safety valves at inlet of each oil-fired appliance.

G. Install pressure relief valves in distribution piping between the supply and return lines.

H. Install one-piece, bronze ball valve with hose end connection at low points in fuel-oil piping.

I. Install manual air vents at high points in fuel-oil piping.

3.6 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION


B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:



D. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and welding operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article.

1. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. 2. Patch factory-applied protective coating as recommended by manufacturer at field welds

and where damage to coating occurs during construction.

E. Flanged Joints: Install gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned.

F. Other Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, and join according to pipe manufacturer's written instructions.


A. Pipe hanger and support and equipment support materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."

B. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) and Smaller: Maximum span, 84 inches (2130 mm); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm).



2. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40): Maximum span, 108 inches (2740 mm); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm).

3. NPS 2 (DN 50): Maximum span, 10 feet (3 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm).

C. Support vertical steel pipe at each floor and at spacing not greater than 15 feet (4.5 m).

3.8 LEAK-DETECTION AND MONITORING SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Extend existing leak-detection and monitoring system to include new piping where indicated on plans.

1. Double-Containment, Fuel-Oil Piping: Install leak-detection sensor system consistent with existing detection system.

B. Install new leak-detection and monitoring system probes located as indicated on drawings. Connect to new leak-detection system provided with generator. Coordinate with electrical.

3.9 CONNECTIONS

A. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

B. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment having threaded pipe connection.

C. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment having flanged pipe connection.

D. Connect piping to equipment with ball valve and union. Install union between valve and equipment.


A. Nameplates, pipe identification, and signs are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification."

3.11 FIELD PAINTING OF ABOVEGROUND PIPING

A. Comply with requirements in Division 9 painting Sections for painting interior and exterior fuel-oil piping.

B. Paint exposed, exterior metal piping, (both new and existing), valves, and piping specialties, except components with factory-applied paint or protective coating.

1. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.1D.

a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat.



c. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel.

C. Paint exposed, exterior nonmetal piping with manufacturer-approved coating for UV and weather protection.



1. Piping: Minimum hydrostatic or pneumatic test-pressures measured at highest point in system:

a. Fuel-Oil Distribution Piping: Minimum 5 psig (34.5 kPa) for minimum 30 minutes.

b. Fuel-Oil, Double-Containment Piping:

1) Carrier Pipe: Minimum 5 psig (34.5 kPa) for minimum 30 minutes. 2) Containment Conduit: Minimum 5 psig (34.5 kPa) for minimum 60

minutes.

c. Suction Piping: Minimum 20-in. Hg (68 kPa) for minimum 30 minutes. d. Isolate storage tanks if test pressure in piping will cause pressure in storage tanks

to exceed 10 psig (69 kPa).

2. Inspect and test fuel-oil piping according to NFPA 31, "Tests of Piping" Paragraph; and according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Test leak-detection and monitoring system for accuracy by manually operating sensors and checking against alarm panel indication.

4. Bleed air from fuel-oil piping using manual air vents.

B. Fuel-oil piping and equipment will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.13 DEMONSTRATION

A. Contractor shall demonstrate proper function of leak-detection and monitoring systems to ATST POC.

3.14 OUTDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Aboveground fuel-oil piping shall be the following:

1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Steel pipe, steel or malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints. Double-containment system shall be used.



3.15 ABOVEGROUND MANUAL FUEL-OIL SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Distribution piping valves for pipe NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller shall be the following:

1. One-piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim.

B. Valves in branch piping for single appliance shall be the following:

1. One-piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim.



GENERAL-SERVICE COMPRESSED-AIR PIPING 15211 - 1

SECTION 15211 - GENERAL-SERVICE COMPRESSED-AIR PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes piping and related specialties for general-service compressed-air systems operating at 200 psig (1380 kPa) or less.


1. Division 15 Section "General-Service Compressed-Air Equipment" for general-service air compressors and accessories.

C. Nitrile (also known as Buna-N) is susceptible to ozone degradation and may not be used on the site.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CR: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic rubber.

B. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

C. Low-Pressure Compressed-Air Piping: System of compressed-air piping and specialties operating at pressures of 150 psig (1035 kPa) or less.


A. Seismic Performance: Compressed-air piping and support and installation shall withstand effects of seismic events determined according to SEI/ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures."



1. Dielectric fittings. 2. Flexible pipe connectors. 3. Safety valves.



4. Pressure regulators. Include rated capacities and operating characteristics. 5. Automatic drain valves. 6. Filters. Include rated capacities and operating characteristics. 7. Quick couplings. 8. Hose assemblies.


A. Brazing and welding certificates.

B. Qualification Data: For Installers.



A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For general-service compressed-air piping specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Brazing: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications," or to AWS B2.2, "Standard for Brazing Procedure and Performance Qualification."

B. ASME Compliance:

1. Comply with ASME B31.1, "Power Piping," for high-pressure compressed-air piping. 2. Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for low-pressure compressed-air

piping.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS

A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K or L (ASTM B 88M, Type A or B) seamless, drawn-temper, water tube.

1. Wrought-Copper Fittings: MSS SP-73, wrought copper with dimensions for brazed joints.

2. Cast-Copper-Alloy Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150 or 300. 3. Copper Unions: ASME B16.22 or MSS SP-123.

B. Transition Couplings for Metal Piping: Metal coupling or other manufactured fitting same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined. Use dielectric fitting when joining dissimilar metallic piping.




A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for compressed-air piping system contents.

1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.

a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges. b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.

B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 VALVES

A. Metal Ball, Butterfly, Check, Gate, and Globe Valves: Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Valves."





a. Capitol Manufacturing Company. b. Hart Industries International, Inc. c. Matco-Norca, Inc. d. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Standard: ASSE 1079. b. Pressure Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa) minimum. c. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

2.5 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTORS




B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Flex-Hose Co., Inc. 2. Flexicraft Industries. 3. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. 4. Metraflex, Inc. 5. Unaflex, Inc.

C. Bronze-Hose Flexible Pipe Connectors: Corrugated-bronze tubing with bronze wire-braid covering and ends brazed to inner tubing.

1. Working-Pressure Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa) minimum. 2. End Connections, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded copper pipe or plain-end

copper tube.

2.6 SPECIALTIES

A. Safety Valves: ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels," construction; National Board certified, labeled, and factory sealed; constructed of bronze body with poppet-type safety valve for compressed-air service.

1. Pressure Settings: Higher than discharge pressure and same or lower than receiver pressure rating.

B. Air-Main Pressure Regulators: Bronze body, direct acting, spring-loaded manual pressure-setting adjustment, and rated for 250-psig (1725-kPa) inlet pressure, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Type: Pilot operated.

C. Air-Line Pressure Regulators: Diaphragm operated, bronze or aluminum body, direct acting, spring-loaded manual pressure-setting adjustment, and rated for 200-psig (1380-kPa) minimum inlet pressure, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Automatic Drain Valves: Stainless-steel body and internal parts, rated for 200-psig (1380-kPa) minimum working pressure, capable of automatic discharge of collected condensate. Include mounting bracket if wall mounting is indicated.

E. Coalescing Filters: Coalescing type with activated carbon capable of removing water and oil aerosols; with color-change dye to indicate when carbon is saturated. Include mounting bracket if wall mounting is indicated.

F. Mechanical Filters: Two-stage, mechanical-separation-type, air-line filters. Equip with deflector plates, resin-impregnated-ribbon-type filters with edge filtration, and drain cock. Include mounting bracket if wall mounting is indicated.



2.7 QUICK COUPLINGS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from the following:

1. Snap-Tite, Inc.; Quick Disconnect & Valve Division.

B. General Requirements for Quick Couplings: Assembly with locking-mechanism feature for quick connection and disconnection of compressed-air hose. Snap-Tite Series “E.”

C. Automatic-Shutoff Quick Couplings: Straight-through brass body with O-ring or gasket seal and stainless-steel or nickel-plated-steel operating parts.

1. Socket End: With one-way valve and threaded inlet for connection to piping or threaded hose fitting.

2. Plug end with barbed outlet for attaching hose.

2.8 HOSE ASSEMBLIES

A. Description: Compatible hose, clamps, couplings, and splicers suitable for compressed-air service, of nominal diameter indicated, and rated for 300-psig (2070-kPa) minimum working pressure, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Hose: Reinforced single- or double-wire-braid, CR-covered hose for compressed-air service.

2. Hose Clamps: Stainless-steel clamps or bands. 3. Hose Couplings: Two-piece, straight-through, threaded brass or stainless-steel O-ring or

gasket-seal swivel coupling with barbed ends for connecting two sections of hose. 4. Hose Splicers: One-piece, straight-through brass or stainless-steel fitting with barbed

ends for connecting two sections of hose.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Compressed-Air Piping: Use one of the following piping materials for each size range:

1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Type K or L (Type A or B), copper tube; wrought-copper fittings; and brazed joints.

B. Drain Piping: Use the following piping materials:

1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Type M (Type C) copper tube; wrought-copper fittings; and brazed joints.



3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. General-Duty Valves: Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Valves" for metal general-duty valves. Use metal valves, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Metal General-Duty Valves: Use valve types specified in "Valve Applications" Article in Division 15 Section "Valves" according to the following:

a. Compressed Air: Valve types specified for compressed air. b. Equipment Isolation NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Safety-exhaust, copper-alloy

ball valve with exhaust vent and pressure rating at least as great as piping system operating pressure.


A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of compressed-air piping. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, air-compressor sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

B. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal and to coordinate with other services occupying that space.

E. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance.

F. Install air and drain piping with 1 percent slope downward in direction of flow.

G. Install nipples, unions, transition and special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings same as or higher than system pressure rating, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Install eccentric reducers where compressed-air piping is reduced in direction of flow, with bottoms of both pipes and reducer fitting flush.

I. Install branch connections to compressed-air mains from top of main. Provide drain leg and drain trap at end of each main and branch and at low points.

J. Install thermometer and pressure gage on discharge piping from each air compressor and on each receiver. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages."

K. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

L. Install piping free of sags and bends.

M. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.



N. Install seismic restraints on piping. Seismic-restraint devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls."

O. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Division 15 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

P. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 15 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

Q. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 15 Section "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."



B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

C. Threaded Joints: Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:



D. Brazed Joints for Copper Tubing: Join according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter.

E. Dissimilar Metal Piping Material Joints: Use dielectric fittings.


A. General-Duty Valves: Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Valves."

B. Install shutoff valves and unions or flanged joints at compressed-air piping to air compressors.

C. Install shutoff valve at inlet to each automatic drain valve, filter, lubricator, and pressure regulator.

D. Install check valves to maintain correct direction of compressed-air flow to and from compressed-air piping specialties and equipment.

3.6 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.



B. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Use dielectric unions.

3.7 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTOR INSTALLATION

A. Install flexible pipe connectors in discharge piping of each air compressor.

B. Install bronze-hose flexible pipe connectors in copper compressed-air tubing.

3.8 SPECIALTY INSTALLATION

A. Install safety valves on receivers in quantity and size to relieve at least the capacity of connected air compressors.

B. Install air-main pressure regulators in compressed-air piping at or near air compressors.

C. Install air-line pressure regulators in branch piping to equipment and tools.

D. Install automatic drain valves on aftercoolers, receivers, and dryers. Discharge condensate via oil-water speparator(s).

E. Install coalescing filters in compressed-air piping at or near air compressors and upstream from mechanical filters.

F. Install mechanical filters in compressed-air piping at or near air compressors and downstream from coalescing filters.

G. Install quick couplings at piping terminals for hose connections.

H. Install hose assemblies at hose connections.

3.9 CONNECTIONS

A. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment and machine.


A. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls" for seismic-restraint devices.

B. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe hanger and support devices.

C. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps.



D. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:

1. 100 Feet (30 m) or Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. 2. Longer than 100 Feet (30 m): MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.

E. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet (30 m) or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

F. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

G. Support horizontal piping within 12 inches (300 mm) of each fitting and coupling.

H. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum rods.

I. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1/4 (DN 8): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 2. NPS 3/8 and NPS 1/2 (DN 10 and DN 15): 72 inches (1800 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm)

rod. 3. NPS 3/4 (DN 20): 84 inches (2100 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 4. NPS 1 (DN 25): 96 inches (2400 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 5. NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32): 108 inches (2700 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 6. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40): 10 feet (3 m) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 7. NPS 2 (DN 50): 11 feet (3.4 m) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.

J. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet (3 m).

3.11 LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION

A. Install identifying labels and devices for general-service compressed-air piping, valves, and specialties. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification."


A. Perform field tests and inspections.


1. Piping Leak Tests for Metal Compressed-Air Piping: Test new and modified parts of existing piping. Cap and fill general-service compressed-air piping with oil-free dry air or gaseous nitrogen to pressure of 50 psig (345 kPa) above system operating pressure, but not less than 200 psig (1380 kPa). Isolate test source and let stand for four hours to equalize temperature. Refill system, if required, to test pressure; hold for two hours with no drop in pressure.

2. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 3. Inspect filters and pressure regulators for proper operation.



C. Prepare test reports.



GENERAL-SERVICE PACKAGED AIR COMPRESSORS AND RECEIVERS 15251 - 1

SECTION 15251 - GENERAL-SERVICE PACKAGED AIR COMPRESSORS AND RECEIVERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Rotary-screw air compressors. 2. Desiccant compressed-air dryers.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Actual Air: Air delivered from air compressors. Flow rate is delivered compressed air measured in acfm (actual L/s).

B. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote-control, signaling power-limited circuits.

C. Standard Air: Free air at 68 deg F (20 deg C) and 1 atmosphere (29.92 in. Hg) before compression or expansion and measured in scfm (standard L/s).


A. Seismic Performance: Compressed-air equipment shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7-05.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.




A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For compressed-air equipment to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Air-Compressor, Inlet-Air-Filter Elements: Equal to 100 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than one (1) unit.

2. Belts: One set for each belt-driven compressor.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label receivers to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

1.9 COORDINATION


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PACKAGED AIR COMPRESSORS AND RECEIVERS

A. General Description: Factory-assembled, -wired, -piped, and -tested; electric-motor-driven; air-cooled; continuous-duty air compressors and receivers that deliver air of quality equal to intake air.

B. Control Panels: Automatic control station with load control and protection functions. Comply with NEMA ICS 2 and UL 508.

1. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6, Type 12 control panel unless otherwise indicated. 2. Motor Controllers: Full-voltage, combination magnetic type with undervoltage release

feature and motor-circuit-protector-type disconnecting means and short-circuit protective device.

3. Control Voltage: 120-V ac or less, using integral control power transformer. 4. Motor Overload Protection: Overload relay in each phase. 5. Starting Devices: Hand-off-automatic selector switch in cover of control panel, plus pilot

device for automatic control.



6. Instrumentation: Include discharge-air pressure gage, air-filter maintenance indicator, hour meter, and control transformer as required.

7. Provide dry-contact "run" output to control air dryer purge cycle.

C. Receivers: Steel tank constructed according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

1. Pressure Rating: At least as high as highest discharge pressure of connected compressors, and bearing appropriate code symbols.

2. Interior Finish: Corrosion-resistant coating. 3. Accessories: Include safety valve, pressure gage, drain, and pressure-reducing valve.

D. Mounting Frame: Fabricate mounting and attachment to pressure vessel with reinforcement strong enough to resist packaged equipment movement during a seismic event when base is anchored to building structure.

2.2 OIL-FLOODED, ROTARY-SCREW AIR COMPRESSORS


1. Atlas Copco. 2. Gardner Denver, Inc. 3. Ingersoll-Rand; Air Solutions Group. 4. Quincy Compressor; an EnPro Industries company. 5. Sullivan – Palatek.

B. Compressor(s): Oil-flooded, rotary-screw type with lubricated helical screws and lubricated gear box.

1. Coupling: Nonlubricated, flexible type. 2. Cooling/Lubrication System: Unit-mounted, air-cooled exchanger package prepiped to

unit; with air pressure circulation system with coolant stop valve, full-flow coolant filter, and thermal bypass valve.

3. Air Filter: Dry type, with maintenance indicator and cleanable replaceable filter element. 4. Air/Coolant Receiver and Separation System: 150-psig- (1035-kPa-) rated steel tank

with ASME safety valve, coolant-level gage, multistage air-coolant separator element, minimum pressure valve, blowdown valve, discharge check valve, coolant stop valve, full-flow coolant filter, and thermal bypass valve.

5. Capacity Control: Capacity modulation between zero and 100 percent air delivery. Include necessary control to hold constant pressure. When air demand is zero, unload compressor by using pressure switch and blowdown valve.

C. Capacities and Characteristics:

1. Air Compressor(s): As described on schedules and in Section 2.1 of this Specification. 2. Intake-Air Temperature: 30 deg F (-1 deg C) to 90 deg F (32 deg C). 3. Elevatoin: 10,000 ft. (3038 M). 4. Receiver: ASME construction steel tank.



a. Characteristics: As described on schedules and in Section 2.1 of this Specification. b. Drain: Automatic valve.

5. Enclosure: Steel with sound-attenuating material lining.

2.3 DESICCANT COMPRESSED-AIR DRYERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Donaldson Company, Inc.; Donaldson Ultrafilter Co. 2. Ingersoll-Rand; Air Solutions Group. 3. Pioneer Air Systems, Inc. 4. Sullivan-Palatek. 5. Zeks Compressed Air Solutions.

B. Description: Twin-tower unit with purge system, mufflers, and capability to deliver minus 40 deg F (minus 40 deg C) air at scheduled pressure. Include dew point controlled purge, step-down transformers, disconnect switches, inlet and outlet pressure gages, thermometers, automatic controls, and filters. Include control to interrupt purge cycle when compressor is not operating.

C. Capacities and Characteristics: As described on schedules.

2.4 MOTORS

A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 15 Section "Motors."

1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.

2. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical devices and connections specified in Division 16 Sections.

3. Derate motor capacity for site elevation, if necessary.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Mounting: Install air compressors on concrete bases using restrained spring isolators as indicated on Plans. Comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."


2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.

B. Install compressed-air equipment anchored to substrate.



C. Arrange equipment so controls and devices are accessible for servicing.

D. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance.

E. Install the following devices on compressed-air equipment:

1. Thermometer, Pressure Gage, and Safety Valve: Install on each compressed-air receiver. 2. Pressure Regulators: Install downstream from air compressors and dryers. 3. Automatic Drain Valves: Install on aftercoolers, receivers, and dryers. Discharge

condensate over nearest floor drain by way of oil-water separator as described on Plans.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Division 15 Section "General-Service Compressed-Air Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify general-service air compressors and components. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification."

3.4 STARTUP SERVICE


1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Check for lubricating oil in lubricated-type equipment. 3. Check belt drives for proper tension, where applicable. 4. Verify that air-compressor inlet filters and piping are clear. 5. Check for equipment vibration-control supports and flexible pipe connectors and verify

that equipment is properly attached to substrate. 6. Check safety valves for correct settings. Ensure that settings are higher than air-

compressor discharge pressure but not higher than rating of system components. 7. Check for proper seismic restraints. 8. Drain receiver tanks. 9. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm

proper motor rotation and unit operation. 10. Test and adjust controls and safeties.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air compressors, aftercoolers, and air dryers.



EMERGENCY PLUMBING FIXTURES 15412 - 1

SECTION 15412 - EMERGENCY PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Eyewash equipment. 2. Eye/face wash equipment. 3. Water-tempering equipment.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Accessible Fixture: Emergency plumbing fixture that can be approached, entered, and used by people with disabilities.

B. Plumbed Emergency Plumbing Fixture: Fixture with fixed, potable-water supply.

C. Self-Contained Emergency Plumbing Fixture: Fixture with flushing-fluid-solution supply.

D. Tepid: Moderately warm, as defined in ANSE Z 358.1


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include flow rates and capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Product Certificates: Submit certificates of performance testing specified in "Source Quality Control" Article.

B. Field quality-control test reports.




A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For emergency plumbing fixtures to include in operation and maintenance manuals.



1. Flushing-Fluid Solution: Separate lot and equal to at least 200 percent of amount of solution installed for each self-contained unit.



B. ANSI Standard: Comply with ANSI Z358.1, "Emergency Eyewash and Shower Equipment."

C. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects," for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.

D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC/ANSI A117.1, "Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities" for plumbing fixtures for people with disabilities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EYEWASH EQUIPMENT

A. Portable, Self-Contained Eyewash Units:


a. Bradley Corporation. b. Encon Safety Products. c. Guardian Equipment Co. d. Haws Corporation. e. Sellstrom Manufacturing Company. f. WaterSaver Faucet Co.

2. Capacity: Not less than 0.4 gpm (1.5 L/min.) for at least 15 minutes. 3. Pressure Tank: 10 gal. (38 L), stainless steel, cylindrical, with pressure gage, and

suitable for on-floor installation.



4. Flushing Fluid: Medically acceptable solution manufactured and labeled according to applicable regulations.

5. Spray-Head Assembly: Chrome-plated copper alloy or stainless-steel piping with flow regulator; paddle-actuated, stay-open control valve; and two spray heads mounted on tank.

6. Drench Hose: Hand-held spray head with squeeze-handle actuation and hose attached to tank.

B. Freeze-Protected, Self-Contained Eyewash Units:


a. Bradley Corporation. b. Encon Safety Products. c. Fend-all. d. Guardian Equipment Co. e. Haws Corporation. f. Speakman Company.

2. Capacity: Not less than 0.4 gpm (1.5 L/min.) for at least 15 minutes. 3. Gravity Tank: 14 gal. (53 L) minimum, plastic, and suitable for shelf mounting. 4. Flushing Fluid: Medically acceptable solution manufactured and labeled according to

applicable regulations. 5. Actuator: Pull-down front panel. 6. Spray Heads: Protected, two mounted on tank. 7. Heating System: Electric, 120-V ac; and insulation with protective jacket.

2.2 EYE/FACE WASH EQUIPMENT

A. Sink, Plumbed, Eye/Face Wash Unit:


a. Acorn Safety; a division of Acorn Engineering Company. b. Bradley Corporation. c. Encon Safety Products. d. Guardian Equipment Co. e. Haws Corporation. f. Sellstrom Manufacturing Company. g. WaterSaver Faucet Co.

2. Capacity: Not less than 3 gpm (11.4 L/min.) for at least 15 minutes. 3. Supply Piping: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) chrome-plated brass or stainless steel with flow

regulator and stay-open control valve. 4. Spray-Head Assembly: Two or four spray heads positioned on swivel arm over sink.



5. Mounting: Attached to sink deck or counter.

2.3 WATER-TEMPERING EQUIPMENT

A. Hot- and Cold-Water, Water-Tempering Equipment:


a. Acorn Safety; a division of Acorn Engineering Company. b. Armstrong International, Inc. c. Bradley Corporation. d. Encon Safety Products. e. Guardian Equipment Co. f. Haws Corporation. g. Lawler Manufacturing Co., Inc. h. Leonard Valve Company. i. Powers; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. j. Speakman Company.

2. Description: Factory-fabricated equipment with thermostatic mixing valve.

a. Thermostatic Mixing Valve: Designed to provide 80 deg F (27 deg C) tepid, potable water at emergency plumbing fixtures, to maintain temperature at plus or minus 5 deg F (3 deg C) throughout required 15-minute test period, and in case of unit failure to continue cold-water flow, with union connections, controls, metal piping, and corrosion-resistant enclosure.

b. Supply Connections: For hot and cold water.

2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Certify performance of emergency plumbing fixtures by independent testing organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for water and waste piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before plumbed emergency plumbing fixture installation.




3.2 EMERGENCY PLUMBING FIXTURE INSTALLATION

A. Assemble emergency plumbing fixture piping, fittings, control valves, and other components.

B. Install fixtures level and plumb.

C. Fasten fixtures to substrate.

D. Install shutoff valves in water-supply piping to fixtures. Use ball valve if specific type valve is not otherwise indicated. Install valves chained or locked in open position if permitted. Install valves in locations where they can easily be reached for operation. Comply with requirements for valves specified in Division 15 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."

1. Exception: Omit shutoff valve on supply to emergency equipment if prohibited by authorities having jurisdiction.

E. Install dielectric fitting in supply piping to emergency equipment if piping and equipment connections are made of different metals. Comply with requirements for dielectric fittings specified in Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping."

F. Install escutcheons on piping wall and ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 15 Section "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."

G. Fill self-contained fixtures with flushing fluid.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect cold-water-supply piping to plumbed emergency plumbing fixtures not having water-tempering equipment. Comply with requirements for cold-water piping specified in Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping."

B. Connect hot- and cold-water-supply piping to hot- and cold-water, water-tempering equipment. Connect output from water-tempering equipment to emergency plumbing fixtures. Comply with requirements for hot- and cold-water piping specified in Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping."

C. Where installing piping adjacent to emergency plumbing fixtures, allow space for service and maintenance of fixtures.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install equipment nameplates or equipment markers on emergency plumbing fixtures and equipment and equipment signs on water-tempering equipment. Comply with requirements for identification materials specified in Division 15 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."




A. Mechanical-Component Testing: After plumbing connections have been made, test for compliance with requirements. Verify ability to achieve indicated capacities.


1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection. 2. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest

until no leaks exist. 3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm

proper unit operation. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

C. Emergency plumbing fixtures and water-tempering equipment will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace fixture flow regulators for proper flow.

B. Adjust equipment temperature settings.



RESIDENTIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES 15414 - 1

SECTION 15414 - RESIDENTIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Water closets. 2. Toilet seats.


1. Section 15412 "Emergency Plumbing Fixtures." 2. Section 15417 "Commercial Urinals." 3. Section 15421 "Commercial Lavatories." 4. Section 15422 "Commercial Sinks."



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for lavatories.

2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For plumbing fixtures and faucets to include in emergency, operation, and operation and maintenance manuals.



1. Flushometer-Tank Repair Kits: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type installed, but no fewer than one of each type.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WATER CLOSETS

A. Water Closets: Floor mounted, floor outlet, close coupled (gravity tank), vitreous china.


a. American Standard America. b. Crane Plumbing, L.L.C. c. Eljer, Inc. d. Gerber Plumbing Fixtures LLC. e. Kohler Co. f. TOTO USA, INC.

2. Bowl:

a. Standards: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1, ASME A112.19.5, and ASSE 1037. b. Bowl Type: Pressure-assist siphon jet. c. Height: Handicapped/elderly. d. Rim Contour: Elongated. e. Water Consumption: Low. f. Color: White.

3. Supply Fittings:

a. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1. b. Supply Piping: Chrome-plated-brass pipe or chrome-plated-copper tube matching

water-supply piping size. Include chrome-plated wall flange. c. Stop: Chrome-plated-brass, one-quarter-turn, ball-type or compression stop with

inlet connection matching water-supply piping type and size.

1) Operation: Wheel handle.

d. Riser:

1) Size: NPS 3/8 (DN 10). 2) Material: ASME A112.18.6, braided- or corrugated-stainless-steel flexible

hose riser.

2.2 TOILET SEATS

A. Toilet Seats:










a. American Standard America. b. Bemis Manufacturing Company. c. Church Seats. d. Eljer, Inc. e. Kohler Co. f. Olsonite Seat Co.

2. Standard: IAPMO/ANSI Z124.5. 3. Material: Plastic. 4. Shape: Elongated rim (Open front). 5. Hinge Type: Self-sustaining, check. 6. Hinge Material: Noncorroding metal. 7. Color: White.

2.3 GROUT





PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in of water-supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before plumbing-fixture installation.

B. Examine walls, floors, cabinets, and counters for suitable conditions where fixtures will be installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install plumbing fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.

B. Install floor-mounted water closets on closet flange attachments to drainage piping.

C. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to water distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.









D. Install tanks for accessible, tank-type water closets with lever handle mounted on wide side of compartment.

E. Install toilet seats on water closets.

F. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. Comply with escutcheon requirements specified in Section 15097 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."

G. Seal joints between plumbing fixtures, counters, floors, and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with sealant requirements specified in Section 07920 "Joint Sealants."

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.

B. Comply with water piping requirements specified in Section 15140 "Domestic Water Piping."

C. Comply with soil and waste piping requirements specified in Section 15150 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping."

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust plumbing fixtures and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures, fittings, and controls.

B. Adjust water pressure at faucets to produce proper flow.


A. After completing installation of plumbing fixtures inspect and repair damaged finishes.

B. Clean plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials.

C. Provide protective covering for installed plumbing fixtures and fittings.

D. Do not allow use of plumbing fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by ATST POC.



DRINKING FOUNTAINS 15415 - 1

SECTION 15415 - DRINKING FOUNTAINS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following drinking fountains and related components:

1. Drinking fountains.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Accessible Drinking Fountain: Fixture that can be approached and used by people with disabilities.

B. Drinking Fountain: Fixture with nozzle for delivering stream of water for drinking.

C. Fitting: Device that controls flow of water into or out of fixture.

D. Fixture: Drinking fountain.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each fixture indicated. Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories.


C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities" for fixtures for people with disabilities.

B. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects," for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DRINKING FOUNTAINS

A. Drinking Fountains:


a. Elkay Manufacturing Co. b. Halsey Taylor. c. Haws Corporation. d. Oasis Corporation.

2. Description: Accessible, wall-mounting drinking fountain.

a. Material: Stainless steel. b. Bubblers: One, with adjustable stream regulator, located on deck. c. Control: Push button. d. Supply: NPS 3/8 (DN 10) with ball, gate, or globe valve. e. Drain: Grid with NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) minimum horizontal waste and trap

complying with ASME A112.18.2. f. Support: Manufacturer’s Mounting Plate.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for water and waste piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before fixture installation. Verify that sizes and locations of piping and types of supports match those indicated.

B. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be installed.


3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Use manufacturer’s plate mount support for wall-mounting fixtures, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Use chrome-plated brass or copper tube, fittings, and valves in locations exposed to view. Plain copper tube, fittings, and valves may be used in concealed locations.



3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install off-floor supports affixed to building substrate and attach wall-mounting fixtures, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Install fixtures level and plumb. For fixtures indicated for children, install at height required by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Install water-supply piping with shutoff valve on supply to each fixture to be connected to water distribution piping. Use ball, gate, or globe valve. Install valves in locations where they can be easily reached for operation. Valves are specified in Division 15 Section "Valves."

D. Install trap and waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be connected to sanitary drainage system.

E. Install pipe escutcheons at wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations. Use deep-pattern escutcheons where required to conceal protruding pipe fittings. Escutcheons are specified in Division 15 Section "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."

F. Seal joints between fixtures and walls and floors using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant, silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Sealants are specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

3.4 CONNECTIONS


B. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.

C. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust fixture flow regulators for proper flow and stream height.

3.6 CLEANING

A. After completing fixture installation, inspect unit. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.

B. Clean fixtures, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.



COMMERCIAL URINALS 15417 - 1

SECTION 15417 - COMMERCIAL URINALS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Urinals. 2. Flushometer valves.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for urinals.



A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For flushometer valves and electronic sensors to include in operation and maintenance manuals.


A. Furnish extra materials that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Flushometer-Valve Repair Kits: Equal to one of each type.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WALL-HUNG URINALS

A. Urinals: Wall hung, back outlet, siphon jet.




a. American Standard America. b. Gerber Plumbing Fixtures LLC. c. Kohler Co. d. Sloan Valve Company.

2. Fixture:

a. Standards: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1 and ASME A112.19.5. b. Material: Vitreous china. c. Type: Siphon jet. d. Strainer or Trapway: Manufacturer's standard strainer with integral trap. e. Spud Size and Location: NPS 3/4 (DN 20); top. f. Outlet Size and Location: NPS 2 (DN 50); back. g. Color: White.

3. Waste Fitting:

a. Standard: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2 for coupling. b. Size: NPS 2 (DN 50).

4. Support: ASME A112.6.1M, Type I, urinal carrier with fixture support plates and coupling with seal and fixture bolts and hardware matching fixture. Include rectangular, steel uprights.

2.2 URINAL FLUSHOMETER VALVES

A. Lever-actuated, Diaphragm Flushometer Valves:


a. Coyne & Delany Co. b. Gerber Plumbing Fixtures LLC. c. Sloan Valve Company. d. Zurn Industries, LLC; Commercial Brass and Fixtures.

2. Standard: ASSE 1037. 3. Minimum Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa). 4. Features: Include integral check stop and backflow-prevention device. 5. Material: Brass body with corrosion-resistant components. 6. Exposed Flushometer-Valve Finish: Chrome plated. 7. Finish: Chrome plated or stainless steel. 8. Style: Exposed.



9. Actuator: Non-hold-open lever, listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency; and marked for intended location and application.

10. Consumption: As scheduled.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before urinal installation.

B. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where urinals will be installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Urinal Installation:

1. Install urinals level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings. 2. Install wall-hung, back-outlet urinals onto waste fitting seals and attached to supports. 3. Install accessible, wall-mounted urinals at mounting height for the handicapped/elderly,

according to ICC/ANSI A117.1. 4. Install trap-seal liquid in waterless urinals.

B. Support Installation:

1. Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-hung urinals. 2. Use off-floor carriers with waste fitting and seal for back-outlet urinals.

C. Flushometer-Valve Installation:

1. Install flushometer-valve water-supply fitting on each supply to each urinal. 2. Attach supply piping to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures. 3. Install lever-handle flushometer valves for accessible urinals with handle mounted on

open side of compartment.

D. Wall Flange and Escutcheon Installation:

1. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations.

2. Install deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. 3. Comply with escutcheon requirements specified in Division 15 Section "Escutcheons for

Plumbing Piping."



E. Joint Sealing:

1. Seal joints between urinals and walls and floors using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant silicone sealant.

2. Match sealant color to urinal color. 3. Comply with sealant requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect urinals with water supplies and soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match urinals.

B. Comply with water piping requirements specified in Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping."

C. Comply with soil and waste piping requirements specified in Division 15 Section "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping."

D. Where installing piping adjacent to urinals, allow space for service and maintenance.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust urinals and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning urinals, fittings, and controls.

B. Adjust water pressure at flushometer valves to produce proper flow.


A. Clean urinals and fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials.

B. Install protective covering for installed urinals and fittings.

C. Do not allow use of urinals for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by ATST POC.



COMMERCIAL LAVATORIES 15421 - 1

SECTION 15421 - COMMERCIAL LAVATORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Lavatories. 2. Faucets.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for lavatories.


B. Shop Drawings: Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring of automatic faucets.


A. Coordination Drawings: Counter cutout templates for mounting of counter-mounted lavatories.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lavatories and faucets to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

1. In addition to items specified in Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

a. Servicing and adjustments of automatic faucets.





1. Faucet Washers and O-Rings: Minimum one set of each type and size installed. 2. Faucet Cartridges and O-Rings: Minimum one set of each type and size installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VITREOUS-CHINA, WALL-MOUNTED LAVATORIES

A. Lavatory: Vitreous china, wall mounted, with back.


a. American Standard America. b. Briggs Plumbing Products, Inc. c. Crane Plumbing, L.L.C. d. Ferguson Enterprises, Inc.; ProFlo Brand. e. Gerber Plumbing Fixtures LLC. f. Kohler Co. g. Mansfield Plumbing Products LLC. h. Peerless Pottery Sales, Inc. i. Zurn Industries, LLC; Commercial Brass and Fixtures.

2. Fixture:

a. Standard: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1. b. Type: For wall hanging. c. Faucet-Hole Location: Top. d. Color: White. e. Mounting Material: Chair carrier.

3. Support: ASME A112.6.1M.

B. Lavatory: Ledge back, vitreous china, wall mounted.


a. American Standard America. b. Briggs Plumbing Products, Inc. c. Crane Plumbing, L.L.C. d. Ferguson Enterprises, Inc.; ProFlo Brand.



e. Gerber Plumbing Fixtures LLC. f. Kohler Co. g. Mansfield Plumbing Products LLC. h. Peerless Pottery Sales, Inc.

2. Fixture:

a. Standard: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1. b. Type: For wall hanging. c. Faucet-Hole Location: Top. d. Color: White. e. Mounting Material: Chair carrier.

3. Support: ASME A112.6.1M.

C. Lavatory: Wheelchair, vitreous china, wall mounted.


a. American Standard America. b. Crane Plumbing, L.L.C. c. Ferguson Enterprises, Inc.; ProFlo Brand. d. Gerber Plumbing Fixtures LLC. e. Kohler Co. f. Mansfield Plumbing Products LLC. g. Peerless Pottery Sales, Inc.

2. Fixture:

a. Standard: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1. b. Type: Slab or wheelchair. c. Faucet-Hole Location: Top. d. Color: White. e. Mounting: For concealed-arm carrier.

3. Support: ASME A112.6.1M, Type II, concealed-arm lavatory carrier with rectangular, steel uprights.

2.2 SOLID-BRASS, AUTOMATICALLY OPERATED LAVATORY FAUCETS

A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF/ANSI 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects," for faucet materials that will be in contact with potable water.

B. Lavatory Faucets: Automatic-type, battery powered, electronic-sensor-operated, solid-brass valve.




a. American Standard America. b. Bradley Corporation. c. Chicago Faucets. d. Gerber Plumbing Fixtures LLC. e. Grohe America, Inc. f. Hydrotek International, Inc. g. Kohler Co. h. Moen Incorporated. i. Sloan Valve Company. j. Speakman Company. k. T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc. l. TOTO USA, INC. m. Zurn Industries, LLC; Commercial Brass and Fixtures.

2. Standards: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1 and UL 1951. 3. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

4. General: Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and fixture hole punchings; coordinate outlet with spout and fixture receptor.

5. Body Type: Single hole. 6. Body Material: Commercial, solid brass. 7. Finish: Polished chrome plate. 8. Maximum Flow Rate: 0.5 gpm (1.5 L/min.). 9. Mounting Type: Deck, concealed. 10. Spout: Rigid type. 11. Spout Outlet: Aerator. 12. Tempering Valve: Include ASSE tempering valve.

2.3 SUPPLY FITTINGS

A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF/ANSI 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects," for supply-fitting materials that will be in contact with potable water.

B. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.

C. Supply Piping: Chrome-plated-brass pipe or chrome-plated copper tube matching water-supply piping size. Include chrome-plated-brass or stainless-steel wall flange.

D. Supply Stops: Chrome-plated-brass, one-quarter-turn, ball-type or compression valve with inlet connection matching supply piping.

E. Operation: Loose key.



F. Risers:

1. NPS 3/8 (DN 10). 2. ASME A112.18.6, braided- or corrugated-stainless-steel, flexible hose riser.

2.4 WASTE FITTINGS

A. Standard: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2.

B. Drain: Grid type with NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) offset and straight tailpiece.

C. Trap:

1. Size: NPS 1-1/2 by NPS 1-1/4 (DN 40 by DN 32)] [NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32). 2. Material: Chrome-plated, two-piece, cast-brass trap and swivel elbow; and chrome-

plated, brass or steel wall flange.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before lavatory installation.

B. Examine counters and walls for suitable conditions where lavatories will be installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install lavatories level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.

B. Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounted lavatories.

C. Install accessible wall-mounted lavatories at handicapped/elderly mounting height for people with disabilities or the elderly, according to ICC/ANSI A117.1.

D. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. Comply with escutcheon requirements specified in Division 15 Section "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."

E. Seal joints between lavatories, counters, and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with sealant requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."



F. Install protective shielding pipe covers and enclosures on exposed supplies and waste piping of accessible lavatories. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Plumbing Piping Insulation."

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.



3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust lavatories and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning lavatories, fittings, and controls.



A. After completing installation of lavatories, inspect and repair damaged finishes.

B. Clean lavatories, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials.

C. Provide protective covering for installed lavatories and fittings.

D. Do not allow use of lavatories for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by ATST POC.



COMMERCIAL SINKS 15422 - 1

SECTION 15422 - COMMERCIAL SINKS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Utility sinks. 2. Kitchen sinks. 3. Sink faucets. 4. Supply fittings.


1. Division 15 Section "Residential Plumbing Fixtures" for residential sinks.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for sinks.



A. Coordination Drawings: Counter cutout templates for mounting of counter-mounted lavatories.


A. Maintenance Data: For sinks to include in maintenance manuals.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 UTILITY SINKS

A. Utility Sinks: Plastic, freestanding.


a. E. L. Mustee & Sons, Inc. b. Crane Plumbing, LLD; Fiat Products. c. Swan Corporation.

2. Fixture:

a. Type: With floor support. b. Number of Compartments: One. c. Compartment:

1) Molded. 2) Drain: Grid with NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) tailpiece.

3. Supports: Steel legs. 4. Faucet(s):

a. Number Required: One.

5. Waste Fittings:

a. Standard: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2. b. Trap(s):

1) Size: NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40).

B. Utility Sinks: Stainless steel.


a. California Stainless Manufacturing. b. Poole Sheet Metal & Welding.

2. Fixture:

a. Type: Top mount. b. Number of Compartments: One. c. Compartment:



1) With sound deadening. 2) Drain: Grid with NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) tailpiece.

3. Supports: Self rim. 4. Faucet(s):

a. Number Required: One.

5. Waste Fittings:

a. Standard: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2. b. Trap(s):

1) Size: NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40).

2.2 KITCHEN SINKS

A. Kitchen Sinks: Counter mounted, stainless steel.


a. Elkay Manufacturing Co. b. Franke Consumer Products, Inc. c. Just Manufacturing. d. Kohler Co. e. Revere Sink.

2. Fixture:

a. Standard: ASME A112.19.3/CSA B45.4 for stainless-steel kitchen sinks. b. Thickness: As scheduled. c. Dimensions: As scheduled.

2.3 SINK FAUCETS

A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF/ANSI 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects," for faucet-spout materials that will be in contact with potable water.

B. Sink Faucets, Service and Utility Sinks: Manual type, two-lever-handle mixing valve. Kitchen Sinks: Manual Type, single control lever


a. American Standard America. b. Chicago Faucets.



c. Crane Plumbing LLC; Fiat Products. d. Delta Faucet Company. e. Elkay Manufacturing Co. f. Just Manufacturing. g. Kohler Co. h. Moen Incorporated.

2. General: Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and fixture hole punchings; coordinate outlet with spout and sink receptor.

3. Body Type: Coordinate with sink. 4. Finish: Chrome plated. 5. Maximum Flow Rate: 2.2 gpm (8.3 L/min.). 6. Vacuum Breaker: Required for hose outlet. 7. Spout Outlet, Service and Utility Sinks: Hose thread according to ASME B1.20.7. 8. Spout Outlet, Kitchen Sinks: Aerator.

2.4 SUPPLY FITTINGS

A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF/ANSI 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects," for supply-fitting materials that will be in contact with potable water.

B. Supply Stops: Chrome-plated brass, one-quarter-turn, ball-type or compression valve with inlet connection matching supply piping.

C. Operation: Loose key.

2.5 GROUT





PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before sink installation.

B. Examine walls, floors, and counters for suitable conditions where sinks will be installed.




3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install sinks level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.

B. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each sink faucet.

1. Exception: Use ball valves if supply stops are not specified with sink. Comply with valve requirements specified in Division 15 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."

2. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.

C. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. Comply with escutcheon requirements specified in Division 15 Section "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."

D. Seal joints between sinks and counters, floors, and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with sealant requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

E. Install protective shielding pipe covers and enclosures on exposed supplies and waste piping of accessible sinks. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Plumbing Piping Insulation."

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect sinks with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.



3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust sinks and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning sinks, fittings, and controls.



A. After completing installation of sinks, inspect and repair damaged finishes.

B. Clean sinks, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials.



C. Provide protective covering for installed sinks and fittings.

D. Do not allow use of sinks for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by ATST POC.



DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS 15441 - 1

SECTION 15441 - DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. In-line, sealless centrifugal pumps. 2. In-line, close-coupled centrifugal pumps. 3. Submersible pumps.


1. Section 15471 "Water Treatment Equipment" for domestic water systems..

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote-control, signaling power-limited circuits.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include materials of construction, rated capacities, certified performance curves with operating points plotted on curves, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water pumps to include in operation and maintenance manuals.



B. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 778 for motor-operated water pumps.




A. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage.

B. Protect bearings and couplings against damage.

C. Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions for handling.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 No Buna-N (Nitrile) materials shall be used on site.

2.2 IN-LINE, SEALLESS CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS


1. Armstrong Pumps Inc. 2. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; ITT Corporation. 3. Grundfos Pumps Corp. 4. TACO Incorporated. 5. WILO USA LLC - WILO Canada Inc.

B. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, in-line, close-coupled, canned-motor, sealless, overhung-impeller centrifugal pumps.


1. Pump and Motor Assembly: Hermetically sealed, replaceable-cartridge type with motor and impeller on common shaft and designed for installation with pump and motor shaft horizontal.

2. Casing: Bronze, with threaded or companion-flange connections. 3. Impeller: Plastic. 4. Motor: Single speed, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Capacities and Characteristics: As shown on plans.

2.3 HORIZONTALLY MOUNTED, IN-LINE, CLOSE-COUPLED CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS


1. Alyan Pump Co. 2. Armstrong Pumps Inc. 3. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; ITT Corporation. 4. Marshall Engineered Products Co. 5. PACO Pumps; Grundfos Pumps Corporation, U.S.A.













6. Pentair Pump Group; Aurora Pump. 7. TACO Incorporated. 8. Thrush Company, Inc.

B. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, in-line, single-stage, close-coupled, overhung-impeller centrifugal pumps designed for domestic hot water circulation.


1. Impeller: Statically and dynamically balanced, closed, and keyed to shaft. 2. Shaft and Shaft Sleeve: Steel shaft with deflector, with copper-alloy shaft sleeve.

Include water slinger on shaft between motor and seal. 3. Seal: Mechanical, with carbon-steel rotating ring, stainless-steel spring, ceramic seat,

and rubber bellows and gasket. 4. Bearings: Oil-lubricated; bronze-journal or ball type. 5. Shaft Coupling: Flexible, capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft

misalignment.

D. Motor: Single speed, with grease-lubricated ball bearings; and resiliently or rigidly mounted to pump casing.

E. Capacities and Characteristics: As shown on plans.

2.4 SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS


1. Aermotor Pumps, Inc. 2. American Turbine Pump Co. 3. Crane Pumps and Systems; Deming Pumps. 4. Grundfos. 5. ITT Industries; Goulds Pumps. 6. Jacuzzi, Inc.; Jacuzzi Brothers. 7. Johnston Pump Company. 8. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. 9. Pentair Pump Group; Layne/Verti-Line. 10. Pentair Pump Group; Myers, F. E. 11. Reda Productions Services; Schlumberger Limited. 12. Sta-Rite Industries, Inc.; Water Systems Group. 13. Sterling Fluid Systems (USA) Inc.; Peerless Pump. 14. USFilter/EMU Products. 15. Weber Industries, Inc.

B. Description: Submersible potable water pump with the following features:

1. Impeller Material: Stainless steel or Silicon bronze. 2. Motor: Capable of continuous operation under water, with protected submersible power

cable.





















C. Capacities and Characteristics: As scheduled on plans.

2.5 CONTROLS

A. Float Switches: Electric, adjustable for control of water-supply pump.

1. Type: Submersible float switch for installation in tank or cistern. 2. Operation of Pump: On or off.

B. Thermostats: Electric; adjustable for control of hot-water circulation pump.

1. Type: Water-immersion temperature sensor, for installation in piping. 2. Range: 65 to 200 deg F (18 to 93 deg C). 3. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4X. 4. Operation of Pump: On or off. 5. Transformer: Provide if required.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in of domestic-water-piping system to verify actual locations of connections before pump installation.

3.2 PUMP INSTALLATION

A. Install in-line, sealless centrifugal pumps with shaft horizontal unless otherwise indicated.

B. Install in-line, close-coupled centrifugal pumps in manufacturer’s indicated orientation.

C. Install submersible pumps as indicted and in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

D. Install float switches per manufacturer’s instructions.

E. Install thermostats in hot-water return piping.

F. Install timers on wall adjacent to circulation pump.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 15140 "Domestic Water Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to pumps to allow service and maintenance.



C. Connect domestic water piping to pumps. Install suction and discharge piping equal to or greater than size of pump nozzles.

D. Connect float switches, thermostats and timers to pumps that they control.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 15076 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for identification of pumps.

3.5 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Check piping connections for tightness. 3. Clean strainers on suction piping. 4. Set switches, thermostats and timers for automatic starting and stopping operation of

pumps. 5. Perform the following startup checks for each pump before starting (where applicable):

a. Verify bearing lubrication. b. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot liquid is

free to rotate with pump hot and cold. If pump is bound or drags, do not operate until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.

c. Verify that pump is rotating in the correct direction.

6. Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pump for operation.

7. Start motor. 8. Open discharge valve slowly. 9. Adjust temperature settings on thermostats. 10. Adjust timer settings.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust domestic water pumps to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Adjust initial temperature set points.

C. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.

D. Adjust level switches.



POTABLE-WATER STORAGE TANKS 15450 - 1

SECTION 15450 - POTABLE-WATER STORAGE TANKS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Plastic, glass-fiber reinforced, nonpressure, potable-water storage tanks.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for water storage tanks.

2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.


A. Product Certificates: For each type of potable-water storage tank, from manufacturer.

B. Source quality-control reports.

C. Purging and disinfecting reports.


A. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic potable-water storage tanks and components. Include appropriate NSF marking.

B. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects," for potable-water storage tanks. Include appropriate NSF marking.

1.6 COORDINATION




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PLASTIC, NONPRESSURE, POTABLE-WATER STORAGE TANKS

A. FRP Potable-Water Storage Tanks:


a. Amprotec, Inc.; Tank System Division. b. Belding Tank Technologies, Inc. c. L. F. Manufacturing, Inc. d. Palmer Manufacturing and Tank Company. e. Xerxes Corporation.

2. Description: FRP, buried, nonpressure-rated water tank; complying with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water tanks.

3. Tappings: Factory-fabricated, FRP flanged-end nozzle.

a. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Include plastic-to-steel transition fitting from tank nozzle flange to ASME B1.20.1, female thread.

b. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged.

4. Manways: Include manways and extensions as indicated on plans.


A. Test and inspect potable-water storage tanks according to the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Testing for Nonpressure, Potable-Water Storage Tanks: Fill tanks to water operating level to ensure structural integrity and freedom from leaks. Hold water level for two hours with no drop in water level. Include operating head of piping above tank as installed.

B. Repair or replace tanks that fail test with new tanks, and repeat until test is satisfactory.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install water storage tanks level and plumb, firmly anchored. Arrange so devices needing servicing are accessible.

B. Anchor tank supports and tanks to substrate.



1. Use steel or FRP straps over or around plastic tanks.

C. Install the following devices on tanks where indicated:

1. Tank vents on nonpressure tanks. 2. Connections to accessories. 3. Manways and extensions.

D. After installing tanks with factory finish, inspect finishes and repair damages to finishes.

3.2 CONNECTIONS


B. Install piping adjacent to potable-water storage tanks to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect water piping to water storage tanks with unions or flanges.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 15 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."


A. Perform the following final checks before backfilling:

1. Test operation of tank accessories and devices.

B. Backfilling Procedures: Follow manufacturer's written procedures.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean potable-water storage tanks.

B. Use purging and cleaning procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if method is not prescribed, use procedure described below:

1. Flush water storage tanks thoroughly with potable water. 2. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat

procedure if biological examination made by authorities having jurisdiction shows evidence of contamination. Coordinate with ATST POC.



WATER TREATMENT EQUIPMENT 15471 - 1

SECTION 15471 - WATER TREATMENT EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Potable water treatment system.

2. Electro-deionization (EDI) water treatment system.


1. Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for plumbing piping strainers.

C. Materials: No Buna-N (Nitrile) materials shall be used on site.


A. Seismic Performance: Water-treatment system shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. The term "withstand" means that "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified.

B. Treatment Performance: Domestic water treatment system shall produce potable water in accordance with local and national health-department standards.

1. EPA Title 40, Chapter 1, Subchapter D, part 141: National Primary Drinking Water Regulations.

2. EPA Title 40, Chapter 1, Subchapter D, part 142: National Primary Drinking Water Regulations Implementation.

3. EPA Title 40, Chapter 1, Subchapter D, part 143: National Secondary Drinking Water Regulations

4. Hawai’i Administrative Rules, Title 11, Chapter 20: Rules Relating to Potable Water Systems.

5. Hawai’i Revised Statutes, Chapter 340E: Safe Drinking Water.

C. Treatment Performance: Humidifier feed water-treatment systems shall produce deionized water in accordance with ASTM Standard D1193, Type 4.




A. Product Data: For each product include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.


A. Certificates of Shop Inspections and Data Reports: For products required to have ASME label, signed by product manufacturer.


C. Field quality-control reports, including start up documentation.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For water treatment equipment to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1.7 MATERIALS MAINTENANCE SUBMITTALS


1. Filter Elements: Elements for filters equal to 200 percent of amount installed for each size and media indicated.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of water filtration equipment through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

D. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects," for all components that will be in contact with potable water.


A. Feedwater Analysis: Refer to attached report.



1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 UNIT CHARACTERISTICS

A. Installation Conditions:

1. Site Elevation 10,000 ft. (3048M) mean sea level. 2. Indoor installation. 3. Ambient temperature range from 40 deg F – 80 deg F (4 deg C – 27 deg C). 4. Raw water pickup point (bottom of cistern) elevation is 24 ft. (7.32 M) below location of

water treatment package. 5. Electro-deionization (EDI) unit will receive RO-quality water from cistern at a pressure

approximately 75 psi.

B. Capacity Required:

1. Refer to schedule.

C. Electrical Service Available:

1. Refer to schedule.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of treatment system.

B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before equipment installation.

C. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where treatment system will be installed.


3.2 EQUIPMENT MOUNTING

A. Equipment Mounting: Install treatment system components on a single base to the extent feasible. Coordinate with structural rquirements.



3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.


C. Make piping connections between water treatment equipment and dissimilar-metal water piping with dielectric fittings. Comply with requirements for dielectric fittings specified in Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping."

D. Install shutoff valves on inlet and outlet piping of each major water treatment component and on inlet and outlet headers.

1. Comply with requirements for metal general-duty valves specified in Division 15 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."

2. Comply with requirements for plastic valves specified in Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping."

3. Exception: Water treatment equipment with factory-installed shutoff valves at locations indicated.

E. Install pressure gages on inlet and outlet piping of each water filter and pump. Comply with requirements for pressure gages specified in Division 15 Section 15126 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."

1. Exception: Water treatment equipment with factory-installed pressure gages at locations indicated.

F. Install drains as indirect wastes to spill into open drains or over floor drains.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION



A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.



2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation.




C. Water treatment equipment will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.6 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service for water treatment systems.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Document proper startup checks and procedures.

B. Sample filtrate after startup and at three consecutive seven-day intervals (total of four samples), and prepare certified test reports for required water performance characteristics.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain water treatment system.



ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS 15485 - 1

SECTION 15485 - ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Commercial, electric, storage, domestic-water heaters. 2. Domestic-water heater accessories.


A. Seismic Performance: Commercial domestic-water heaters shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified.


A. Product Data: For each type and size of domestic-water heater indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings:



A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For commercial domestic-water heaters, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.


2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.



3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of domestic-water heater, from manufacturer.

C. Domestic-Water Heater Labeling: Certified and labeled by testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Source quality-control reports.

E. Field quality-control reports.

F. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For electric, domestic-water heaters to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.



B. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.

C. NSF Compliance: Fabricate and label equipment components that will be in contact with potable water to comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects."

1.8 COORDINATION


1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of electric, domestic-water heaters that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including storage tank and supports. b. Faulty operation of controls. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.

2. Warranty Periods: From date of Substantial Completion.



a. Domestic-Water Heaters:

1) Storage Tank: Three years. 2) Controls and Other Components: Three years.

b. Compression Tanks: Five years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS

A. Domestic-Water Heaters:


a. Bradford White Corporation. b. Lochinvar Corporation. c. Rheem Manufacturing Company. d. Smith, A. O. Water Products Co.; a division of A. O. Smith Corporation. e. State Industries.

2. Storage-Tank Construction: Steel vertical arrangement with glass lining.

a. Tappings: Factory fabricated of materials compatible with tank and piping connections. Attach tappings to tank before testing.

1) NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1.

b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). c. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water tank

linings, including extending lining material into tappings.

3. Factory-Installed Storage-Tank Appurtenances:

a. Anode Rod: Replaceable magnesium. b. Drain Valve: Corrosion-resistant metal complying with ASSE 1005. c. Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. d. Jacket: Steel with enameled finish. e. Heating Elements: Electric, screw-in or bolt-on immersion type arranged in

multiples of three. f. Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat. g. Safety Controls: High-temperature-limit and low-water cutoff devices or systems. h. Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped for combination temperature-and-

pressure relief valves. Include one or more relief valves with total relieving capacity at least as great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than



domestic-water heater working-pressure rating. Select one relief valve with sensing element that extends into storage tank.

2.2 DOMESTIC-WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES

A. Domestic-Water Compression Tanks:


a. AMTROL Inc. b. Honeywell International Inc. c. Smith, A. O. Water Products Co.; a division of A. O. Smith Corporation. d. State Industries. e. Taco, Inc.

2. Description: Steel pressure-rated tank constructed with welded joints and factory-installed butyl-rubber diaphragm. Include air precharge to minimum system-operating pressure at tank.

3. Construction:

a. Tappings: Factory-fabricated steel, welded to tank before testing and labeling. Include ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.

b. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water tank linings, including extending finish into and through tank fittings and outlets.

c. Air-Charging Valve: Factory installed.

4. Capacity and Characteristics: As scheduled.

B. Drain Pans: Corrosion-resistant metal with raised edge. Comply with ANSI/CSA LC 3. Include dimensions not less than base of domestic-water heater, and include drain outlet not less than NPS 3/4 (DN 20) with ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads or with ASME B1.20.7 garden-hose threads.

C. Piping-Type Heat Traps: Field-fabricated piping arrangement according to ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 or ASHRAE 90.2.

D. Heat-Trap Fittings: ASHRAE 90.2.

E. Combination Temperature-and-Pressure Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped. Include relieving capacity at least as great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than domestic-water heater working-pressure rating. Select relief valves with sensing element that extends into storage tank.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DOMESTIC-WATER HEATER INSTALLATION

A. Install domestic-water heaters level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original design, and referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices needing service are accessible.

1. Install shutoff valves on domestic-water-supply piping to domestic-water heaters and on domestic-hot-water outlet piping. Comply with requirements for shutoff valves specified in Division 15 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."

B. Install domestic-water heaters with seismic-restraint devices. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Division 15 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

C. Install combination temperature-and-pressure relief valves in top portion of storage tanks. Use relief valves with sensing elements that extend into tanks. Extend water-heater relief-valve outlet, with drain piping same size as T&P valve discharge in continuous downward pitch, and discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor drain or outdoors as indicated on plan.

D. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water piping for electric, domestic-water heaters that do not have tank drains. Comply with requirements for hose-end drain valves specified in Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."

E. Install thermometers on outlet piping of electric, domestic-water heaters. Comply with requirements for thermometers specified in Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."

F. Install piping-type heat traps on inlet and outlet piping of electric, domestic-water heater storage tanks without integral or fitting-type heat traps.

G. Fill electric, domestic-water heaters with water.

H. Charge domestic-water compression tanks with air.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Where installing piping adjacent to electric, domestic-water heaters, allow space for service and maintenance of water heaters. Arrange piping for easy removal of domestic-water heaters.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION







2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper operation.


B. Electric, domestic-water heaters will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for retesting and reinspecting requirements and Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for requirements for correcting the Work.


3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain domestic-water heaters.



RECIPROCATING WATER CHILLERS 15627 - 1

SECTION 15627 - RECIPROCATING WATER CHILLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Packaged, water-cooled, electric-motor-driven, reciprocating water chillers.


1. Section 15635 "Refrigerant Detection and Alarm" for refrigerant monitors, alarms, supplemental breathing apparatus, and ventilation equipment interlocks.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. COP: Coefficient of performance. The ratio of the rate of heat removal to the rate of energy input using consistent units for any given set of rating conditions.

B. EER: Energy-efficiency ratio. The ratio of the cooling capacity given in terms of Btu/h to the total power input given in terms of watts at any given set of rating conditions.

C. IPLV: Integrated part-load value. A single number part-load efficiency figure of merit calculated per the method defined by ARI 550/590 and referenced to ARI standard rating conditions.

D. kW/Ton: The ratio of total power input of the chiller in kilowatts to the net refrigerating capacity in tons at any given set of rating conditions.

E. NPLV: Nonstandard part-load value. A single number part-load efficiency figure of merit calculated per the method defined by ARI 550/590 and intended for operating conditions other than the ARI standard rating conditions.


A. Seismic Performance: Reciprocating water chillers shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7-05.





A. Product Data: Include refrigerant, rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

1. Performance at ARI standard conditions and at conditions indicated. 2. Performance at ARI standard unloading conditions. 3. Minimum evaporator flow rate. 4. Refrigerant capacity of water chiller. 5. Oil capacity of water chiller. 6. Fluid capacity of evaporator. 7. Fluid capacity of condenser. 8. Characteristics of safety relief valves. 9. Minimum entering condenser-water temperature. 10. Performance at varying capacity with constant-design entering condenser-water

temperature.

B. Shop Drawings: Complete set of manufacturer's prints of water chiller assemblies, control panels, sections and elevations, and unit isolation. Include the following:

1. Assembled unit dimensions. 2. Weight and load distributions. 3. Required clearances for maintenance and operation. 4. Sizes and locations of piping and wiring connections. 5. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Certificates: For certification required in "Quality Assurance" Article.

B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For water chillers, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.




C. Source quality-control test reports.

D. Startup service reports.

E. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.




A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each water chiller to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. ARI Rating: Rate water chiller performance according to requirements in ARI 550/590, "Water Chilling Packages Using the Vapor Compression Cycle."

B. ASHRAE Compliance: ASHRAE 15 for safety code for mechanical refrigeration.

C. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and stamp water chiller heat exchangers to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.


A. Ship water chillers from the factory fully charged with refrigerant and filled with oil.

1.10 COORDINATION


1.11 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of water chillers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Compressor Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PACKAGED WATER-COOLED WATER CHILLERS


1. Carrier Corporation; a United Technologies company.

2. Drake Refrigeration, Inc. 3. McQuay International. 4. Motivair Corporation.





B. Description: Factory-assembled and run-tested water chiller complete with compressor(s), compressor motors and motor controllers, evaporator, condenser where indicated, electrical power, controls, and indicated accessories.

C. Fabricate water chiller mounting base with reinforcement strong enough to resist water chiller movement during a seismic event when water chiller is anchored to field support structure.

D. Compressors:

1. Description: Positive-displacement direct drive with semihermetically sealed and accessible bolted casings.

2. Each compressor provided with suction and discharge service valves, crankcase oil heater, and suction strainer.

3. Operating Speed: 1750 rpm for 60-Hz applications. 4. Capacity Control: Combinations of cylinder unloading and on-off compressor cycling of

multiple compressors, plus hot-gas bypass. Compressor shall be capable of operating at part-load conditions without increased vibration over normal vibration at full-load operation and shall be capable of continuous operation at its lowest step of unloading.

5. Oil Lubrication System: Automatically reversible, positive-displacement pump with strainer, sight glass, filling connection, filter with magnetic plug, and initial oil charge.

6. Vibration Isolation: Mount individual compressors on either neoprene or spring isolators. 7. Sound-reduction package shall consist of acoustic blankets around the compressors that

are designed to reduce sound level without affecting performance.

E. Compressor Motors:

1. Hermetically sealed and cooled by refrigerant suction gas. 2. High-torque, four-pole induction type with inherent thermal-overload protection on each

phase.

F. Compressor Motor Controllers:

1. Across the Line: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, full voltage, nonreversing. 2. Part-Wind Start: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, reduced voltage, nonreversing.

G. Refrigeration:

1. Refrigerant: R-404a. Classified as Safety Group A1 according to ASHRAE 34. 2. Refrigerant Compatibility: Parts exposed to refrigerants shall be fully compatible with

refrigerants, and pressure components shall be rated for refrigerant pressures. 3. Refrigerant Circuit: Each circuit shall include an electronic expansion valve, refrigerant

charging connections, a hot-gas muffler, compressor suction and discharge shutoff valves, a liquid-line shutoff valve, a replaceable-core filter-dryer, a sight glass with moisture indicator, a liquid-line solenoid valve, and an insulated suction line.

4. Refrigerant Isolation: Factory install positive shutoff isolation valves in the compressor discharge line and the refrigerant liquid-line to allow the isolation and storage of the refrigerant charge in the chiller condenser.



H. Evaporator:

1. Brazed-plate or shell-and-tube design, as indicated. 2. Shell and Tube:

a. Description: Direct-expansion, shell-and-tube design with fluid flowing through the shell and refrigerant flowing through the tubes within the shell.

b. Code Compliance: Tested and stamped according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

c. Shell Material: Carbon steel. d. Shell Heads: Removable carbon-steel heads with multipass baffles designed to

ensure positive oil return and located at each end of the tube bundle. e. Shell Nozzles: Fluid nozzles located along the side of the shell and terminated

with mechanical-coupling end connections for connection to field piping. f. Tube Construction: Individually replaceable copper tubes with enhanced fin

design, expanded into tube sheets.

3. Brazed Plate:

a. Direct-expansion, single-pass, brazed-plate design. b. Type 316 stainless-steel construction. c. Code Compliance: Tested and stamped according to ASME Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Code. d. Fluid Nozzles: Terminate with mechanical-coupling end connections for

connection to field piping.

I. Condenser:

1. Shell and tube, brazed plate, or without integral condenser; as indicated. 2. Shell and Tube:

a. Description: Shell-and-tube design with refrigerant flowing through the shell and fluid flowing through the tubes within the shell.

b. Provides positive subcooling of liquid refrigerant. c. Code Compliance: Tested and stamped according to ASME Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Code. d. Shell Material: Carbon steel. e. Water Boxes: Removable, of carbon-steel construction, located at each end of the

tube bundle with fluid nozzles terminated with mechanical-coupling end connections for connection to field piping.

f. Tube Construction: Individually replaceable copper tubes with enhanced fin design, expanded into tube sheets.

g. Provide each condenser with a pressure relief device, purge cock, and liquid-line shutoff valve.

3. Brazed Plate:

a. Single-pass, brazed-plate design provides positive subcooling of liquid refrigerant. b. Type 316 stainless-steel construction.



c. Code Compliance: Tested and stamped according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

d. Fluid Nozzles: Terminate with mechanical-coupling end connections for connection to field piping.

e. Provide each condenser with a liquid-line shutoff valve.

4. Provide water chiller without an integral condenser and design chiller for field connection to remote condenser. Coordinate requirements with Section 15672 "Air-Cooled Refrigerant Condensers."

J. Electrical Power:

1. Factory-installed and -wired switches, motor controllers, transformers, and other electrical devices necessary shall provide a single-point field power connection to water chiller.

2. House in a unit-mounted, NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure with hinged access door with lock and key or padlock and key.

3. Wiring shall be numbered and color-coded to match wiring diagram. 4. Install factory wiring outside of an enclosure in a raceway. 5. Field power interface shall be to NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, nonfused disconnect switch. 6. Provide branch power circuit to each motor and to controls with one of the following

disconnecting means:

a. NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, fusible switch with rejection-type fuse clips rated for fuses. Select and size fuses to provide Type 2 protection according to IEC 60947-4-1.

b. NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, nonfusible switch. c. NEMA AB 1, motor-circuit protector (circuit breaker) with field-adjustable, short-

circuit trip coordinated with motor locked-rotor amperes.

7. Provide each motor with overcurrent protection. 8. Overload relay sized according to UL 1995, or an integral component of water chiller

control microprocessor. 9. Phase-Failure and Undervoltage: Solid-state sensing with adjustable settings. 10. Controls Transformer: Unit-mounted transformer with primary and secondary fuses and

sized with enough capacity to operate electrical load plus spare capacity. 11. Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable time-delay relays. 12. Indicate the following for water chiller electrical power supply:

a. Current, phase to phase, for all three phases. b. Voltage, phase to phase and phase to neutral for all three phases. c. Three-phase real power (kilowatts). d. Three-phase reactive power (kilovolt amperes reactive). e. Power factor. f. Running log of total power versus time (kilowatt hours). g. Fault log, with time and date of each.

K. Controls:

1. Stand-alone, microprocessor based.



2. Enclosure: Share enclosure with electrical power devices or provide a separate enclosure of matching construction.

3. Operator Interface: Keypad or pressure-sensitive touch screen. Multiple-character, backlit, liquid-crystal display or light-emitting diodes. Display the following:

a. Date and time. b. Operating or alarm status. c. Operating hours. d. Outside-air temperature if required for chilled-water reset. e. Temperature and pressure of operating set points. f. Entering and leaving temperatures of chilled water. g. Entering and leaving temperatures of condenser water. h. Refrigerant pressures in evaporator and condenser. i. Saturation temperature in evaporator and condenser. j. No cooling load condition. k. Elapsed time meter (compressor run status). l. Pump status. m. Antirecycling timer status. n. Percent of maximum motor amperage. o. Current-limit set point. p. Number of compressor starts.

4. Control Functions:

a. Manual or automatic startup and shutdown time schedule. b. Entering and leaving chilled-water temperatures, control set points, and motor load

limit. Chilled-water leaving temperature shall be reset based on signal from building automation system.

c. Current limit and demand limit. d. Condenser-water temperature. e. External water chiller emergency stop. f. Antirecycling timer. g. Automatic lead-lag switching.

5. Manual-Reset Safety Controls: The following conditions shall shut down water chiller and require manual reset:

a. Low evaporator pressure or high condenser pressure. b. Low chilled-water temperature. c. Refrigerant high pressure. d. High or low oil pressure. e. High oil temperature. f. Loss of chilled-water flow. g. Loss of condenser-water flow. h. Control device failure.

6. Building Automation System Interface: Factory-installed hardware and software to enable building automation system to monitor, control, and display water chiller status and alarms.



a. ASHRAE 135 (BACnet) communication interface with building automation system shall enable building automation system operator to control and monitor the water chiller from a remote operator workstation. Control features and monitoring points displayed locally at water chiller control panel shall be available through building automation system.

L. Insulation:

1. Material: Closed-cell, flexible elastomeric, thermal insulation complying with ASTM C 534, Type I, for tubular materials and Type II, for sheet materials.

2. Thickness: 3/4 inch (19 mm). 3. Factory-applied insulation over cold surfaces of water chiller components.

a. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer and applied to 100 percent of insulation contact surface. Seal seams and joints.

4. Apply protective coating to exposed surfaces of insulation.

M. Accessories:

1. Factory-furnished, chilled- and condenser-water flow switches for field installation. 2. Individual compressor suction and discharge pressure gages with shutoff valves. 3. Factory-furnished spring isolators for field installation.


A. Perform functional test of water chillers before shipping.

B. Factory performance test water chillers, before shipping, according to ARI 550/590, "Water Chilling Packages Using the Vapor Compression Cycle."

1. Allow Owner access to place where water chillers are being tested. Notify Architect 28 days in advance of testing.

C. Factory test and inspect evaporator and water-cooled condenser according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1. Stamp with ASME label.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Before water chiller installation, examine roughing-in for equipment support, anchor-bolt sizes and locations, piping, and electrical connections to verify actual locations, sizes, and other conditions affecting water chiller performance, maintenance, and operations.

1. Water chiller locations indicated on Drawings are approximate. Determine exact locations before roughing-in for piping and electrical connections.




3.2 WATER CHILLER INSTALLATION

A. Install water chillers on support structure indicated.

B. Equipment Mounting: Install water chiller on concrete bases using elastomeric pads. Comply with requirements in Section 03300 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Section 15074 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

1. Minimum Deflection: 1 inch (25 mm). 2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,

install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.

3. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.



C. Equipment Mounting: Install water chiller on vibration isolation inertia bases. Comply with requirements specified in Section 15074 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."


E. Charge water chiller with refrigerant if not factory charged and fill with oil if not factory installed.

F. Install separate devices furnished by manufacturer and not factory installed.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 15181 "Hydronic Piping" and Section 15179 "Hydronic Piping Specialties." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to chiller to allow service and maintenance.

C. Evaporator Fluid Connections: Connect to evaporator inlet with shutoff valve, strainer, flexible connector, thermometer, and plugged tee with pressure gage. Connect to evaporator outlet with shutoff valve, balancing valve, flexible connector, flow switch, thermometer, plugged tee with pressure gage, flow meter, and drain connection with valve. Make connections to water chiller with a union, flange, or mechanical coupling.

D. Condenser Fluid Connections: Connect to condenser inlet with shutoff valve, strainer, flexible connector, thermometer, and plugged tee with pressure gage. Connect to condenser outlet with shutoff valve, balancing valve, flexible connector, flow switch, thermometer, plugged tee with



pressure gage, and drain connection with valve. Make connections to water chiller with a union, flange, or mechanical coupling.

E. Refrigerant Pressure Relief Valve Connections: For water chillers installed indoors, extend vent piping to the outside without valves or restrictions. Comply with ASHRAE 15.

F. Connect each drain connection with a union and drain pipe, and extend pipe, full size of connection, to floor drain. Provide a shutoff valve at each connection if required.

3.4 STARTUP SERVICE


B. Inspect field-assembled components, equipment installation, and piping and electrical connections for proper assemblies, installations, and connections.

C. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and perform the following:

1. Verify that refrigerant charge is sufficient and water chiller has been leak tested. 2. Verify that pumps are installed and functional. 3. Verify that thermometers and gages are installed. 4. Operate water chiller for run-in period. 5. Check bearing lubrication and oil levels. 6. Verify that refrigerant pressure relief for chillers installed indoors is vented outside. 7. Verify proper motor rotation. 8. Verify static deflection of vibration isolators, including deflection during water chiller

startup and shutdown. 9. Verify and record performance of chilled- and condenser-water flow and low-temperature

interlocks. 10. Verify and record performance of water chiller protection devices. 11. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

D. Prepare a written startup report that records results of tests and inspections.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain water chillers. Video record the training sessions.



SCROLL WATER CHILLERS 15629 - 1

SECTION 15629 - SCROLL WATER CHILLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Packaged, water-cooled, electric-motor-driven, scroll water chillers.


1. Section 15635 "Refrigerant Detection and Alarm" for refrigerant monitors, alarms, supplemental breathing apparatus, and ventilation equipment interlocks.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. COP: Coefficient of performance. The ratio of the rate of heat removal to the rate of energy input using consistent units for any given set of rating conditions.

B. EER: Energy-efficiency ratio. The ratio of the cooling capacity given in terms of Btu/h to the total power input given in terms of watts at any given set of rating conditions.

C. IPLV: Integrated part-load value. A single number part-load efficiency figure of merit calculated per the method defined by ARI 550/590 and referenced to ARI standard rating conditions.

D. kW/Ton: The ratio of total power input of the chiller in kilowatts to the net refrigerating capacity in tons at any given set of rating conditions.

E. NPLV: Nonstandard part-load value. A single number part-load efficiency figure of merit calculated per the method defined by ARI 550/590 and intended for operating conditions other than the ARI standard rating conditions.


A. Seismic Performance: Scroll water chillers shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7-05.





A. Product Data: Include refrigerant, rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

1. Performance at ARI standard conditions and at conditions indicated. 2. Performance at ARI standard unloading conditions. 3. Minimum evaporator flow rate. 4. Refrigerant capacity of water chiller. 5. Oil capacity of water chiller. 6. Fluid capacity of evaporator. 7. Fluid capacity of condenser. 8. Characteristics of safety relief valves. 9. Minimum entering condenser-water temperature. 10. Performance at varying capacity with constant design condenser-water temperature.

B. Shop Drawings: Complete set of manufacturer's prints of water chiller assemblies, control panels, sections and elevations, and unit isolation. Include the following:

1. Assembled unit dimensions. 2. Weight and load distribution. 3. Required clearances for maintenance and operation. 4. Size and location of piping and wiring connections. 5. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Certificates: For certification required in "Quality Assurance" Article.

B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For water chillers, accessories, and components from manufacturers.





D. Startup service reports.

E. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.




A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each water chiller to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. ARI Rating: Rate water chiller performance according to requirements in ARI 550/590, "Water Chilling Packages Using the Vapor Compression Cycle."

B. ASHRAE Compliance: ASHRAE 15 for safety code for mechanical refrigeration.

C. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and stamp water chiller heat exchangers to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.



A. Ship water chillers from the factory fully charged with refrigerant and filled with oil.

1.10 COORDINATION


B. Coordinate sizes, locations, and anchoring attachments of structural-steel support structures.

C. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with actual equipment provided.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of water chillers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified period.

1. Compressor Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PACKAGED WATER-COOLED WATER CHILLERS




1. McQuay International. 2. Trane. 3. Carrier.

B. Description: Factory-assembled and run-tested water chiller complete with compressor(s), compressor motors and motor controllers, evaporator, condenser where indicated, electrical power, controls, and indicated accessories.

C. Fabricate water chiller mounting base with reinforcement strong enough to resist water chiller movement during a seismic event when water chiller is anchored to field support structure.

D. Compressors:

1. Description: Positive-displacement direct drive with hermetically sealed casing. 2. Each compressor provided with suction and discharge service valves, crankcase oil

heater, and suction strainer. 3. Operating Speed: Nominal 3600 rpm for 60-Hz applications. 4. Capacity Control: On-off compressor cycling, plus hot-gas bypass. 5. Oil Lubrication System: Automatic pump with strainer, sight glass, filling connection,

filter with magnetic plug, and initial oil charge. 6. Vibration Isolation: Mount individual compressors on vibration isolators. 7. Sound-reduction package shall consist of acoustic blankets around the compressors that

are designed to reduce sound level without affecting performance.

E. Compressor Motors:

1. Hermetically sealed and cooled by refrigerant suction gas. 2. High-torque, two-pole induction type with inherent thermal-overload protection on each

phase.

F. Compressor Motor Controllers:

1. Across the Line: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, full voltage, nonreversing.

G. Refrigeration:

1. Refrigerant: R-410a or R134a. Classified as Safety Group A1 according to ASHRAE 34.

2. Refrigerant Compatibility: Parts exposed to refrigerants shall be fully compatible with refrigerants, and pressure components shall be rated for refrigerant pressures.

3. Refrigerant Circuit: Each circuit shall include a thermal-expansion valve, refrigerant charging connections, a hot-gas muffler, compressor suction and discharge shutoff valves, a liquid-line shutoff valve, a replaceable-core filter-dryer, a sight glass with moisture indicator, a liquid-line solenoid valve, and an insulated suction line.

4. Refrigerant Isolation: Factory install positive shutoff isolation valves in the compressor discharge line and the refrigerant liquid-line to allow the isolation and storage of the refrigerant charge in the chiller condenser.





H. Evaporator:

1. Brazed-plate or shell-and-tube design. 2. Shell and Tube:

a. Description: Direct-expansion, shell-and-tube design with fluid flowing through the shell and refrigerant flowing through the tubes within the shell.

b. Code Compliance: Tested and stamped according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

c. Shell Material: Carbon steel. d. Shell Heads: Removable carbon-steel heads with multipass baffles designed to

ensure positive oil return and located at each end of the tube bundle. e. Shell Nozzles: Fluid nozzles located along the side of the shell and terminated

with mechanical-coupling end connections for connection to field piping. f. Tube Construction: Individually replaceable copper tubes with enhanced fin

design, expanded into tube sheets.

3. Brazed Plate:

a. Direct-expansion, single-pass, brazed-plate design. b. Type 316 stainless-steel construction. c. Code Compliance: Tested and stamped according to ASME Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Code. d. Fluid Nozzles: Terminate with mechanical-coupling end connections for

connection to field piping.

I. Condenser:

1. Shell and tube or without integral condenser; as indicated. 2. Shell and Tube:

a. Description: Shell-and-tube design with refrigerant flowing through the shell and fluid flowing through the tubes within the shell.

b. Provides positive subcooling of liquid refrigerant. c. Code Compliance: Tested and stamped according to ASME Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Code. d. Shell Material: Carbon steel. e. Water Boxes: Removable, of carbon-steel construction, located at each end of the

tube bundle with fluid nozzles terminated with mechanical-coupling end connections for connection to field piping.

f. Tube Construction: Individually replaceable copper tubes with enhanced fin design, expanded into tube sheets.

g. Provide each condenser with a pressure relief device, purge cock, and liquid-line shutoff valve.

J. Electrical Power:

1. Factory-installed and -wired switches, motor controllers, transformers, and other electrical devices necessary shall provide a single-point field power connection to water chiller.



2. House in a unit-mounted, NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure with hinged access door with lock and key or padlock and key.

3. Wiring shall be numbered and color-coded to match wiring diagram. 4. Install factory wiring outside of an enclosure in a raceway. 5. Field power interface shall be to NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, nonfused disconnect switch. 6. Provide branch power circuit to each motor and to controls with one of the following

disconnecting means:

a. NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, fusible switch with rejection-type fuse clips rated for fuses. Select and size fuses to provide Type 2 protection according to IEC 60947-4-1.

b. NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, nonfusible switch. c. NEMA AB 1, motor-circuit protector (circuit breaker) with field-adjustable, short-

circuit trip coordinated with motor locked-rotor amperes.

7. Provide each motor with overcurrent protection. 8. Overload relay sized according to UL 1995, or an integral component of water chiller

control microprocessor. 9. Phase-Failure and Undervoltage: Solid-state sensing with adjustable settings. 10. Controls Transformer: Unit-mounted transformer with primary and secondary fuses and

sized with enough capacity to operate electrical load plus spare capacity. 11. Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable time-delay relays. 12. Indicate the following for water chiller electrical power supply:

a. Current, phase to phase, for all three phases. b. Voltage, phase to phase and phase to neutral for all three phases. c. Three-phase real power (kilowatts). d. Three-phase reactive power (kilovolt amperes reactive). e. Power factor. f. Running log of total power versus time (kilowatt hours). g. Fault log, with time and date of each.

K. Controls:

1. Stand-alone, microprocessor based. 2. Enclosure: Share enclosure with electrical power devices or provide a separate enclosure

of matching construction. 3. Operator Interface: Keypad or pressure-sensitive touch screen. Multiple-character,

backlit, liquid-crystal display or light-emitting diodes. Display the following:

a. Date and time. b. Operating or alarm status. c. Operating hours. d. Outside-air temperature if required for chilled-water reset. e. Temperature and pressure of operating set points. f. Entering and leaving temperatures of chilled water. g. Entering and leaving temperatures of condenser water. h. Refrigerant pressures in evaporator and condenser. i. Saturation temperature in evaporator and condenser. j. No cooling load condition.



k. Elapsed time meter (compressor run status). l. Pump status. m. Antirecycling timer status. n. Percent of maximum motor amperage. o. Current-limit set point. p. Number of compressor starts.

4. Control Functions:

a. Manual or automatic startup and shutdown time schedule. b. Entering and leaving chilled-water temperatures, control set points, and motor load

limit. Chilled-water leaving temperature shall be reset based on signal from building automation system.

c. Current limit and demand limit. d. Condenser-water temperature. e. External water chiller emergency stop. f. Antirecycling timer. g. Automatic lead-lag switching.

5. Manual-Reset Safety Controls: The following conditions shall shut down water chiller and require manual reset:

a. Low evaporator pressure or high condenser pressure. b. Low chilled-water temperature. c. Refrigerant high pressure. d. High or low oil pressure. e. High oil temperature. f. Loss of chilled-water flow. g. Loss of condenser-water flow. h. Control device failure.

6. Building Automation System Interface: Factory-installed hardware and software to enable building automation system to monitor, control, and display water chiller status and alarms.

a. ASHRAE 135 (BACnet) communication interface with building automation system shall enable building automation system operator to remotely control and monitor the water chiller from an operator workstation. Control features and monitoring points displayed locally at water chiller control panel shall be available through building automation system.

L. Insulation:

1. Material: Closed-cell, flexible elastomeric, thermal insulation complying with ASTM C 534, Type I, for tubular materials and Type II, for sheet materials.

2. Thickness: 3/4 inch (19 mm). 3. Factory-applied insulation over cold surfaces of water chiller components.

a. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer and applied to 100 percent of insulation contact surface. Seal seams and joints.



4. Apply protective coating to exposed surfaces of insulation.

M. Accessories:

1. Factory-furnished, chilled- and condenser-water flow switches for field installation. 2. Individual compressor suction and discharge pressure gages with shutoff valves for each

refrigeration circuit. 3. Factory-furnished spring isolators for field installation.


A. Perform functional test of water chillers before shipping.

B. Factory performance test water chillers, before shipping, according to ARI 550/590, "Water Chilling Packages Using the Vapor Compression Cycle."

1. Allow ATST POC access to place where water chillers are being tested. Notify ATST POC 28 days in advance of testing.

C. Factory test and inspect evaporator and water-cooled condenser according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1. Stamp with ASME label.

D. For water chillers located indoors, rate sound power level according to ARI 575 procedure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Before water chiller installation, examine roughing-in for equipment support, anchor-bolt sizes and locations, piping, and electrical connections to verify actual locations, sizes, and other conditions affecting water chiller performance, maintenance, and operations.

1. Water chiller locations indicated on Drawings are approximate. Determine exact locations before roughing-in for piping and electrical connections.


3.2 WATER CHILLER INSTALLATION

A. Install water chillers on support structure indicated.

B. Equipment Mounting: Install water chiller on concrete bases using restrained spring isolators. Comply with requirements in Section 03300 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Section 15074 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

1. Minimum Deflection: 1 inch (25 mm).



2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.




C. Equipment Mounting: Install water chiller on vibration isolation inertia bases. Comply with requirements specified in Section 15074 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."


E. Charge water chiller with refrigerant if not factory charged and fill with oil if not factory installed.

F. Install separate devices furnished by manufacturer and not factory installed.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 15181 "Hydronic Piping" and Section 15179 "Hydronic Piping Specialties." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to chiller to allow service and maintenance.

C. Evaporator Fluid Connections: Connect to evaporator inlet with shutoff valve, strainer, flexible connector, thermometer, and plugged tee with pressure gage. Connect to evaporator outlet with shutoff valve, balancing valve, flexible connector, flow switch, thermometer, plugged tee with pressure gage, and drain connection with valve. Make connections to water chiller with a union, flange, or mechanical coupling.

D. Condenser Fluid Connections: Connect to condenser inlet with shutoff valve, strainer, flexible connector, thermometer, and plugged tee with pressure gage. Connect to condenser outlet with shutoff valve, balancing valve, flexible connector, flow switch, thermometer, plugged tee with pressure gage, and drain connection with valve. Make connections to water chiller with a union, flange, or mechanical coupling.

E. Refrigerant Pressure Relief Valve Connections: For water chillers installed indoors, extend vent piping to the outside without valves or restrictions. Comply with ASHRAE 15.

F. Connect each drain connection with a union and drain pipe and extend pipe, full size of connection, to floor drain. Provide a shutoff valve at each connection if required.

3.4 STARTUP SERVICE




B. Inspect field-assembled components, equipment installation, and piping and electrical connections for proper assemblies, installations, and connections.

C. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and perform the following:

1. Verify that refrigerant charge is sufficient and water chiller has been leak tested. 2. Verify that pumps are installed and functional. 3. Verify that thermometers and gages are installed. 4. Operate water chiller for run-in period. 5. Check bearing lubrication and oil levels. 6. Verify that refrigerant pressure relief device for chillers installed indoors is vented

outside. 7. Verify proper motor rotation. 8. Verify static deflection of vibration isolators, including deflection during water chiller

startup and shutdown. 9. Verify and record performance of chilled- and condenser-water flow and low-temperature

interlocks. 10. Verify and record performance of water chiller protection devices. 11. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

D. Prepare a written startup report that records results of tests and inspections.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain water chillers. Video record the training session.



REFRIGERANT DETECTION AND ALARM 15635 - 1

SECTION 15635 - REFRIGERANT DETECTION AND ALARM

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes refrigerant monitors, and notification appliances.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. LCD: Liquid-crystal display.

B. LED: Light-emitting diode.

C. PIR: Photoacoustic infrared.


A. Product Data:

1. For each type of refrigerant monitor, include refrigerant sensing range in ppm, temperature and humidity range, alarm outputs, display range, furnished specialties, installation requirements, and electric power requirement.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Air-Sampling Tubing: Size, routing, and termination including elevation above finished floor.



A. Product Certificates: For monitoring devices, signed by product manufacturer.





A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For refrigerant monitoring equipment to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.



1. One calibration kit including clean air calibration gas bottle for zero calibration and specific refrigerant calibration gas for span calibration, minimum 58-L capacity, pressure regulator, and tubing.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate refrigerant detection and alarm system with refrigerant contained in refrigeration equipment for compatibility.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIR REFRIGERANT MONITOR


1. Chillgard Refrigerant Monitors; MSA; Instrument Division. 2. Haloguard Monitors; Thermal Gas Systems, Inc.

B. Description: Sensor shall be factory tested, calibrated, and certified to continuously measure and display the specific gas concentration and shall be capable of indicating, alarming, and automatically activating ventilation system.

C. ASHRAE: Monitoring system shall comply with ASHRAE 15 and ASHRAE 147.

D. Performance:

1. Refrigerant to Be Monitored: R-134a, R-404a, R-410A and R507 2. Range: 0 to 1000 ppm. 3. Sensitivity:

a. Minimum Detectability: 1 ppm. b. Accuracy: 0 to 100 ppm; plus or minus 1 ppm. 100 to 1000 ppm; plus or minus 10

percent of reading. c. Repeatability: Plus or minus 1 percent of full scale. d. Response: Maximum 10 seconds per sample. e. Detection Level Set Points:





1) Detection Level 1: 1 ppm. 2) Detection Level 2: 10 ppm. 3) Detection Level 3: 50 ppm.

4. Operating Temperature: 32 to 104 deg F (0 to 40 deg C). 5. Relative Humidity: 20 to 95 percent, noncondensing over the operating temperature

range. Compensate sensor for relative humidity. 6. Site Elevation: Maximum 10,000 feet (3,050 m).

E. Input/Output Features:

1. Maximum Power Input: 120-V ac, 60 Hz, 75 W. 2. Number of Air-Sampling Points: Eight. 3. Air-Sampling Point Inlet Filter: 0.10-micron filter element for each sampling point. 4. Air-Sampling Point Analog Output: 0- to 10-V dc into 2k ohms, or 4- to 20-mA into 1k

ohms matched to sensor output. 5. Alarm Relays: Minimum of 5-A resistive load each. 6. Alarm Set Points: Displayed and adjustable through keypad on front of meter. 7. Alarm Silence Switch: Mount in the front panel of the monitor to stop audible and visual

notification appliances, but alarm LED remains illuminated. 8. Alarm Manual Reset: Momentary-contact push button in the front panel of the monitor

stops audible and visual notification appliances, extinguishes alarm LED, and returns monitor to detection mode at current detection levels.

9. Display: Alphanumeric LCD, LED indicating lights for each detection level; acknowledge switch and test switch mounted on front panel; alarm status LEDs and service fault/trouble LEDs.

10. Audible Output: Minimum 75 dB at 10 feet (3 m). 11. Visible Output: Strobe light. 12. Sensor Analog Output: 0- to 10-V dc into 2k ohms, or 4- to 20-mA into 1k ohms. 13. Serial Output: RS-232 or RS-485 compatible with HVAC controls. 14. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4, with locking quarter-turn latch and key.

2.2 MONITOR ALARM SEQUENCE

A. Detection Level 1: Notify HVAC control workstation of detection in the refrigeration equipment room on a rise or fall of refrigerant concentration to this level. Start ventilation system at low speed to allow occupancy by maintenance technicians to identify leaks. Cycle blue strobe lights.

B. Detection Level 2: Notify the HVAC control workstation of the detection in the refrigeration equipment room on a rise or fall of refrigerant concentration to this level. Run ventilation system at high speed on a rise in concentration to this level, and change to low speed on a reduction in concentration below this level. Operate the ventilation system at high speed for a minimum of five minutes. Cycle amber strobe lights.

C. Detection Level 3: Notify the HVAC control workstation of the detection in the refrigeration equipment room on a rise or fall of refrigerant concentration to this level. Sound alarm horns and cycle red strobe lights inside and outside refrigeration equipment room. Terminate



operation of any combustion-process equipment located in the refrigeration equipment room. Provide manual reset for this detection level.

D. Sensor Fault/Trouble: Notify HVAC control workstation of fault/trouble detection in monitor.

2.3 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

A. Horns: Comply with UL 464; electric-vibrating-polarized type, listed by a qualified testing agency with provision for housing the operating mechanism behind a grille. Horns shall produce a sound-pressure level of 90 dBA, measured 10 feet (3 m) from the horn.

B. Visible Alarm Devices: Comply with UL 1971; three color xenon strobe lights, with clear or nominal white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The words "REFRIGERANT DETECTION" printed in minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) high letters on the lens. Rated light output is 110 candela.

2.4 AIR-SAMPLING TUBING

A. Annealed-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with ASHRAE 15 and ASHRAE 147.

B. Install air-sampling inlets, or diffusion type monitors in pits, tunnels, or trenches in machinery room that are accessible to personnel.

C. Floor mount diffusion-type monitor, sensor/transmitters, or air-sampling inlets on slotted channel frame 12 to 18 inches (300 to 450 mm) above the floor in a location near the refrigerant source or between the refrigerant source and the ventilation duct inlet.

D. Wall mount air-sampling multiple-point monitors with top of unit 60 inches (1525 mm) above finished floor.

E. Run air-sampling tubing from monitor to air-sampling point, in size as required by monitor manufacturer. Install tubing with maximum unsupported length of 36 inches (915 mm), for tubing exposed to view. Terminate air-sampling tubing at sampling point with filter recommended by monitor manufacturer.

F. Install air-sampling tubing with sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration of tubing and movement of equipment.

G. Purge air-sampling tubing with dry, oil-free compressed air before connecting to monitor.



H. Number-code or color-code air-sampling tubing for future identification and service of air-sampling multiple-point monitors.

I. Extend air-sampling tubing from exhaust part of multiple-point monitors to outside.

J. Place warning signs inside and outside each door to the refrigeration equipment room. Sample wording: "AUDIBLE AND VISUAL ALARM SOUNDING INDICATES REFRIGERANT DETECTION - ENTRY REQUIRES SCBA."

K. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install at each entry door to refrigeration equipment room, and position not less than 6 inches (150 mm) below the ceiling. Install horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealed behind a grille.

L. Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm horn at each entry door to refrigeration equipment room, and position at least 6 inches (150 mm) below the ceiling.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Report results in writing.


1. Inspect field-assembled components, equipment installation, and electrical connections for compliance with requirements.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. 3. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:

a. Test procedures used. b. Test results that comply with requirements. c. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to

achieve compliance with requirements.

C. Repair or replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

3.3 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain refrigerant detection devices. Refer to requirements in Section 01820 "Demonstration and Training."



HYDRONIC HEAT EXCHANGERS 15710 - 1

SECTION 15710 – HYDRONIC HEAT EXCHANGERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes plate heat exchangers.



1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.


A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For heat exchanger, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.


2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Heat Exchanger: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of heat exchanger anchorage devices on which certification is based and their installation requirements.


C. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For heat exchangers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01400 "Quality Requirements," to design seismic restraints for heat exchangers.

B. Seismic Performance: Heat exchangers shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified.

2. Component Importance Factor is 1.5.

2.2 GASKETED-PLATE HEAT EXCHANGERS


1. Alfa Laval Inc. 2. Delta T Heat Exchangers. 3. ITT Corporation; Bell & Gossett. 4. Polaris Plate Heat Exchangers. 5. TACO Incorporated. 6. Tranter, Inc.

B. Configuration: Freestanding assembly consisting of frame support, top and bottom carrying and guide bars, fixed and movable end plates, tie rods, individually removable plates, and one-piece gaskets.

C. Construction: Fabricate and label heat exchangers to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels," Division 1.

D. Frame:

1. Capacity to accommodate 20 percent additional plates. 2. Painted carbon steel with provisions for anchoring to support.

E. Top and Bottom Carrying and Guide Bars: Painted carbon steel, aluminum, or stainless steel.

1. Fabricate attachment of heat-exchanger carrying and guide bars with reinforcement strong enough to resist heat-exchanger movement during seismic event when heat-exchanger carrying and guide bars are anchored to building structure.

F. End-Plate Material: Painted carbon steel.

G. Tie Rods and Nuts: Steel or stainless steel.

H. Plate Material: 0.031 inch (0.8 mm) thick before stamping; Type 316 stainless steel.









I. Gasket Materials: EPDM rubber.

J. Piping Connections: Factory fabricated of materials compatible with heat-exchanger shell. Attach tappings to shell before testing and labeling.

1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1. 2. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged ends according to ASME B16.5 for steel and

stainless-steel flanges and according to ASME B16.24 for copper and copper-alloy flanges.

K. Enclose plates in solid aluminum removable shroud.


A. Hydrostatically test heat exchangers to minimum of one and one-half times pressure rating before shipment.

B. Heat exchangers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and for structural rigidity, strength, anchors, and other conditions affecting performance of heat exchangers.

B. Examine roughing-in for heat-exchanger piping to verify actual locations of piping connections before equipment installation.


3.2 GASKETED-PLATE HEAT-EXCHANGER INSTALLATION

A. Install gasketed-plate heat exchanger anchored to floor as indicated on Drawings.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in other Section 15181 "Hydronic Piping" and Section 15179 "Hydronic Piping Specialties." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to heat exchangers to allow space for service and maintenance of heat exchangers. Arrange piping for easy removal of heat exchangers.



C. Install shutoff valves at heat-exchanger inlet and outlet connections.

D. Install relief valves on heat-exchanger heated-fluid connection and install pipe relief valves, full size of valve connection, to floor drain.

E. Install hose end valve to drain shell.

F. Install thermometer on heat-exchanger and inlet and outlet piping, and install thermometer on heating-fluid inlet and outlet piping. Comply with requirements for thermometers specified in Section 15127 "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping."

G. Install pressure gages on heat-exchanger and heating-fluid piping. Comply with requirements for pressure gages specified in Section 15127 "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping."

3.4 CLEANING

A. After completing system installation, including outlet fitting and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train ATST POC's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain heat exchangers.



CUSTOM AIR HANDLING UNITS 15726 - 1

SECTION 15726 – CUSTOM AIR HANDLING UNITS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Packaged custom air handling units and related components including Fan Systems, Coils, Filters, Dampers, Humidifiers, etc.


A. Performance: Manufacturer shall guarantee performance when operating under the specified or indicated conditions. Manufacturer shall repair or replace equipment found deficient in field testing.

B. Unit shall be constructed in accordance with UL 1995 standards, comply with NEMA standards and shall carry an ETL or UL label. Installation of ancillary electrical components shall comply with applicable NEC standards.

C. Unit sound performance data shall be derived from testing performed in accordance with AMCA Standard 300.

D. Filter Media: ANSI/U.L. 900 listed, Class II, as approved by local authorities.

E. Air Coils: Certify capacities, pressure drops, and selection procedures in accordance with ARI 410.

F. Air-handling units shall be designed, fabricated, and installed in compliance with NFPA 90A, “Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems”.

G. Unit shall be factory tested for air performance, sound and vibration. Notify ATST POC 30 days prior to test so they may be present during testing.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings that indicate performance, unit dimensions, weight loading, required clearances, construction details, and field connection details.

B. Product data shall include the following:

1. Dimensions and weights of all components, capacities, ratings, fan performance, motor electrical characteristics, and gages and finishes of materials.



2. Detailed fan selections including curves showing the performance of multiple fan arrays. Fan curves and tabular performance data shall indicate the ability of the fan array system to meet the specified operating point with all fans operating and with (1) fan failure. Fan array performance based on a single fan scaled to indicate performance for the number of fans in the array will not be accepted.

3. Sound power levels for unit inlet, outlet, and casing radiated at scheduled operating conditions.

4. Product data for motors, coils, filter media, and dampers. 5. Electrical requirements for power supply wiring including wiring diagrams for interlock

and control wiring, clearly indicating factory- installed and field-installed wiring.

C. At the conclusion of the project, provide Operations & Maintenance Manuals (O&M’s). PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Products meeting this specification as manufactured by the following companies are acceptable.

1. Huntair 2. Temtrol 3. Governair 4. Mammoth

2.2 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

A. Fabricate units in accordance with these specifications and with components and arrangement as shown on drawings.

B. Fabricate and ship units in multiple sections as indicated on the drawings or as required by shipping limitations to facilitate rigging and installation.

2.3 CASING

A. Double wall construction (4" minimum) consisting of A60 galvanized steel with minimum 16-gage exterior and 20 gage interior. Panels to be bolted standing seam construction with seams turned inward or individually secured to a steel support frame. Casing shall be suitably reinforced or braced to preclude noticeable or damaging deflection of any component at the required operating conditions. Casing exterior shall be factory painted with a UL listed industrial grade paint that meets or exceeds a 1000-hr salt spray test in accordance with ASTM117.



B. Casing design and construction methods shall preclude any exterior sweating at ASHRAE design WB conditions and the scheduled coil leaving air temperature. Units found to produce sweating within the warranty period shall be modified in the field as required to mitigate the situation solely at the contractor’s expense.

C. Insulate roof, walls, and floor with minimum 3-lbs/ft3 density glass fiber insulation (minimum 4" thick). Casing construction shall preclude any insulation exposed to the conditioned airstream. Utilize mat-faced insulation where perforated liners are indicated or specified.

D. Access shall be provided to all components of the unit that require periodic maintenance. Access shall be via hinged double-wall access doors with construction to match the unit casing. Where unit casing height allows, provide 72" high doors. Otherwise, provide maximum door height as allowed by casing dimensions. Latches shall be operable from both the interior and exterior of the unit. Provide minimum 12"x 12" dual pane thermal glass inspection windows on access doors into fan sections. Doors shall be provided with closed cell gasket seal around the entire perimeter of the door and frame. Doors shall be “in-swing” or “out-swing” as required to open against pressure. Doors used to access rotating equipment shall be provided with an OSHA approved safety latching mechanism requiring a tool to open, and shall also have highly visible, permanently fixed, caution sign on the exterior of the door.

E. Provide a fully welded, 304 stainless steel double wall insulated drain pan in cooling coil sections. The drain pan shall extend completely under the coil rack and a minimum of 18 inches beyond the leaving face of the cooling coil. Drain pans shall be double-sloped for positive drainage. All cooling coils shall be removable without cutting or removing any portion of the drain pan.

F. Unit base shall be fully welded structural steel around the entire perimeter of the unit and shall include intermediate structural steel supports as required for all internal components. Provide a 3/16" A60 steel tread-plate floor with continuously welded or mechanically fastened and caulked seams. The unit base shall include a 20 gage galvanized steel liner under floor insulation. Unit base shall be provided with fully welded brackets that receive removable steel plate lifting lugs.

G. Where unit must be provided in sections to facilitate shipment and/or rigging, each section shall include a full-perimeter structural steel frame with all required hardware for re-assembly. All seems shall be gasketed and caulked.

H. Unit casing leakage rate shall not exceed 0.5% of the design flow rate at the scheduled total static pressure after field assembly. If leakage is found during the warranty period, the Owner may (at his option) hire a test and balance contractor to field test the unit for leakage. If the leakage rate exceeds the specified requirements, the installing contractor shall be responsible for all field modifications necessary to comply with the specifications as well as all costs associated with the initial leakage test and subsequent testing to demonstrate compliance.

I. All floor penetrations larger than one square foot, including damper openings, shall be covered with removable heavy gauge walk on service grating bolted in place. The service grating shall be capable of supporting a minimum dead load of 300 pounds.



2.4 FAN SYSTEMS

A. Each fan system array shall consist of multiple fan/motor assemblies (”cubes”) consisting of an intake wall, inlet funnel, fan wheel, motor, and motor support structure. Each fan/motor cube shall be dynamically balanced to meet AMCA standard 204-96, category BV-5, to meet or exceed Grade 0.55.

B. Each fan shall be a direct driven, arrangement 4 plenum fan rated and certified in accordance with AMCA publication 211 and comply with the requirements of the AMCA Certified Ratings Program. Fans shall be constructed per the AMCA requirements for the duty specified, (Class I, II, or III) and shall be selected to operate at a system Total Static Pressure that does not exceed 90% of the peak static pressure producing capability at the design fan/motor speed.

C. The fan system shall produce a uniform velocity profile within the airway tunnel so as not to exceed the specified cooling coil and/or filter bank face velocity when measured at a point 12" upstream or 48" downstream of the intake plenum bulkhead.

D. Each fan system shall include a NEMA rated, UL listed integral electrical control panel. Panel shall be surface mounted or recessed into the unit casing as indicated on the drawings. Each panel shall include a single point electrical connection for the multiple fan array with a single main input disconnect. Each fan in a multi-fan array system shall include a single VFD to provide overload, ground fault protection, and individual disconnecting means. Individual VFD’s may be enabled or disabled to reconfigure the number of active fans to achieve substantially peak efficiency of the array through the range of operation. On horizontal airflow fan arrays with more than (1) fan cube, the VFD shall be located at the individual fan cell within the airway tunnel being served. All VFD’s shall be plenum rated and capable of providing the motor nameplate FLA.

E. Each VFD shall accept a 4-20 mA signal from individual companion fan cell differential pressure transmitter serving each individual fan. Each of the VFD’s shall then convert the input 4-20 mA signal to a linear output signal, sent to a PLC, located in the unit main control panel, via an internal serial communication Modbus loop. The PLC controller shall continuously monitor required flow and pressure and compare the required BHP to the available enabled HP, and shall automatically optimize the enabled fan configuration and operating speed of the enabled fans to achieve substantially peak efficiency for the fan array. System optimization controls including a local touchscreen interface shall be provided by the AHU manufacturer and shall require only (1) external control signal (SP of flow) for proper operation. The PLC shall include an open protocol (BacNET or Lonworks) interface card to communicate with the Building Automation System as specified elsewhere.

F. Each fan system and its associated panel shall provide complete “N+1” redundancy such that the system will provide design flow and pressure in the event of a motor or VFD failure automatically without interruption.



G. On horizontal airflow fan systems, all fans in a fan system shall be provided with a back flow prevention means that produces less than 0.05" of static pressure drop and/or system effect when that fan is enabled. Any system effects and/or pressure drop shall be included as a component in determining fan system total static pressure as submitted. Back draft dampers that are rated for pressure drop and performance in straight runs of ductwork per AMCA standards will not be accepted.

H. Each fan/motor cube shall be provided with an acoustical silencer that reduces the bare fan, discharge sound power levels by a minimum of 15 db re 10^-12 watts throughout the eight octave bands with center frequencies of 125, 250, 500, 1000, 2000, 4000, and 8000 HZ. The silencers shall not increase the fan total static pressure, nor shall they increase the airway tunnel length.

I. Each fan/motor assembly shall be removable through a 24" wide access door located on the discharge side of the Fan array.

J. All motors shall be pedestal mounted premium efficiency inverter-duty TEFC T-Frame per IEEE standards meeting the requirements of NEMA MG1-2006, Part 31. All motors shall include isolated bearings or shaft grounding system.

K. The maximum motor size shall be as indicated on the schedules. If not specifically scheduled, in no case shall a fan system require greater than 10-HP motors.

2.5 COILS

A. Chilled and Hot Water Coils shall be of the aluminum plate ripple fin .0075 aluminum, extended surface rated in accordance with ARI 410 for water, or ethylene/propylene glycol water mixture. The tubes shall have a minimum 0.020" wall thickness of seamless copper expanded into the fin collars to provide a permanent mechanical bond. Return Bends shall be a minimum of 0.025" brazed replaceable copper. Coil headers shall be non-ferrous seamless copper or red brass and provided with copper or brass male pipe same end connections. Each coil shall be provided with capped vent & drain connections extended to the exterior of the cabinet. All coils shall be fully drainable with no trapped tubes. The use of internal restrictive devices such as turbulator springs is not acceptable.

B. Coil casings shall be minimum 16 gauge galvanized steel (304 stainless steel on chilled water

coils), with formed 3/4" flanges on all sides of the coil. The coil casing shall be reinforced so that the maximum unsupported length is 60". The reinforcements shall be of the same material as the casing. Both ends of the coil to be sealed off from the main air stream by full height blankoff’s on the entering air side. Blankoff’s to be the same material as the coil casing.

C. All coils are tested and rated in accordance with the Air Conditioning and Refrigeration

Institute (ARI) Standard 410 and certified in accordance with the ARI certification program. All coils shall be leak tested under water at 315 PSIG and rated for 250 PSIG working pressures.



D. Stacked coils to be mounted in racks to allow individual coil removal without interference to other coils. All coils to be removable from either side of the unit by removable end panels. Individual end panels to be supplied for each coil on the Supply & Return side of the cabinet. Coil rack to be same material as coil casing.

E. Provide 304 stainless steel intermediate drain pans on all stacked cooling coils. The

intermediate pan shall drain to the main drain pan through a copper or stainless steel downspout.

F. Coil Supply & Return piping connections extending through the cabinet wall shall be sealed by

double escutcheon plate on the exterior of the casing. The escutcheon plate shall have a rolled collar around the pipe opening to protect the pipe and be equipped with an “O” ring rubber gasket between the collar and the pipe to provide an air tight seal around the opening.

2.6 FILTERS

A. Provide face-loading type-8 gasketed frames and associated clips for upstream face loading filter media as scheduled and detailed. Provide (2) complete sets of all filter media.

B. Provide factory installed Magnehelic gage to read pressure drop across the filter bank. Gauge shall be recessed into unit cabinetry. On outdoor units, provide a hinged metal flap cover to protect the gage from UV rays. Cover assembly shall be finished to match the unit casing.

2.7 DAMPERS

A. Provide Ruskin CD50 low leakage control dampers or approved equal AMCA licensed Class 1A damper. Maximum Leakage rate, according to AMCA 500, "Laboratory Methods for Testing Dampers for Rating," shall not exceed 3-cfm/sq. ft at 1-inch wg (1000-Pa) pressure differential.

B. The location of the outside air, relief air, returns air and supply air connections shall be as indicated on the drawings.

2.8 LIGHTS / RECEPTACLES

A. Provide a 100W vapor proof marine-type light fixture in each accessible section; factory wired to a common switch located adjacent to the supply fan access door or as indicated on the unit drawings. Provide duplex GFI service receptacle adjacent to electrical control center. Lights and service receptacle shall be factory-wired to an external J-box for separate 120V service provided by others. For units split for shipment, all wiring shall be terminated at j-boxes located at the unit shipping splits for field re-connection.

Sharon

Rectangle



C. Store in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic. Handle carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures, and finish.

D. Do not operate units for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until ductwork is clean, filters are

in place, bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation.

3.3 START-UP

A. Provide the services of a factory authorized service technician to assist the installing contractor with startup services and instruct the contractor and owner’s personnel in the maintenance and use of the equipment.



UNIT HEATERS 15762 - 1

SECTION 15762 - UNIT HEATERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Propeller unit heaters with hot-water coils.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. BAS: Building automation system.

B. CWP: Cold working pressure.

C. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene plastic.

D. TFE: Tetrafluoroethylene plastic.


A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories for each product indicated.


A. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that cabinet unit heaters, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Section 15074 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." Include the following:


a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."







A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For cabinet unit heaters to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PROPELLER UNIT HEATERS


1. Airtherm; a Mestek Company. 2. ATST POCed Air Ltd. 3. McQuay International. 4. Rosemex Products. 5. Ruffneck Heaters; a division of Lexa Corporation. 6. Trane.

B. Description: An assembly including casing, coil, fan, and motor in horizontal discharge configuration with adjustable discharge louvers.

C. Comply with UL 2021.

D. Comply with UL 823.

E. Cabinet: Removable panels for maintenance access to controls.

F. Cabinet Finish: Manufacturer'sstandard baked enamel applied to factory-assembled and -tested propeller unit heater before shipping.

G. Discharge Louver: Adjustable fin diffuser for horizontal units.

H. General Coil Requirements: Test and rate hot-water propeller unit heater coils according to ASHRAE 33.









I. Hot-Water Coil: Copper tube, minimum 0.025-inch (0.635-mm) wall thickness, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced no closer than 0.1 inch (2.5 mm) and rated for a minimum working pressure of 200 psig (1380 kPa) and a maximum entering-water temperature of 325 deg F (163 deg C), with manual air vent. Test for leaks to 350 psig (2413 kPa) underwater.

J. Fan: Propeller type with aluminum wheel directly mounted on motor shaft in the fan venturi.

K. Fan Motors: Comply with requirements in Section 15058 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

1. Motor Type: Permanently lubricated, variable speed.

L. Control Devices:

1. Unit-mounted, variable fan-speed controller. 2. Wall-mounting thermostat.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive unit heaters for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in for piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations before unit heater installation.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install propeller unit heaters level and plumb.

B. Suspend propeller unit heaters from structure with all-thread hanger rods and elastomeric hangers. Hanger rods and attachments to structure are specified in Section 15062 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." Vibration hangers are specified in Section 15074 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

C. Install wall-mounting thermostats and switch controls in electrical outlet boxes at heights to match lighting controls. Verify location of thermostats and other exposed control sensors with Drawings and room details before installation.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in Section 15181 "Hydronic Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.



B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect piping to cabinet unit heater's factory, hot-water piping package. Install the piping package if shipped loose.

D. Comply with safety requirements in UL 1995.

E. Unless otherwise indicated, install union and ball valve on supply/return-water connections and union and calibrated balancing valve on return-water connection of unit heater. Hydronic specialties are specified in Section 15181 "Hydronic Piping."

F. Ground equipment according to Section 16060 "Grounding and Bonding."

G. Connect wiring according to Section 16120 "Conductors and Cables."


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections. Report results in writing.

B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.

2. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.




FAN-COIL UNITS 15763 - 1

SECTION 15763 - FAN-COIL UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes fan-coil units and accessories.

1.3 DEFINITIONS



A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.



A. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that fan-coil units, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Section 15074 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." Include the following:


a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."






C. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fan-coil units to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 01782 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Maintenance schedules and repair part lists for motors, coils, integral controls, and filters.



1. Fan-Coil-Unit Filters: Furnish one spare filter for each filter installed. 2. Fan Belts: Furnish one spare fan belt for each unit installed.



1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of fan-coil units and suspension system components with other construction that penetrates or is supported by ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition assemblies.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In the Fan-Coil-Unit Schedule where titles below are column or row headings that introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.



2.2 DUCTED FAN-COIL UNITS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Carrier Corporation. 2. McQuay International. 3. Trane. 4. YORK International Corporation.

B. Description: Factory-packaged and -tested units rated according to ARI 440, ASHRAE 33, and UL 1995.

C. Coil Section Insulation: 1-inch (25-mm) thick foil-faced glass fiber complying with ASTM C 1071 and attached with adhesive complying with ASTM C 916.

1. Fire-Hazard Classification: Insulation and adhesive shall have a combined maximum flame-spread index of 25 and smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to ASTM E 84.

2. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.

D. Drain Pans: Stainless steel. Fabricate pans and drain connections to comply with ASHRAE 62.1.

E. Chassis: Galvanized steel where exposed to moisture, with baked-enamel finish and removable access panels.

F. Cabinets: Steel with baked-enamel finish in manufacturer's standard paint color.

1. Supply-Air Plenum: Sheet metal plenum finished and insulated to match the chassis. 2. Mixing Plenum: Sheet metal plenum finished and insulated to match the chassis with

outdoor- and return-air, formed-steel dampers. 3. Dampers: Galvanized steel with extruded-vinyl blade seals, flexible-metal jamb seals,

and interlocking linkage.

G. Filters: Minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1, and a minimum efficiency reporting value (MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2 as noted on plans.

H. Hydronic Coils: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced no closer than 0.1 inch (2.5 mm), rated for a minimum working pressure of 200 psig (1378 kPa) and a maximum entering-water temperature of 220 deg F (104 deg C). Include manual air vent and drain.

I. Direct-Driven Fans: Double width, forward curved, centrifugal; with permanently lubricated, multispeed motor resiliently mounted in the fan inlet. Aluminum or painted-steel wheels, and painted-steel or galvanized-steel fan scrolls.

J. Belt-Driven Fans: Double width, forward curved, centrifugal; with permanently lubricated, single-speed motor installed on an adjustable fan base resiliently mounted in the cabinet. Aluminum or painted-steel wheels, and painted-steel or galvanized-steel fan scrolls.








1. Motors: Comply with requirements in Section 15058 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

K. Electrical Connection: Factory wire motors and controls for a single electrical connection.

L. Control Voltage Transformer: Stepdown transformer shall convert from line voltage to 24 AC.

M. UV Lights:

1. Unit:

a. Unit to have factory-mounted UV lights located on the leaving air side of the cool-ing coil.

b. Unit to have view port to allow for visual indication of operation through UV re-sistant glass.

c. Unit to have door interlocks on each door accessing UV light. Interlock to kill power to UV light when door is opened.

2. Lamp and Fixture:

a. Lamp and fixture to consist of a housing, power source, lamp sockets, and lamp. b. All components are to be constructed to withstand typical HVAC environments and

are UL/C-UL listed. c. Housings are to be constructed of type 304 stainless steel and are to be equipped

with both male and female power plugs with one type at each end to facilitate sim-ple fixture-to-fixture plug-in for AC power.

3. Power Source:

a. Power source shall be an electric, rapid-type with overload protections and is to be designed to maximize radiance and reliability at UL/C-UL listed temperatures of 55 deg F – 135 deg

b. Power source will include RF and EMI suppression.

4. Sockets:

a. Sockets shall be medium bi-pin, single click safety, twist lock type and are to be constructed of a UVC-resistant polycarbonate.

E. Lamp:

1. Lamp shall be a high output, hot cathode, T8 diameter, medium bi-pin that produces UVGI of 254 nm. Each tube produces the specified output at 500 fpm and air tempera-tures of 55 deg F to 135 deg F.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive fan-coil units for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in for piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations before fan-coil-unit installation.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install fan-coil units level and plumb.

B. Install fan-coil units to comply with NFPA 90A.

C. Suspend fan-coil units from structure with spring isolater hangers. Vibration isolators are specified in Section 15074 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

D. Install new filters in each fan-coil unit within two weeks after Substantial Completion.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. Specific connection requirements are as follows:

1. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance. 2. Connect condensate drain to indirect waste.

a. Install condensate trap of adequate depth to seal against the pressure of fan. Install cleanouts in piping at changes of direction.

B. Connect supply and return ducts to fan-coil units with flexible duct connectors specified in Section 15820 "Duct Accessories." Comply with safety requirements in UL 1995 for duct connections.

C. Ground equipment according to Section 16060 "Grounding and Bonding."

D. Connect wiring according to Section 16120 "Conductors and Cables."




A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections. Report results in writing.


1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.

2. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.


3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fan-coil units. Refer to Section 01820 "Demonstration and Training."



METAL DUCTS 15815 - 1

SECTION 15815 - METAL DUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Single-wall rectangular ducts and fittings. 2. Single-wall round ducts and fittings. 3. Sheet metal materials. 4. Duct liner. 5. Sealants and gaskets. 6. Hangers and supports.


1. Section 15817 "HVAC Casings" for factory- and field-fabricated casings for mechanical equipment.

2. Section 15820 "Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct-mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.

3. Section 15950 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for testing, adjusting, and balancing requirements for metal ducts.


A. Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and performance requirements and design criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article.

B. Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports and seismic restraints shall withstand the effects of gravity and seismic loads and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and ASCE/SEI 7-05.

1. Seismic Hazard Level A: Seismic force to weight ratio, 0.48.

C. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.




A. Product Data: For each type of the following products:

1. Liners and adhesives. 2. Sealants and gaskets. 3. Seismic-restraint devices.

B. Delegated-Design Submittal:

1. Sheet metal thicknesses. 2. Joint and seam construction and sealing. 3. Reinforcement details and spacing. 4. Materials, fabrication, assembly, and spacing of hangers and supports. 5. Design Calculations: Calculations, including analysis data signed and sealed by the

qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation for selecting hangers and supports and seismic restraints.





A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports. AWS D9.1M/D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports. 2. AWS D9.1M/D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding.

C. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-up."

D. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC System Construction and Insulation."



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.

B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 4, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

2.2 SINGLE-WALL ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.


a. Lindab Inc. b. McGill AirFlow LLC. c. SEMCO Incorporated. d. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc. e. Spiral Manufacturing Co., Inc.

B. Flat-Oval Ducts: Indicated dimensions are the duct width (major dimension) and diameter of the round sides connecting the flat portions of the duct (minor dimension).









C. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Round Duct Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

1. Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 60 Inches (1524 mm) in Diameter: Flanged.

D. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Round Duct Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

1. Fabricate round ducts larger than 90 inches (2286 mm) in diameter with butt-welded longitudinal seams.

2. Fabricate flat-oval ducts larger than 72 inches (1830 mm) in width (major dimension) with butt-welded longitudinal seams.

E. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

2.3 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90 (Z275). 2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.

C. Factory- or Shop-Applied Antimicrobial Coating:

1. Apply to the surface of sheet metal that will form the interior surface of the duct. An untreated clear coating shall be applied to the exterior surface.

2. Antimicrobial compound shall be tested for efficacy by an NRTL and registered by the EPA for use in HVAC systems.

3. Coating containing the antimicrobial compound shall have a hardness of 2H, minimum, when tested according to ASTM D 3363.

4. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.

5. Shop-Applied Coating Color: White.



6. Antimicrobial coating on sheet metal is not required for duct containing liner treated with antimicrobial coating.

D. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

E. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch (6-mm) minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches (900 mm) or less; 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches (900 mm).

2.4 DUCT LINER

A. Fibrous-Glass Duct Liner: Comply with ASTM C 1071, NFPA 90A, or NFPA 90B; and with NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard."


a. CertainTeed Corporation; Insulation Group. b. Johns Manville. c. Knauf Insulation. d. Owens Corning. e. Maximum Thermal Conductivity:

1) Type I, Flexible: 0.27 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F (0.039 W/m x K) at 75 deg F (24 deg C) mean temperature.

2. Antimicrobial Erosion-Resistant Coating: Apply to the surface of the liner that will form the interior surface of the duct to act as a moisture repellent and erosion-resistant coating. Antimicrobial compound shall be tested for efficacy by an NRTL and registered by the EPA for use in HVAC systems.

3. Water-Based Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with ASTM C 916.

a. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

b. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

B. Natural-Fiber Duct Liner: 85 percent cotton, 10 percent borate, and 5 percent polybinding fibers, treated with a microbial growth inhibitor and complying with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.


a. Bonded Logic, Inc.








b. Reflectix Inc.

2. Maximum Thermal Conductivity: 0.24 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F (0.034 W/m x K) at75 deg F (24 deg C) mean temperature when tested according to ASTM C 518.

3. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to ASTM E 84; certified by an NRTL.

4. Liner Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer and complying with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.

a. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

C. Insulation Pins and Washers:

1. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.135-inch- (3.5-mm-) diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) galvanized carbon-steel washer.

2. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- (0.41-mm) thick galvanized steel; with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in diameter.

D. Shop Application of Duct Liner: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 7-11, "Flexible Duct Liner Installation."

1. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent adhesive coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness with multiple layers of duct liner is prohibited.

2. Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive metal nosing.

3. Butt transverse joints without gaps, and coat joint with adhesive. 4. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted-

edge overlapping. 5. Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts,

unless duct size and dimensions of standard liner make longitudinal joints necessary. 6. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches (100 mm) from corners and at intervals

not exceeding 12 inches (300 mm) transversely; at 3 inches (75 mm) from transverse joints and at intervals not exceeding 18 inches (450 mm) longitudinally.

7. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have either channel or "Z" profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge facings at the following locations:

a. Fan discharges. b. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct.

8. Terminate inner ducts with buildouts attached to fire-damper sleeves, dampers, turning vane assemblies, or other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or other buildout means are optional; when used, secure buildouts to duct walls with bolts, screws, rivets, or welds.




2.5 SEALANT AND GASKETS

A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.

B. Two-Part Tape Sealing System:

1. Tape: Woven cotton fiber impregnated with mineral gypsum and modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight seal.

2. Tape Width: 4 inches (102 mm). 3. Sealant: Modified styrene acrylic. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg (2500 Pa), positive and negative. 7. Service: Indoor and outdoor. 8. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 93 deg C). 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless

steel, or aluminum. 10. For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

C. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:

1. Application Method: Brush on. 2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent. 3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water). 7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg (2500 Pa), positive and negative. 8. Service: Indoor or outdoor. 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless

steel, or aluminum sheets.

D. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920.

1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric. 2. Type: S. 3. Grade: NS. 4. Class: 25. 5. Use: O. 6. For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2.6 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.



B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.

C. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1 (Table 5-1M), "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."

D. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603.

E. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.

F. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials.

G. Trapeze and Riser Supports:

1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.

H. MFMA Manufacturer Metal Framing Systems:


a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc. c. Flex-Strut Inc. d. Unistrut Corporation; Tyco International, Ltd.

2. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated assembly for supporting ducts. 3. Standard: MFMA-4. 4. Channels: Continuous slotted steel channel with inturned lips. 5. Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped steel nuts or other devices designed to fit into channel

slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel. 6. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel. 7. Metallic Coating: Hot-dipped galvanized.

2.7 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES


1. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 3. Hilti Corp. 4. Mason Industries. 5. Unistrut Corporation; Tyco International, Ltd.







B. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and applications shall be as defined in reports by an evaluation service member of the ICC Evaluation Service.

1. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be subjected.

C. Channel Support System: Shop- or field-fabricated support assembly made of slotted steel channels rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces and with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end. Include matching components and corrosion-resistant coating.

D. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 603, galvanized-steel cables with end connections made of cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; and with an automatic-locking and clamping device or double-cable clips.

E. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Reinforcing steel angle clamped to hanger rod.

F. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings.

B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install round ducts in maximum practical lengths.

D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.

E. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch connections.

F. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to building lines.

G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building.

H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch (25 mm), plus allowance for insulation thickness.



I. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and enclosures.

J. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm).

K. Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire dampers. Comply with requirements in Section 15820 "Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers.

L. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials. Comply with SMACNA's "IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction," Appendix G, "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines."

3.2 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK

A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged.

B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use two-part tape sealing system.

C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds, and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding.

D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of fittings, hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets.

E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these requirements.

3.3 DUCT SEALING

A. Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct Schedule" Article according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

B. Seal ducts to the following seal classes according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible":

1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 2. Outdoor, Supply-Air Ducts: Seal Class A. 3. Outdoor, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C. 4. Outdoor, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C. 5. Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg (500 Pa) and

Lower: Seal Class B.



6. Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch wg (500 Pa): Seal Class A.

7. Unconditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C. 8. Unconditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class B. 9. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg (500 Pa) and Lower:

Seal Class C. 10. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch wg (500

Pa): Seal Class B. 11. Conditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class B. 12. Conditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C.


A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports."

B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.

1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete. 2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured. 3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for

slabs more than 4 inches (100 mm) thick. 4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for

slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick. 5. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints.

C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1 (Table 5-1M), "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches (610 mm) of each elbow and within 48 inches (1200 mm) of each branch intersection.

D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.

E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16 feet (5 m).

F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

3.5 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT-DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Install ducts with hangers and braces designed to support the duct and to restrain against seismic forces required by applicable building codes and as design in delegated design submittal.



3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Section 15820 "Duct Accessories."

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.

3.7 PAINTING

A. Paint interior of metal ducts that are visible through registers and grilles and that do not have duct liner. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex paint over a compatible galvanized-steel primer. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Section 09911 "Exterior Painting" and Section 09912 "Interior Painting."



B. Leakage Tests:

1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual." Submit a test report for each test.

2. Test the following systems:

a. Ducts with a Pressure Class Higher Than 3-Inch wg (750 Pa): Test representative duct sections, selected by ATST POC from sections installed, totaling no less than 25 percent of total installed duct area for each designated pressure class.

3. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage testing and for compliance with test requirements.

4. Test for leaks before applying external insulation. 5. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or section

being tested. If static-pressure classes are not indicated, test system at maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure.

6. Give seven days' advance notice for testing.

3.9 START UP

A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Section 15950 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing."



DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820 - 1

SECTION 15820 - DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Backdraft and pressure relief dampers. 2. Manual volume dampers. 3. Control dampers. 4. Fire dampers. 5. Ceiling radiation dampers. 6. Flange connectors. 7. Turning vanes. 8. Remote damper operators. 9. Duct-mounted access doors. 10. Flexible connectors. 11. Flexible ducts. 12. Duct accessory hardware.


1. Section 13852 "Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System" for duct-mounted fire and smoke detectors.

2. Section 13853 "Zoned (DC Loop) Fire-Alarm System" for duct-mounted fire and smoke detectors.




A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air duct accessories to include in operation and maintenance manuals.





1. Fusible Links: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION

A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90 (Z275). 2. Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized.

B. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, Temper H14; with mill finish for concealed ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts.

C. Extruded Aluminum: Comply with ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063, Temper T6.

D. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.

E. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch (6-mm) minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches (900 mm) or less; 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches (900 mm).

2.3 BACKDRAFT AND PRESSURE RELIEF DAMPERS


1. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 2. Nailor Industries Inc. 3. Pottorff. 4. Ruskin Company. 5. Vent Products Company, Inc.








B. Description: Gravity balanced.

C. Frame: Hat-shaped, 0.05-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel with welded corners or mechanically attached.

D. Blades: Multiple single-piece blades, end pivoted, maximum 6-inch (150-mm) width, 0.025-inch- (0.6-mm-) thick, roll-formed galvanized with sealed edges.

E. Blade Action: Parallel.

F. Blade Seals: Extruded vinyl, mechanically locked.

G. Blade Axles:

1. Material: Galvanized steel. 2. Diameter: 0.20 inch (5 mm).

H. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

I. Bearings: Synthetic pivot bushings.

2.4 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS

A. Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers:


a. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc. b. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. c. Nailor Industries Inc. d. Pottorff. e. Ruskin Company. f. Vent Products Company, Inc.

2. Standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream. 3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 4. Frames:

a. Frame: Hat-shaped, 0.094-inch- (2.4-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel. b. Mitered and welded corners. c. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.

5. Blades:

a. Multiple or single blade. b. Parallel- or opposed-blade design. c. Stiffen damper blades for stability. d. Galvanized-steel, 0.064 inch (1.62 mm) thick.









6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel. 7. Bearings:

a. Molded synthetic. b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg (750 Pa) or less shall have

axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.

8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

2.5 CONTROL DAMPERS



B. Low-leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and bearing AMCA's Certified Ratings Seal for both air performance and air leakage.

C. Frames:

1. Hat shaped. 2. 0.094-inch- (2.4-mm-) thick, extruded aluminum. 3. Interlocking, gusseted corners.

D. Blades:

1. Multiple blade with maximum blade width of 6 inches (152 mm). 2. Opposed-blade design. 3. Aluminum. 4. 0.0747-inch- (1.9-mm-) thick dual skin. 5. Blade Edging: PVC. 6. Blade Edging: Inflatable seal blade edging, or replaceable rubber seals.

E. Blade Axles: 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) diameter; galvanized steel; blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and brass; ends sealed against blade bearings.

1. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F (minus 40 to plus 93 deg C).

F. Bearings:

1. Molded synthetic. 2. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg (750 Pa) or less shall have axles full

length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.








3. Thrust bearings at each end of every blade.

2.6 FIRE DAMPERS



B. Type: Dynamic; rated and labeled according to UL 555 by an NRTL.

C. Closing rating in ducts up to 4-inch wg (1-kPa) static pressure class and minimum 2000-fpm (10-m/s) velocity.

D. Fire Rating: 1-1/2 hours.

E. Frame: Curtain type with blades outside airstream fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-inch- (0.85-mm-) thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.

F. Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field-installed, galvanized sheet steel.

1. Minimum Thickness: 0.138 inch (3.5 mm) thick, as indicated, and of length to suit application.

G. Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated.

H. Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking, 0.034-inch- (0.85-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel. In place of interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.034-inch- (0.85-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel blade connectors.

I. Horizontal Dampers: Include blade lock and stainless-steel closure spring.

J. Heat-Responsive Device: Replaceable, 165 deg F (74 deg C) rated, fusible links.

2.7 CEILING RADIATION DAMPERS


1. Nailor Industries Inc. 2. Pottorff. 3. Ruskin Company.











B. General Requirements:

1. Labeled according to UL 555C by an NRTL. 2. Comply with construction details for tested floor- and roof-ceiling assemblies as

indicated in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory."

C. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, round or rectangular, style to suit ceiling construction.

D. Blades: Galvanized sheet steel with refractory insulation.

E. Heat-Responsive Device: Replaceable, 165 deg F (74 deg C) rated, fusible links.

F. Fire Rating: 2 hours.

2.8 FLANGE CONNECTORS


1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Nexus PDQ; Division of Shilco Holdings Inc. 3. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

B. Description: Add-on or roll-formed, factory-fabricated, slide-on transverse flange connectors, gaskets, and components.

C. Material: Galvanized steel.

D. Gage and Shape: Match connecting ductwork.

2.9 TURNING VANES


1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Elgen Manufacturing. 3. METALAIRE, Inc. 4. SEMCO Incorporated. 5. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

B. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.

C. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

D. Vane Construction: Single wall for ducts up to 48 inches (1200 mm) wide and double wall for larger dimensions.











2.10 REMOTE DAMPER OPERATORS


1. Pottorff. 2. Ventfabrics, Inc. 3. Young Regulator Company.

B. Description: Cable system designed for remote manual damper adjustment.

C. Tubing: Flexible galvanized spiral wire.

D. Cable: Stainless steel.

E. Wall-Box Mounting: Recessed.

F. Wall-Box Cover-Plate Material: Steel.

2.11 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS


1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 3. Nailor Industries Inc. 4. Pottorff.

B. Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 7-2 (7-2M), "Duct Access Doors and Panels," and 7-3, "Access Doors - Round Duct."

1. Door:

a. Double wall, rectangular. b. Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct

pressure class. c. Hinges and Latches: 1-by-1-inch (25-by-25-mm)butt or piano hinge and cam

latches. d. Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.

2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets. 3. Number of Hinges and Locks:

a. Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches (300 mm) Square: No hinges and two sash locks.

b. Access Doors up to 18 Inches (460 mm) Square: Two hinges and two sash locks. c. Access Doors up to 24 by 48 Inches (600 by 1200 mm): Continuous hinge and

two compression latches with outside and inside handles.










d. Access Doors Larger than 24 by 48 Inches (600 by 1200 mm): Continuous hinge and two compression latches with outside and inside handles.

2.12 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS


1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Elgen Manufacturing. 3. Ventfabrics, Inc. 4. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

B. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics.

C. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.

D. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches (89 mm) wide attached to two strips of 2-3/4-inch- (70-mm-) wide, 0.028-inch- (0.7-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch- (0.8-mm-) thick aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts.

E. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.

1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd. (880 g/sq. m). 2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch (84 N/mm) in the warp and 360 lbf/inch (63 N/mm) in the

filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 93 deg C).

2.13 FLEXIBLE DUCTS


1. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. 2. McGill AirFlow LLC. 3. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

B. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, 2-ply vinyl film supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene vapor-barrier film.

1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg (2500 Pa) positive and 1.0-inch wg (250 Pa) negative. 2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm (20 m/s). 3. Temperature Range: Minus 10 to plus 160 deg F (Minus 23 to plus 71 deg C).










C. Flexible Duct Connectors:

1. Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band with a worm-gear action in sizes 3 through 18 inches (75 through 460 mm), to suit duct size.

2.14 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE

A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct-insulation thickness.

B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.

B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.

C. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel.

D. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

E. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.

F. Install fire dampers according to UL listing.

G. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and equipment at the following locations:

1. Control devices requiring inspection. 2. Elsewhere as indicated.

H. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure.

I. Access Door Sizes:

1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches (200 by 125 mm). 2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches (300 by 150 mm).



3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches (460 by 250 mm). 4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches (530 by 355 mm). 5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches (635 by 355 mm). 6. Body plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches (635 by 430 mm).

J. Label access doors according to Section 15077 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" to indicate the purpose of access door.

K. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment.

L. For fans developing static pressures of 5-inch wg (1250 Pa) and more, cover flexible connectors with loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps.

M. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to ducts with lengths of flexible duct clamped in place.



1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement. 2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be

performed. 3. Operate fire dampers to verify full range of movement and verify that proper heat-

response device is installed. 4. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation. 5. Operate remote damper operators to verify full range of movement of operator and

damper.



DUCT SOUND ATTENUATORS 15821 - 1

SECTION 15821 – DUCT SOUND ATTENUATORS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Galvanized steel duct sound attenuators

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM E477 - American Society for Testing and Materials, Standard method of testing duct liner material and prefabricated silencers for acoustical and airflow performance.

B. NFPA 255 - National Fire Protection Association, testing of air conditioning and ventilation

systems. C. ASTM E84 - American Society for Testing and Materials, testing of air conditioning and

ventilation systems. D. UL-723 - Underwriters Laboratories, standard for safety; duct silencers.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with requirements of Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data.

1. Include dynamic insertion loss data. 2. Include pressure drop data. 3. Verify conformance of ASTM E477, ASTM E84, NFPA 255, UL-723, and applicable

building codes 4. Verify silencer dynamic insertion loss and pressure drop ratings based on tests performed

at independent lab testing facility and verified with AMCA


A. Silencers licensed to bear AMCA Certified Ratings Seal. Ratings based on tests and procedures performed in accordance with and complying with AMCA Certified Ratings Program. AMCA Certified Ratings Seal applies to acoustical and aerodynamic performance.

B. Dynamic Insertion Loss: Silencer dynamic insertion loss based on tests and procedures

performed in accordance with ASTM E477 testing procedures. C. Pressure Drop: Silencer pressure drop performance based on tests and procedures performed in

accordance with ASTM E477 testing procedures.




A. Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer’s original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly indicating manufacturer and material. All openings shall be capped.

B. Storage: Store materials in a dry area indoors, protected from damage and in accordance with

manufacturer’s instructions. C. Handling: Handle and lift silencers in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Protect

materials and finishes during handling and installation to prevent damage.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. RUSKIN Sound Control.

2.2 DUCT SILENCER

A. Fabrication:

1. Model: Broad band rectangular silencers. 2. Outer Casing: 22 gauge G90 galvanized (suitable for outdoor use) outer casing 3. Internal Liner: 22 gauge G90 galvanized (suitable for outdoor use) internal liner. Liner

shall be perforated steel and shall be acoustically transparent. 4. Baffle Fill: Inorganic glass fiber acoustic material fill. Glass fiber packed under 5%

compression to eliminate voids due to settling. 5. Pod Construction: Pods constructed using fully tapered pod design. Tapered pods used for

superior static regain. Solid radius nosepiece allows for exceptional aerodynamic performance

6. Flange: Body shall extend for 1 1/2" flange past silencer. This allows for ease of installation, flange shall be solid or bored with bolt holes at factory

7. Construction: Silencer constructed using Pittsburgh Lock Seam sheet metal construction. Sound attenuators capable of withstanding a differential air pressure of 8" w.g. Airtight construction shall be provided by use of a duct sealing compound on the job site, contractor shall supply material and labor

8. Assembly: Factory shall assemble silencer and accessories and furnish as a single unit. 9. Mylar Lining: Acoustic fill lined with mylar to prevent erosion of acoustic fill and/or

absorption of moisture by insulation. Bacterial or microbial growth within silencer is also reduced.

10. Capped Ends: Silencers shall be manufactured with capped ends to prevent contamination during delivery to job site and at job site.



B. Performance Data:

1. Based on testing 24 inch by 24 inch size unit (lengths 3', 5', 7', 10'). 2. Maximum recommended Air Flow - Model A - 2000 fpm, Model AM - 3000 fpm, Model

DM - 4000 fpm 3. All acoustical performance data is derived from independent laboratory testing in

accordance with ASTM E477 testing procedure. Testing executed in a duct-to-reverberant room laboratory, providing for airflow in both directions through the silencer. Dynamic Insertion Loss (D.I.L) calculated for:

a. Forward Flow - air and sound move in same direction. b. Reverse Flow - air and sound move in opposite directions.

4. Aerodynamic performance data is derived from independent laboratory testing in accordance with ASTM E477 testing procedure. Data shall be presented for the same units as those tested to ascertain acoustical performance data. Maximum insertion loss of 0.28 inches water gauge at sea level conditions.

5. Fire and smoke performance data derived from testing in accordance with ASTM E84, NFPA 255, and UL-723 testing methods. Incombustible filler material exhibits the following fire hazard classification values:

FLAMESPREAD - 20 FUEL CONTRIBUTED - 15 SMOKE DEVELOPED - 20

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Inspect areas to receive sound attenuators. Notify the Engineer of conditions that would adversely affect the installation or subsequent utilization of the silencers. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install sound attenuators at locations indicated on the drawings and in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions.

B. If duct transitions are required to adapt silencer dimensions to installed ductwork dimensions, the

contractor shall provide the required hardware and labor.


CENTRIFUGAL FANS 15837 - 1

SECTION 15837 - CENTRIFUGAL FANS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: For each product.

1. Airfoil centrifugal fans. 2. Backward-inclined centrifugal fans. 3. Forward-curved centrifugal fans.


A. Product Data:

1. Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each fan. 2. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated. 3. Certified fan sound-power ratings. 4. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories. 5. Material thickness and finishes, including color charts. 6. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.




A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For centrifugal fans to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Belts: One set for each belt-driven unit.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. AMCA Compliance:

1. Comply with AMCA performance requirements and bear the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

2. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.

B. Unusual Service Conditions:

1. Ambient Temperature: 14 to 80 deg F (10 to 27 deg C). 2. Altitude: 10,000 feet (3,048 m) above sea level.


2.2 BACKWARD-INCLINED CENTRIFUGAL FANS


1. Aerovent; a Twin City Fan company. 2. Cincinnati Fan. 3. Howden Buffalo Inc. 4. Loren Cook Company. 5. New York Blower Company (The).

B. Description:

1. Factory-fabricated, -assembled, -tested, and -finished, belt-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor, drive assembly, and support structure.

2. Deliver fans as factory-assembled units, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations.

C. Housings:

1. Formed panels to make curved-scroll housings with shaped cutoff. 2. Panel Bracing: Steel angle- or channel-iron member supports for mounting and

supporting fan scroll, wheel, motor, and accessories. 3. Spun inlet cone with flange. 4. Inlet and outlet flange.

D. Backward-Inclined Wheels:

1. Single-width-single-inlet and double-width-double-inlet construction with curved inlet flange, backplate, backward-inclined blades, and fastened to shaft with set screws.

2. Welded or riveted to flange and backplate; cast-iron or cast-steel hub riveted to backplate.








E. Shafts:

1. Statically and dynamically balanced and selected for continuous operation at maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower, with adjustable alignment and belt tensioning.

2. Turned, ground, and polished hot-rolled steel with keyway. Ship with protective coating of lubricating oil.

3. Designed to operate at no more than 70 percent of first critical speed at top of fan's speed range.

F. Grease-Lubricated Shaft Bearings:

1. Self-aligning, pillow-block-type, ball bearings with adapter mount and two-piece, cast-iron housing.

2. Ball-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 9, Ll0 at 120,000 hours.

G. Belt Drives:

1. Factory mounted, with adjustable alignment and belt tensioning. 2. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor Size: 1.5. 3. Fan Pulleys: Cast iron or cast steel with split, tapered bushing; dynamically balanced at

factory. 4. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 5 hp; fixed pitch for use

with larger motors. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle of adjustment range at fan design conditions.

5. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple belt drives. 6. Belt Guards: Fabricate to comply with OSHA and SMACNA requirements of diamond-

mesh wire screen welded to steel angle frame or equivalent, prime coated. Secure to fan or fan supports without short circuiting vibration isolation. Include provisions for adjustment of belt tension, lubrication, and use of tachometer with guard in place.

7. Motor Mount: Adjustable for belt tensioning.

H. Accessories:

1. Access for Inspection, Cleaning, and Maintenance: Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.

2. Inlet Screens: Grid screen of same material as housing. 3. Companion Flanges: Rolled flanges for duct connections of same material as housing.

2.3 MOTORS

A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency require-ments for motors specified in Section 15058 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equip-ment."




A. Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

B. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to AMCA 210/ASHRAE 51, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Certified Aerodynamic Performance Rating."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install centrifugal fans level and plumb.

B. Disassemble and reassemble units, as required for moving to the final location, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.

D. Equipment Mounting:

1. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation and seismic control devices specified in Section 15074 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC."

2. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Section 15068 "Vibration Controls for HVAC."

E. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

F. Label fans according to requirements specified in Section 15077 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Section 15820 "Duct Accessories."

B. Install ducts adjacent to fans to allow service and maintenance.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.



B. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative:

1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. 2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to

ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches.

3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete. 4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan

wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards.

5. Adjust belt tension. 6. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts. 7. Verify that manual and automatic volume control dampers in connected ductwork

systems are in fully open position. 8. See Section 15950 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for testing, adjusting, and

balancing procedures. 9. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

C. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Controls and equipment will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train ATST POC's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain centrifugal fans.



DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 15855 - 1

SECTION 15855 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Diffusers, registers and grilles.


1. Section 15820 "Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volume-control dampers not integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include the following:

1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings.

2. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For diffusers, registers, and grilles with factory-applied color finishes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."


DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 15855 - 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb.

B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.

C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing.



HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 15900 - 1

SECTION 15900 - HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes control equipment for HVAC systems and components, including control components for terminal heating and cooling units not supplied with factory-wired controls.


1. Section 15126 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for measuring equipment that relates to this Section.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. DDC: Direct digital control.

B. I/O: Input/output.

C. MS/TP: Master slave/token passing.

D. PC: Personal computer.

E. PID: Proportional plus integral plus derivative.

F. RTD: Resistance temperature detector.

1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

A. Comply with the following performance requirements:

1. Graphic Display: Display graphic with minimum 20 dynamic points with current data within 10 seconds.

2. Graphic Refresh: Update graphic with minimum 20 dynamic points with current data within 8 seconds.

3. Object Command: Reaction time of less than two seconds between operator command of a binary object and device reaction.

4. Object Scan: Transmit change of state and change of analog values to control units or workstation within six seconds.



5. Alarm Response Time: Annunciate alarm at workstation within 45 seconds. Multiple workstations must receive alarms within five seconds of each other.

6. Program Execution Frequency: Run capability of applications as often as five seconds, but selected consistent with mechanical process under control.

7. Performance: Programmable controllers shall execute DDC PID control loops, and scan and update process values and outputs at least once per second.

8. Reporting Accuracy and Stability of Control: Report values and maintain measured variables within tolerances as follows:

a. General Sensors:

1) Water Temperature: Plus or minus 1 deg F (0.5 deg C). 2) Water Flow: Plus or minus 5 percent of full scale. 3) Water Pressure: Plus or minus 2 percent of full scale. 4) Space Temperature: Plus or minus 1 deg F (0.5 deg C). 5) Ducted Air Temperature: Plus or minus 1 deg F (0.5 deg C). 6) Outside Air Temperature: Plus or minus 1 deg F (0.5 deg C). 7) Dew Point Temperature: Plus or minus 2 deg F (1.0 deg C). 8) Temperature Differential: Plus or minus 0.25 deg F (0.15 deg C). 9) Relative Humidity: Plus or minus 5 percent. 10) Airflow (Pressurized Spaces): Plus or minus 3 percent of full scale. 11) Airflow (Measuring Stations): Plus or minus 5 percent of full scale. 12) Air Pressure (Space): Plus or minus 0.01-inch wg (2.5 Pa). 13) Air Pressure (Ducts): Plus or minus 0.1-inch wg (25 Pa). 14) Electrical: Plus or minus 5 percent of reading.

b. Coudé Lab:

1) Space Temperature: Plus or minus 0.1 deg F (0.05 deg C). 2) Relative Humidity: Plus or minus 0.8%.

1.5 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION

A. As noted on Plans.


A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical literature for each control device. Indicate dimensions, capacities, performance characteristics, electrical characteristics, finishes for materials, and installation and startup instructions for each type of product indicated.

1. DDC System Hardware: Bill of materials of equipment indicating quantity, manufacturer, and model number. Include technical data for operator workstation equipment, interface equipment, control units, transducers/transmitters, sensors, actuators, valves, relays/switches, control panels, and operator interface equipment.

2. Control System Software: Include technical data for operating system software, operator interface, color graphics, and other third-party applications.



3. Controlled Systems: Instrumentation list with element name, type of device, manufacturer, model number, and product data. Include written description of sequence of operation including schematic diagram.


1. Bill of materials of equipment indicating quantity, manufacturer, and model number. 2. Schematic flow diagrams showing fans, pumps, coils, dampers, valves, and control

devices. 3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. 4. Details of control panel faces, including controls, instruments, and labeling. 5. Written description of sequence of operation. 6. Schedule of valves including flow characteristics. 7. DDC System Hardware:

a. Wiring diagrams for control units with termination numbers. b. Schematic diagrams and floor plans for field sensors and control hardware. c. Schematic diagrams for control, communication, and power wiring, showing trunk

data conductors and wiring between operator workstation and control unit locations.

8. Control System Software: List of color graphics indicating monitored systems, data (connected and calculated) point addresses, output schedule, and operator notations.

9. Controlled Systems:

a. Schematic diagrams of each controlled system with control points labeled and control elements graphically shown, with wiring.

b. Scaled drawings showing mounting, routing, and wiring of elements including bases and special construction.

c. Written description of sequence of operation including schematic diagram. d. Points list.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each color required, of each type of thermostat or sensor cover with factory-applied color finishes.


A. Data Communications Protocol Certificates: Certify that each proposed DDC system component complies with ASHRAE 135.

B. Qualification Data: For Installer.

C. Software Upgrade Kit: For ATST POC to use in modifying software to suit future systems revisions or monitoring and control revisions.





A. Operation and Maintenance Data: ATST POC shall have all keys, passwords and software necessary to modify programming without involving original installing contractor. For HVAC instrumentation and control system to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 01782 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Maintenance instructions and lists of spare parts for each type of control device. 2. Interconnection wiring diagrams with identified and numbered system components and

devices. 3. Keyboard illustrations and step-by-step procedures indexed for each operator function. 4. Inspection period, cleaning methods, cleaning materials recommended, and calibration

tolerances. 5. Calibration records and list of set points.

B. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation: Include the following:

1. Software operating and upgrade manuals. 2. Program Software Backup: On a magnetic media or compact disc, complete with data

files. 3. Device address list. 4. Printout of software application and graphic screens. 5. Software license required by and installed for DDC workstations and control systems.


A. Installer Qualifications: Automatic control system manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of system components required for this Project.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

C. Comply with ASHRAE 135 for DDC system components.


A. Factory-Mounted Components: Where control devices specified in this Section are indicated to be factory mounted on equipment, arrange for shipping of control devices to equipment manufacturer.

B. System Software: Update to latest version of software at Project completion.

1.11 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with plans and room details before installation.



B. Coordinate equipment with Section 13852 "Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System" and Section 13853 "Zoned (DC Loop) Fire-Alarm System" to achieve compatibility with equipment that interfaces with that system.

C. Coordinate supply of conditioned electrical branch circuits for control units and operator workstation.

D. Coordinate equipment with Section 16215 "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control" to achieve compatibility of communication interfaces.

E. Coordinate equipment with Section 16442 "Panelboards" to achieve compatibility with starter coils and annunciation devices.

F. Coordinate equipment with Section 16443 "Motor-Control Centers" to achieve compatibility with motor starters and annunciation devices.

G. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Section 03300 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements. Provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.

2.2 CONTROL SYSTEM

A. Available Manufacturer:

1. Allen-Bradley.

B. Control system shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface equipment, other apparatus, accessories, and software connected to distributed controllers operating in multiuser, multitasking environment on token-passing network and programmed to control mechanical systems. An operator workstation permits interface with the network via dynamic color graphics with each mechanical system, building floor plan, and control device depicted by point-and-click graphics.

C. The facilities management system shall have supervisory control and data acquisition capabilities over the Building Automation System.



2.3 DDC EQUIPMENT

A. Operator Workstation: One PC-based microcomputer with minimum configuration as follows:

1. Motherboard: With 8 integrated USB 2.0 ports, integrated Intel Pro 10/100 (Ethernet), integrated audio, bios, and hardware monitoring.

2. Processor: Intel Pentium Dual Core, 2.8 GHz minimum. 3. RAM: 8 GB. 4. Graphics: Minimum 1GB Radeon HD (1DP/DVI) 5. Monitors: 21.5 inch Flat Screen Wide, VGA/DVI 6. Keyboard: USB 104 Quit Key. 7. Hard Drive: 250 GB, SATA 3.0 G b/s and 8 MB burst Cache. 8. 16X DVD-ROM SATA 9. Mouse: Three button optical wireless. 10. UPS: 1000 VA 120 VAC. 11. OS: Window 7 Professional. 12. Other Software: Microsoft Office Professional 2010.

a) ASHRAE 135 Compliance: Workstation shall use ASHRAE 135 protocol and communicate using ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) datalink/physical layer protocol.

13. Application Software:

a) I/O capability from operator station. b) System security for each operator via software password and access levels. c) Automatic system diagnostics; monitor system and report failures. d. Database creation and support. e) Automatic and manual database save and restore. f) Dynamic color graphic displays with up to 10 screen displays at once. g) Custom graphics generation and graphics library of HVAC equipment and

symbols. h) Alarm processing, messages, and reactions. i) Trend logs retrievable in spreadsheets and database programs. j) Alarm and event processing. k) Object and property status and control. l) Automatic restart of field equipment on restoration of power. m) Data collection, reports, and logs. Include standard reports for the following:

1) Current values of all objects. 2) Current alarm summary. 3) Disabled objects. 4) Alarm lockout objects. 5) Logs.

n) Custom report development. o) Utility and weather reports. p) Workstation application editors for controllers and schedules. q) Maintenance management.



14. Custom Application Software:

a. English language oriented. b. Full-screen character editor/programming environment. c. Allow development of independently executing program modules with

debugging/simulation capability. d. Support conditional statements. e. Support floating-point arithmetic with mathematic functions. f. Contains predefined time variables.

B. Diagnostic Terminal Unit: Portable Laptop-style, PC-based microcomputer terminal capable of accessing system data by connecting to system network with minimum configuration as follows:

1. System: With two integrated USB 2.0 port, integrated Intel Pro 10/100 (Ethernet), integrated audio, bios, and hardware monitoring.

2. Processor: Intel Quad Core 2.2 GHz with 6M cache. 3. Random-Access Memory: 8 GB. 4. Graphics: N Video Quadro 3000M with 2 GB. 5. Monitor: 17 inches, LCD color. 6. Keyboard: QWERTY. 7. Hard-Disk Drive: 750 GB. 8. 8X DVD +/- RW. 9. Pointing Device: Touch pad or other internal device. 10. Operating System: Windows 7 Professional. 11. Other Software: Microsoft Office Professional 2010.

C. Control Units: Modular, comprising processor board with programmable, nonvolatile, random-access memory; local operator access and display panel; integral interface equipment; and backup power source.

1. Units monitor or control each I/O point; process information; execute commands from other control units, devices, and operator stations; and download from or upload to operator workstation or diagnostic terminal unit.

2. Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status. Functions include the following:

a. Global communications. b. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse I/O. c. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points. d. Software applications, scheduling, and alarm processing. e. Testing and developing control algorithms without disrupting field hardware and

controlled environment.

3. Standard Application Programs:

a. Electric Control Programs: Duty cycling, automatic time scheduling, start/stop time optimization, night setback/setup, on-off control with differential sequencing, staggered start, antishort cycling, PID control, DDC with fine tuning, and trend logging.



b. HVAC Control Programs: Optimal run time, supply-air reset. c. Chiller Control Programs: Control function of condenser-water reset, chilled-

water reset, and equipment sequencing. d. Programming Application Features: Include trend point; alarm processing and

messaging; weekly, monthly, and annual scheduling; energy calculations; run-time totalization; and security access.

e. Remote communications. f. Maintenance management. g. Units of Measure: Inch-pound and SI (metric).

4. Local operator interface provides for download from or upload to operator workstation or diagnostic terminal unit.

5. ASHRAE 135 Compliance: Control units shall use ASHRAE 135 protocol and communicate using ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) datalink/physical layer protocol.

D. Local Control Units: Modular, comprising processor board with electronically programmable, nonvolatile, read-only memory; and backup power source.

1. Units monitor or control each I/O point, process information, and download from or upload to operator workstation or diagnostic terminal unit.

2. Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status. Functions include the following:

a. Global communications. b. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse I/O. c. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points.

3. Local operator interface provides for download from or upload to operator workstation or diagnostic terminal unit.

4. ASHRAE 135 Compliance: Control units shall use ASHRAE 135 protocol and communicate using ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) datalink/physical layer protocol.

E. I/O Interface: Hardwired inputs and outputs may tie into system through controllers. Protect points so that shorting will cause no damage to controllers.

1. Binary Inputs: Allow monitoring of on-off signals without external power. 2. Pulse Accumulation Inputs: Accept up to 10 pulses per second. 3. Analog Inputs: Allow monitoring of low-voltage (0- to 10-V dc), current (4 to 20 mA),

or resistance signals. 4. Binary Outputs: Provide on-off or pulsed low-voltage signal, selectable for normally

open or normally closed operation with three-position (on-off-auto) override switches and status lights.

5. Analog Outputs: Provide modulating signal, either low voltage (0- to 10-V dc) or current (4 to 20 mA).

6. Tri-State Outputs: Provide two coordinated binary outputs for control of three-point, floating-type electronic actuators.

7. Universal I/Os: Provide software selectable binary or analog outputs.



F. Power Supplies: Transformers with Class 2 current-limiting type or overcurrent protection; limit connected loads to 80 percent of rated capacity. DC power supply shall match output current and voltage requirements and be full-wave rectifier type with the following:

1. Output ripple of 5.0 mV maximum peak to peak. 2. Combined 1 percent line and load regulation with 100-mic.sec. response time for 50

percent load changes. 3. Built-in overvoltage and overcurrent protection and be able to withstand 150 percent

overload for at least 3 seconds without failure.

G. Power Line Filtering: Internal or external transient voltage and surge suppression for workstations or controllers with the following:

1. Minimum dielectric strength of 1000 V. 2. Maximum response time of 10 nanoseconds. 3. Minimum transverse-mode noise attenuation of 65 dB. 4. Minimum common-mode noise attenuation of 150 dB at 40 to 100 Hz.

2.4 ELECTRONIC SENSORS

A. RTDs and Transmitters:

1. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.2 percent for general use and 0.1 percent for Coudé at calibration point.

2. Wire: Twisted, shielded-pair cable. 3. Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point, 18 inches (460 mm) long; use where not

affected by temperature stratification or where ducts are smaller than 9 sq. ft. (0.84 sq. m).

4. Averaging Elements in Ducts: 24 feet (7.3 m) long, flexible; use where prone to temperature stratification or where ducts are larger than 9 sq. ft. (0.84 sq. m); length as required.

5. Insertion Elements for Liquids: Brass socket with minimum insertion length of 2-1/2 inches (64 mm).

6. Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers. 7. Outside-Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct sunlight. 8. Room Security Sensors: Stainless-steel cover plate with insulated back and security

screws.

B. Humidity Sensors: Bulk polymer sensor element.

1. Accuracy: 2 percent for general use and 0.8 percent for Coudé full range with linear output.

2. Room Sensor Range: 20 to 80 percent relative humidity. 3. Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers. 4. Duct Sensor: 20 to 80 percent relative humidity range with element guard and mounting

plate. 5. Outside-Air Sensor: 20 to 80 percent relative humidity range with mounting enclosure,

suitable for operation at outdoor temperatures of minus 22 to plus 185 deg F (minus 30 to plus 85 deg C).



6. Duct and Sensors: With element guard and mounting plate, range of 0 to 100 percent relative humidity.

C. Pressure Transmitters/Transducers:

1. Static-Pressure Transmitter: Nondirectional sensor with suitable range for expected input, and temperature compensated.

a. Accuracy: 1 percent of full scale with repeatability of 0.5 percent. b. Output: 4 to 20 mA. c. Building Static-Pressure Range: 0- to 0.1-inch wg (0 to 25 Pa). d. Duct Static-Pressure Range: 0- to 5-inch wg (0 to 1240 Pa).

2. Water Pressure Transducers: Stainless-steel diaphragm construction, suitable for service; minimum 150-psig (1034-kPa) operating pressure; linear output 4 to 20 mA.

3. Water Differential-Pressure Transducers: Stainless-steel diaphragm construction, suitable for service; minimum 150-psig (1034-kPa) operating pressure and tested to 300-psig (2070-kPa); linear output 4 to 20 mA.

4. Differential-Pressure Switch (Air or Water): Snap acting, with pilot-duty rating and with suitable scale range and differential.

5. Pressure Transmitters: Direct acting for gas, liquid, or steam service; range suitable for system; linear output 4 to 20 mA.

D. Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers.

2.5 HUMIDISTATS

A. Duct Mounted Humidistats: Electronic insertion, 2 position type with adjustable, 2 percent throttling range 20 to 80 percent operating range, and single- or double-pole contacts.

2.6 STATUS SENSORS

A. Status Inputs for Fans: Differential-pressure switch with pilot-duty rating and with adjustable range of 2- to 10-inch wg (50 to 2480 Pa).

B. Status Inputs for Pumps: Differential-pressure switch with pilot-duty rating and with adjustable pressure-differential range of 8 to 60 psig (55 to 414 kPa), piped across pump.

C. Status Inputs for Electric Motors: Comply with ISA 50.00.01, current-sensing fixed- or split-core transformers with self-powered transmitter, adjustable and suitable for 175 percent of rated motor current.

D. Current Switches: Self-powered, solid-state with adjustable trip current, selected to match current and system output requirements.

E. Electronic Valve/Damper Position Indicator: Visual scale indicating percent of travel and 2- to 10-V dc, feedback signal.



F. Water-Flow Switches: Snap-acting type with pilot-duty rating, stainless-steel or bronze paddle, with appropriate range and differential adjustment, in NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure.

2.7 ACTUATORS

A. Electric Motors: Size to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating action or two-position action.

1. Comply with requirements in Section 15058 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

2. Permanent Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Type: Gear trains completely oil immersed and sealed. Equip spring-return motors with integral spiral-spring mechanism in housings designed for easy removal for service or adjustment of limit switches, auxiliary switches, or feedback potentiometer.

3. Nonspring-Return Motors for Valves Larger Than NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): Size for running torque of 150 in. x lbf (16.9 N x m) and breakaway torque of 300 in. x lbf (33.9 N x m).

4. Spring-Return Motors for Valves Larger Than NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): Size for running and breakaway torque of 150 in. x lbf (16.9 N x m).

5. Nonspring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft. (2.3 sq. m): Size for running torque of 150 in. x lbf (16.9 N x m) and breakaway torque of 300 in. x lbf (33.9 N x m).

6. Spring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft. (2.3 sq. m): Size for running and breakaway torque of 150 in. x lbf (16.9 N x m).

B. Electronic Actuators: Direct-coupled type designed for minimum 60,000 full-stroke cycles at rated torque.

1. Valves: Size for torque required for valve close off at maximum pump differential pressure.

2. Dampers: Size for running torque calculated as follows:

a. Parallel-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 7 inch-lb/sq. ft. (86.8 kg-cm/sq. m) of damper.

b. Opposed-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 5 inch-lb/sq. ft. (62 kg-cm/sq. m) of damper.

c. Parallel-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 4 inch-lb/sq. ft (49.6 kg-cm/sq. m) of damper.

d. Opposed-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 3 inch-lb/sq. ft. (37.2 kg-cm/sq. m) of damper.

e. Dampers with 2- to 3-Inch wg (500 to 750 Pa) of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 1000 to 2500 fpm (5 to 13 m/s): Increase running torque by 1.5.

f. Dampers with 3- to 4-Inch wg (750 to 1000 Pa) of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 2500 to 3000 fpm (13 to 15 m/s): Increase running torque by 2.0.

3. Coupling: V-bolt and V-shaped, toothed cradle. 4. Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation-sensing circuitry. 5. Fail-Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring-return mechanism. Provide external, manual

gear release on nonspring-return actuators. 6. Power Requirements (Two-Position Spring Return): 24-V ac.



7. Power Requirements (Modulating): Maximum 10 VA at 24-V ac or 8 W at 24-V dc. 8. Proportional Signal: 2- to 10-V dc or 4 to 20 mA, and 2- to 10-V dc position feedback

signal. 9. Temperature Rating: Minus 22 to plus 122 deg F (Minus 30 to plus 50 deg C). 10. Temperature Rating (Smoke Dampers): Minus 22 to plus 250 deg F (Minus 30 to plus

121 deg C). 11. Run Time: 30 seconds.

2.8 CONTROL VALVES

A. Control Valves: Factory fabricated, of type, body material, and pressure class based on maximum pressure and temperature rating of piping system, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Hydronic system globe valves shall have the following characteristics:

1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Class 125 bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, renewable composition disc, and screwed ends with backseating capacity repackable under pressure.

2. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Class 125 iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, plug-type disc, flanged ends, and renewable seat and disc.

3. Internal Construction: Replaceable plugs and stainless-steel or brass seats.

a. Single-Seated Valves: Cage trim provides seating and guiding surfaces for plug on top and bottom.

b. Double-Seated Valves: Balanced plug; cage trim provides seating and guiding surfaces for plugs on top and bottom.

4. Sizing: 5-psig (35-kPa) maximum pressure drop at design flow rate or the following:

a. Two Position: Line size. b. Two-Way Modulating: Either the value specified above or twice the load pressure

drop, whichever is more. c. Three-Way Modulating: Twice the load pressure drop, but not more than value

specified above.

5. Flow Characteristics: Two-way valves shall have equal percentage characteristics; three-way valves shall have linear characteristics.

6. Close-Off (Differential) Pressure Rating: Combination of actuator and trim shall provide minimum close-off pressure rating of 150 percent of total system (pump) head for two-way valves and 100 percent of pressure differential across valve or 100 percent of total system (pump) head.

C. Butterfly Valves: 150-psig (1034-kPa) maximum pressure differential, ASTM A 126 cast-iron or ASTM A 536 ductile-iron body and bonnet, extended neck, stainless-steel stem, field-replaceable EPDM or Buna N sleeve and stem seals.

1. Body Style: Lug. 2. Disc Type: Stainless-Steel. 3. Sizing: 1-psig (7-kPa) maximum pressure drop at design flow rate.



2.9 CONTROL CABLE

A. Electronic and fiber-optic cables for control wiring are specified in Section 16717 "Communications Horizontal Cabling."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that power supply is available to control units and operator workstation.

B. Verify that duct-, pipe-, and equipment-mounted devices are installed before proceeding with installation.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install software in control units and operator workstation(s). Implement all features of programs to specified requirements and as appropriate to sequence of operation.

B. Connect and configure equipment and software to achieve sequence of operation specified.

C. Verify location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with Drawings and room details before installation. Install devices 48 inches (1220 mm) above the floor.

1. Install averaging elements in ducts and plenums in crossing or zigzag pattern.

D. Install guards on thermostats in the following locations:

1. Entrances. 2. Public areas. 3. Where indicated.

E. Install automatic dampers according to Section 15820 "Duct Accessories."

F. Install damper motors on outside of duct in warm areas, not in locations exposed to outdoor temperatures.

G. Install labels and nameplates to identify control components according to Section 15077 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

H. Install hydronic instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according to Section 15179 "Hydronic Piping Specialties."

I. Install duct volume-control dampers according to Section 15815 "Metal Ducts" and Section 15816 "Nonmetal Ducts."

J. Install electronic and fiber-optic cables according to Section 16717 "Communications Horizontal Cabling."



3.3 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONNECTION INSTALLATION

A. Install raceways, boxes, and cabinets according to Section 16130 "Raceways and Boxes."

B. Install building wire and cable according to Section 16120 "Conductors and Cables."

C. Install signal and communication cable according to Section 16717 "Communications Horizontal Cabling."

1. Conceal cable, except in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduit and piping are exposed.

2. Install exposed cable in raceway. 3. Install concealed cable in raceway. 4. Bundle and harness multiconductor instrument cable in place of single cables where

several cables follow a common path. 5. Fasten flexible conductors, bridging cabinets and doors, along hinge side; protect against

abrasion. Tie and support conductors. 6. Number-code or color-code conductors for future identification and service of control

system, except local individual room control cables. 7. Install wire and cable with sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration

of piping and equipment.

D. Connect manual-reset limit controls independent of manual-control switch positions. Automatic duct heater resets may be connected in interlock circuit of power controllers.

E. Connect hand-off-auto selector switches to override automatic interlock controls when switch is in hand position.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.


1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. 3. Test calibration of electronic controllers by disconnecting input sensors and stimulating

operation with compatible signal generator. 4. Test each point through its full operating range to verify that safety and operating control

set points are as required. 5. Test each control loop to verify stable mode of operation and compliance with sequence

of operation. Adjust PID actions. 6. Test each system for compliance with sequence of operation. 7. Test software and hardware interlocks.



C. DDC Verification:

1. Verify that instruments are installed before calibration, testing, and loop or leak checks. 2. Check instruments for proper location and accessibility. 3. Check instrument installation for direction of flow, elevation, orientation, insertion depth,

and other applicable considerations. 4. Check instrument tubing for proper fittings, slope, material, and support. 5. Check flow instruments. Inspect tag number and line and bore size, and verify that inlet

side is identified and that meters are installed correctly. 6. Check pressure instruments, piping slope, installation of valve manifold, and self-

contained pressure regulators. 7. Check temperature instruments and material and length of sensing elements. 8. Check control valves. Verify that they are in correct direction. 9. Check DDC system as follows:

a. Verify that DDC controller power supply is from emergency power supply, if applicable.

b. Verify that wires at control panels are tagged with their service designation and approved tagging system.

c. Verify that spare I/O capacity has been provided. d. Verify that DDC controllers are protected from power supply surges.

D. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment and repeat testing procedures.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Calibrating and Adjusting:

1. Calibrate instruments. 2. Make three-point calibration test for both linearity and accuracy for each analog

instrument. 3. Calibrate equipment and procedures using manufacturer's written recommendations and

instruction manuals. Use test equipment with accuracy at least double that of instrument being calibrated.

4. Control System Inputs and Outputs:

a. Check analog inputs at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span. b. Check analog outputs using milliampere meter at 0, 50, and 100 percent output. c. Check digital inputs using jumper wire. d. Check digital outputs using ohmmeter to test for contact making or breaking. e. Check resistance temperature inputs at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span using a

precision-resistant source.

5. Flow:

a. Set differential pressure flow transmitters for 0 and 100 percent values with 3-point calibration accomplished at 50, 90, and 100 percent of span.

b. Manually operate flow switches to verify that they make or break contact.



6. Pressure:

a. Calibrate pressure transmitters at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span. b. Calibrate pressure switches to make or break contacts, with adjustable differential

set at minimum.

7. Temperature:

a. Calibrate resistance temperature transmitters at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span using a precision-resistance source.

b. Calibrate temperature switches to make or break contacts.

8. Stroke and adjust control valves and dampers without positioners, following the manufacturer's recommended procedure, so that valve or damper is 100 percent open and closed.

9. Stroke and adjust control valves and dampers with positioners, following manufacturer's recommended procedure, so that valve and damper is 0, 50, and 100 percent closed.

10. Provide diagnostic and test instruments for calibration and adjustment of system. 11. Provide written description of procedures and equipment for calibrating each type of

instrument. Submit procedures review and approval before initiating startup procedures.

B. Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points.

C. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to three visits to Project during other than normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train ATST POC's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC instrumentation and controls. Refer to Section 01820 "Demonstration and Training."



TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15950 - 1

SECTION 15950 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Balancing Air Systems:

a. Constant-volume air systems. b. Variable-air-volume systems.

2. Balancing Hydronic Piping Systems:

a. Constant-flow hydronic systems. b. Variable-flow hydronic systems.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.

B. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.

C. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

D. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.

E. TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work.


A. Qualification Data: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit documentation that the TAB contractor and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.

B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3.



C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 60 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article.

D. Certified TAB reports.

E. Sample report forms.

F. Instrument calibration reports, to include the following:

1. Instrument type and make. 2. Serial number. 3. Application. 4. Dates of use. 5. Dates of calibration.


A. TAB Contractor Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified by AABC, NEBB or TABB.

1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB contractor and certified by AABC, NEBB or TABB.

2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB contractor and who is certified by AABC, NEBB or TABB as a TAB technician.

B. Certify TAB field data reports and perform the following:

1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB reports.

2. Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification.

C. TAB Report Forms: Use standard TAB contractor's forms approved by ATST POC.

D. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in ASHRAE 111, Section 5, "Instrumentation."


A. Partial ATST POC Occupancy: ATST POC may occupy completed areas of building before Substantial Completion. Cooperate with ATST POC during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with ATST POC's operations.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and times.



B. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.

B. Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify that locations of these balancing devices are accessible.

C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.

D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.

E. Examine ceiling plenums and underfloor air plenums used for supply, return, or relief air to verify that they meet the leakage class of connected ducts as specified in Section 15815 "Metal Ducts" and are properly separated from adjacent areas. Verify that penetrations in plenum walls are sealed and fire-stopped if required.

F. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves.

1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.

2. Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design." Compare results with the design data and installed conditions.

G. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing, cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.

H. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections.

I. Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.

J. Examine terminal units such as variable-air-volume boxes, and verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning.



K. Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens are replaced by permanent screens with indicated perforations.

L. Examine three-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or mixing fluid flows.

M. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.

N. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.

O. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment.

P. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.

B. Complete system-readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following:

1. Permanent electrical-power wiring is complete. 2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air. 3. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational. 4. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed. 5. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open. 6. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational. 7. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and

access to balancing devices is provided. 8. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be

met.

3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING

A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in AABC's "National Standards for Total System Balance" or NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems" and in this Section.

B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures.

1. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness as used to construct ducts.

2. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation, coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Section 15086 "Duct Insulation," Section 15087 "HVAC Equipment Insulation," and Section 15088 "HVAC Piping Insulation."



C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings.

D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) and metric (SI) units.

3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.

C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.

D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements.

E. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.

F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.

G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.

H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.

I. Check for airflow blockages.

J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.

K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components.

L. Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Section 15815 "Metal Ducts."

3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS

A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer.

1. Measure total airflow.

a. Where sufficient space in ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow.

2. Measure fan static pressures as follows to determine actual static pressure:



a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practical and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.

b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection. c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as

possible, upstream from the flexible connection, and downstream from duct restrictions.

d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum that houses the fan.

3. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit, rooftop unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment.

a. Report the cleanliness status of filters and the time static pressures are measured.

4. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices, such as sound traps, heat-recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions.

5. Obtain approval from ATST POC for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than indicated speed. Comply with requirements in HVAC Sections for air-handling units for adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated air-handling-unit performance.

6. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full-cooling, full-heating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum required brake horsepower.

B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.

1. Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts.

a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow for that zone.

2. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper, and adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.

3. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.

C. Measure air outlets and inlets without making adjustments.

1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written instructions and calculating factors.

D. Adjust air outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments using branch volume dampers rather than extractors and the dampers at air terminals.



1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the Contract Documents.

2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.

3.6 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Measure water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures except for positive-displacement pumps:

1. Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed. Read pressure differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in gage heights. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow and verify that the pump has the intended impeller size.

a. If impeller sizes must be adjusted to achieve pump performance, obtain approval from ATST POC and comply with requirements in Section 15185 "Hydronic Pumps."

2. Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across the pump and mark pump manufacturer's head-capacity curve. Adjust pump discharge valve until indicated water flow is achieved.

a. Monitor motor performance during procedures and do not operate motors in overload conditions.

3. Verify pump-motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake horsepower for the system based on pump manufacturer's performance data. Compare calculated brake horsepower with nameplate data on the pump motor. Report conditions where actual amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage.

4. Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 10 percent of design.

B. Measure flow at all automatic flow control valves to verify that valves are functioning as designed.

C. Measure flow at all pressure-independent characterized control valves, with valves in fully open position, to verify that valves are functioning as designed.

D. Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated presettings.

E. Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance.

1. System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow-pressure-drop relationship may be used as a flow-indicating device.

F. Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve flow that is 5 percent greater than indicated flow.

G. Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of indicated flow rate as follows:



1. Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over indicated flow. 2. Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage over

indicated flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over indicated flow.

3. Record settings and mark balancing devices.

H. Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage, rpm, pump heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures including outdoor-air temperature.

I. Measure the differential-pressure-control-valve settings existing at the conclusion of balancing.

J. Check settings and operation of each safety valve. Record settings.

3.7 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Balance systems with automatic two- and three-way control valves by setting systems at maximum flow through heat-exchange terminals and proceed as specified above for hydronic systems.

3.8 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT EXCHANGERS

A. Measure water flow through all circuits.

B. Adjust water flow to within specified tolerances.

C. Measure inlet and outlet water temperatures.

D. Measure inlet steam pressure.

E. Check settings and operation of safety and relief valves. Record settings.

3.9 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS

A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:

1. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number. 2. Motor horsepower rating. 3. Motor rpm. 4. Efficiency rating. 5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase. 6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase. 7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.

B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass of the controller to prove proper operation. Record observations including name of controller manufacturer, model number, serial number, and nameplate data.



3.10 PROCEDURES FOR CHILLERS

A. Balance water flow through each evaporator and condenser to within specified tolerances of indicated flow with all pumps operating. With only one chiller operating in a multiple chiller installation, do not exceed the flow for the maximum tube velocity recommended by the chiller manufacturer. Measure and record the following data with each chiller operating at design conditions:

1. Evaporator-water entering and leaving temperatures, pressure drop, and water flow. 2. For water-cooled chillers, condenser-water entering and leaving temperatures, pressure

drop, and water flow. 3. Evaporator and condenser refrigerant temperatures and pressures, using instruments

furnished by chiller manufacturer. 4. Power factor if factory-installed instrumentation is furnished for measuring kilowatts. 5. Kilowatt input if factory-installed instrumentation is furnished for measuring kilowatts. 6. Capacity: Calculate in tons of cooling.

3.11 PROCEDURES FOR BOILERS

A. Hydronic Boilers: Measure and record entering- and leaving-water temperatures and water flow.

3.12 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT-TRANSFER COILS

A. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each water coil:

1. Entering- and leaving-water temperature. 2. Water flow rate. 3. Water pressure drop. 4. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 5. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air for cooling coils. 6. Airflow. 7. Air pressure drop.

3.13 TOLERANCES

A. Set HVAC system's air flow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances:

1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent. 2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent. 3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent. 4. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent.

3.14 REPORTING

A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems'



balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices.

3.15 FINAL REPORT

A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections for tested systems and balanced systems.

1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer.

2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.

B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following:

1. Pump curves. 2. Fan curves. 3. Manufacturers' test data. 4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers. 5. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and

product data.

C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data:

1. Title page. 2. Name and address of the TAB contractor. 3. Project name. 4. Project location. 5. ATST POC's name and address. 6. ATST POC's name and address. 7. Contractor's name and address. 8. Report date. 9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report. 10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report.

Number each page in the report. 11. Summary of contents including the following:

a. Indicated versus final performance. b. Notable characteristics of systems. c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract

Documents.

12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. 13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings. 14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values. 15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:

a. Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.



b. Conditions of filters. c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions. d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils. e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter. f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems. g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller. h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.

D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present each system with single-line diagram and include the following:

1. Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows. 2. Water and steam flow rates. 3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes. 4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations. 5. Terminal units. 6. Balancing stations. 7. Position of balancing devices.

E. Air-Handling-Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following:

1. Unit Data:

a. Unit identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and unit size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Unit arrangement and class. g. Discharge arrangement. h. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore. i. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches (mm). j. Number, make, and size of belts. k. Number, type, and size of filters.

2. Motor Data:

a. Motor make, and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and rpm. c. Volts, phase, and hertz. d. Full-load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore. f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches (mm).

3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):

a. Total air flow rate in cfm (L/s). b. Total system static pressure in inches wg (Pa). c. Fan rpm. d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg (Pa).



e. Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa). f. Preheat-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa). g. Cooling-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa). h. Heating-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa). i. Outdoor airflow in cfm (L/s). j. Return airflow in cfm (L/s). k. Outdoor-air damper position. l. Return-air damper position. m. Vortex damper position.

F. Apparatus-Coil Test Reports:

1. Coil Data:

a. System identification. b. Location. c. Coil type. d. Number of rows. e. Fin spacing in fins per inch (mm) o.c. f. Make and model number. g. Face area in sq. ft. (sq. m). h. Tube size in NPS (DN). i. Tube and fin materials. j. Circuiting arrangement.


a. Air flow rate in cfm (L/s). b. Average face velocity in fpm (m/s). c. Air pressure drop in inches wg (Pa). d. Outdoor-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg C). e. Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg C). f. Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg C). g. Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg C). h. Water flow rate in gpm (L/s). i. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig (kPa). j. Entering-water temperature in deg F (deg C). k. Leaving-water temperature in deg F (deg C). l. Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types. m. Refrigerant suction pressure in psig (kPa). n. Refrigerant suction temperature in deg F (deg C). o. Inlet steam pressure in psig (kPa).

G. Electric-Coil Test Reports: For electric furnaces, duct coils, and electric coils installed in central-station air-handling units, include the following:

1. Unit Data:

a. System identification. b. Location.



c. Coil identification. d. Capacity in Btu/h (kW). e. Number of stages. f. Connected volts, phase, and hertz. g. Rated amperage. h. Air flow rate in cfm (L/s). i. Face area in sq. ft. (sq. m). j. Minimum face velocity in fpm (m/s).


a. Heat output in Btu/h (kW). b. Air flow rate in cfm (L/s). c. Air velocity in fpm (m/s). d. Entering-air temperature in deg F (deg C). e. Leaving-air temperature in deg F (deg C). f. Voltage at each connection. g. Amperage for each phase.

H. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:

1. Fan Data:

a. System identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Arrangement and class. g. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore. h. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches (mm).

2. Motor Data:

a. Motor make, and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and rpm. c. Volts, phase, and hertz. d. Full-load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore. f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches (mm). g. Number, make, and size of belts.


a. Total airflow rate in cfm (L/s). b. Total system static pressure in inches wg (Pa). c. Fan rpm. d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg (Pa). e. Suction static pressure in inches wg (Pa).



I. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid representing the duct cross-section and record the following:

1. Report Data:

a. System and air-handling-unit number. b. Location and zone. c. Traverse air temperature in deg F (deg C). d. Duct static pressure in inches wg (Pa). e. Duct size in inches (mm). f. Duct area in sq. ft. (sq. m). g. Indicated air flow rate in cfm (L/s). h. Indicated velocity in fpm (m/s). i. Actual air flow rate in cfm (L/s). j. Actual average velocity in fpm (m/s). k. Barometric pressure in psig (Pa).

J. Air-Terminal-Device Reports:

1. Unit Data:

a. System and air-handling unit identification. b. Location and zone. c. Apparatus used for test. d. Area served. e. Make. f. Number from system diagram. g. Type and model number. h. Size. i. Effective area in sq. ft. (sq. m).


a. Air flow rate in cfm (L/s). b. Air velocity in fpm (m/s). c. Preliminary air flow rate as needed in cfm (L/s). d. Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm (m/s). e. Final air flow rate in cfm (L/s). f. Final velocity in fpm (m/s). g. Space temperature in deg F (deg C).

K. System-Coil Reports: For reheat coils and water coils of terminal units, include the following:

1. Unit Data:

a. System and air-handling-unit identification. b. Location and zone. c. Room or riser served. d. Coil make and size.



e. Flowmeter type.


a. Air flow rate in cfm (L/s). b. Entering-water temperature in deg F (deg C). c. Leaving-water temperature in deg F (deg C). d. Water pressure drop in feet of head or psig (kPa). e. Entering-air temperature in deg F (deg C). f. Leaving-air temperature in deg F (deg C).

L. Pump Test Reports: Calculate impeller size by plotting the shutoff head on pump curves and include the following:

1. Unit Data:

a. Unit identification. b. Location. c. Service. d. Make and size. e. Model number and serial number. f. Water flow rate in gpm (L/s). g. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig (kPa). h. Required net positive suction head in feet of head or psig (kPa). i. Pump rpm. j. Impeller diameter in inches (mm). k. Motor make and frame size. l. Motor horsepower and rpm. m. Voltage at each connection. n. Amperage for each phase. o. Full-load amperage and service factor. p. Seal type.


a. Static head in feet of head or psig (kPa). b. Pump shutoff pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa). c. Actual impeller size in inches (mm). d. Full-open flow rate in gpm (L/s). e. Full-open pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa). f. Final discharge pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa). g. Final suction pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa). h. Final total pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa). i. Final water flow rate in gpm (L/s). j. Voltage at each connection. k. Amperage for each phase.

M. Instrument Calibration Reports:

1. Report Data:



a. Instrument type and make. b. Serial number. c. Application. d. Dates of use. e. Dates of calibration.

3.16 INSPECTIONS

A. Initial Inspection:

1. After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly check measurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final test and balance readings documented in the final report.

2. Check the following for each system:

a. Measure airflow of at least 10 percent of air outlets. b. Measure water flow of at least 5 percent of terminals. c. Measure room temperature at each thermostat/temperature sensor. Compare the

reading to the set point. d. Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance position. e. Note deviations from the Contract Documents in the final report.

B. Final Inspection:

1. After initial inspection is complete and documentation by random checks verifies that testing and balancing are complete and accurately documented in the final report, request that a final inspection be made by ATST POC.

2. The TAB contractor's test and balance ATST POC shall conduct the inspection in the presence of ATST POC.

3. ATST POC shall randomly select measurements, documented in the final report, to be rechecked. Rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total measurements recorded or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a normal 8-hour business day.

4. If rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as "FAILED."

5. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be considered incomplete and shall be rejected.

C. TAB Work will be considered defective if it does not pass final inspections. If TAB Work fails, proceed as follows:

1. Recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report and balancing device settings to include all changes; resubmit the final report and request a second final inspection.



2. If the second final inspection also fails, ATST POC may contract the services of another TAB contractor to complete TAB Work according to the Contract Documents and deduct the cost of the services from the original TAB contractor's final payment.


3.17 ADDITIONAL TESTS

A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.

B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near-peak summer and winter conditions.



GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK 16000 - 1

SECTION 16000 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 The requirements set out in Bidders Documents, Contract Forms, General Conditions, supplementary General Conditions and General Requirements apply to all Work specified hereinafter in sections of this subdivision.

1.2 BUILDING CONSTRUCTION

A. Refer to Architectural, Structural and Mechanical Drawings and Specifications to become familiar with the general building construction and details as they apply to the Work of this division. Contractor is responsible for all equipment mounting, conduit routing, or incidental work that may be necessary because of Architectural or structural details, whether or not they are shown on the electrical drawings.

1.3 SCOPE

A. The Work covered by this section shall include the furnishing of all materials, labor, transportation, tools, permits, fees, and incidentals necessary for the installation of a complete electrical system. This section applies to all sections of Division 16.

B. It is the intent of these contract documents to provide an installation complete in every respect. In the event that additional details or special construction is required for Work indicated or specified in this or other sections, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide all materials and equipment which is usually furnished with such systems in order to complete the installation, whether mentioned or not.

C. All apparatus, appliances, material, or labor that may be necessary to complete work in accordance with the intent and purposes of these plans and Specifications shall be furnished by the Contractor without extra cost to the ATST POC.

D. Omission of express reference to any parts necessary for, or reasonably incidental to, a complete installation shall not be construed as releasing Contractor from finishing such parts. The electrical system as supplied shall be complete and functioning, with all electrical items furnished in operable condition.

1.4 CODES, FEES, AND LATERAL COSTS

A. Comply with applicable codes, rules, regulations, and building and safety laws relating to construction, public health and safety.

B. Where Contractor proposes to use an item of equipment other than that specified or detailed on the Drawing, which requires any redesign of the structure, partitions, foundations, piping, wiring or any other part of the mechanical, electrical or Architectural layout, all such redesign and all the new Drawings and detailing required therefore, shall be prepared by the Contractor proposing the change at his own expense and shall be submitted for approval by the ATST POC. Where such approved deviation requires a different quantity and arrangement of ductwork, piping, wiring, conduit, and equipment from that specified or indicated on the



Drawings, Contractor shall furnish and install any such ductwork, piping, structural supports, insulation, controllers, motors, starters, equipment, electrical wiring and conduit, and any other additional components required by the system at no additional cost to the ATST POC.

C. Give necessary notices, obtain permits, and pay taxes, fees and other costs in connection with the Work; file necessary plans, and obtain necessary approvals of regulating authorities having jurisdiction; obtain all required Certificates of Inspection for Work and deliver to the ATST POC before request for acceptance and final payment of the Contract.

D. Provide all labor, materials, services, apparatus, Drawings (in addition to Contract Documents) required to comply with applicable laws, ordinances, rules and regulations.

E. Contract Documents take precedence when they are more stringent than codes, ordinances, standards and statutes. Codes, ordinances, standards and statutes take precedence when they are more stringent or conflict with Drawings and Specifications. Following industry standards, Specifications and Codes are minimum requirements (latest issue as of date of Contract):

1. Applicable municipal, county and state electrical, health and sanitary codes, laws and ordinances.

2. National Electrical Code. 3. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association Standards. 4. National Electrical Safety Code. 5. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Standards. 6. American National Standards Institute. 7. American Society for Testing Materials Standards. 8. Standards and requirements of local utility companies. 9. National Fire Protection Association Standards. 10. Occupational Safety and Health Act. 11. American with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines.

1.5 DRAWINGS

A. The Drawings are generally diagrammatic, intended to define the Scope and show the general arrangement of the Work. They are not intended to show every offset, fitting, or structural difficulty that may be encountered during the installation of the Work.

B. The accompanying Drawings are intended to show the general arrangement and the extent of the Work. The exact location and arrangement of all parts shall be determined as the Work progresses to conform in the best possible manner with the surroundings and as directed by the ATST POC.

C. If any departures from the Drawings are deemed necessary by the Contractor, details of such departures and the reasons therefore shall be submitted to the ATST POC for review. No departures shall be made without prior written acceptance of the ATST POC.

D. Figured dimensions should be followed without reference to scale. Where dimensions are not figured, measurements shall be scaled.



E. A fresh, clean set of plans on which actual installed positions of all equipment is legibly recorded and designated “as built” shall be furnished to the ATATST POC upon completion and acceptance of Work and before final payment is made.

1.6 CONFLICTS

A. Where conflicts occur between the Drawings and Specifications or within the Drawings and/or Specifications, the most restrictive requirements shall apply.

B. Do not prevent or disturb operation of active services, which are to remain. If Work makes temporary shutdown of services unavoidable, consult with the ATST POC as to dates, procedures and estimated duration of shutdown period at least ten working days in advance of date when Work is to be performed. Arrange work for continuous performance to assure that existing operating services will be shutdown only during the time required to make necessary connections. If a system cannot be shutdown, install temporary bypass until final connections are complete.

1.7 INTERFERENCES AND COOPERATION

A. The plans are generally diagrammatic and the Contractor must coordinate the Work of the different trades so that interferences between piping, equipment, structural, and architectural work shall be avoided. The Contractor shall cooperate with the General Contractor and all other Contractors to coordinate their work, to harmonize in service and appearance of all parts.

B. It is the intent of the Specifications and Drawings to call for finished work, tested and ready for operation. Provide all apparatus, appliances, materials and work as shown on Drawings, and/or indicated in the Specifications. Any incidental accessories necessary to make the Work complete and ready for operation shall be provided without additional expense to the ATST POC. Should there appear to be discrepancies between or questionable intent of the Contract Documents, the ATST POC shall be consulted for clarification, before any material or equipment is ordered or Work is begun. For any discrepancies which are not resolved at bid time base bid on the most expensive requirements.

C. The Drawings are generally diagrammatic, intended to define the Scope and show the general arrangement of the Work. They are not intended to show every offset, fitting, or structural difficulty that may be encountered during the installation of the Work. The Specifications denote the style and quality of workmanship to be employed. Where a conflict exists between the Drawings and Specifications, promptly notify the ATST POC for proper interpretation and final decision. Should conditions require revisions to space requirements or major rearrangement to suit the design of equipment proposed for installation, submit working Drawings showing in detail the changes and arrangements for space and revisions to the Work specified under the other Divisions before proceeding with the Work. Do not decrease sizes or make radical changes in the installation without obtaining prior written consent from the ATST POC. Changes to Work, which become necessary on account of failure to coordinate the Work, shall be made at the Contractor’s expense.



D. The Contractor is responsible for insuring that all conduit sleeves are timely installed and are sealed, flashed or caulked to the satisfaction of the ATST POC.

E. Do not prevent or disturb operation of active services, which are to remain. If Work makes temporary shutdown of services unavoidable, consult with ATST POC as to dates, procedures and estimated duration of shutdown period at least ten working days in advance of date when Work is to be performed. Arrange Work for continuous performance to assure that existing operating services will be shutdown only during the time required to make necessary connections. If a system cannot be shutdown, install temporary bypass until final connections are complete.

1.8 CODES AND STANDARDS

A. All Work shall be in compliance with all applicable portions of the latest edition of the National Electrical Code (NEC), the National Electrical Safety Code (NESC), city codes and ordinances, terms and conditions of local utility and other codes which may be specifically referenced in these Specifications. None of the terms or provisions of this Specification shall be construed as waiving any of the rules, regulations or requirements of these authorities.

B. In any instance where these Specifications or the Drawings call for materials for construction of a better quality or larger size than required by the codes, the provisions of these Specifications shall take precedence. The codes shall govern in case of direct conflict between the codes and the Drawings.

C. Furnish and install all equipment necessary for proper operation of the system. Furnish, install, adjust, and leave in a safe and satisfactory condition materials and equipment mentioned in the Specifications, shown on the Drawings or both. Furnish and install supplies, appliances, and connections necessary to the proper operation of the equipment.

D. Work to be done under this section includes, but is not limited to, furnishing of all labor, material, equipment and services necessary for proper completion of all electrical work as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. In general, this consists of wiring for light and power, provision of wiring telephone and miscellaneous electric systems, and the installation of lighting fixtures and any other equipment as hereinafter specified. Electrical work shall be furnished with all wiring, conduit, fittings, equipment and connections, as specified or required, to make a complete and functioning system.

E. Omission of express reference to any parts necessary for, or reasonably incidental to, a complete installation shall not be construed as releasing Contractor from furnishing such parts. The electrical system as supplied shall be complete and functioning, with all electrical items furnished in operable condition.

F. All materials shall be new and of quality grade, standard manufacturer. All equipment and materials of a type for which the Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. (“UL”) has established a standard shall be listed by UL for the intended use and shall bear the UL label.



1.9 TEMPORARY POWER

A. The Electrical Contractor shall coordinate with the local utility company, the General Contractor and other trades involved to determine requirements for temporary power on this project. No additional charges shall be made to the ATST POC for wiring, connections, poles, fixtures, or devices required to facilitate construction.

B. The electrical Contractor shall provide the necessary wiring, connections, services switches, poles, wring protective devices, lighting fixtures, lamps, outlet devices, disconnect switches, etc., as required for temporary lighting. In addition, a similar system shall be provided for the distribution of single and three phase power of voltage levels and adequate ampacity as required to facilitate the construction of the project. These services shall be installed in accordance with requirements of the NEC and OSHA.

1.10 SITE EXAMINATION

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination and proper relation of his work to the building structure and to the work of all trades. The Contractor shall visit the premises to thoroughly familiarize himself with all details of the Work and working conditions and to verify all dimensions in the field. The Contractor shall advise the ATST POC of any discrepancy at least seven (7) days prior to bidding. The submission of bids shall be deemed evidence of the Contractor’s site visit, the coordination of all existing conditions, and the inclusion of all considerations for existing conditions.

B. Review all Contract Documents to verify the location of the various building components and items to be installed by other trades. Coordinate the Work schedule for a minimum of interference with the Work of other trades. Ascertain temporary openings required for admission of electrical equipment and coordinate requirements with work of other trades.

C. Coordinate with the Work of other Divisions for determining space requirements and adequate clearances with respect to other equipment in the building. The ATST POC reserves the right to determine space priority in the event of interferences between piping, conduit, ductwork and equipment of various trades.

1.11 VISITING THE PREMISES

A. Before ordering material or doing Work, visit the premises and become thoroughly familiar with the general layout of the building site and the location of existing services to which connections shall be made. Check present grades, ditches, pavements, and other conditions affecting utility installations.

B. Verify measurements at the building to the greatest extent possible prior to fabrication. Where sequence of measuring before fabrication would delay the Project, proceed with fabrication allowing ample tolerances and providing offsets to accommodate as-built conditions. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for making a proper and thorough investigation of requirements. Submit significant differences found to the ATST POC for consideration before proceeding with corrective measures.



1.12 UTILITIES

A. The contract documents reflect the general location, voltage, capacity, size, and manner of routing for all utilities known to be required on this project. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to visit the site and meet with the local utility companies in order to coordinate and conform the exact requirements for all electrical utilities, including but not limited to all facilities required to provide complete and operative electrical power and telephone services. The bid submitted by the Contractor shall include costs for all such coordinative work as well as any and all utility company charges or fees.

B. Locations of equipment and conduit shown on the Drawings are diagrammatic and approximately correct. Exact locations shall be determined on the job and governed by structural conditions of the building and coordination with other Contractors.

C. Do not prevent or disturb operation of active services, which are to remain.

D. If Work makes temporary shutdown of services unavoidable, consult with ATST POC as to dates, procedures and estimated duration of shutdown period at least ten working days in advance of date when Work is to be performed. Arrange Work for continuous performance to assure that existing operating services will be shutdown only during the time required to make necessary connections. If a system cannot be shut down, install temporary bypasses until final connections are complete.

E. Existing utility services or installations are indicated on the Drawings in accordance with the best available information. Determine the exact location of service lines or installations encountered in the performance of Work and provide suitable protection, support and maintenance.

F. Repair or replace immediately, utility services or installations damaged in the performance of Work. Obtain written approval of the repair or replacement from the ATST POC and the utility company.

G. If existing active utility services are encountered which require relocation, make request of proper authorities for determination of procedures. Properly terminate existing services to be abandoned in conformance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

H. All removed equipment shall remain the property of the ATST POC unless otherwise provided by other articles of these Specifications.

1.13 MECHANICAL CONTROL EQUIPMENT

A. The Contractor is responsible for coordinating the electrical and the mechanical trades, before bid date. The electrical drawings will indicate only branch circuit power supplies.

B. All wiring conduit and other electrical devices or material not shown on the electrical drawings or called for in the electrical specifications, required for the proper operation of products and equipment furnished under Division 15, shall be installed by the Contractor responsible for installation of such product or equipment, under Division 15, in strict accordance with the requirements of Division 16.



C. In the event that the power supply, wiring, disconnect devices, starters, or any of the electrical services indicated on the electrical drawings or in the electrical specifications are incompatible with the products or equipment furnished under Division 15 of the Specifications, the Contractor shall notify the ATST POC and coordinate any required changes at no additional cost to the ATST POC.

1.14 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT

A. Contractor shall verify location and size of all mechanical equipment and controls prior to installation.

1.15 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Where it becomes necessary to drill into or cut through any newly completed floor, walls, or ceilings to permit the installation of any Work under this contract, or to repair any defects that may appear to the expiration of the warranty, such cutting shall be done under the supervision of the ATST POC by the Contractor. After the necessary work has been completed, the damage shall be repaired by the Contractor, who shall pay all costs of such cutting and repairing.

B. No joists, beams, girders or columns shall be cut by any Contractor without first obtaining written permission from the ATST POC.

C. All drilling for expansion bolts, hangers and other supports shall be done by the Contractor, subject to the approval of the ATST POC. Labor and materials required to replace or rebuild parts cut or injured shall be furnished at the Contractor’s expenses, subject to the satisfaction of the ATST POC.

D. Provide fire retardant UL approved sealant on all raceway penetrations of fire rated ceilings, partitions, walls and slabs. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to verify, prior to submitting bid, locations of all such fire rated walls, partitions, ceilings and slabs.

1.16 ACCESS TO ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

A. General: The work of this article is limited to access of electrical equipment through other work, and does not include required access for electrical equipment systems (see individual work sections of Division 16). Furnish adequate access doors and removable access plates to other trades involved prior to performance of their work to minimize cutting and patching which would otherwise be required.

B. Coordination: The exact location and size of each access panel and removable plate required shall be determined prior to installation and such information shall be submitted to the ATST POC for review and approval. Adjustments may be directed by the ATST POC for the purposes of controlling visual impact of units. To largest extent possible, prearrange unit locations to minimize number required.

1.17 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated by technical provisions of individual sections within Division 16, final electrical connections of equipment shall be provided under Division 16.



B. Provide hard service cords and proper receptacles, where required, for “cord and plug connected” equipment.

C. Where equipment furnished by others includes plug, cord set or mechanical fitting, which do not match the receptacle as installed, change the outlet or change the plug, cord set or mechanical fitting as required, all at no extra cost to the ATST POC.

1.18 ELECTRICAL GENERAL EQUIPMENT PROVISIONS

A. General: Furnish materials and equipment that is standard products of a reputable manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the specified item. All items shall be furnished by the same manufacturer where more than one unit is required, except where specified otherwise.

B. Install material and equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Contact ATST POC immediately if variance occurs between Contract Documents and manufacturer’s recommendations so that variations in installation can be known by all parties concerned.

C. Deliver materials or equipment to the Project in the manufacturer’s original, unopened, labeled containers. Protect from damage caused by theft, the weather, and building operations. Failure to protect the materials and apparatus adequately shall be sufficient cause for the rejection of any damaged material or equipment. Close pipe and equipment openings to prevent obstructions and damage.

D. ATST POC may require removal from the premises, of such material or work, which is not in accordance with Contract Documents. Unsatisfactory work shall be replaced without delay, without additional cost to the ATST POC.

1.19 MOTORS

A. Motors supplied with packaged equipment shall meet UL and NEMA standards for the application and environment depicted by Contract Drawings.

B. Motors supplied in outdoor situations, exposed to the elements of nature shall be 1.15 service factor, 50 deg C ambient and 40 deg C temperature rise over the 50 deg C ambient.

C. Coordinate with Mechanical Specifications, Drawings and ATST POC prior to bid date.

1.20 MOTOR CONTROLLERS

A. Controllers are provided by the Electrical Contractor, unless furnished as an integral part of manufacturer’s package equipment or specified to be furnished with equipment. Responsibility for providing starter compatible with motor furnished rests with Contractor.

1.21 SEPARATE CONDUIT SYSTEMS

A. Each electrical and signal system shall be contained in a separate conduit system. This includes each power system, each lighting system, fiber optic and copper communication system, emergency system, security system, fire alarm system, etc.



B. Each wiring item of building equipment shall have its own run of power wiring. Control wiring may be included in the same conduit, if properly sized, for equipment feeders of #6 AWG and smaller. Larger wire shall have separate conduit.

1.22 FLASHING

A. Coordinate flashing and counter flashing all electrical penetrations of roofing membrane, as shown or specified with roofing membrane installer.

1.23 RUST PROOFING

A. Rust proofing primer shall be applied as work of this section to all-ferrous metal, pipe racks, hangers, stands, supports, etc. Provide as specified in Painting Section 09900.

1.24 EXCAVATING FOR ELECTRICAL WORK

A. General: The work shall include excavating and backfilling necessary for installation of electrical work. Coordinate the work with other work in the same area, including dewatering, flood protection, other temporary facilities, existing underground facilities, landscape development, paving, floor slabs on grade, and other underground services.

B. Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of Division 2 sections and specific requirements of individual sections within Division 16. (Requirements indicated in individual sections shall supersede requirements of Division 2).

C. Each contractor shall excavate backfill and remove excess dirt in connection with his work.

D. Provide separate trenches for all lines unless otherwise shown.

E. Conduit Support: Provide conduit spacers where more than one conduit is run in a common trench. Sand base or concrete encasement shall be as detailed on the Drawings. Compact previously disturbed and unsatisfactory subsoil to provide adequate and uniform support; or excavate to greater depth and replace with stable compacted sub-base material or low slump concrete, as required for adequate support. Backfill by hand and tamp thoroughly with mechanical tamper.

F. Sequencing: Do not backfill or encase underground conduit until ATST POC has reviewed installation.

G. Roadways: Where conduit is less than 2'-6" below surface of roadway, provide encasement in Class 2500 concrete, 3" minimum coverage all around.

1.25 CONCRETE FOR ELECTRICAL WORK

A. General: The work shall include concrete work, not including concrete equipment pads required for the installation of electrical work.

B. Standards: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with applicable provisions of Division 3 sections and specific requirements of individual sections within Division 16. Refer instances of uncertain applicability to ATST POC for resolution before proceeding. Coordinate the work



with the other concrete work; and coordinate size requirements for equipment PADS specified as work of Division 3, except that concrete pads for power company equipment shall meet power company requirements.

C. Associated Work: Comply with the applicable requirements of Division 5 and 7 sections for joint fillers, sealants and miscellaneous metal components.

D. Where moisture or vapor barrier is indicated under or behind concrete, provide fiber-reinforced, plastic-core, asphalt-saturated felt laminate sheets, 1/8" thick, 70 lbs. per 100 square feet, 0.005 per rating.

E. All required anchor bolts, sleeves, templates and other materials incidental to equipment installation shall be provided by the Contractor. Unless otherwise indicated, anchor bolts shall be of the hook type, of a diameter governed by the equipment base-plated holes; bolts and nuts shall be ASTM-A-107, of a hexagon form, ASA B1.1 Coarse Thread, Class 1 Fit. Exposed bolt-thread projection above top of nut shall not exceed 1/4" after placement and leveling of equipment and leveling of equipment base plate.

F. Steel shims and grouting shall be provided by the Contractor as necessary to insure accurate leveling of base plates. Concrete floors and/or pavement surfaces shall be scarfed, cleaned and wetted as necessary to insure bond to concrete bases.

1.26 HOUSEKEEPING PADS

A. Each piece of floor mounted equipment, such as switchboards, transformers, etc., shall be set on neat cement finished, structural grade concrete bases. Bases shall be not less than 4" high and shall be pinned to the floor.

1.27 PAINTING FOR ELECTRICAL WORK

A. Refer to Section 09900 for painting requirements.

1.28 VIBRATION ISOLATION

A. The Contractor shall furnish and install vibration isolation means for all equipment materials furnished under this contract to prevent transmission of perceptible vibration, structure borne, air borne noise to occupied areas.

B. All transformers, switchgear, UPS, etc. shall be mounted on one inch (1") thick cork rib pads and/or rubber or steel spring isolator units properly sized, spaced, and loaded, as specified herein, which in turn shall rest on a 4" minimum concrete base.

C. Electrical conduit shall be isolated from all dry type transformers, rotating or reciprocating machinery with a minimum of 24" of PVC coated liquid tight flexible steel conduit with matching compression connectors.



1.29 STORAGE AT SITE

A. The Contractor shall not receive material or equipment at the job site until ready for installation or until there is suitable space provided to properly protect equipment from rust, weather, humidity, dust or physical damage.

B. Store service entrance and distribution switchboards in a clean, dry, and conditioned environment protected from the weather, sealed in original factory wrapping. Storage outdoors is not acceptable. Use precaution to prevent switchboards from falling over during storage.

1.30 CLEANING

A. The Contractor shall, at all times, keep the premises free from accumulations of waste material and packaging debris. This debris shall be removed daily from construction site.

1.31 IDENTIFICATION AND LABELING

A. All equipment shall have manufacturer’s nameplate permanently affixed in obvious location. Panels shall contain a typed index card identifying all circuits.

1.32 WIRE IDENTIFICATION

A. Refer to Specification Section 16075 "Electrical Identification."

1.33 NAMEPLATE

A. Refer to Specification Section 16075 "Electrical Identification."

B. All J-boxes shall be clearly labeled with indelible black ink, indicating panel, circuit number or bus and switch number.

C. All motors shall be identified with a permanently attached tag with motor name and function corresponding to the motor control center one line.

D. Each alarm device is to be tagged with its zone identification number.

1.34 TESTING REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Before making application for final acceptance of the work, all tests deemed necessary by the ATST POC to show proper execution of the Work shall have been performed and completed in his presence. Scheduling of all testing procedures shall be arranged to provide a minimum of three days’ notice to the ATST POC. Arrange for testing of installed systems in accordance with the requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction and the requirements of Division 16. Provide labor, materials, instruments and power for all testing by procedures specified. Test duration shall be per specifications except when the authority having the jurisdiction requires a longer test period. Comply with additional testing requirements of Section 01210 for Procedures and Controls.

B. Specific Requirements: Wiring shall be tested for continuity, short circuits, and/or accidental grounds. All systems shall be entirely free from “grounds”, “short circuits”, and any or all defects.



C. Motors shall be operating in proper rotation, and control devices functioning properly. Check all motor controllers to determine that properly sized overload devices are installed, and all other electrical equipment for proper operation.

D. Where electricity utilizing equipment, supplied separate from the electrical work, is energized, controlled, or otherwise made operative by electrical systems, the testing to provide the proper functional performance of such wiring systems shall be conducted by the trade responsible for the equipment. The electrical work shall, however, include cooperation in such testing and the making available of any necessary electrical testing equipment.

E. The electrical work shall include the provision of any assistance, such as the removal of panelboard trims and junction and pull box covers, deemed necessary by the ATST POC to demonstrate compliance with the requirement of the Drawings and Specification.

F. Repair or replace defective Work and repeat tests until particular system and component parts thereof receive approval of ATST POC and regulating authority. Repair any damages resulting from tests and replace damaged materials to satisfaction of ATST POC and at no cost to ATST POC.

G. Make final tests in the presence of the appropriate inspector.

H. Furnish copies of test reports and certificates of acceptance, signed by the inspector, to the ATST POC before making claims for final payment; such claims will not be processed until these submittals have been made.

1.35 GUARANTEE

A. The Contractor shall guarantee all labor and materials furnished by him for a period of one (1) year. Certain work and materials shall be guaranteed for a longer period when so specified. Guarantee period shall extend from the time of final acceptance of the installation. The guarantee shall cover the repair or replacement without additional cost to the ATST POC, of any defective material or faulty workmanship. Necessary service to each item and other work requiring specialized training shall be furnished by the Contractor, at no cost to the ATST POC, for a period of one (1) year, concurrent with the warranty period specified above. This shall not include repair of damage due to fire (unless the fire results from faulty material or workmanship on the part of the Contractor), storm, vandalism or other factors entirely beyond the control of the Contractor, nor shall it include such routine service as oiling motor, replacing blown fuses (unless caused by defective performance of the equipment), replacing lamps, nor any other Work not requiring special skill. The above items pertaining to routine servicing of the equipment and motors, replacing fuses or replacing lamps, are the responsibility of the ATST POC unless a service agreement is made between the Contractor and the ATST POC.



PART 2 - PRODUCT

2.1 AS STIPULATED HEREIN.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SUBMITTALS

A. The Contractor shall furnish at least five (5) copies of the manufacturer’s literature and Drawings describing all proposed equipment and materials indicated in the Specifications. The proposed use of the exact equipment and materials specified shall not change this requirement of including literature describing the proposed equipment. The front sheet or brochure shall have job name, Architect, Engineer, Contractor, and Suppliers identified.

B. Shop Drawings and Submittal Data shall be complete in all respects, with all information for all products and services included in one professionally developed package. Partial Submittals may be returned to Contractor by ATST POC without checking.

C. All sheets of the Submittal shall have the job name stamped or permanently written on them and shall be assembled in an indexed brochure. The descriptive materials shall be arranged in the brochure in the same order as found in the Specifications. Each brochure shall be submitted in a three-ring binder. Binders shall be hardback unless ATST POC, at their discretion, allows heavy paper type binders on smaller projects. The leading sheet of the descriptive material for each item shall be full size of heavy paper, with a numbered outside tab, and an index sheet showing the location in the brochure of all equipment and material submitted, shall be placed in the front of the brochure. The index sheet shall be made up to conform to the following example:

-INDEX- Item Specifications Specifications Description No. Paragraph No. Page No.

D. Submittals shall include detailed specifications and construction data. Manufacturer’s regular

catalog sheets will not be acceptable unless they indicate completely all of the Specification requirements including, but not limited to:

1. Labeling. 2. Ampacity, voltage, phase, etc. 3. Physical Size. 4. Light Fixture Photometric Data. 5. Schematics/shop drawings - major equipment only. 6. Point to point fire alarm diagrams.

E. Where submittal sheets cover several sizes or types of equipment, they shall clearly indicate, by

the use of different color ink, the type or size to be used on the project and the use intended. Products submitted as substitutions shall be identified in the index as a subscription.



F. Brochures shall contain a certification that the equipment or materials are suitable for conditions shown and specified; that the equipment or materials are believed to be in conformity with the plans and specifications, except as may be specifically described and that approval is recommended. The certification shall be signed by the Contractor. Brochures received not in conformity with these requirements shall be returned for required action.

G. Approval of the brochures, or any part of the contents therein shall not eliminate responsibility for compliance with the plans and specifications, unless specific attention has been called in writing to proposed deviations at the time of transmittal of the brochures and such deviations have been approved, nor shall it eliminate the requirements or the responsibility for freedom from errors of any sort in the data submitted.

H. Where Contractor desires to use products, material or equipment different that those indicated or specified, or, in the opinion of Contractor, local conditions necessitate an arrangement of materials or equipment different from that indicated on the Drawings, Contractor shall submit for review, six (6) copies of Shop Drawings showing proposed rearrangement. The shop drawings shall be in sufficient detail and of a quality, which will permit the ATST POC to review and approve. Shop Drawings shall be drawn at the same scale (or larger) as the original Contract Documents and on reproducible sheets of uniform size. The Shop Drawings will indicate the method of attachment or mounting of all equipment or materials, the weight of all equipment and material, and the utility and ancillary requirements of all equipment. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate with other any changes or revisions so required, and shall be done at no additional cost to the ATST POC.

I. It is expected that Contractor will diligently review all shop drawings prior to forwarding to the ATST POC for review. In the event that the Contractor Submittals and Shop Drawings must be returned for corrections more than one time, Contractors shall be billed directly by ATST POC for costs related to such additional review time. As an example, if the resubmittal is returned to Contractor for revisions and Contractor’s resubmittal is not acceptable and must be returned for corrections, Contractor will be billed for subsequent review time and expense.

3.2 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

A. All work shall be performed by competent mechanics, skilled in their trade, and shall be executed in a thorough and substantial manner.

B. This Contractor shall be held responsible for transportation of his materials to and on the job and for their storage and protection until the final acceptance of the job.

C. The Contractor shall be held responsible for timely placing of all conduit outlet boxes, cabinets, and other wiring devices in the walls, ceilings, slabs, beams, etc. as construction progresses.

D. Contractor shall furnish all necessary scaffolding, tackle, tools, and appurtenances of all kinds and all labor required for the safe and expeditious execution of his contract.

E. Reference in the Specifications or on the Drawings to any article, device, product, material, fixture, form or type of construction by naming more than one acceptable manufacturer shall be interpreted as establishing a standard of quality and shall not be construed as limiting competition, but the Contractor, in such cases, must get written prior approval for substitution of unnamed manufacturers. Requests for substitution must be received by the Engineer in



writing; at least five (5) working days before bid date. The request shall include a detailed listing of all products and/or device for which acceptance is being requested. Engineering, Specifications Sheets and/or Construction Details shall be included for comparative purposes. If the product is acceptable to the satisfaction of the ATST POC, an addenda item will be issued stating acceptability.

F. If doubt exists about the acceptability or equality of any unnamed product, device, fixture or article, the Contractor shall request written authority for substitution from the Engineer as stated in preceding paragraph. No verbal acceptance will be issued.

G. All equipment shall be installed in a manner to permit access to parts requiring service. All electrical equipment shall be installed in such a manner as to allow removal for service without disassembly of other equipment and shall have working clearances as required by NEC. Any large piece of apparatus which is to be installed in any space in the building, and which is too large to fit through finished openings, shall be placed before enclosing structure is completed. Following placement, such apparatus shall be completely protected from damage.

3.3 START-UP PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK

A. Adjusting and Aligning Equipment:

1. Adjust all equipment. 2. All switches, dimmers, etc. shall be adjusted to work as specified. 3. All wire shall be checked to phase out as intended and shown. 4. All contactors shall be adjusted and aligned to eliminate all unnecessary hum and chatter;

this applies to contactors furnished by other Contractors as well as in this contract. 5. Review all thermal elements in motor control in accordance with motor and thermal

element manufacturer’s recommendations. Replace heater elements where necessary to prevent motor from cutting out.

B. Cleaning:

1. Remove tools, scaffolding, surplus materials, barricades, temporary walks, debris and rubbish from the Project promptly upon completion of that portion of the Work of each section. Leave the area of operations completely clean and free of these items.

2. During course of construction, cap conduit in approved manner to insure adequate protection against entrance of foreign substances.

3. Disconnect, clean and reconnect wherever necessary to locate and remove obstructions from any system stopped by any foreign matter after being placed in operation. Repair or replace any Work damaged in course of removing obstruction at no additional cost to the ATST POC.

C. Operation by ATST POC:

1. ATST POC may require operation of certain systems or parts thereof, prior to final acceptance.

2. Operation is not to be construed as acceptance of Work.



D. Instructions of ATST POC’s Personnel:

1. Prior to acceptance of Work and during time designated by ATST POC, provide necessary qualified personnel to operate each system for period of two consecutive full working days.

2. During operating period, fully instruct ATST POC in complete operation, adjustment care and maintenance of each respective system and piece of equipment.

E. Instruction Manual: Prior to completion of installation and final inspection of Work, furnish to

ATST POC three copies of complete Operation & Maintenance Manual, bound in booklet form and indexed for each respective trade specified under Electrical Divisions. Each manual shall contain the following items:

1. List of equipment with manufacturer’s name, model number and local representative, service facilities and normal channel of supply for each item.

2. Manufacturer’s literature describing each item of equipment with detailed parts list. 3. Name, address, and phone number of contractors involved in Work under this Division. 4. Individual equipment guarantees. 5. Certificates of Inspection. 6. Record Blueprints and related Shop Drawings. 7. List of motors with their fuse and thermal element sizes.



GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060 - 1

SECTION 16060 - GROUNDING AND BONDING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes grounding systems and equipment, plus the following special applications:

1. Underground distribution grounding. 2. Ground bonding common with lightning protection system.




A. Informational Submittals: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of grounding features specified in "Field Quality Control" Article, including the following:

1. Test wells. 2. Ground rings. 3. Grounding arrangements and connections for separately derived systems. 4. Grounding for sensitive electronic equipment.



A. Electrical Components, Components, Devices and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Bare Copper Conductors:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. 4. Ring Conductor: No. 4/0 AWG, stranded conductor.

2.2 CONNECTORS

A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.

B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, pressure type with at least two bolts.

1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe.

C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions.

D. Bus-bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless exothermic-type wire terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar.

2.3 GROUNDING ELECTRODES

A. Grounding Electrodes:

1. Ground Ring: Continuous No. 4/0 AWG bare conductor encased in conductive type concrete buried a minimum of 30 inches (762 mm) below grade.

2. Concrete Encased Electrode (UFER): All structural foundations and slabs containing re-enforcing, non-coated steel rebar and wire tied together and encased with concrete (Cast-In-Place) shall be used as a grounding electrode.

3. Conductive Concrete: Lynconite 11TM, Sankosha San Earth (wet) or equal.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.

B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare copper conductor, No. 4/0 AWG minimum.

1. Bury at least 30 inches (762 mm) below grade encased in conductive concrete.

C. Isolated Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe. On feeders with isolated ground, identify grounding conductor where visible to normal inspection, with alternating bands of green and yellow tape, with at least three bands of green and two bands of yellow.

D. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical and telephone equipment rooms, in rooms housing service equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.

1. Install bus on insulated spacers 2 inches (50 mm) minimum from wall, 6 inches (150 mm) above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

2. Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame, across top of doorway, and down to specified height above floor; connect to horizontal bus.

E. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise

indicated. 3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors. 4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.

3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.

B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70:

1. Feeders and branch circuits. 2. Lighting circuits. 3. Receptacle circuits. 4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 6. Flexible raceway runs. 7. Armored and metal-clad cable runs.



8. Busway Supply Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor from grounding bus in the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panel to equipment grounding bar terminal on busway.

9. Computer and Rack-Mounted Electronic Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor in branch-circuit runs from equipment-area power panels and power-distribution units.

C. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping.

D. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.

E. Isolated Grounding Receptacle Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor connected to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service unless otherwise indicated.

F. Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits: For designated equipment supplied by a branch circuit or feeder, isolate equipment enclosure from supply circuit raceway with a nonmetallic raceway fitting listed for the purpose. Install fitting where raceway enters enclosure, and install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor. Isolate conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service unless otherwise indicated.

G. Signal and Communication Equipment: In addition to grounding and bonding required by NFPA 70, provide a separate grounding system complying with requirements in TIA/ATIS J-STD-607-A.

1. For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other communication equipment, provide No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central equipment location.

2. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding conductor on a 1/4-by-4-by-12-inch (6.3-by-100-by-300-mm) grounding bus.

3. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.



B. Ground Bonding Common with Lightning Protection System: Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system. Bond electrical power system ground directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest point to electrical service grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as system grounding electrode conductor, and install in conduit.

C. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance except where routed through short lengths of conduit.

1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts.

2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.

3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp.

D. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:

1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes; use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange by using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.

2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.

3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve.

E. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install tinned bonding jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity.

F. Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Ground steel building columns using No. 4/0 AWG jumper from ground ring to column and exothermic type weld.

G. Ground Ring: Install a grounding conductor, electrically connected to each building structure steel column, extending around the perimeter of area or item indicated.

1. Install copper conductor not less than No. 4/0 AWG for ground ring and for taps to building steel.

2. Bury ground ring not less than 24 inches (600 mm) from building's foundation.

H. Ufer Ground (Concrete-Encased Grounding Electrode): Fabricate according to NFPA 70; use a minimum of 20 feet (6 m) of bare copper conductor not smaller than No. 4/0 AWG.

1. If concrete foundation is less than 20 feet (6 m) long, coil excess conductor within base of foundation.



2. Bond grounding conductor to reinforcing steel in at least four locations and to anchor bolts. Extend grounding conductor below grade and connect to building's grounding grid or to grounding electrode external to concrete.



1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected.

a. Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance.

b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.

B. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


D. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:

1. Ground system total resistance shall be 5 ohms or less. 2. 5 ohms resistance between any paint or the grounding network system and any object in

the vicinity including earth and floor.

E. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify ATST POC promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.



HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 16073 - 1

SECTION 16073 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.


A. Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents.

C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.






A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified together with concrete Specifications.

B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Section 07720 "Roof Accessories."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. c. ERICO International Corporation. d. GS Metals Corp. e. Thomas & Betts Corporation. f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. g. Wesanco, Inc.

2. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4.

3. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-4.

4. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.

B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.

C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.











E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following:

1. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used.

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc. 3) Hilti Inc. 4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 5) MKT Fastening, LLC.

2. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

3. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element.

4. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.

5. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 6. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES

A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment.

B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Section 05500 "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes and plates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.

B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter.









C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits.

1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps.

D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.

3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article.

B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.

C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb (90 kg).

D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:

1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor

fasteners on solid masonry units. 4. To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, with lock washers

and nuts, Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69 and Spring-tension clamps.

5. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 6. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,

panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means that meet seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements.

E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS

A. Comply with installation requirements in Section 05500 "Metal Fabrications" for site-fabricated metal supports.



B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

3.4 CONCRETE BASES

A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches (100 mm) larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base.

B. Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in Section 03300 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

C. Anchor equipment to concrete base.

1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.

3.5 PAINTING


1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05 mm).

B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 9 painting sections for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.



VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 16074 - 1

SECTION 16074 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Isolation pads. 2. Spring isolators. 3. Restrained spring isolators. 4. Channel support systems. 5. Restraint cables. 6. Hanger rod stiffeners. 7. Anchorage bushings and washers.


1. Section 16073 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for commonly used electrical supports and installation requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. The IBC: International Building Code.


C. OSHPD: Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development for the State of California.



1. Site Class as Defined in the IBC: D. 2. Assigned Seismic Building Category as Defined in the IBC: I.

a. Component Importance Factor: 1.0. b. Component Response Modification Factor: Coordinate/verify with Seismic

Design Requirements on Structural Drawing Sheet No. SB001.



c. Component Amplification Factor: Coordinate/verify with Seismic Design Requirements on Structural Drawing Sheet No. SB001.

d. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods (0.2 Second): Coordinate/verify with Seismic Design Requirements on Structural Drawing Sheet No. SB001.

e. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at 1.0-Second Period: Coordinate/verify with Seismic Design Requirements on Structural Drawing Sheet No. SB001.




2. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each type and size of seismic-restraint component used.



3. Restrained-Isolation Devices: Include ratings for horizontal, vertical, and combined loads.

B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For vibration isolation and seismic-restraint details indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading due to equipment weight and operation, seismic forces required to select vibration isolators and seismic restraints.

a. Coordinate design calculations with wind-load calculations required for equipment mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in other electrical Sections for equipment mounted outdoors.

2. Indicate materials and dimensions and identify hardware, including attachment and anchorage devices.

3. Field-fabricated supports. 4. Seismic-Restraint Details:







A. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of seismic bracing for electrical components with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and seismic restraints.





A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.


C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

D. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall bear anchorage preapproval OPA number from OSHPD, preapproval by ICC-ES, or preapproval by another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum seismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic-restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

E. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Ace Mountings Co., Inc. 2. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 3. California Dynamics Corporation.






4. Isolation Technology, Inc. 5. Kinetics Noise Control. 6. Mason Industries. 7. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. 8. Vibration Isolation. 9. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc. 10. Approved equal.

B. Pads: Arrange in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates, and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment.

1. Resilient Material: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene, rubber or hermetically sealed compressed fiberglass.

C. Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, open-spring isolators.



deformation or failure. 5. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to 1/4-inch- (6-mm-)

thick, rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 500 psig (3447 kPa).

6. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw to fasten and level equipment.

D. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with seismic or limit-stop restraint.

1. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to weight being removed; factory-drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick, neoprene or rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable equipment mounting and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation.

2. Restraint: Seismic or limit-stop as required for equipment and authorities having jurisdiction.




2.2 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES










1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 2. California Dynamics Corporation. 3. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 4. Hilti Inc. 5. Loos & Co.; Seismic Earthquake Division. 6. Mason Industries. 7. TOLCO Incorporated; a brand of NIBCO INC. 8. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. 9. Approved equal.

B. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and application requirements shall be as defined in reports by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be subjected.

C. Channel Support System: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated support assembly made of slotted steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end and other matching components and with corrosion-resistant coating; and rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces.

D. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 603 galvanized or ASTM A 492 stainless-steel cables with end connections made of steel assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivels, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; and with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement.

E. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally bolted connections or Reinforcing steel angle clamped to hanger rod. Do not weld stiffeners to rods.

F. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchors and studs.

G. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of attachment devices.

H. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant neoprene, with a flat washer face.

I. Mechanical Anchor: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchors with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488. Minimum length of eight times diameter.

J. Adhesive Anchor: Drilled-in and capsule anchor system containing polyvinyl or urethane methacrylate-based resin and accelerator, or injected polymer or hybrid mortar adhesive. Provide anchor bolts and hardware with zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.











2.3 FACTORY FINISHES

A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested equipment before shipping.

1. Powder coating on springs and housings. 2. All hardware shall be galvanized. Hot-dip galvanize metal components for exterior use. 3. Baked enamel or powder coat for metal components on isolators for interior use. 4. Color-code or otherwise mark vibration isolation and seismic-control devices to indicate

capacity range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control devices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.



3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Secure raceways and cables to trapeze member with clamps approved for application by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces.

C. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within specified loading limits.

3.3 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Equipment and Hanger Restraints:

1. Install restrained isolators on electrical equipment. 2. Install resilient, bolt-isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance

between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch (3.2 mm). 3. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction providing required submittals for component.



B. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.

C. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.

D. Drilled-in Anchors:

1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.

2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength.

3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened.

4. Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air pockets in the adhesive.

5. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench. 6. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior

applications.


A. Install flexible connections in runs of raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different structural elements, and where they terminate with connection to equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from the one supporting them as they approach equipment.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.



2. Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, before connecting anchorage device to restrained component (unless postconnection testing has been approved), and with at least seven days' advance notice.

3. Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide temporary load-spreading members.



4. Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by Architect.

5. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device. 6. Measure isolator restraint clearance. 7. Measure isolator deflection. 8. Verify snubber minimum clearances. 9. If a device fails test, modify all installations of same type and retest until satisfactory

results are achieved.



3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust isolators after isolated equipment is at operating weight.

B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation.

C. Adjust active height of spring isolators.

D. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.



ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16075 - 1

SECTION 16075 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Identification for raceways. 2. Identification of power and control cables. 3. Identification for conductors. 4. Underground-line warning tape. 5. Warning labels and signs. 6. Instruction signs. 7. Equipment identification labels.


A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.


A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 and IEEE C2.


C. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.



C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.

D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 POWER RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway size.

B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:

1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: Indicate voltage.

C. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at More Than 600 V:

1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING" with 3-inch-

(75-mm) high letters on 20-inch (500-mm) centers.

D. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

E. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable.

1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer.

2.2 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size.

B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

C. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable.

1. Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by printer manufacturer.



D. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

E. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve, 2 inches (50 mm) long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

2.3 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils (0.08 mm) thick by 1 to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm) wide.

B. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.

C. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable.

1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer.

2.4 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE

A. Tape:

1. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and locate underground electrical and communications utility lines.

2. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations. 3. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading when

exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils.

B. Color and Printing:

1. Comply with ANSI Z535.1 through ANSI Z535.5. 2. Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE. 3. Inscriptions for Orange-Colored Tapes: TELEPHONE CABLE, CATV CABLE,

COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE.

C. Tag: Type ID:

1. Detectable three-layer laminate, consisting of a printed pigmented polyolefin film, a solid aluminum-foil core, and a clear protective film that allows inspection of the continuity of the conductive core, bright-colored, continuous-printed on one side with the inscription of the utility, compounded for direct-burial service.

2. Overall Thickness: 5 mils (0.125 mm). 3. Foil Core Thickness: 0.35 mil (0.00889 mm). 4. Weight: 28 lb/1000 sq. ft. (13.7 kg/100 sq. m).



5. 3-Inch (75-mm) Tensile According to ASTM D 882: 70 lbf (311.3 N), and 4600 psi (31.7 MPa).

2.5 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS

A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise indicated.

C. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs:

1. Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for application.

2. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting. 3. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches (180 by 250 mm).

D. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:

1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."

2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES (915 MM)."

2.6 INSTRUCTION SIGNS

A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick for signs up to 20 sq. inches (129 sq. cm) and 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick for larger sizes.

1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face. 2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners. 3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable

equipment.

B. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).

C. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.

2.7 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).



B. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.

C. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).

D. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. White letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).

E. Stenciled Legend: In nonfading, waterproof, black ink or paint. Minimum letter height shall be 1 inch (25 mm).

2.8 CABLE TIES

A. General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon.

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm). 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F (23 deg C), According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi

(82.7 MPa). 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 85 deg C). 4. Color: Black except where used for color-coding.

B. UV-Stabilized Cable Ties: Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposure to exterior sunlight, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon.

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm). 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F (23 deg C), According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi

(82.7 MPa). 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 85 deg C). 4. Color: Black.

C. Plenum-Rated Cable Ties: Self extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, self locking.

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm). 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F (23 deg C), According to ASTM D 638: 7000 psi

(48.2 MPa). 3. UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V-0. 4. Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 284 deg F (Minus 46 to plus 140 deg C). 5. Color: Black.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Paint: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior).



B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.

B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

C. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.

D. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate.

E. System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color-coding band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot (15-m) maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot (7.6-m) maximum intervals in congested areas.

F. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of conductor or cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility.

G. Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type, except as listed below:

1. Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon. 2. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated.

H. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground-line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches (400 mm) overall.

I. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for surface preparation and paint application.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE

A. Concealed Raceways, Duct Banks, More Than 600 V, within Buildings: Tape and stencil 4-inch- (100-mm-) wide black stripes on 10-inch (250-mm) centers over orange background that extends full length of raceway or duct and is 12 inches (300 mm) wide. Stencil legend "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING" with 3-inch- (75-mm-) high black letters on 20-inch (500-mm) centers. Stop stripes at legends. Apply to the following finished surfaces:



1. Floor surface directly above conduits running beneath and within 12 inches (300 mm) of a floor that is in contact with earth or is framed above unexcavated space.

2. Wall surfaces directly external to raceways concealed within wall. 3. Accessible surfaces of concrete envelope around raceways in vertical shafts, exposed in

the building, or concealed above suspended ceilings.

B. Accessible Raceways, Armored and Metal-Clad Cables, More Than 600 V: Self-adhesive vinyl labels. Install labels at 10-foot (3-m) maximum intervals.

C. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuits More Than 30 A, and 120 V to ground: Identify with self-adhesive vinyl label. Install labels at 10-foot (3-m) maximum intervals.

D. Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows:

1. Normal Power. 2. Emergency Power. 3. Standby Power. 4. UPS Power.

E. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase.

1. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded service feeder and branch-circuit conductors.

a. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG, if authorities having jurisdiction permit.

b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Black. 2) Phase B: Red. 3) Phase C: Blue.

c. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Brown. 2) Phase B: Orange. 3) Phase C: Yellow.

d. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches (150 mm) from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.

F. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, More than 600 V: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use write-on tags.



G. Install instructional sign including the color code for grounded and ungrounded conductors using adhesive-film-type labels.

H. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach write-on tags to conductors and list source.

I. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal connections.

1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.

2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.

3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.

J. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable.

1. Limit use of underground-line warning tape to direct-buried cables. 2. Install underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in

raceway.

K. Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces.

1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145. 2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. 3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. 4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of

equipment including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Power transfer switches. b. Controls with external control power connections.

L. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.

M. Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red background with minimum 3/8-inch- (10-mm-) high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used for power transfer.

N. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification.



1. Labeling Instructions:

a. Indoor Equipment: Adhesive film label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) high letters on 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches (50 mm) high.

b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for

viewing from the floor. d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with

appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure.

2. Equipment to Be Labeled:

a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.

b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets. c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. d. Switchgear. e. Switchboards. f. Transformers: Label that includes tag designation shown on Drawings for the

transformer, feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary. g. Substations. h. Emergency system boxes and enclosures. i. Motor-control centers. j. Enclosed switches. k. Enclosed circuit breakers. l. Enclosed controllers. m. Variable-speed controllers. n. Push-button stations. o. Power transfer equipment. p. Contactors. q. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices. r. Battery-inverter units. s. Battery racks. t. Power-generating units. u. Monitoring and control equipment. v. UPS equipment.



SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING 16091 - 1

SECTION 16091 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Sleeves for raceway and cable penetration of non-fire-rated construction walls and floors. 2. Sleeve-seal systems. 3. Sleeve-seal fittings. 4. Grout. 5. Silicone sealants.


1. Section 07841 "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for penetration firestopping installed in fire-resistance-rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers, with and without penetrating items.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Wall Sleeves:

1. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, plain ends.

2. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.

B. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: Galvanized-steel sheet; 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint, with tabs for screw-fastening the sleeve to the board.



C. PVC-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.

D. Molded-PVC Sleeves: With nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

E. Molded-PE or -PP Sleeves: Removable, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

F. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings:

1. Material: Galvanized sheet steel. 2. Minimum Metal Thickness:

a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and with no side larger than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3 mm).

b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter 50 inches (1270 mm) or more and one or more sides larger than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.138 inch (3.5 mm).


A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable.


a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. CALPICO, Inc. c. Metraflex Company (The). d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. e. Proco Products, Inc.

2. Sealing Elements: EPDM rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

3. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. 4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating of length

required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.

2.3 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS

A. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for embedding in concrete slab or wall. Unit shall have plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to match piping OD.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of the following:

a. Presealed Systems.










2.4 GROUT

A. Description: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-fire-rated walls or floors.

B. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.



2.5 SILICONE SEALANTS

A. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below.

1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces that are not fire rated.

2. Sealant shall have VOC content of 400 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

3. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

B. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Comply with NEMA VE 2 for cable tray and cable penetrations.

C. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above-Grade Non-Fire-Rated Concrete and Masonry-Unit Floors and Walls:

1. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors:

a. Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Section 07920 "Joint Sealants."

b. Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect material while curing.



2. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. 3. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and

raceway or cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed. 4. Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are

used. Install sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. Deburr after cutting.

5. Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors 4 inches (100 mm) above finished floor level. Install sleeves during erection of floors.

D. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies:

1. Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

2. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.

E. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

F. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

G. Underground, Exterior-Wall and Floor Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.


A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at raceway entries into building.

B. Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.

B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.

C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.

D. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.



CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16120 - 1

SECTION 16120 - CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.


1. Division 16 Section 16060 "Grounding and Bonding."








PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES





1. American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company. 2. General Cable Corporation. 3. Senator Wire & Cable Company. 4. Southwire Company.

B. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70.

C. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THHN-THWN and XHHW.

D. Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Type SOOW with ground wire.

2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES


1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 3. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC. 4. 3M; Electrical Products Division. 5. Tyco Electronics Corp.

B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders: Copper, solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

B. Branch Circuits: Copper, solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS

A. Service Entrance: Type XHHW, single conductors in raceway.

B. Exposed Feeders: Type XHHW, single conductors in raceway.

C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type XHHW, single conductors in raceway.













E. Feeders in Cable Tray: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

F. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type XHHW, single conductors in raceway.

G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type XHHW, single conductors in raceway.

H. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type XHHW, single conductors in raceway.

I. Branch Circuits in Cable Tray: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

J. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SOOW, hard service cord with stainless-steel, wire-mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application.

K. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type XHHW, in raceway.

L. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type XHHW, in raceway.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.

D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.

E. Support cables according to Section 16073 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

F. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 16075 "Electrical Identification."

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches (150 mm) of slack.



3.5 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 16091 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."

3.6 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Section 07841 "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."


A. Testing Agency: ATST POC will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.


1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test service entrance, feeder and branch circuit conductors for compliance with requirements.

2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

C. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:

1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve

compliance with requirements.

D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.



RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130 - 1

SECTION 16130 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings. 2. Nonmetal conduits, tubing, and fittings. 3. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters. 4. Nonmetal wireways and auxiliary gutters. 5. Surface raceways. 6. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. 7. Handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling.


1. Division 16 Section 16060 "Grounding and Bonding" for exterior ductbanks, manholes, and underground utility construction.

2. Division 16 Section 16073 "Hangars and Supports" for electrical systems.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic conduit.

B. RGS: Rigid galvanized steel conduit.

C. FMC: Flexible metal conduit.

D. LTFC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.

E. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.


A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.



B. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.


A. Source quality-control reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co. 3. Electri-Flex Company. 4. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group. 5. Republic Conduit. 6. Robroy Industries. 7. Southwire Company. 8. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 9. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation.

B. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. RGS: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.

D. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit.

1. Comply with NEMA RN 1. 2. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch (1 mm), minimum.

E. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.

F. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel.

G. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.

H. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.

1. Fittings for EMT:

a. Material: Steel. b. Type: Compression.













2. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper.

I. Joint Compound for GRC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.

2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS


1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Anamet Electrical, Inc. 3. Arnco Corporation. 4. CANTEX Inc. 5. CertainTeed Corp. 6. Condux International, Inc. 7. Electri-Flex Company. 8. Kraloy. 9. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 10. Niedax-Kleinhuis USA, Inc. 11. RACO; a Hubbell company. 12. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

B. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise indicated.

D. Fittings for RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.

2.3 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS


1. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2. Hoffman; a Pentair company. 3. Mono-Systems, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 3R or Type 4 unless otherwise indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70.





















1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

D. Wireway Covers: As indicated on drawings.

E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

2.4 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS


1. Adalet. 2. Cooper Technologies Company; Cooper Crouse-Hinds. 3. EGS/Appleton Electric. 4. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company. 5. FSR Inc. 6. Hoffman; a Pentair company. 7. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Division. 8. Kraloy. 9. Milbank Manufacturing Co. 10. Mono-Systems, Inc. 11. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group. 12. RACO; a Hubbell Company. 13. Robroy Industries. 14. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company. 15. Stahlin Non-Metallic Enclosures; a division of Robroy Industries. 16. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 17. Wiremold / Legrand.

B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.

C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.

D. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

E. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, galvanized with gasketed cover.

F. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box.

G. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep (100 mm square by 60 mm deep).





















H. Gangable boxes are allowed.

I. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 3R with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated.

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Plastic. 3. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.

J. Cabinets:

1. NEMA 250, Type 3R galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. 6. Nonmetallic cabinets shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified

testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.5 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING

A. General Requirements for Handholes and Boxes:

1. Boxes and handholes for use in underground systems shall be designed and identified as defined in NFPA 70, for intended location and application.

2. Boxes installed in wet areas shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Polymer-Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer-Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and aggregate, bound together with polymer resin, and reinforced with steel, fiberglass, or a combination of the two.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

a. Armorcast Products Company. b. Carson Industries LLC. c. CDR Systems Corporation; Hubbell Power Systems. d. NewBasis. e. Oldcastle Precast, Inc.; Christy Concrete Products. f. Synertech Moulded Products; a division of Oldcastle Precast, Inc.

2. Standard: Comply with SCTE 77. 3. Configuration: Designed for flush burial with open bottom unless otherwise indicated. 4. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural

load rating consistent with enclosure and handhole location. 5. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. 6. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, as indicated for each service.









7. Handholes 12 Inches Wide by 24 Inches Long (300 mm Wide by 600 mm Long) and Larger: Have inserts for cable racks and pulling-in irons installed before concrete is poured.

2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL FOR UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURES

A. Handhole and Pull-Box Prototype Test: Test prototypes of handholes and boxes for compliance with SCTE 77. Strength tests shall be for specified tier ratings of products supplied.

1. Tests of materials shall be performed by an independent testing agency. 2. Strength tests of complete boxes and covers shall be by either an independent testing

agency or manufacturer. A qualified registered professional Engineer shall certify tests by manufacturer.

3. Testing machine pressure gages shall have current calibration certification complying with ISO 9000 and ISO 10012 and traceable to NIST standards.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Conduit: RGS. 2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: RGS. 3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, direct buried or PVC coated, BITU

coated, half-lapped lomic tape wrapped RGS conduit with sealant applied to all joints. 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LTRC. 5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R or Type 4.

B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT. 3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: RGS. Raceway locations include the

following:

a. Loading dock. b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling units. c. Mechanical rooms.

4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. 5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations.

6. Damp or Wet Locations: RGS. 7. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1.



C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch (21-mm) trade size.

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

2. RNC/PVC Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this type of conduit. Use cement recommended by fitting manufacturer. Comply with NEMA TC3, UL 514B and NEC 352.

3. EMT: Use compression, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 4. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with

NEMA FB 2.20.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors.

B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

D. Comply with requirements in Section 16073 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports.

E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.

F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches (300 mm) of changes in direction.

G. Conceal conduit within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

H. Support conduit within 12 inches (300 mm) of enclosures to which attached.

I. Raceways Embedded in Slabs:

1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch (27-mm) trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot (3-m) intervals.

2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings.

3. Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of 1 inch (25 mm) of concrete cover in all directions.



4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by ATST POC for each specific location.

J. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:

1. Use EMT or RMC for raceways. 2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or

in an enclosure.

K. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.

L. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

M. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch (35mm) trade size and insulated throat metal bushings on 1-1/2-inch (41-mm) trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits.

N. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.

O. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path.

P. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch (53-mm) trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length.

Q. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use.

R. Surface Raceways:

1. Install surface raceway with a minimum 2-inch (50-mm) radius control at bend points. 2. Secure surface raceway with clamps/straps and screws or other anchor-type devices at

intervals not exceeding 48 inches (1200 mm) and with no less than two supports per straight raceway section. Support surface raceway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue are not acceptable support methods.

S. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70.



T. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all raceways at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces.

2. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure. 3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

U. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings.

V. Expansion-Joint Fittings:

1. Install in each run of aboveground RGS or EMT that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F (17 deg C) and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet (7.6 m).

2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of the following locations:

a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F (70 deg C) temperature change.

b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F (86 deg C) temperature change.

c. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F (70 deg C) temperature change.

3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F (0.06 mm per meter of length of straight run per deg C) of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F (0.0115 mm per meter of length of straight run per deg C) of temperature change for metal conduits.

4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints.

5. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.

W. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches (1830 mm) of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed luminaires, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.

1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. 2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.

X. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to bottom of box unless otherwise indicated.



Y. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box.

Z. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel.

AA. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.

BB. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.

CC. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits.

DD. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT

A. Direct-Buried Conduit:

1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench bottom as specified in Section 02300 "Earthwork" for pipe less than 6 inches (150 mm) in nominal diameter.

2. Install backfill as specified in Section 02300 "Earthwork." 3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end

of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches (300 mm) of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Section 02300 "Earthwork."

4. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through floor unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts throughout length of elbow.

a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches (75 mm) of concrete for a minimum of 12 inches (300 mm) on each side of the coupling.

5. Warning Planks: Bury warning planks approximately 12 inches (300 mm) above direct-buried conduits but a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) below grade. Align planks along centerline of conduit.

6. Underground Warning Tape: Comply with requirements in Section 16075 "Electrical Identification."



3.4 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES

A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2-inch (12.5-mm) sieve to No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.

C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other enclosures 1 inch (25 mm) above finished grade.

D. Field-cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed.

3.5 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS


3.6 FIRESTOPPING

A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 07841 "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.

2. Repair damage to paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.



CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 16136 - 1

SECTION 16136 - CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Ladder cable trays. 2. Wire-basket cable trays. 3. Single-rail cable trays. 4. Trough cable trays. 5. Fiberglass cable trays.


1. Section 16074 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems" for cable trays, vibration and seismic controls and restraints.


A. Product Data: For each type of cable tray.

1. Include data indicating dimensions and finishes for each type of cable tray indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For each type of cable tray.

1. Show fabrication and installation details of cable trays, including plans, elevations, and sections of components and attachments to other construction elements. Designate components and accessories, including clamps, brackets, hanger rods, splice-plate connectors, expansion-joint assemblies, straight lengths, and fittings.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For seismic restraints.

1. Seismic-Restraint Details: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer, licensed in the state where Project is located, who is responsible for their preparation.

2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting seismic restraints. 3. Detail fabrication, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported

cable trays.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01400 "Quality Requirements," to design cable tray supports and seismic bracing.

B. Seismic Performance: Cable trays and supports shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the cable trays will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified."

2. Component Importance Factor: 1.0. 3. For Component Amplification Factor and Component Response Modification Factor,

coordinate/verify with seismic Design requirements on Structural Drawing Sheet No. SB001.

C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes in cable tray installed outdoors.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.

2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CABLE TRAYS

A. Cable Trays and Accessories: Identified as defined in NFPA 70 and marked for intended location, application, and grounding.

1. Source Limitations: Obtain cable trays and components from single manufacturer. 2. Uniform Load Distribution: Capable of supporting a uniformly distributed load on the

indicated support span when supported as a simple span and tested according to NEMA VE 1.

3. Concentrated Load: A load applied at midpoint of span and centerline of tray. 4. Load and Safety Factors: Applicable to both side rails and rung capacities.

2.3 LADDER CABLE TRAYS


1. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co. 2. Chalfant Manufacturing Company. 3. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 4. Mono-Systems, Inc. 5. MP Husky. 6. Niedax-Kleinhuis USA, Inc.









B. Description:

1. Configuration: Two I-beam side rails with transverse rungs welded to side rails. 2. Rung Spacing: 6 inches (150 mm)] [9 inches (225 mm) o.c. 3. Radius-Fitting Rung Spacing: 9 inches (225 mm) at center of tray's width. 4. Minimum Cable-Bearing Surface for Rungs: 7/8-inch (22-mm) width with radius edges. 5. No portion of the rungs shall protrude below the bottom plane of side rails. 6. Structural Performance of Each Rung: Capable of supporting a maximum cable load,

with a safety factor of 1.5, plus a 200-lb (90-kg) concentrated load, when tested according to NEMA VE 1.

7. Minimum Usable Load Depth: 4 inches (100 mm). 8. Straight Section Lengths: 10 feet (3 m) except where shorter lengths are required to

facilitate tray assembly. 9. Width: 12 inches (300 mm) unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 10. Fitting Minimum Radius: 12 inches (300 mm). 11. Class Designation: Comply with NEMA VE 1, Class 12C and Class 20C. 12. Splicing Assemblies: Bolted type using serrated flange locknuts. 13. Hardware and Fasteners: Steel, zinc plated according to ASTM B 633. 14. Splice Plate Capacity: Splices located within support span shall not diminish rated

loading capacity of cable tray.

2.4 MATERIALS AND FINISHES

A. Aluminum:

1. Materials: Alloy 6063-T6 according to ANSI H 35.1/H 35.1M for extruded components and Alloy 5052-H32 or Alloy 6061-T6 according to ANSI H 35.1/H 35.1M for fabricated parts.

2. Hardware: Chromium-zinc-plated steel, ASTM F 1136. 3. Hardware for Aluminum Cable Tray Used Outdoors: Stainless steel, Type 316,

ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594.

2.5 CABLE TRAY ACCESSORIES

A. Fittings: Tees, crosses, risers, elbows, and other fittings as indicated, of same materials and finishes as cable tray.

B. Barrier Strips: Same materials and finishes as for cable tray.

C. Cable tray supports and connectors, including bonding jumpers, as recommended by cable tray manufacturer.

2.6 WARNING SIGNS

A. Lettering: 1-1/2-inch- (40-mm-) high, black letters on yellow background with legend "Warning! Not To Be Used as Walkway, Ladder, or Support for Ladders or Personnel."



B. Comply with requirements for fasteners in Section 16075 "Electrical Identification."


A. Testing: Test and inspect cable trays according to NEMA VE 1.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CABLE TRAY INSTALLATION

A. Install cable trays according to NEMA VE 2.

B. Install cable trays as a complete system, including fasteners, hold-down clips, support systems, barrier strips, adjustable horizontal and vertical splice plates, elbows, reducers, tees, crosses, cable dropouts, adapters, covers, and bonding.

C. Install cable trays so that the tray is accessible for cable installation and all splices are accessible for inspection and adjustment.

D. Remove burrs and sharp edges from cable trays.

E. Join aluminum cable tray with splice plates; use four square neck-carriage bolts and locknuts.

F. Fasten cable tray supports to building structure and install seismic restraints.

G. Design fasteners and supports to carry cable tray, the cables, and a concentrated load of 200 lb (90 kg). Comply with requirements in Section 16073 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." Comply with seismic-restraint details according to Section 16074 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

H. Place supports so that spans do not exceed maximum spans on schedules and provide clearances shown on Drawings. Install intermediate supports when cable weight exceeds the load-carrying capacity of the tray rungs.

I. Construct supports from channel members, threaded rods, and other appurtenances furnished by cable tray manufacturer. Arrange supports in trapeze or wall-bracket form as required by application.

J. Support bus assembly to prevent twisting from eccentric loading.

K. Install center-hung supports for single-rail trays designed for 60 versus 40 percent eccentric loading condition, with a safety factor of 3.

L. Locate and install supports according to NEMA VE 2. Do not install more than one cable tray splice between supports.

M. Support wire-basket cable trays with center support hangers.



N. Install expansion connectors where cable trays cross building expansion joints and in cable tray runs that exceed dimensions recommended in NEMA VE 2. Space connectors and set gaps according to applicable standard.

O. Make changes in direction and elevation using manufacturer's recommended fittings.

P. Make cable tray connections using manufacturer's recommended fittings.

Q. Seal penetrations through fire and smoke barriers. Comply with requirements in Section 07841 "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."

R. Install capped metal sleeves for future cables through firestop-sealed cable tray penetrations of fire and smoke barriers.

S. Install cable trays with enough workspace to permit access for installing cables.

T. Install barriers to separate cables of different systems, such as power, communications, and data processing; or of different insulation levels, such as 600, 5000, and 15 000 V.

U. Install permanent covers, if used, after installing cable. Install cover clamps according to NEMA VE 2.

V. Clamp covers on cable trays installed outdoors with heavy-duty clamps.

W. Install warning signs in visible locations on or near cable trays after cable tray installation.

3.2 CABLE TRAY GROUNDING

A. Ground cable trays according to NFPA 70 unless additional grounding is specified. Comply with requirements in Section 16060 "Grounding and Bonding."

B. Cable trays with communications cable shall be bonded together with splice plates listed for grounding purposes or with listed bonding jumpers.

C. Cable trays with control conductors shall be bonded together with splice plates listed for grounding purposes or with listed bonding jumpers.

D. When using epoxy- or powder-coat painted cable trays as a grounding conductor, completely remove coating at all splice contact points or ground connector attachment. After completing splice-to-grounding bolt attachment, repair the coated surfaces with coating materials recommended by cable tray manufacturer.

E. Bond cable trays to power source for cables contained within with bonding conductors sized according to NFPA 70, Article 250.122, "Size of Equipment Grounding Conductors."

3.3 CABLE INSTALLATION

A. Install cables only when each cable tray run has been completed and inspected.



B. Fasten cables on horizontal runs with cable clamps or cable ties according to NEMA VE 2. Tighten clamps only enough to secure the cable, without indenting the cable jacket. Install cable ties with a tool that includes an automatic pressure-limiting device.

C. Fasten cables on vertical runs to cable trays every 18 inches (450 mm).

D. Fasten and support cables that pass from one cable tray to another or drop from cable trays to equipment enclosures. Fasten cables to the cable tray at the point of exit and support cables independent of the enclosure. The cable length between cable trays or between cable tray and enclosure shall be no more than 72 inches (1800 mm).

E. Tie MI cables down every 36 inches (900 mm) where required to provide a 2-hour fire rating and every 72 inches (1800 mm) elsewhere.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Remove paint from all connection points before making connections. Repair paint after the connections are completed.

B. Connect pathways to cable trays according to requirements in NEMA VE 2 and NEMA FG 1.


A. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative:

1. After installing cable trays and after electrical circuitry has been energized, survey for compliance with requirements.

2. Visually inspect cable insulation for damage. Correct sharp corners, protuberances in cable trays, vibrations, and thermal expansion and contraction conditions, which may cause or have caused damage.

3. Verify that the number, size, and voltage of cables in cable trays do not exceed that permitted by NFPA 70. Verify that communications or data-processing circuits are separated from power circuits by barriers or are installed in separate cable trays.

4. Verify that there are no intruding items such as pipes, hangers, or other equipment in the cable tray.

5. Remove dust deposits, industrial process materials, trash of any description, and any blockage of tray ventilation.

6. Visually inspect each cable tray joint and each ground connection for mechanical continuity. Check bolted connections between sections for corrosion. Clean and retorque in suspect areas.

7. Check for improperly sized or installed bonding jumpers. 8. Check for missing, incorrect, or damaged bolts, bolt heads, or nuts. When found, replace

with specified hardware. 9. Perform visual and mechanical checks for adequacy of cable tray grounding; verify that

all takeoff raceways are bonded to cable trays. Test entire cable tray system for continuity. Maximum allowable resistance is 1 ohm.



B. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed cable trays and cables.

1. Install temporary protection for cables in open trays to safeguard exposed cables against falling objects or debris during construction. Temporary protection for cables and cable tray can be constructed of wood or metal materials and shall remain in place until the risk of damage is over.

2. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by cable tray manufacturer.

3. Repair damage to paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by cable tray manufacturer.



WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 1

SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates. 2. Twist-locking receptacles. 3. Isolated-ground receptacles. 4. Weather-resistant receptacles. 5. Wall-switches and dimmers. 6. Cord and plug sets.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

C. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.

D. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.

E. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:

1. Receptacles for ATST POC-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations. 2. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements.








A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing-label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:

1. Cooper Wiring Devices; Division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper). 2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell). 3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton). 4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour).

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS

A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.


C. Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be substituted under the following conditions:

1. Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding building wire. 2. Devices shall comply with the requirements in this Section.

2.3 STRAIGHT-BLADE RECEPTACLES

A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Cooper; 5351 (single), CR5362 (duplex). b. Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), HBL5352 (duplex).











c. Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex). d. Pass & Seymour; 5361 (single), 5362 (duplex).

B. Isolated-Ground, Duplex Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596.


a. Cooper; IG5362RN. b. Hubbell; IG5362. c. Leviton; 5362-IG. d. Pass & Seymour; IG5362.

2. Description: Straight blade; equipment grounding contacts shall be connected only to the green grounding screw terminal of the device and with inherent electrical isolation from mounting strap. Isolation shall be integral to receptacle construction and not dependent on removable parts.

2.4 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. General Description:

1. Straight blade, feed-through type. 2. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596. 3. Include indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned and no longer

provides proper GFCI protection.

B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:


a. Cooper; VGF20. b. Hubbell; GFR5352L. c. Pass & Seymour; 2095. d. Leviton; 7590.

2.5 TWIST-LOCKING RECEPTACLES

A. Single Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration L5-20R, and UL 498.


a. Cooper; CWL520R. b. Hubbell; HBL2310. c. Leviton; 2310. d. Pass & Seymour; L520-R.

B. Isolated-Ground, Single Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:





















a. Cooper; IGL520R. b. Hubbell; IG2310. c. Leviton; 2310-IG. d. Pass & Seymour; IG4700.

2. Description:

a. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration L5-20R, and UL 498. b. Equipment grounding contacts shall be connected only to the green grounding

screw terminal of the device and with inherent electrical isolation from mounting strap. Isolation shall be integral to receptacle construction and not dependent on removable parts.

2.6 CORD AND PLUG SETS

A. Description:

1. Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of equipment being connected.

2. Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded-copper conductors, with Type SOW-A jacket; with green-insulated grounding conductor and ampacity of at least 130 percent of the equipment rating.

2.7 TOGGLE SWITCHES

A. Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896.

B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:


a. Single Pole:

1) Cooper; AH1221. 2) Hubbell; HBL1221. 3) Leviton; 1221-2. 4) Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC1.

b. Two Pole:

















c. Three Way:


d. Four Way:


C. Pilot-Light Switches, 20 A:


a. Cooper; AH1221PL for 120 and 277 V. b. Hubbell; HBL1201PL for 120 and 277 V. c. Leviton; 1221-LH1. d. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1RPL for 120 V, PS20AC1RPL7 for 277 V.

2. Description: Single pole, with neon-lighted handle, illuminated when switch is "off."

D. Single-Pole, Double-Throw, Momentary-Contact, Center-off Switches: 120/277 V, 20 A; for use with mechanically held lighting contactors.


a. Cooper; 1995. b. Hubbell; HBL1557. c. Leviton; 1257. d. Pass & Seymour; 1251.

2.8 WALL-BOX DIMMERS

A. Dimmer Switches: Modular, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on-off switches, with audible frequency and EMI/RFI suppression filters.

B. Control: Continuously adjustable slider; with single-pole or three-way switching. Comply with UL 1472.

C. Incandescent Lamp Dimmers: 120 V; control shall follow square-law dimming curve. On-off switch positions shall bypass dimmer module.

1. 600 W; dimmers shall require no derating when ganged with other devices. Illuminated when "off."





















D. Fluorescent Lamp Dimmer Switches: Modular; compatible with dimmer ballasts; trim potentiometer to adjust low-end dimming; dimmer-ballast combination capable of consistent dimming with low end not greater than 20 percent of full brightness.

2.9 WALL PLATES

A. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices.

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: 0.035-inch- (1-mm-) thick, satin-finished, Type 302

stainless steel. 3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel. 4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed

and labeled for use in wet and damp locations.

B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weather-resistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover.

2.10 FINISHES

A. Device Color:

1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: Ivory unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.

2. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: Red. 3. TVSS Devices: Blue. 4. Isolated-Ground Receptacles: Orange.

B. Wall Plate Color: For plastic covers, match device color.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Coordination with Other Trades:

1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of boxes.

2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables.

3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.



4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.

C. Conductors:

1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated on devices.

2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.

3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails.

4. Existing Conductors:

a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors. b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted, provided the outlet box is large enough.

D. Device Installation:

1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were installed before building finishing operations were complete.

2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors.

3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment.

4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches (152 mm) in length.

5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal screw.

6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer. 7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice

No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold

device-mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.

E. Receptacle Orientation:

1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the left.

F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.

G. Dimmers:

1. Install dimmers within terms of their listing. 2. Verify that dimmers used for fan speed control are listed for that application. 3. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to

manufacturers' device listing conditions in the written instructions.



H. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates.

I. Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings.

3.2 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. Install non-feed-through-type GFCI receptacles where protection of downstream receptacles is not required.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with Section 16075 "Electrical Identification."

B. Identify each receptacle with panelboard identification and circuit number. Use hot, stamped, or engraved machine printing with black-filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes.


A. Perform the following tests and inspections for each of the (3) phases of construction:

1. In healthcare facilities, prepare reports that comply with recommendations in NFPA 99. 2. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. 3. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital

readout or illuminated digital-display indicators of measurement.

B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:

1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. 2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is unacceptable. 3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. 5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. 6. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit

breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above.

C. Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.




LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 16145 - 1

SECTION 16145 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Indoor occupancy sensors. 2. Lighting contactors.


1. Section 16140 "Wiring Devices" for wall-box dimmers, wall-switch occupancy sensors, and manual light switches.



B. Shop Drawings: Show installation details for occupancy and light-level sensors.




A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of lighting control device to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORS


1. Bryant Electric; a Hubbell company. 2. Cooper Industries, Inc. 3. Hubbell Building Automation, Inc. 4. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. 5. Lightolier Controls. 6. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc. 7. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc. 8. NSi Industries LLC; TORK Products. 9. RAB Lighting. 10. Sensor Switch, Inc. 11. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. 12. Watt Stopper.

B. General Requirements for Sensors: Wall- or ceiling-mounted, solid-state indoor occupancy sensors with a separate power pack.

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when coverage area is occupied, and turn them off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes.

3. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL 773A. Sensor is powered from the power pack.

4. Power Pack: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120- and 277-V ac, for 13-A tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Sensor has 24-V dc, 150-mA, Class 2 power source, as defined by NFPA 70.

5. Mounting:

a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box. b. Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2-inch (13-mm) knockout in a standard

electrical enclosure. c. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged

door.

6. Indicator: Digital display, to show when motion is detected during testing and normal operation of sensor.

7. Bypass Switch: Override the "on" function in case of sensor failure. 8. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc (21.5 to 2152 lux); turn

lights off when selected lighting level is present.















C. Dual-Technology Type: Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area using PIR and ultrasonic detection methods. The particular technology or combination of technologies that control on-off functions is selectable in the field by operating controls on unit.

1. Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology. 2. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- (150-mm-) minimum movement of

any portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in. (232 sq. cm), and detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches (305 mm) in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s (305 mm/s).

3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. (93 sq. m) when mounted on a 96-inch- (2440-mm-) high ceiling.

2.2 SWITCHBOX-MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSORS


1. Bryant Electric; a Hubbell company. 2. Cooper Industries, Inc. 3. Hubbell Building Automation, Inc. 4. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. 5. Lightolier Controls. 6. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc. 7. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc. 8. NSi Industries LLC; TORK Products. 9. RAB Lighting. 10. Sensor Switch, Inc. 11. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. 12. Watt Stopper.

B. General Requirements for Sensors: Automatic-wall-switch occupancy sensor, suitable for mounting in a single gang switchbox.


2. Operating Ambient Conditions: Dry interior conditions, 32 to 120 deg F (0 to 49 deg C). 3. Switch Rating: Not less than 800-VA fluorescent at 120 V, 1200-VA fluorescent at

277 V, and 800-W incandescent.

C. Wall-Switch Sensor Tag WS1:

1. Standard Range: 180-degree field of view, field adjustable from 180 to 40 degrees; with a minimum coverage area of 2100 sq. ft (196 sq. m).

2. Sensing Technology: Dual technology - PIR and ultrasonic. 3. Switch Type: SP, field selectable automatic "on," or manual "on" automatic "off." 4. Voltage: Match the circuit voltage and Dual voltage, 120 and 277 V; dual-technology

type.















5. Ambient-Light Override: Concealed, field-adjustable, light-level sensor from 10 to 150 fc (108 to 1600 lux). The switch prevents the lights from turning on when the light level is higher than the set point of the sensor.

6. Concealed, field-adjustable, "off" time-delay selector at up to 30 minutes. 7. Adaptive Technology: Self-adjusting circuitry detects and memorizes usage patterns of

the space and helps eliminate false "off" switching.

2.3 LIGHTING CONTACTORS


1. Allen-Bradley/Rockwell Automation. 2. ASCO Power Technologies, LP; a division of Emerson Electric Co. 3. Eaton Corporation. 4. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution; Total

Lighting Control. 5. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Description: Electrically operated and electrically held, combination-type lighting contactors with fusible switch, complying with NEMA ICS 2 and UL 508.

1. Current Rating for Switching: Listing or rating consistent with type of load served, including tungsten filament, inductive, and high-inrush ballast (ballast with 15 percent or less total harmonic distortion of normal load current).

2. Fault Current Withstand Rating: Equal to or exceeding the available fault current at the point of installation.

3. Enclosure: Comply with NEMA 250. 4. Provide with control and pilot devices as scheduled, matching the NEMA type specified

for the enclosure.

C. BAS Interface: Provide hardware interface to enable the BAS to monitor and control lighting contactors.

1. Monitoring: On-off status. 2. Control: On-off operation.


A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 16120 "Conductors and Cables."

B. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No. 18 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 16120 "Conductors and Cables."

C. Class 1 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No. 16 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 16120 "Conductors and Cables."









PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SENSOR INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, smoke detectors, fire-suppression systems, and partition assemblies.

B. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90 percent coverage of areas indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions.

3.2 CONTACTOR INSTALLATION

A. Mount electrically held lighting contactors with elastomeric isolator pads to eliminate structure-borne vibration, unless contactors are installed in an enclosure with factory-installed vibration isolators.

3.3 WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Wiring Method: Comply with Section 16120 "Conductors and Cables." Minimum conduit size is 1/2 inch (13 mm).

B. Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power-limited and nonpower-limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated.

D. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Section 16075 "Electrical Identification."

1. Identify controlled circuits in lighting contactors. 2. Identify circuits or luminaires controlled by occupancy sensors at each sensor.

B. Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate lighting control devices and perform tests and inspections.



B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative:

1. Operational Test: After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation.


D. Lighting control devices will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months from date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sensors to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to one visit to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

1. For occupancy and motion sensors, verify operation at outer limits of detector range. Set time delay to suit Owner's operations.

2. For daylighting controls, adjust set points and deadband controls to suit Owner's operations.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Coordinate demonstration of products specified in this Section with demonstration requirements for low-voltage, programmable lighting control systems specified in Section 13845 "Lighting Controls."

B. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain lighting control devices.



ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING AND CONTROL 16215 - 1

SECTION 16215 - ELECTRICAL POWER MONITORING AND CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes the following for monitoring and control of electrical power system:

1. PC-based workstation(s) and software. 2. Communication network and interface modules for RS-485, Modbus TCP/IP data

transmission protocols.


1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Ethernet: Local area network based on IEEE 802.3 standards.

B. Firmware: Software (programs or data) that has been written onto read-only memory (ROM). Firmware is a combination of software and hardware. Storage media with ROMs that have data or programs recorded on them are firmware.

C. HTML: Hypertext markup language.

D. I/O: Input/output.

E. KY Pulse: A term used by the metering industry to describe a method of measuring consumption of electricity that is based on a relay changing status in response to the rotation of the disk in the meter.

F. LAN: Local area network; sometimes plural as "LANs."

G. LCD: Liquid crystal display.

H. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or remote-control, signaling and power-limited circuits.

I. Modbus TCP/IP: An open protocol for exchange of process data.



J. Monitoring: Acquisition, processing, communication, and display of equipment status data, metered electrical parameter values, power quality evaluation data, event and alarm signals, tabulated reports, and event logs.

K. PC: Personal computer; sometimes plural as "PCs."

L. rms: Root-mean-square value of alternating voltage, which is the square root of the mean value of the square of the voltage values during a complete cycle.

M. RS-232: A TIA standard for asynchronous serial data communications between terminal devices.

N. RS-485: A TIA standard for multipoint communications using two twisted-pairs.

O. TCP/IP: Transport control protocol/Internet protocol incorporated into Microsoft Windows.

P. THD: Total harmonic distortion.

Q. UPS: Uninterruptible power supply; used both in singular and plural context.

R. WAN: Wide area network.



1. Attach copies of approved Product Data submittals for products (such as switchboards and switchgear) that describe power monitoring and control features to illustrate coordination among related equipment and power monitoring and control.

B. Shop Drawings: For power monitoring and control equipment. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Outline Drawings: Indicate arrangement of components and clearance and access requirements.

2. Block Diagram: Show interconnections between components specified in this Section and devices furnished with power distribution system components. Indicate data communication paths and identify networks, data buses, data gateways, concentrators, and other devices to be used. Describe characteristics of network and other data communication lines.

3. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

4. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. Coordinate nomenclature and presentation with a block diagram.

5. UPS sizing calculations for workstation. 6. Surge Suppressors: Data for each device used and where applied.





B. Other Informational Submittals:

1. Manufacturer's system installation and setup guides, with data forms to plan and record options and setup decisions.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For power monitoring and control units, to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 01782 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Operating and applications software documentation. 2. Software licenses. 3. Software service agreement. 4. PC installation and operating documentation, manuals, and software for the PC and all

installed peripherals. Software shall include system restore, emergency boot diskettes, and drivers for all installed hardware. Provide separately for each PC.

5. Hard copies of manufacturer's specification sheets, operating specifications, design guides, user's guides for software and hardware, and PDF files on CD-ROM of the hard-copy submittal.

B. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:

1. Self-study guide describing the process for setting equipment's network address; setting Owner's options; procedures to ensure data access from any PC on the network, using a standard Web browser; and recommended firewall setup.

2. Software operating and upgrade manuals. 3. Software Backup: On a magnetic media or compact disc, complete with Owner-selected

options. 4. Device address list and the set point of each device and operator option, as set in

applications software. 5. Graphic file and printout of graphic screens and related icons, with legend.

C. Software licenses and upgrades required by and installed for operating and programming digital and analog devices.



1. Addressable Relays: One for every 10 installed. Furnish at least one of each type. 2. Data Line Surge Suppressors: One for every 10 of each type installed. Furnish at least

one of each type.




A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing power monitoring and control equipment similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.


1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate features of distribution equipment and power monitoring and control components to form an integrated interconnection of compatible components.

1. Match components and interconnections for optimum performance of specified functions.

B. Coordinate Work of this Section with those in Sections specifying distribution components that are monitored or controlled by power monitoring and control equipment.

1.10 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT

A. Technical Support: Beginning with Substantial Completion, provide software support two years.

B. Upgrade Service: Update software to latest version at Project completion. Install and program software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Substantial Completion. Upgrading software shall include the operating systems. Upgrade shall include new or revised licenses for use of software.

1. Provide 30 days' notice to Owner to allow scheduling and access to system and to allow Owner to upgrade computer equipment if necessary.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer products. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial. 3. Landis+Gyr Inc. 4. Rockwell Automation, Inc.; Allen-Bradley brand. 5. Schneider Electric - Power Management Operation.








2.2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

A. Instrumentation and Recording Devices: Monitor and record load profiles and chart energy consumption patterns.

1. Calculate and Record the Following:

a. Load factor. b. Peak demand periods.

2. Measure and Record Metering Data for the Following:

a. Electricity.

B. Software: Calculate allocation of utility costs.

1. Automatically Import Energy Usage Records to Allocate Energy Costs for the Following:

a. At least 15 departments. b. At least 30 tenants. c. At least five processes. d. At least five buildings.

C. Power Quality Monitoring: Identify power system anomalies and measure, display, and record trends and alarms of the following power quality parameters:

1. Voltage regulation and unbalance. 2. Continuous three-phase rms voltage. 3. Periodic max./min./avg. voltage samples. 4. Harmonics. 5. Voltage excursions.

D. Emergency Load Shedding. Preserve critical loads or avoid total shutdown due to unforeseen loss of power sources according to the following logic:

1. Determine system topology. 2. Evaluate remaining loads and sources. 3. Shed loads in less than 100 ms.

E. Demand Management:

1. Peaking or co-generator control. 2. Load interlocking. 3. Load shedding. 4. Load trimming.

F. System: Report equipment status and power system control.



2.3 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

A. Monitoring and Control System: Include multiple PC-based workstations with graphics capability and Web access, with its operating system and application software, connected to data transmission network.

B. Surge Protection: For external wiring of each conductor entry connection to components to protect components from voltage surges originating external to equipment housing and entering through power, communication, signal, control, or sensing leads.

1. Minimum Protection for Power Lines 120 V and More: Auxiliary panel suppressors complying with requirements in Section 16289 "Surge Protection for Low-Voltage Electrical Power Circuits."

2. Minimum Protection for Communication, Signal, Control, and Low-Voltage Power Lines: Comply with requirements as recommended by manufacturer for type of line being protected.

C. Addressable Devices: All transmitters and receivers shall communicate unique device identification and status reports to monitoring and control clients.

D. BAS Interface: Provide factory-installed hardware and software to enable the BAS to monitor, display, and record data for use in processing reports.

1. ASHRAE 135 (BACnet) communication interface with the BAS shall enable the BAS operator to remotely monitor meter information from a BAS operator workstation. Control features and monitoring points displayed locally at metering panel shall be available through the BAS.

2.4 OPERATING SYSTEM

A. Software: Configured for a server and multiple client PCs, each with capability for accessing multiple devices simultaneously. Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP, RS-232, and RS-485 digital communications.

B. Operating System Software: Based on 32-bit, Microsoft Windows workstation operating system. Software shall have the following features:

1. Multiuser and multitasking to allow independent activities and monitoring to occur simultaneously at different workstations.

2. Graphical user interface to show pull-down menus and a menu tree format. 3. Capability for future additions within the indicated system size limits.

C. Peer Computer Control Software: Shall detect a failure of workstation and associated server, and shall cause other workstation and associated server to assume control of all system functions without interruption of operation. Drivers shall be provided in both central computers to support this mode of operation.



2.5 APPLICATIONS SOFTWARE

A. Basic Requirements:

1. Fully compatible with and based on the approved operating system. 2. Password-protected operator login and access; three levels, minimum. 3. Password-protected setup functions. 4. Context-sensitive online help. 5. Capability of creating, deleting, and copying files; and automatically maintaining a

directory of all files, including size and location of each sequential and random-ordered record.

6. Capability for importing custom icons into graphic views to represent alarms and I/O devices.

7. Automatic and encrypted backups for database and history; automatically stored at selected workstation and encrypted with a nine-character alphanumeric password, which must be used to restore or read data contained in backup.

8. Operator audit trail for recording and reporting all changes made to user-defined system options.

B. Workstation Server Functions:

1. Support other client PCs on the LAN and WAN. 2. Maintain recorded data in databases accessible from other PCs on the LAN and WAN.

C. Data Formats:

1. User-programmable export and import of data to and from commonly used Microsoft Windows spreadsheet, database, billing, and other applications; using dynamic data exchange technology.

2. Option to convert reports and graphics to HTML format. 3. Interactive graphics. 4. Option to send preprogrammed or operator designed e-mail reports.

D. Metered Data: Display metered values in real time.

E. Remote Control:

1. Display circuit-breaker status and allow breaker control. 2. User defined with load-shedding automatically initiated and executed schemes

responding to programmed time schedules, set points of metered demands, utility contracted load shedding, or combinations of these.

F. Equipment Documentation: Database for recording of equipment ratings and characteristics; with capability for graphic display on monitors.

G. Graphics: Interactive color-graphics platform with pull-down menus and mouse-driven generation of power system graphics, in formats widely used for such drafting; to include the following:



1. Site plan. 2. Floor plans. 3. Equipment elevations. 4. Single-line diagrams.

H. User-Defined Monitoring and Control Events: Display and record with date and time stamps accurate to 0.1 second, and including the following:

1. Operator log on/off. 2. Attempted operator log on/off. 3. All alarms. 4. Equipment operation counters. 5. Out-of-limit, pickup, trip, and no-response events.

I. Trending Reports: Display data acquired in real-time from different meters or devices, in historical format over user-defined time; unlimited as to interval, duration, or quantity of trends.

1. Spreadsheet functions of sum, delta, percent, average, mean, standard deviation, and related functions applied to recorded data.

2. Charting, statistical, and display functions of standard Windows-based spreadsheet.

J. Alarms: Display and record alarm messages from discrete input and controls outputs, according to user programmable protocol.

1. Functions requiring user acknowledgment shall run in background during computer use for other applications and override other presentations when they occur.

K. Waveform Data: Display and record waveforms on demand or automatically on an alarm or programmed event. Include the graphic displays of the following, based on user-specified criteria:

1. Phase voltages, phase currents, and residual current. 2. Overlay of three-phase currents, and overlay each phase voltage and current. 3. Waveforms ranging in length from 2 cycles to 5 minutes. 4. Disturbance and steady-state waveforms up to 512 points per cycle. 5. Transient waveforms up to 83,333 points per cycle on 60-Hz base. 6. Calculated waveform, based on recorded data, on a minimum of four cycles of data of the

following:

a. THD. b. rms magnitudes. c. Peak values. d. Crest factors. e. Magnitude of individual harmonics.

L. Data Sharing: Allow export of recorded displays and tabular data to third-party applications software.

1. Tabular data shall be in the comma-separated values.



M. Activity Billing Software:

1. Automatically compute and prepare activity demand and energy-use statements based on metering of energy use and peak demand integrated over user-defined interval.

2. Intervals shall be same as used by electric utilities, including current vendor. 3. Import metered data from saved records that were generated by metering and monitoring

software. 4. Maintain separate directory for each activity's historical billing information. 5. Prepare summary reports in user-defined formats and time intervals.

N. Reporting: User commands initiate the reporting of a list of current alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions in system or a log of past events.

1. Print a record of user-defined alarm, supervisory, and trouble events on workstation printer.

2. Sort and report by device name and by function. 3. Report type of signal (alarm, supervisory, or trouble), description, date, and time of

occurrence. 4. Differentiate alarm signals from other indications. 5. When system is reset, report reset event with same information concerning device,

location, date, and time.

2.6 COMMUNICATION COMPONENTS AND NETWORKS

A. Network Configuration: High-speed, multi-access, open nonproprietary, industry standard communication protocol; LANs complying with EIA 485, 100 Base-T Ethernet, and Modbus TCP/IP.

2.7 POWER MONITORS

A. Separately mounted, permanently installed instrument for power monitoring and control, complying with UL 1244.

1. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 1.

B. Environmental Conditions: System components shall be capable of withstanding the following environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of operating capability:

1. Indoor installation in non-air-conditioned spaces that have environmental controls to maintain ambient conditions of 0 to 122 deg F (minus 18 to plus 50 deg C) dry bulb and 20 to 90 percent relative humidity, noncondensing.

C. rms Real-Time Measurements:

1. Current: Each phase, neutral, average of three phases, percent unbalance. 2. Voltage: Line-to-line each phase, line-to-line average of three phases, line-to-neutral

each phase, line-to-neutral average of three phases, line-to-neutral percent unbalance.



3. Power: Per phase and three-phase total. 4. Reactive Power: Per phase and three-phase total. 5. Apparent Power: Per phase and three-phase total. 6. Power Factor: Per phase and three-phase total. 7. Displacement Power Factor: Per phase and three-phase total. 8. Frequency. 9. THD: Current and voltage. 10. Accumulated Energy: Real kWh, reactive kVARh, apparent kVAh (signed/absolute). 11. Incremental Energy: Real kWh, reactive kVARh, apparent kVAh (signed/absolute). 12. Conditional Energy: Real kWh, reactive kVARh, apparent kVAh (signed/absolute).

D. Demand Current Calculations, per Phase, Three-Phase Average and Neutral:

1. Present. 2. Running average. 3. Last completed interval. 4. Peak.

E. Demand Real Power Calculations, Three-Phase Total:

1. Present. 2. Running average. 3. Last completed interval. 4. Predicted. 5. Peak. 6. Coincident with peak kVA demand. 7. Coincident with kVAR demand.

F. Demand Reactive Power Calculations, Three-Phase Total:


G. Demand Apparent Power Calculations, Three-Phase Total:




H. Average Power Factor Calculations, Demand Coincident, Three-Phase Total:

1. Last completed interval. 2. Coincident with kW peak. 3. Coincident with kVAR peak. 4. Coincident with kVA peak.

I. Power Analysis Values:

1. THD, Voltage and Current: Per phase, three phase, and neutral. 2. Displacement Power Factor: Per phase, three phase. 3. Fundamental Voltage, Magnitude and Angle: Per phase. 4. Fundamental Currents, Magnitude and Angle: Per phase. 5. Fundamental Real Power: Per phase, three phase. 6. Fundamental Reactive Power: Per phase. 7. Harmonic Power: Per phase, three phase. 8. Phase rotation. 9. Unbalance: Current and voltage. 10. Harmonic Magnitudes and Angles for Current and Voltages: Per phase, up to 31st

harmonic.

J. Power Demand Calculations: According to one of the following calculation methods, selectable by the user:

1. Thermal Demand: Sliding window updated every second for the present demand and at end of the interval for the last interval. Adjustable window that can be set in 1-minute intervals, from 1 to 60 minutes.

2. Block Interval with Optional Subintervals: Adjustable for 1-minute intervals, from 1 to 60 minutes. User-defined parameters for the following block intervals:

a. Sliding block that calculates demand every second, with intervals less than 15 minutes, and every 15 seconds with an interval between 15 and 60 minutes.

b. Fixed block that calculates demand at end of the interval. c. Rolling block subinterval that calculates demand at end of each subinterval and

displays it at end of the interval.

3. Demand Calculation Initiated by a Synchronization Signal:

a. Signal is a pulse from an external source. Demand period begins with every pulse. Calculation shall be configurable as either a block or rolling block calculation.

b. Signal is a communication signal. Calculation shall be configurable as either a block or rolling block calculation.

c. Demand can be synchronized with clock in the power meter.

K. Sampling:

1. Current and voltage shall be digitally sampled at a rate high enough to provide accuracy to 63rd harmonic of 60-Hz fundamental.

2. Power monitor shall provide continuous sampling at a rate of 128 samples per cycle on all voltage and current channels in the meter.



L. Minimum and Maximum Values: Record monthly minimum and maximum values, including date and time of record. For three-phase measurements, identify phase of recorded value. Record the following parameters:

1. Line-to-line voltage. 2. Line-to-neutral voltage. 3. Current per phase. 4. Line-to-line voltage unbalance. 5. Line-to-neutral voltage unbalance. 6. Power factor. 7. Displacement power factor. 8. Total power. 9. Total reactive power. 10. Total apparent power. 11. THD voltage L-L. 12. THD voltage L-N. 13. THD current. 14. Frequency.

M. Harmonic Calculation: Display and record the following:

1. Harmonic magnitudes and angles for each phase voltage and current through 31st harmonic. Calculate for all three phases, current and voltage, and residual current. Current and voltage information for all phases shall be obtained simultaneously from same cycle.

2. Harmonic magnitude reported as a percentage of the fundamental or as a percentage of rms values, as selected by user.

N. Current and Voltage Ratings:

1. Designed for use with current inputs from standard instrument current transformers with 5-A secondary and shall have a metering range of 0-10 A.

2. Withstand ratings shall not be less than 15 A, continuous; 50 A, lasting over 10 seconds, no more frequently than once per hour; 500 A, lasting 1 second, no more frequently than once per hour.

3. Designed for use with voltage inputs from standard instrument potential transformers with a 120-V secondary.

O. Accuracy:

1. Comply with ANSI C12.20, Class 0.5; and IEC 60687, Class 0.5 for revenue meters. Accuracy from Light to Full Rating shall meet the following criteria:

a. Power: Accurate to 0.25 percent of reading, plus 0.025 percent of full scale. b. Voltage and Current: Accurate to 0.075 percent of reading, plus 0.025 percent of

full scale. c. Power Factor: Plus or minus 0.002, from 0.5 leading to 0.5 lagging. d. Frequency: Plus or minus 0.01 Hz at 45 to 67 Hz.



2. For meters that are circuit-breaker accessories, metering accuracy at full-scale shall not be less than the following:

a. Current: Plus or minus 2.5 percent. b. Voltage: Plus or minus 1.5 percent. c. Energy, Demand, and Power: Plus or minus 4.0 percent. d. Frequency: Plus or minus 1 Hz.

P. Waveform Capture:

1. Capture and store steady-state waveforms of voltage and current channels; initiated manually. Each capture shall be for 3 cycles, 128 data points for each cycle, allowing resolution of harmonics to 31st harmonic of basic 60 Hz.

2. Store captured waveforms in internal nonvolatile memory; available for PC display, archiving, and analysis.

Q. Input: Two digital input signals.

1. Normal mode for on/off signal. 2. Demand interval synchronization pulse, accepting a demand synchronization pulse from

a utility demand meter. 3. Conditional energy signal to control conditional energy accumulation.

R. Outputs:

1. Operated either by user command sent via communication link, or set to operate in response to user-defined alarm or event.

2. Closed in either a momentary or latched mode as defined by user. 3. Each output relay used in a momentary contact mode shall have an independent timer that

can be set by user. 4. One digital KY pulse to a user-definable increment of energy measurement. Output

ratings shall be up to 120-V ac, 300-V dc, 50 mA, and provide 3500-V rms isolation. 5. Two relay output modules, providing a load voltage range from 20- to 240-V ac or from

20- to 30-V dc, supporting a load current of 2 A. 6. Output Relay Control:

a. Relay outputs shall operate either by user command sent via communication link or in response to user-defined alarm or event.

b. Normally open and normally closed contacts, field configured to operate as follows:

1) Normal contact closure where contacts change state for as long as signal exists.

2) Latched mode when contacts change state on receipts of a pickup signal; changed state is held until a dropout signal is received.

3) Timed mode when contacts change state on receipt of a pickup signal; changed state is held for a preprogrammed duration.

4) End of power demand interval when relay operates as synchronization pulse for other devices.



5) Energy Pulse Output: Relay pulses quantities used for absolute kWh, absolute kVARh, kVAh, kWh In, kVARh In, kWh Out, and kVARh Out.

6) Output controlled by multiple alarms using Boolean-type logic.

S. Onboard Data Logging:

1. Store logged data, alarms, events, and waveforms in 800 KB of onboard nonvolatile memory.

2. Stored Data:

a. Billing Log: User configurable; data shall be recorded every 15 minutes, identified by month, day, and 15-minute interval. Accumulate 24 months of monthly data, 32 days of daily data, and between 2 and 52 days of 15-minute interval data, depending on number of quantities selected.

b. Custom Data Logs: Three user-defined logs holding up to 96 parameters. Date and time stamp each entry to the second and include the following user definitions:

1) Schedule interval. 2) Event definition. 3) Configured as "fill-and-hold" or "circular, first-in first-out."

c. Alarm Log: Include time, date, event information, and coincident information for each defined alarm or event.

d. Waveform Log: Store captured waveforms configured as "fill-and-hold" or "circular, first-in first-out."

3. Default values for all logs shall be initially set at factory, with logging to begin on device power up.

T. Alarms.

1. User Options:

a. Define pickup, dropout, and delay. b. Assign one of four severity levels to make it easier for user to respond to the most

important events first. c. Allow for combining up to four alarms using Boolean-type logic statements for

outputting a single alarm.

2. Alarm Events:

a. Over/undercurrent. b. Over/undervoltage. c. Current imbalance. d. Phase loss, current. e. Phase loss, voltage. f. Voltage imbalance. g. Over kW demand. h. Phase reversal. i. Digital input off/on.



j. End of incremental energy interval. k. End of demand interval.

U. Control Power: 90- to 457-V ac or 100- to 300-V dc.

V. Communications:

1. Power monitor shall be permanently connected to communicate via RS-485 Modbus TCP/IP.

2. Local plug-in connections shall be for RS-232 and 100 Base-T Ethernet.

2.8 STANDALONE, WEB-ENABLED MONITORING AND CONTROL INSTRUMENT

A. Separately mounted, permanently installed instrument for power monitoring and control.

1. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 1.

B. Environmental Conditions: System components shall be capable of withstanding the following environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of operating capability.

1. Indoor installation in non-air-conditioned spaces that have environmental controls to maintain ambient conditions of 0 to 122 deg F (minus 18 to plus 50 deg C) dry bulb and 20 to 90 percent relative humidity, noncondensing.

C. Power-Distribution Equipment Monitor: Web enabled, with integral network port and embedded Web server with factory-configured firmware and HTML-formatted Web pages for viewing of power monitoring and equipment status information from connected devices equipped with digital communication ports.

D. LAN Connectivity: Multipoint, RS-485 Modbus serial communication network, interconnecting all breaker trip units, protective relays, drives, and metering devices equipped with communications. Serial communication network connected to Ethernet server that functions as a gateway and server, providing data access via 100 Base-T LAN.

E. Communication Devices within the Equipment: Addressed at factory and tested to verify reliable communication with network server.

F. Server Configuration:

1. Initial network parameters set using a standard Web browser. Connect via a local operator interface, or an RJ-45 port accessible from front of equipment.

2. Network server shall be factory programmed with embedded HTML-formatted Web pages that are user configurable and that provide detailed communication diagnostic information for serial and Ethernet ports as status of RS-485 network; with internal memory management information pages for viewing using a standard Web browser.

3. Login: Password protected; password administration accessible from the LAN using a standard Web browser.

4. Operating Software: Suitable for local access; firewall protected.



G. Data Access:

1. Network server shall include embedded HTML pages providing real-time information from devices connected to RS-485 network ports via a standard Web browser.

H. Equipment Monitoring Options: Login shall be followed by a main menu for selecting summary Web pages that follow.

I. Summary Web pages shall be factory configured to display the following information for each communicating device within the power equipment lineup:

1. User-Configured Custom Home Page: Provide for the lineup, showing status-at-a-glance of key operating values.

2. Circuit Summary Page: Circuit name, three-phase average rms current, power (kW), power factor, and breaker status.

3. Load Current Summary Page: Circuit name, Phase A, B, and C rms current values. 4. Demand Current Summary Page: Circuit name, Phase A, B, and C average demand

current values. 5. Power Summary Page: Circuit name, present demand power (kW), peak demand power

(kW), and recorded time and date. 6. Energy Summary Page: Circuit name, energy (kWh), reactive energy (kVARh), and

time/date of last reset. 7. Specific Device Pages: Each individual communicating device shall display detailed,

real-time information, as appropriate for device type.

a. Display historical energy data that shall be logged automatically for each device, as appropriate for device type.

b. Display historical data logged from each device in graphical time-trend plots. Value to be displayed on time-trend plot shall be user selectable. Time interval to be displayed on scale shall be for previous day or week.

8. Export historical energy data to a PC or workstation through network using FTP (File Transfer Protocol). Format exported data in a CSV (Comma Separated Variable) file format for importing into spreadsheet applications.

J. Communications:

1. Power monitor: Permanently connected to communicate via RS-485 Modbus TCP/IP. 2. Local Plug-in Connections: RS-232 and 100 Base-T Ethernet. 3. Monitor Display: Backlighted LCD to display metered data with touch-screen selecting

device.

2.9 WORKSTATION HARDWARE

A. Environmental Conditions: System components shall be capable of withstanding the following environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of operating capability:



1. Indoor installation in spaces that have environmental controls to maintain ambient conditions of 36 to 122 deg F (2 to 50 deg C) dry bulb and 20 to 90 percent relative humidity, noncondensing.

B. Computer: Standard unmodified PC of modular design, designed for the latest version of Windows operating system.

1. Memory: 32-GB of usable installed memory. 2. Real-Time Clock. Automatic time correction once every 24 hours by synchronizing

clock with the Time Service Department of the U.S. Naval Observatory. 3. Ports: Two RS-232-F serial ports for general use; one parallel port; four USB ports 4. Replaceable graphics board. 5. LAN Adapter Card. 6. Sound Card: For playback and recording of digital WAV sound files associated with

audible warning and alarm functions. 7. Color Monitor: WXGA TFT, not less than 18 inches (455 mm), LCD type. 8. Keyboard: US English. 9. Mouse: Standard. 10. Minimum Disk Storage: 2000-GB, 7200 rpm hard drive. 11. Magnetic Tape System: 4-mm cartridge magnetic tape system with minimum 20-GB

formatted capacity per tape. Provide 10 tapes, each in a rigid cartridge with spring-loaded cover and operator-selectable write-protect feature.

12. CD-RW/DVD-ROM Drive. 13. Report Printer: Minimum resolution 600 dpi laser printer.

a. Connected to central station and designated workstations. b. RAM: 4 MB, minimum. c. Printing Speed: Minimum 12 pages per minute. d. Paper Handling: Automatic sheet feeder with 250-sheet paper cassette and with

automatic feed.

2.10 LAN CABLES

A. RS-485 Cable:

1. PVC-Jacketed, RS-485 Cable: Paired, 2 pairs, twisted, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned copper conductors, PVC insulation, unshielded, PVC jacket, and NFPA 70, Type CMG.

2. Plenum-Type, RS-485 Cable: Paired, 2 pairs, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned copper conductors, fluorinated-ethylene-propylene insulation, unshielded, and fluorinated-ethylene-propylene jacket, and NFPA 70, Type CMP.

B. Unshielded Twisted Pair Cables: Category 5e as specified for horizontal cable for data service per ICEA S-90-661, TIA-568-C.1, and UL 444-2008.

2.11 LOW-VOLTAGE WIRING

A. Comply with Section 16120 "Conductors and Cables."



B. Comply with Section 16123 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables."

C. Low-Voltage Control Cable: Multiple conductor, color-coded, No. 20 AWG copper, minimum.

1. Sheath: PVC; except in plenum-type spaces, use sheath listed for plenums. 2. Ordinary Switching Circuits: Three conductors unless otherwise indicated. 3. Switching Circuits with Pilot Lights or Locator Feature: Five conductors unless

otherwise indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine pathway elements intended for cables. Check raceways, cable trays, and other elements for compliance with space allocations, installation tolerances, hazards to cable installation, and other conditions affecting installation.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 CABLING


B. Install cables and wiring according to requirements in Section 16717 "Communications Horizontal Cabling."

C. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceway and cable tray except within consoles, cabinets, desks, and counters. Conceal raceway and wiring except in unfinished spaces.

D. Install LAN cables using techniques, practices, and methods that are consistent with specified category rating of components and that ensure specified category performance of completed and linked signal paths, end to end.

E. Install cables without damaging conductors, shield, or jacket.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Section 16075 "Electrical Identification."

B. Label each power monitoring and control module with a unique designation.

3.4 GROUNDING

A. Comply with IEEE 1100, "Recommended Practice for Powering and Grounding Electronic Equipment."






1. Electrical Tests: Use caution when testing devices containing solid-state components. 2. Continuity tests of circuits. 3. Operational Tests: Set and operate controls at workstation and at monitored and

controlled devices to demonstrate their functions and capabilities. Use a methodical sequence that cues and reproduces actual operating functions as recommended by manufacturer. Submit sequences for approval. Note response to each test command and operation. Note time intervals between initiation of alarm conditions and registration of alarms at central-processing workstation.

a. Coordinate testing required by this Section with that required by Sections specifying equipment being monitored and controlled.

b. Test LANs according to requirements in Section 16717 "Communications Horizontal Cabling."

c. System components with battery backup shall be operated on battery power for a period of not less than 10 percent of calculated battery operating time.

d. Verify accuracy of graphic screens and icons. e. Metering Test: Load feeders, measure loads on feeder conductor with an rms

reading clamp-on ammeter, and simultaneously read indicated current on the same phase at central-processing workstation. Record and compare values measured at the two locations. Resolve discrepancies greater than 5 percent and record resolution method and results.

f. Record metered values, control settings, operations, cues, time intervals, and functional observations and submit test reports printed by workstation printer.

C. Power monitoring and control equipment will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


E. Correct deficiencies, make necessary adjustments, and retest. Verify that specified requirements are met.

F. Test Labeling: After satisfactory completion of tests and inspections, apply a label to tested components indicating test results, date, and responsible agency and representative.

G. Reports: Written reports of tests and observations. Record defective materials and workmanship and unsatisfactory test results. Record repairs and adjustments.

H. Remove and replace malfunctioning devices and circuits and retest as specified above.



3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train ATST POC's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems. See Section 01820 "Demonstration and Training."

1. Train ATST POC's management and maintenance personnel in interpreting and using monitoring displays and in configuring and using software and reports. Include troubleshooting, servicing, adjusting, and maintaining equipment. Provide a minimum of 16 hours' training.

2. Training Aid: Use approved final versions of software and maintenance manuals as training aids.

3.7 ON-SITE ASSISTANCE

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.



PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS 16231 - 1

SECTION 16231 - PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes packaged engine-generator sets for standby power supply with the following features:

1. Diesel engine. 2. Unit-mounted cooling system. 3. Unit-mounted control and monitoring. 4. Performance requirements for sensitive loads.


1. Section 16074 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems" for equipment vibration isolation and seismic control devices.

2. Section 16415 "Transfer Switches" for transfer switches including sensors and relays to initiate automatic-starting and -stopping signals for engine-generator sets.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Operational Bandwidth: The total variation from the lowest to highest value of a parameter over the range of conditions indicated, expressed as a percentage of the nominal value of the parameter.


A. Product Data: For each type of packaged engine generator indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. In addition, include the following:

1. Thermal damage curve for generator. 2. Time-current characteristic curves for generator protective device.




1. Dimensioned outline plan and elevation drawings of engine-generator set and other components specified.

2. Design Calculations: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.

3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Detail fabrication, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include base weights.



A. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that day tank, engine-generator set, batteries, battery racks, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Section 16074 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following:


a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."



B. Qualification Data: For installer manufacturer and testing agency.


1. Certified summary of prototype-unit test report. 2. Certified Test Reports: For components and accessories that are equivalent, but not

identical, to those tested on prototype unit. 3. Certified Summary of Performance Tests: Certify compliance with specified requirement

to meet performance criteria for sensitive loads. 4. Report of factory test on units to be shipped for this Project, showing evidence of

compliance with specified requirements. 5. Report of sound generation. 6. Report of exhaust emissions showing compliance with applicable regulations. 7. Certified Torsional Vibration Compatibility: Comply with NFPA 110.


E. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.




A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For packaged engine generators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 01782 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. List of tools and replacement items recommended to be stored at Project for ready access. Include part and drawing numbers, current unit prices, and source of supply.



1. Fuses: One for every 10 of each type and rating, but no fewer than one of each. 2. Indicator Lamps: Two for every six of each type used, but no fewer than two of each. 3. Filters: One set each of lubricating oil, fuel, and combustion-air filters.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

1. Maintenance Proximity: Not more than four hours' normal travel time from Installer's place of business to Project site.

2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for vibration isolators and seismic restraints of engine skid mounts, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer. Maintain, within 200 miles (321 km) of Project site, a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL), and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain packaged generator sets and auxiliary components through one source from a single manufacturer.



E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

F. Comply with ASME B15.1.

G. Comply with NFPA 37.

H. Comply with NFPA 70.

I. Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 2 emergency power supply system.

J. Comply with UL 2200.

K. Engine Exhaust Emissions: Comply with applicable state and local government requirements.

L. Noise Emission: Comply with Haleakalā High Altitude Observatory and applicable state and local government requirements for maximum noise level at adjacent property boundaries due to sound emitted by generator set including engine, engine exhaust, engine cooling-air intake and discharge, and other components of installation.


A. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify ATST POC no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without ATST POC written permission.

B. Environmental Conditions: Engine-generator system shall withstand the following environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of performance capability:

1. Ambient Temperature: 5 to 40 deg C. 2. Relative Humidity: 0 to 95 percent. 3. Altitude: Sea level to 10,000 feet (3,300 M).

C. Unusual Service Conditions: Engine-generator equipment and installation are required to operate under the following conditions:

1. During a seismic event, provide seismic control devices to retrain equipment while maintaining vibration isolation.

2. Engine-generator equipment shall also be fully functional after the seismic event.



1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for package engine generators. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of packaged engine generators and associated auxiliary components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Caterpillar; Engine Div. 2. Generac Power Systems, Inc. 3. Kohler Co.; Generator Division. 4. Magnetek, Inc. 5. Onan/Cummins Power Generation; Industrial Business Group. 6. Spectrum Detroit Diesel.

2.2 ENGINE-GENERATOR SET

A. Factory-assembled and -tested, engine-generator set.

B. Mounting Frame: Maintain alignment of mounted components without depending on concrete foundation; and have lifting attachments.

1. Rigging Diagram: Inscribed on metal plate permanently attached to mounting frame to indicate location and lifting capacity of each lifting attachment and generator-set center of gravity.

C. Capacities and Characteristics:

1. Power Output Ratings: Nominal ratings are 500 kW, 625 kVA at 0.8 PF, standby rating per NEC Article 701 based on site conditions of 10,000 feet (3,300 M) altitude and 95 deg F ambient temperature.

2. Output Connections: 277/480Volts AC, three-phase, four wire. 3. Nameplates: For each major system component to identify manufacturer's name and

address, and model and serial number of component.









D. Generator-Set Performance for Sensitive Loads:

1. Oversizing generator compared with the rated power output of the engine is permissible to meet specified performance.

a. Nameplate Data for Oversized Generator: Show ratings required by the Contract Documents rather than ratings that would normally be applied to generator size installed.

2. Steady-State Voltage Operational Bandwidth: 1 percent of rated output voltage from no load to full load.

3. Transient Voltage Performance: Not more than 10 percent variation for 50 percent step-load increase or decrease. Voltage shall recover and remain within the steady-state operating band within 0.5 second.

4. Steady-State Frequency Operational Bandwidth: Plus or minus 0.25 percent of rated frequency from no load to full load.

5. Steady-State Frequency Stability: When system is operating at any constant load within the rated load, there shall be no random speed variations outside the steady-state operational band and no hunting or surging of speed.

6. Transient Frequency Performance: Less than 2-Hz variation for 50 percent step-load increase or decrease. Frequency shall recover and remain within the steady-state operating band within three seconds.

7. Output Waveform: At no load, harmonic content measured line to neutral shall not exceed 2 percent total with no slot ripple. Telephone influence factor, determined according to NEMA MG 1, shall not exceed 50 percent.

8. Sustained Short-Circuit Current: For a 3-phase, bolted short circuit at system output terminals, system shall supply a minimum of 300 percent of rated full-load current for not less than 10 seconds and then clear the fault automatically, without damage to winding insulation or other generator system components.

9. Excitation System: Performance shall be unaffected by voltage distortion caused by nonlinear load.

a. Provide permanent magnet excitation for power source to voltage regulator.

2.3 ENGINE

A. Fuel: Fuel oil, Grade DF-2.

B. Rated Engine Speed: 1800 rpm.

C. Maximum Piston Speed for Four-Cycle Engines: 2250 fpm (11.4 m/s).

D. Lubrication System: The following items are mounted on engine or skid:

1. Filter and Strainer: Rated to remove 90 percent of particles 5 micrometers and smaller while passing full flow.

2. Thermostatic Control Valve: Control flow in system to maintain optimum oil temperature. Unit shall be capable of full flow and is designed to be fail-safe.



3. Crankcase Drain: Arranged for complete gravity drainage to an easily removable container with no disassembly and without use of pumps, siphons, special tools, or appliances.

E. Engine Fuel System:

1. Main Fuel Pump: Mounted on engine. Pump ensures adequate primary fuel flow under starting and load conditions.

2. Relief-Bypass Valve: Automatically regulates pressure in fuel line and returns excess fuel to source.

F. Coolant Jacket Heater: Electric-immersion type, factory installed in coolant jacket system. Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 equipment for heater capacity.

G. Governor: Adjustable isochronous, with speed sensing.

H. Cooling System: Closed loop, liquid cooled, with radiator factory mounted on engine-generator-set mounting frame and integral engine-driven coolant pump.

1. Coolant: Solution of 50 percent ethylene-glycol-based antifreeze and 50 percent water, with anticorrosion additives as recommended by engine manufacturer.

2. Size of Radiator: Adequate to contain expansion of total system coolant from cold start to 110 percent load condition.

3. Expansion Tank: Constructed of welded steel plate and rated to withstand maximum closed-loop coolant system pressure for engine used. Equip with gage glass and petcock.

4. Temperature Control: Self-contained, thermostatic-control valve modulates coolant flow automatically to maintain optimum constant coolant temperature as recommended by engine manufacturer.

5. Coolant Hose: Flexible assembly with inside surface of nonporous rubber and outer covering of aging-, ultraviolet-, and abrasion-resistant fabric.

a. Rating: 50-psig (345-kPa) maximum working pressure with coolant at 180 deg F (82 deg C), and noncollapsible under vacuum.

b. End Fittings: Flanges or steel pipe nipples with clamps to suit piping and equipment connections.

I. Muffler/Silencer: Critical type, sized as recommended by engine manufacturer and selected with exhaust piping system to not exceed engine manufacturer's engine backpressure requirements.

1. Minimum sound attenuation of 25 dB at 500 Hz. 2. Sound level measured at a distance of 10 feet (3 m) from exhaust discharge after

installation is complete shall be 85 dBA or less. 3. Maximum sound level at property line shall not exceed 45 dBA.

J. Air-Intake Filter: Heavy-duty, engine-mounted air cleaner with replaceable dry-filter element and "blocked filter" indicator.

K. Starting System: 12-V electric, with negative ground.



1. Components: Sized so they will not be damaged during a full engine-cranking cycle with ambient temperature at maximum specified in Part 1 "Project Conditions" Article.

2. Cranking Motor: Heavy-duty unit that automatically engages and releases from engine flywheel without binding.

3. Cranking Cycle: As required by NFPA 110 for system level specified. 4. Battery: Adequate capacity within ambient temperature range specified in Part 1 "Project

Conditions" Article to provide specified cranking cycle at least twice without recharging. 5. Battery Cable: Size as recommended by engine manufacturer for cable length indicated.

Include required interconnecting conductors and connection accessories. 6. Battery-Charging Alternator: Factory mounted on engine with solid-state voltage

regulation and 35-A minimum continuous rating.

a. Operation: Equalizing-charging rate of 10 A shall be initiated automatically after battery has lost charge until an adjustable equalizing voltage is achieved at battery terminals. Unit shall then be automatically switched to a lower float-charging mode and shall continue to operate in that mode until battery is discharged again.

b. Automatic Temperature Compensation: Adjust float and equalize voltages for variations in ambient temperature from minus 40 deg C to plus 60 deg C to prevent overcharging at high temperatures and undercharging at low temperatures.

c. Automatic Voltage Regulation: Maintain constant output voltage regardless of input voltage variations up to plus or minus 10 percent.

d. Ammeter and Voltmeter: Flush mounted in door. Meters shall indicate charging rates.

e. Safety Functions: Sense abnormally low battery voltage and close contacts providing low battery voltage indication on control and monitoring panel. Sense high battery voltage and loss of ac input or dc output of battery charger. Either condition shall close contacts that provide a battery-charger malfunction indication at system control and monitoring panel.

f. Enclosure and Mounting: NEMA 250, Type 1, wall-mounted cabinet.

2.4 FUEL OIL STORAGE

A. Comply with NFPA 30.

B. Base Mounted Fuel Oil Day Tank: Comply with UL 142, based mounted, factory-fabricated fuel tank assembly, with integral, float-controlled, supply and return transfer pumps and the following features:

1. Containment: Integral rupture basin with a capacity of 150 percent of nominal capacity of day tank.

a. Leak Detector: Locate in rupture basin and connect to a dedicated leak detection control panel, providing audible and visual alarm in the event of day-tank leak.

2. Tank Capacity: As recommended by engine manufacturer for an uninterrupted period of 4 hours' operation at 100 percent of rated power output of engine-generator system without being refilled.



3. Fuel Supply Pump and Capacity: Provide fuel supply pump fully integrated into base mount fuel day tank complete with solevoid valves to supply fuel to day tank from existing remote fuel tank. Exceeds maximum flow of fuel drawn by engine-mounted fuel supply pump at 110 percent of rated capacity, including fuel returned from engine.

4. Day Tank Low-Level Alarm Sensor: Liquid-level device operates alarm contacts at 25 percent of normal fuel level.

5. Day Tank High-Level Alarm Sensor: Liquid-level device operates alarm and redundant fuel shutoff contacts at midpoint between overflow level and 100 percent of normal fuel level.

6. Piping Connections: Factory-installed fuel supply and return lines from tank to transfer pumps to engine; local fuel fill, vent line, overflow line; and tank drain line with shutoff valve.

7. Day tank level indication. 8. Fuel Return Pump: Provide fuel return pump fully integrated into base mount fuel day

tank complete with solenoid valves to return unused fuel in piping between day tank and existing remote fuel tank back to remote fuel tank.

9. Day tank vandal-resistant fill cap. 10. Day tank fuel level monitoring alarms, and leak detection shall be connected to dedicated

leak detection control panel specified in Division 15.

2.5 CONTROL AND MONITORING

A. Automatic Starting System Sequence of Operation: When mode-selector switch on the control and monitoring panel is in the automatic position, remote-control contacts in one or more separate automatic transfer switches initiate starting and stopping of generator set. When mode-selector switch is switched to the on position, generator set starts. The off position of same switch initiates generator-set shutdown. When generator set is running, specified system or equipment failures or derangements automatically shut down generator set and initiate alarms. Operation of a remote emergency-stop switch also shuts down generator set.

B. Configuration: Operating and safety indications, protective devices, basic system controls, and engine gages shall be grouped in a common control and monitoring panel mounted on the generator set. Mounting method shall isolate the control panel from generator-set vibration.

C. Indicating and Protective Devices and Controls: As required by NFPA 110 for Level 2 (standby) system, and the following:

1. AC voltmeter. 2. AC ammeter. 3. AC frequency meter. 4. DC voltmeter (alternator battery charging). 5. Engine-coolant temperature gage. 6. Engine lubricating-oil pressure gage. 7. Running-time meter. 8. Ammeter-voltmeter, phase-selector switch(es). 9. Generator-voltage adjusting rheostat. 10. Fuel tank derangement alarm. 11. Fuel tank high-level shutdown of fuel supply alarm. 12. Generator overload.



D. Supporting Items: Include sensors, transducers, terminals, relays, and other devices and include wiring required to support specified items. Locate sensors and other supporting items on engine or generator, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Provide engine run auxiliary contacts — one (1) N.O.; one (1) N.C. — for control interface to external fresh air intake, motor actuated louvers located in exterior wall of engine/generator room.

F. Connection to Data Link: The generator set shall be provided with a network communication module to allow real time communication with the generator set control by remote devices. The control shall communicate all engine and alternator data; alarm, shutdown and status conditions; and allow starting and stopping of the generator set via the network in both test and emergency modes.

G. Common Remote Audible Alarm: Signal the occurrence of any events listed below without differentiating between event types. Connect so that after an alarm is silenced, clearing of initiating condition will reactivate alarm until silencing switch is reset.

1. Engine high-temperature shutdown. 2. Lube-oil, low-pressure shutdown. 3. Overspeed shutdown. 4. Remote emergency-stop shutdown. 5. Engine high-temperature prealarm. 6. Lube-oil, low-pressure prealarm. 7. Fuel tank, low-fuel level. 8. Low coolant level.

H. Remote Emergency-Stop Switch: Flush; wall mounted, unless otherwise indicated; and labeled. Push button shall be protected from accidental operation.

2.6 GENERATOR OVERCURRENT AND FAULT PROTECTION

A. Generator Circuit Breaker: Insulated-case, electronic-trip type; 100 percent rated; complying with UL 489.

1. Tripping Characteristics: Adjustable long-time and short-time delay and instantaneous (LSI).

2. Trip Settings: Selected to coordinate with generator thermal damage curve. 3. Shunt Trip: Connected to trip breaker when generator set is shut down by other

protective devices. 4. Mounting: Adjacent to or integrated with control and monitoring panel.

2.7 GENERATOR, EXCITER, AND VOLTAGE REGULATOR

A. Comply with NEMA MG 1.

B. Drive: Generator shaft shall be directly connected to engine shaft. Exciter shall be rotated integrally with generator rotor.



C. Electrical Insulation: Class H or Class F.

D. Stator-Winding Leads: Brought out to terminal box to permit future reconnection for other voltages if required.

E. Construction shall prevent mechanical, electrical, and thermal damage due to vibration, overspeed up to 125 percent of rating, and heat during operation at 110 percent of rated capacity.

F. Enclosure: Dripproof.

G. Instrument Transformers: Mounted within generator enclosure.

H. Voltage Regulator: Solid-state type, separate from exciter, providing performance as specified.

1. Adjusting rheostat on control and monitoring panel shall provide plus or minus 5 percent adjustment of output-voltage operating band.

I. Windings: Two-thirds pitch stator winding and fully linked amortisseur winding.

J. Subtransient Reactance: 12 percent, maximum.

2.8 VIBRATION ISOLATION DEVICES

A. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with seismic restraint.

1. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to wind loads or if weight is removed; factory-drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick, elastomeric isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable equipment mounting and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation.

2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of compressed height of the spring at rated load.

3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without


2.9 FINISHES

A. Indoor Enclosures and Components: Manufacturer's standard finish over corrosion-resistant pretreatment and compatible primer.


A. Prototype Testing: Factory test engine-generator set using same engine model, constructed of identical or equivalent components and equipped with identical or equivalent accessories.

1. Tests: Comply with NFPA 110, Level 1 Energy Converters and with IEEE 115.



B. Project-Specific Equipment Tests: Before shipment, factory test engine-generator set and other system components and accessories manufactured specifically for this Project. Perform tests at rated load and power factor. Include the following tests:

1. Test components and accessories furnished with installed unit that are not identical to those on tested prototype to demonstrate compatibility and reliability.

2. Full load run. 3. Maximum power. 4. Voltage regulation. 5. Transient and steady-state governing. 6. Single-step load pickup. 7. Safety shutdown. 8. Provide 14 days' advance notice of tests and opportunity for observation of tests by

ATST POC’s representative. 9. Report factory test results within 10 days of completion of test.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, equipment bases, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting packaged engine-generator performance.

B. Examine roughing-in of piping systems and electrical connections. Verify actual locations of connections before packaged engine-generator installation.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with packaged engine-generator manufacturers' written installation and alignment instructions and with NFPA 110.

B. Install packaged engine generator to provide access, without removing connections or accessories, for periodic maintenance.

C. Install packaged engine generator with restrained spring isolators having a minimum deflection of 1 inch (25 mm) on 4-inch- (100-mm-) high concrete base. Secure sets to anchor bolts installed in concrete bases. Concrete base construction is specified in Section 16074 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

D. Install Schedule 40, black steel piping with welded joints and connect to engine muffler. Install thimble at wall. Piping shall be same diameter as muffler outlet. Flexible connectors and steel piping materials and installation requirements are specified in Section 15181 "Hydronic Piping."



1. Install condensate drain piping to muffler drain outlet full size of drain connection with a shutoff valve, stainless-steel flexible connector, and Schedule 40, black steel pipe with welded joints. Flexible connectors and piping materials and installation requirements are specified in Section 15181 "Hydronic Piping."

E. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by equipment manufacturers but not specified to be factory mounted.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties.

B. Connect fuel, cooling-system, and exhaust-system piping adjacent to packaged engine generator to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect engine exhaust pipe to engine with flexible connector.

D. Connect fuel piping to engines with a gate valve and union and flexible connector.

1. Diesel storage tanks, tank accessories, piping, valves, and specialties for fuel systems are specified in Section 15192 "Facility Fuel-Oil Piping."

E. Ground equipment according to Section 16060 "Grounding and Bonding."

F. Connect wiring according to Section 16120 "Conductors and Cables."

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components according to Section 15077 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" and Section 16075 "Electrical Identification."




1. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection for "AC Generators and for Emergency Systems" specified in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. NFPA 110 Acceptance Tests: Perform tests required by NFPA 110 that are additional to those specified here including, but not limited to, single-step full-load pickup test.

3. Battery Tests: Equalize charging of battery cells according to manufacturer's written instructions. Record individual cell voltages.



a. Measure charging voltage and voltages between available battery terminals for full-charging and float-charging conditions. Check electrolyte level and specific gravity under both conditions.

b. Test for contact integrity of all connectors. Perform an integrity load test and a capacity load test for the battery.

c. Verify acceptance of charge for each element of the battery after discharge. d. Verify that measurements are within manufacturer's specifications.

4. Battery-Charger Tests: Verify specified rates of charge for both equalizing and float-charging conditions.

5. System Integrity Tests: Methodically verify proper installation, connection, and integrity of each element of engine-generator system before and during system operation. Check for air, exhaust, and fluid leaks.

6. Exhaust-System Back-Pressure Test: Use a manometer with a scale exceeding 40-inch wg (120 kPa). Connect to exhaust line close to engine exhaust manifold. Verify that back pressure at full-rated load is within manufacturer's written allowable limits for the engine.

7. Exhaust Emissions Test: Comply with applicable government test criteria. 8. Voltage and Frequency Transient Stability Tests: Use recording oscilloscope to measure

voltage and frequency transients for 50 and 100 percent step-load increases and decreases, and verify that performance is as specified.

9. Harmonic-Content Tests: Measure harmonic content of output voltage under 25 percent and at 100 percent of rated linear load. Verify that harmonic content is within specified limits.

10. Noise Level Tests: Measure A-weighted level of noise emanating from generator-set installation, including engine exhaust and cooling-air intake and discharge, at four locations on Haleakalā Observatory boundary, and compare measured levels with required values.

C. Coordinate tests with tests for transfer switches and run them concurrently.

D. Test instruments shall have been calibrated within the last 12 months, traceable to standards of NIST, and adequate for making positive observation of test results. Make calibration records available for examination on request.

E. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

F. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.

G. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

H. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

I. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified requirements are met.



J. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured insulation resistances, time delays, and other values and observations. Attach a label or tag to each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.

K. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each power wiring termination and each bus connection. Remove all access panels so terminations and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

1. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

2. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

3. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies terminations and connections checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain packaged engine generators. Refer to Section 01820 "Demonstration and Training."



STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY 16264 - 1

SECTION 16264 - STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Three-phase and single-phase, on-line, double-conversion, static-type, UPS units with the following features:

a. Surge suppression. b. Input harmonics reduction. c. Rectifier-charger. d. Inverter. e. Static bypass transfer switch. f. Battery and battery disconnect device. g. Internal maintenance bypass/isolation switch. h. Output isolation transformer. i. Remote UPS monitoring provisions. j. Battery monitoring.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

B. LCD: Liquid-crystal display.

C. LED: Light-emitting diode.

D. PC: Personal computer.

E. THD: Total harmonic distortion.

F. UPS: Uninterruptible power supply.


A. Seismic Performance: UPS shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.





A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include data on features, components, ratings, and performance.

B. Shop Drawings: For UPS. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, components, and location and identification of each field connection. Show access, workspace, and clearance requirements; details of control panels; and battery arrangement.



A. Qualification Data: For qualified installer and manufacturer.

B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For UPS equipment, from manufacturer.




C. Manufacturer Certificates: For each product, from manufacturer.

D. Factory Test Reports: Comply with specified requirements.

E. Field quality-control reports.

F. Performance Test Reports: Indicate test results compared with specified performance requirements, and provide justification and resolution of differences if values do not agree.

G. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For UPS units to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.





1. Fuses: One for every 10 of each type and rating, but no fewer than one of each. 2. Cabinet Ventilation Filters: One complete set(s).



B. UL Compliance: Listed and labeled under UL 924 and 1778 by an NRTL.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Battery Warranties: Specified form in which manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace UPS system storage batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranted Cycle Life for Valve-Regulated, Lead-Calcium Batteries: Equal to or greater than that represented in manufacturer's published table, including figures corresponding to the following, based on annual average battery temperature of 77 deg F (25 deg C):

Discharge Rate Discharge Duration Discharge End

Voltage Cycle Life

8 hours 8 hours 1.67 6 cycles 30 minutes 30 minutes 1.67 20 cycles 15 minutes 45 seconds 1.67 120 cycles

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Automatic operation includes the following:

1. Normal Conditions: Load is supplied with power flowing from the normal power input terminals, through the rectifier-charger and inverter, with the battery connected in parallel with the rectifier-charger output.

2. Abnormal Supply Conditions: If normal supply deviates from specified and adjustable voltage, voltage waveform, or frequency limits, the battery supplies energy to maintain constant, regulated inverter power output to the load without switching or disturbance.

3. If normal power fails, energy supplied by the battery through the inverter continues supply-regulated power to the load without switching or disturbance.



4. When power is restored at the normal supply terminals of the system, controls automatically synchronize the inverter with the external source before transferring the load. The rectifier-charger then supplies power to the load through the inverter and simultaneously recharges the battery.

5. If the battery becomes discharged and normal supply is available, the rectifier-charger charges the battery. On reaching full charge, the rectifier-charger automatically shifts to float-charge mode.

6. If any element of the UPS system fails and power is available at the normal supply terminals of the system, the static bypass transfer switch switches the load to the normal ac supply circuit without disturbance or interruption.

7. If a fault occurs in the system supplied by the UPS, and current flows in excess of the overload rating of the UPS system, the static bypass transfer switch operates to bypass the fault current to the normal ac supply circuit for fault clearing.

8. When the fault has cleared, the static bypass transfer switch returns the load to the UPS system.

9. If the battery is disconnected, the UPS continues to supply power to the load with no degradation of its regulation of voltage and frequency of the output bus.

B. Manual operation includes the following:

1. Turning the inverter off causes the static bypass transfer switch to transfer the load directly to the normal ac supply circuit without disturbance or interruption.

2. Turning the inverter on causes the static bypass transfer switch to transfer the load to the inverter.

C. Maintenance Bypass/Isolation Switch Operation: Switch is interlocked so it cannot be operated unless the static bypass transfer switch is in the bypass mode. Device provides manual selection among the three conditions in subparagraphs below without interrupting supply to the load during switching:

1. Full Isolation: Load is supplied, bypassing the UPS. Normal UPS ac input circuit, static bypass transfer switch, and UPS load terminals are completely disconnected from external circuits.

2. Maintenance Bypass: Load is supplied, bypassing the UPS. UPS ac supply terminals are energized to permit operational checking, but system load terminals are isolated from the load.

3. Normal: Normal UPS ac supply terminals are energized and the load is supplied through either the static bypass transfer switch and the UPS rectifier-charger and inverter, or the battery and the inverter.

D. Environmental Conditions: The UPS shall be capable of operating continuously in the following environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of operating capability, except battery performance.

1. Ambient Temperature for Electronic Components: 32 to 104 deg F (0 to 40 deg C). 2. Ambient Temperature for Battery: 41 to 95 deg F (5 to 35 deg C). 3. Relative Humidity: 0 to 95 percent, noncondensing. 4. Altitude: Project Site is 10,000 feet (3,050 M) above sea level.




A. The UPS shall perform as specified in this article while supplying rated full-load current, composed of any combination of linear and nonlinear load, up to 100 percent nonlinear load with a load crest factor of 3.0, under the following conditions or combinations of the following conditions:

1. Inverter is switched to battery source. 2. Steady-state ac input voltage deviates up to plus or minus 10 percent from nominal

voltage. 3. Steady-state input frequency deviates up to plus or minus 5 percent from nominal

frequency. 4. THD of input voltage is 15 percent or more with a minimum crest factor of 3.0, and the

largest single harmonic component is a minimum of 5 percent of the fundamental value. 5. Load is 30 percent unbalanced continuously.

B. Minimum Duration of Supply: If battery is sole energy source supplying rated full UPS load current at 90 percent power factor, duration of supply is five minutes unless otherwise noted. For dedicated UPS serving emergency lighting, duration of supply shall be 90 minutes.

C. Input Voltage Tolerance: System steady-state and transient output performance remains within specified tolerances when steady-state ac input voltage varies plus 10, minus 20 percent from nominal voltage.

D. Overall UPS Efficiency: Equal to or greater than 92.5 percent at 100 percent load, 91.5 percent at 75 percent load, and 90.5 percent at 50 percent load.

E. Maximum Acoustical Noise: 65 dBA, "A" weighting, emanating from any UPS component under any condition of normal operation, measured 39 from nearest surface of component enclosure.

F. Maximum Energizing Inrush Current: Six times the full-load current.

G. Maximum AC Output-Voltage Regulation for Loads up to 50 Percent Unbalanced: Plus or minus 2 percent over the full range of battery voltage.

H. Output Frequency: 60 Hz, plus or minus 0.5 percent over the full range of input voltage, load, and battery voltage.

I. Limitation of harmonic distortion of input current to the UPS shall be as follows:

1. Description: Either a tuned harmonic filter or an arrangement of rectifier-charger circuits shall limit THD to 10 percent, maximum, at rated full UPS load current, for power sources with X/R ratio between 2 and 30.

2. Description: THD is limited to a maximum of 32 percent, at rated full UPS load current, for power sources with X/R ratio between 2 and 30.

J. Maximum Harmonic Content of Output-Voltage Waveform: 5 percent rms total and 3 percent rms for any single harmonic, for 100 percent rated nonlinear load current with a load crest factor of 3.0.



K. Minimum Overload Capacity of UPS at Rated Voltage: 125 percent of rated full load for 10 minutes, and 150 percent for 30 seconds in all operating modes.

L. Maximum Output-Voltage Transient Excursions from Rated Value: For the following instantaneous load changes, stated as percentages of rated full UPS load, voltage shall remain within stated percentages of rated value and recover to, and remain within, plus or minus 2 percent of that value within 100 ms:

1. 50 Percent: Plus or minus 5 percent. 2. 100 Percent: Plus or minus 5 percent. 3. Loss of AC Input Power: Plus or minus 1 percent. 4. Restoration of AC Input Power: Plus or minus 1 percent.

M. Input Power Factor: A minimum of 0.9 lagging when supply voltage and current are at nominal rated values and the UPS is supplying rated full-load current.

N. EMI Emissions: Comply with FCC Rules and Regulations and with 47 CFR 15 for Class A equipment.

2.3 UPS SYSTEMS


1. Eaton Corporation; Powerware Division. 2. Liebert Corporation; a division of Emerson. 3. MGE UPS SYSTEMS. 4. Mitsubishi Electric Automation, Inc. 5. Toshiba Corporation; Industrial Systems.

B. Electronic Equipment: Solid-state devices using hermetically sealed, semiconductor elements. Devices include rectifier-charger, inverter, static bypass transfer switch, and system controls.

C. Enclosures: Comply with NEMA 250, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Control Assemblies: Mount on modular plug-ins, readily accessible for maintenance.

E. Surge Suppression: Protect internal UPS components from surges that enter at each ac power input connection including main disconnect switch, static bypass transfer switch, and maintenance bypass/isolation switch. Protect rectifier-charger, inverter, controls, and output components.

1. Use factory-installed surge suppressors tested according to IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category B.








2. Additional Surge Protection: Protect internal UPS components from low-frequency, high-energy voltage surges described in IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2. Design the circuits connecting with external power sources and select circuit elements, conductors, conventional surge suppressors, and rectifier components and controls so input assemblies will have adequate mechanical strength and thermal and current-carrying capacity to withstand stresses imposed by 40-Hz, 180 percent voltage surges described in IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2.

F. Seismic-Restraint Design: UPS assemblies, subassemblies, and components (and fastenings and supports, mounting, and anchorage devices for them) shall be designed and fabricated to withstand static and seismic forces.

G. Output Circuit Neutral Bus, Conductor, and Terminal Ampacity: Rated phase current times a multiple of 1.73, minimum.

H. UPS systems dedicated for serving emergency lighting and life safety related loads shall be UL 924 listed, tested, and certified meeting the requirements per NEC Article 700, and NFPA 101 and 110. UPS battery bank shall provide minimum of 90 minutes of back-up time capacity at rated unit full load.

I. Refer to drawings for UPS system sizes (kVA ratings).

2.4 RECTIFIER-CHARGER

A. Capacity: Adequate to supply the inverter during rated full output load conditions and simultaneously recharge the battery from fully discharged condition to 95 percent of full charge within 10 times the rated discharge time for duration of supply under battery power at full load.

B. Output Ripple: Limited by output filtration to less than 0.5 percent of rated current, peak to peak.

C. Control Circuits: Immune to frequency variations within rated frequency ranges of normal and emergency power sources.

1. Response Time: Field adjustable for maximum compatibility with local generator-set power source.

D. Battery Float-Charging Conditions: Comply with battery manufacturer's written instructions for battery terminal voltage and charging current required for maximum battery life.

2.5 INVERTER

A. Description: Pulse-width modulated, with sinusoidal output.

B. Description: Pulse-width modulated, with sinusoidal output. Include a bypass phase synchronization window adjustment to optimize compatibility with local engine-generator-set power source.



2.6 STATIC BYPASS TRANSFER SWITCH

A. Description: Solid-state switching device providing uninterrupted transfer. A contactor or electrically operated circuit breaker automatically provides electrical isolation for the switch.

B. Switch Rating: Continuous duty at the rated full UPS load current, minimum.

2.7 BATTERY

A. Description: Valve-regulated, recombinant, lead-calcium units, factory assembled in an isolated compartment of UPS cabinet, complete with battery disconnect switch.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. C&D Technologies, Inc.; Standby Power Division. 2. Eaton Corporation; Powerware Division. 3. EnerSys. 4. Panasonic Corporation of North America; Panasonic Industrial Company.

C. Seismic-Restraint Design: Battery racks, cabinets, assemblies, subassemblies, and components (and fastenings and supports, mounting, and anchorage devices for them) shall be designed and fabricated to withstand static and seismic forces.

2.8 CONTROLS AND INDICATIONS

A. Description: Group displays, indications, and basic system controls on a common control panel on front of UPS enclosure.

B. Minimum displays, indicating devices, and controls include those in lists below. Provide sensors, transducers, terminals, relays, and wiring required to support listed items. Alarms include audible signals and visual displays.

C. Indications: Plain-language messages on a digital LCD or LED.

1. Quantitative indications shall include the following:

a. Input voltage, each phase, line to line. b. Input current, each phase, line to line. c. Bypass input voltage, each phase, line to line. d. Bypass input frequency. e. System output voltage, each phase, line to line. f. System output current, each phase. g. System output frequency. h. DC bus voltage. i. Battery current and direction (charge/discharge). j. Elapsed time discharging battery.







2. Basic status condition indications shall include the following:

a. Normal operation. b. Load-on bypass. c. Load-on battery. d. Inverter off. e. Alarm condition.

3. Alarm indications shall include the following:

a. Bypass ac input overvoltage or undervoltage. b. Bypass ac input overfrequency or underfrequency. c. Bypass ac input and inverter out of synchronization. d. Bypass ac input wrong-phase rotation. e. Bypass ac input single-phase condition. f. Bypass ac input filter fuse blown. g. Internal frequency standard in use. h. Battery system alarm. i. Control power failure. j. Fan failure. k. UPS overload. l. Battery-charging control faulty. m. Input overvoltage or undervoltage. n. Input transformer overtemperature. o. Input circuit breaker tripped. p. Input wrong-phase rotation. q. Input single-phase condition. r. Approaching end of battery operation. s. Battery undervoltage shutdown. t. Maximum battery voltage. u. Inverter fuse blown. v. Inverter transformer overtemperature. w. Inverter overtemperature. x. Static bypass transfer switch overtemperature. y. Inverter power supply fault. z. Inverter transistors out of saturation. aa. Identification of faulty inverter section/leg. bb. Inverter output overvoltage or undervoltage. cc. UPS overload shutdown. dd. Inverter current sensor fault. ee. Inverter output contactor open. ff. Inverter current limit.

4. Controls shall include the following:

a. Inverter on-off. b. UPS start. c. Battery test. d. Alarm silence/reset. e. Output-voltage adjustment.



D. Dry-form "C" contacts shall be available for remote indication of the following conditions:

1. UPS on battery. 2. UPS on-line. 3. UPS load-on bypass. 4. UPS in alarm condition. 5. UPS off (maintenance bypass closed).

E. Emergency Power Off Switch: Capable of local operation and operation by means of activation by external dry contacts.

2.9 MAINTENANCE BYPASS/ISOLATION SWITCH

A. Description: Manually operated switch or arrangement of switching devices with mechanically actuated contact mechanism arranged to route the flow of power to the load around the rectifier-charger, inverter, and static bypass transfer switch.

1. Switch shall be electrically and mechanically interlocked to prevent interrupting power to the load when switching to bypass mode.

2. Switch shall electrically isolate other UPS components to permit safe servicing.

B. Comply with NEMA PB 2 and UL 891.

C. Panel Rating: Continuous duty at rated full UPS load current.

D. Mounting Provisions: Internal and integrated into system cabinet.

E. Key interlock requires unlocking maintenance bypass/isolation switch before switching from normal position with key that is released only when the UPS is bypassed by the static bypass transfer switch. Lock is designed specifically for mechanical and electrical component interlocking.

2.10 OUTPUT ISOLATION TRANSFORMER

A. Description: Shielded unit with low forward transfer impedance up to 3 kHz, minimum. Include the following features:

1. Comply with applicable portions of UL 1561, including requirements for nonlinear load current-handling capability for a K-factor of approximately 20.

2. Output Impedance at Fundamental Frequency: Between 3 and 4 percent. 3. Regulation: 5 percent, maximum, at rated nonlinear load current. 4. Full-Load Efficiency at Rated Nonlinear Load Current: 96 percent, minimum. 5. Electrostatic Shielding of Windings: Independent for each winding. 6. Coil Leads: Physically arranged for minimum interlead capacitance. 7. Equipment Ground Bus: Provide dedicated equipment ground bus. 8. Shield Grounding Terminal: Provide dedicated and fully insulated isolated ground bus

(shield ground).



9. Capacitive Coupling between Primary and Secondary: 33 picofarads, maximum, over a frequency range of 20 Hz to 1 MHz.

2.11 OUTPUT DISTRIBUTION SECTION

A. Panelboards: Comply with Division 16, Section 16442 "Panelboards," except provide panel assembly integral to UPS cabinet line-up.

2.12 MONITORING BY REMOTE COMPUTER

A. Description: Communication module in unit control panel provides capability for remote monitoring of status, parameters, and alarms specified in "Controls and Indications" Article. The remote computer and the connecting signal wiring are not included in this Section. Include the following features:

1. Connectors and network interface units or modems for data transmission via RS-485 Modbus TCP/IP link.

2. Software designed for control and monitoring of UPS functions and to provide on-screen explanations, interpretations, diagnosis, action guidance, and instructions for use of monitoring indications and development of meaningful reports. Permit storage and analysis of power-line transient records. Designs for Windows applications, software, and computer are not included in this Section.

3. Software and Hardware: Compatible with that specified in Section 16215 "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control."

2.13 BASIC BATTERY MONITORING


1. Albercorp. 2. BTECH, Inc. 3. Eaton Corporation; Powerware Division.

B. Battery Ground-Fault Detector: Initiates alarm when resistance to ground of positive or negative bus of battery is less than 5000 ohms.

C. Battery compartment smoke/high-temperature detector initiates an alarm when smoke or a temperature greater than 75 deg C occurs within the compartment.

D. Annunciation of Alarms: At UPS control panel and remotely via communication link.


A. Factory test complete UPS system before shipment. Use actual batteries that are part of final installation. Include the following:






1. Test and demonstration of all functions, controls, indicators, sensors, and protective devices.

2. Full-load test. 3. Transient-load response test. 4. Overload test. 5. Power failure test.

B. Report test results. Include the following data:

1. Description of input source and output loads used. Describe actions required to simulate source load variation and various operating conditions and malfunctions.

2. List of indications, parameter values, and system responses considered satisfactory for each test action. Include tabulation of actual observations during test.

3. List of instruments and equipment used in factory tests.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for conditions affecting performance of the UPS.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Mounting: Install UPS on concrete base. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in Division 3, Section 03301 "Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete."





B. Maintain minimum clearances and workspace at equipment according to manufacturer's written instructions and NFPA 70.

C. Connections: Interconnect system components. Make connections to supply and load circuits according to manufacturer's wiring diagrams unless otherwise indicated.



3.3 GROUNDING

A. Separately Derived Systems: If not part of a listed power supply for a data-processing room, comply with NFPA 70 requirements for connecting the isolation transformer output neutral terminal to the grounding electrode system via closest available ground bus.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify components and wiring according to Section 16075 "Electrical Identification."

1. Identify each battery cell individually.

3.5 BATTERY EQUALIZATION

A. Equalize charging of battery cells according to manufacturer's written instructions. Record individual-cell voltages.



1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.


1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Inspect interiors of enclosures, including the following:

a. Integrity of mechanical and electrical connections. b. Component type and labeling verification. c. Ratings of installed components.

3. Inspect batteries and chargers according to requirements in NETA Acceptance Testing Specifications.

4. Test manual and automatic operational features and system protective and alarm functions.

5. Test communication of status and alarms to remote monitoring equipment. 6. Load the system using a variable-load bank to simulate kilovolt amperes, kilowatts, and

power factor of loads for unit's rating. Use instruments calibrated within the previous six months according to NIST standards.

a. Simulate malfunctions to verify protective device operation. b. Test duration of supply on emergency, low-battery voltage shutdown, and transfers

and restoration due to normal source failure. c. Test harmonic content of input and output current less than 25, 50, and 100 percent

of rated loads.



d. Test output voltage under specified transient-load conditions. e. Test efficiency at 50, 75, and 100 percent of rated loads. f. Test remote status and alarm panel functions. g. Test battery-monitoring system functions.

C. Seismic-restraint tests and inspections shall include the following:

1. Inspect type, size, quantity, arrangement, and proper installation of mounting or anchorage devices.

2. Test mounting and anchorage devices according to requirements in Section 16074 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

D. The UPS system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Record of Tests and Inspections: Maintain and submit documentation of tests and inspections, including references to manufacturers' written instructions and other test and inspection criteria. Include results of tests, inspections, and retests.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train ATST POC's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain the UPS.



VARIABLE FREQUENCY CONTROLLERS 16269 - 1

SECTION 16269 - VARIABLE FREQUENCY CONTROLLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes separately enclosed, pre-assembled, combination VFCs, rated 600 V and less, for speed control of three-phase, squirrel-cage induction motors.

1.3 DEFINITIONS


B. CE: Conformite Europeene (European Compliance).

C. CPT: Control power transformer.

D. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

E. IGBT: Insulated-gate bipolar transistor.

F. LAN: Local area network.

G. LED: Light-emitting diode.

H. MCP: Motor-circuit protector.

I. NC: Normally closed.

J. NO: Normally open.

K. OCPD: Overcurrent protective device.

L. PCC: Point of common coupling.

M. PID: Control action, proportional plus integral plus derivative.

N. PWM: Pulse-width modulated.

O. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.



P. TDD: Total demand (harmonic current) distortion.

Q. THD(V): Total harmonic voltage demand.

R. VFC: Variable-frequency motor controller.


A. Seismic Performance: VFCs shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.



A. Product Data: For each type and rating of VFC indicated. Include features, performance, electrical ratings, operating characteristics, shipping and operating weights, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For each VFC indicated. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, and sections; and conduit entry locations and sizes, mounting arrangements, and details, including required clearances and service space around equipment.

1. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following:

a. Each installed unit's type and details. b. Factory-installed devices. c. Enclosure types and details. d. Nameplate legends. e. Short-circuit current (withstand) rating of enclosed unit. f. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of each VFC and installed

devices. g. Specified modifications.

2. Schematic and Connection Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, drawn to scale, showing dimensioned layout, required working clearances, and required area above and around VFCs. Show VFC layout and relationships between electrical components and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support, and weight on each support. Indicate field measurements.

B. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.



C. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For VFCs, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.



3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based, and their installation requirements.

D. Product Certificates: For each VFC, from manufacturer.

E. Harmonic Analysis Study and Report: Comply with IEEE 399 and NETA Acceptance Testing Specification; identify the effects of nonlinear loads and their associated harmonic contributions on the voltages and currents throughout the electrical system. Analyze designated operating scenarios, including recommendations for VFC input filtering to limit TDD and THD(V) at each VFC to specified levels.

F. Source quality-control reports.

G. Field quality-control reports.

H. Load-Current and Overload-Relay Heater List: Compile after motors have been installed, and arrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual motor nameplate, full-load currents.

I. Load-Current and List of Settings of Adjustable Overload Relays: Compile after motors have been installed and arrange to demonstrate that switch settings for motor-running overload protection suit actual motors to be protected.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For VFCs to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 01782 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer’s written instructions for testing and adjusting thermal-magnetic circuit breaker and MCP trip settings.

2. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable overload relays. 3. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing, adjusting, and reprogramming

microprocessor control modules. 4. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable timers, controls, and status

and alarm points.





1. Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.

2. Control Power Fuses: 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than two of each size and type.

3. Indicating Lights: Two of each type and color installed. 4. Auxiliary Contacts: Furnish one spare for each size and type of magnetic controller

installed. 5. Power Contacts: Furnish three spares for each size and type of magnetic contactor

installed.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

D. IEEE Compliance: Fabricate and test VFC according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in Section 16074 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."


A. Store VFCs indoors in clean, dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation. Protect VFCs from exposure to dirt, fumes, water corrosive substances and physical damage.


A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation, capable of driving full load without derating, under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than 14 deg F (minus 10 deg C) and not exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C).

2. Ambient Storage Temperature: Not less than minus 4 deg F (minus 20 deg C) and not exceeding 140 deg F (60 deg C)

3. Humidity: Less than 95 percent (noncondensing). 4. Altitude: Not exceeding 10,200 feet (3109 m).

B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for VFCs, including clearances between VFCs, and adjacent surfaces and other items.



1.12 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate features of motors, load characteristics, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the following:

1. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load. 2. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence. 3. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.

1.13 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace VFCs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS


1. ABB. 2. Baldor Electric Company. 3. Danfoss Inc.; Danfoss Drives Div. 4. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 5. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 6. Rockwell Automation, Inc.; Allen-Bradley Brand. 7. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 8. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. 9. Toshiba International Corporation. 10. Yaskawa Electric America, Inc; Drives Division.

B. General Requirements for VFCs: Comply with NEMA ICS 7, NEMA ICS 61800-2, and UL 508C.

C. Application: Variable torque associated with pump and HVAC fan equipment.

D. VFC Description: Variable-frequency power converter (rectifier, dc bus, and IGBT, PWM inverter) factory packaged in an enclosure, with integral disconnecting means and overcurrent and overload protection; listed and labeled by an NRTL as a complete unit; arranged to provide self-protection, protection, and variable-speed control of one or more three-phase induction motors by adjusting output voltage and frequency.













1. Units suitable for operation of NEMA MG 1, Design A and Design B motors as defined by NEMA MG 1, Section IV, Part 30, "Application Considerations for Constant Speed Motors Used on a Sinusoidal Bus with Harmonic Content and General Purpose Motors Used with Adjustable-Voltage or Adjustable-Frequency Controls or Both."

2. Units suitable for operation of inverter-duty motors as defined by NEMA MG 1, Section IV, Part 31, "Definite-Purpose Inverter-Fed Polyphase Motors."

3. Listed and labeled for integrated short-circuit current (withstand) rating by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

E. Design and Rating: Match load type, such as fans, blowers, and pumps; and type of connection used between motor and load such as direct or through a power-transmission connection.

F. Output Rating: Three-phase; 10 to 60 Hz, with voltage proportional to frequency throughout voltage range; maximum voltage equals input voltage.

G. Unit Operating Requirements:

1. Input AC Voltage Tolerance: Plus 10 and minus 10 percent of VFC input voltage rating. 2. Input AC Voltage Unbalance: Not exceeding 3 percent. 3. Input Frequency Tolerance: Plus or minus 3 percent of VFC frequency rating. 4. Minimum Efficiency: 96 percent at 60 Hz, full load. 5. Minimum Displacement Primary-Side Power Factor: 96 percent under any load or speed

condition. 6. Minimum Short-Circuit Current (Withstand) Rating: 65 kA. 7. Ambient Temperature Rating: Not less than 14 deg F (minus 10 deg C) and not

exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C). 8. Ambient Storage Temperature Rating: Not less than minus 4 deg F (minus 20 deg C) and

not exceeding 140 deg F (60 deg C) 9. Humidity Rating: Less than 95 percent (noncondensing). 10. Altitude Rating: Not exceeding 10,200 feet (3109 m). 11. Vibration Withstand: Comply with IEC 60068-2-6. 12. Overload Capability: 1.1 times the base load current for 60 seconds; minimum of 1.8

times the base load current for three seconds. 13. Starting Torque: Minimum 100 percent of rated torque from 3 to 60 Hz. 14. Speed Regulation: Plus or minus 5 percent. 15. Output Carrier Frequency: Selectable; 0.5 to 15 kHz. 16. Stop Modes: Programmable; includes fast, free-wheel, and dc injection braking.

H. Inverter Logic: Microprocessor based, 32 bit, isolated from all power circuits.

I. Isolated Control Interface: Allows VFCs to follow remote-control signal over a minimum 40:1 speed range.

1. Signal: Electrical. 2. Signal: Pneumatic.

J. Internal Adjustability Capabilities:

1. Minimum Speed: 5 to 25 percent of maximum rpm. 2. Maximum Speed: 80 to 100 percent of maximum rpm.



3. Acceleration: 2-22 seconds. 4. Deceleration: 2-22 seconds. 5. Current Limit: 30 to minimum of 150 percent of maximum rating.

K. Self-Protection and Reliability Features:

1. Input transient protection by means of surge suppressors to provide three-phase protection against damage from supply voltage surges 10 percent or more above nominal line voltage.

2. Loss of Input Signal Protection: Selectable response strategy, including speed default to a percent of the most recent speed, a preset speed, or stop; with alarm.

3. Under- and overvoltage trips. 4. Inverter overcurrent trips. 5. VFC and Motor Overload/Overtemperature Protection: Microprocessor-based thermal

protection system for monitoring VFCs and motor thermal characteristics, and for providing VFC overtemperature and motor overload alarm and trip; settings selectable via the keypad; NRTL approved.

6. Critical frequency rejection, with three selectable, adjustable deadbands. 7. Instantaneous line-to-line and line-to-ground overcurrent trips. 8. Loss-of-phase protection. 9. Reverse-phase protection. 10. Short-circuit protection. 11. Motor overtemperature fault.

L. Automatic Reset/Restart: Attempt three restarts after drive fault or on return of power after an interruption and before shutting down for manual reset or fault correction; adjustable delay time between restart attempts.

M. Power-Interruption Protection: To prevent motor from re-energizing after a power interruption until motor has stopped, unless "Bidirectional Autospeed Search" feature is available and engaged.

N. Torque Boost: Automatically varies starting and continuous torque to at least 1.5 times the minimum torque to ensure high-starting torque and increased torque at slow speeds.

O. Motor Temperature Compensation at Slow Speeds: Adjustable current fall-back based on output frequency for temperature protection of self-cooled, fan-ventilated motors at slow speeds.

P. Integral Input Disconnecting Means and OCPD: NEMA AB1, thermal-magnetic circuit breaker with pad-lockable, door-mounted handle mechanism.

1. Disconnect Rating: Not less than 115 percent of VFC input current rating.

2.2 CONTROLS AND INDICATION

A. Status Lights: Door-mounted LED indicators displaying the following conditions:

1. Power on.



2. Run. 3. Overvoltage. 4. Line fault. 5. Overcurrent. 6. External fault.

B. Panel-Mounted Operator Station: Manufacturer's standard front-accessible, sealed keypad and plain-English language digital display; allows complete programming, program copying, operating, monitoring, and diagnostic capability.

1. Keypad: In addition to required programming and control keys, include keys for HAND, OFF, and AUTO modes.

2. Security Access: Provide electronic security access to controls through identification and password with at least three levels of access: View only; view and operate; and view, operate, and service.

a. Control Authority: Supports at least four conditions: Off, local manual control at VFC, local automatic control at VFC, and automatic control through a remote source.

C. Historical Logging Information and Displays:

1. Real-time clock with current time and date. 2. Running log of total power versus time. 3. Total run time. 4. Fault log, maintaining last four faults with time and date stamp for each.

D. Indicating Devices: Digital display and additional readout devices as required, mounted flush in VFC door and connected to display VFC parameters including, but not limited to:

1. Output frequency (Hz). 2. Motor speed (rpm). 3. Motor status (running, stop, fault). 4. Motor current (amperes). 5. Motor torque (percent). 6. Fault or alarming status (code). 7. PID feedback signal (percent). 8. DC-link voltage (V dc). 9. Set point frequency (Hz). 10. Motor output voltage (V ac).

E. Control Signal Interfaces:

1. Electric Input Signal Interface:

a. A minimum of two programmable analog inputs: 4- to 20-mA dc. b. A minimum of six multifunction programmable digital inputs.

2. Remote Signal Inputs: Capability to accept any of the following speed-setting input signals from the BAS or other control systems:



a. 0- to 10-V dc. b. 4- to 20-mA dc. c. Potentiometer using up/down digital inputs. d. Fixed frequencies using digital inputs.

3. Output Signal Interface: A minimum of one programmable analog output signal(s) 4- to 20-mA dc, which can be configured for any of the following:

a. Output frequency (Hz). b. Output current (load). c. DC-link voltage (V dc). d. Motor torque (percent). e. Motor speed (rpm). f. Set point frequency (Hz).

4. Remote Indication Interface: A minimum of tow programmable dry-circuit relay outputs (120-V ac, 1 A) for remote indication of the following:

a. Motor running. b. Set point speed reached. c. Fault and warning indication (overtemperature or overcurrent). d. PID high- or low-speed limits reached.

F. PID Control Interface: Provides closed-loop set point, differential feedback control in response to dual feedback signals. Allows for closed-loop control of fans and pumps for pressure, flow, or temperature regulation.

1. Number of Loops: Two.

G. BAS Interface: Factory-installed hardware and software to enable the BAS to monitor, control, and display VFC status and alarms and energy usage. Allows VFC to be used with an external system within a multidrop LAN configuration; settings retained within VFC's nonvolatile memory.

1. Network Communications Ports: Ethernet and RS-422/485. 2. Embedded BAS Protocols for Network Communications: ASHRAE 135 BACnet or

Modbus/Memobus; protocols accessible via the communications ports.

2.3 LINE CONDITIONING AND FILTERING

A. Input Line Conditioning: Provide input filtering, as required, to limit TDD at input terminals of all VFCs to less than 5 percent and THD(V) to 3 percent. Options may include DC bus link reactors isolation transformers, active and passive harmonic filters, and 12 or 18 pulse phase shifting input transformers.

B. EMI/RFI Filtering: CE marked; certify compliance with IEC 61800-3 for Category C2.



2.4 OPTIONAL FEATURES

A. Remote Indicating Circuit Terminals: Mode selection, controller status, and controller fault.

B. Remote digital operator kit.

C. Communication Port: RS-232 port, USB 2.0 port, or equivalent connection capable of connecting a printer and a notebook computer.

2.5 ENCLOSURES

A. VFC Enclosures: NEMA 250, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.

1. Dry and Clean Indoor Locations: Type 1. 2. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R. 3. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: Type 4. 4. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:

Type 12.

B. Plenum Rating: UL 1995; NRTL certification label on enclosure, clearly identifying VFC as "Plenum Rated" for VFC installed in plenums.

2.6 ACCESSORIES

A. General Requirements for Control-Circuit and Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5; factory installed in VFC enclosure cover unless otherwise indicated.

1. Push Buttons, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: Heavy-duty, type.

a. Push Buttons: Covered Lockable types; momentary. b. Pilot Lights: LED types; push to test. c. Selector Switches: Rotary type.

B. Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable solid-state time-delay relays.

C. Phase-Failure, Phase-Reversal, and Undervoltage and Overvoltage Relays: Solid-state sensing circuit with isolated output contacts for hard-wired connections. Provide adjustable undervoltage, overvoltage, and time-delay settings.

1. Current Transformers: Continuous current rating, basic impulse insulating level (BIL) rating, burden, and accuracy class suitable for connected circuitry. Comply with IEEE C57.13.

D. Supplemental Digital Meters:

1. Elapsed-time meter. 2. Kilowatt meter. 3. Kilowatt-hour meter.



E. Breather and drain assemblies, to maintain interior pressure and release condensation in NEMA 250, Type 4 enclosures installed outdoors or in unconditioned interior spaces subject to humidity and temperature swings.

F. Space heaters, with NC auxiliary contacts, to mitigate condensation in NEMA 250, Type 4 enclosures installed outdoors or in unconditioned interior spaces subject to humidity and temperature swings.

G. Cooling Fan and Exhaust System: For NEMA 250, Type 4 type; UL 508 component recognized: Supply fan, with composite intake and exhaust grills and filters; 120-V ac; obtained from integral CPT.

H. Spare control-wiring terminal blocks; unwired.


A. Testing: Test and inspect VFCs according to requirements in NEMA ICS 61800-2.

1. Test each VFC while connected to its specified motor. 2. Verification of Performance: Rate VFCs according to operation of functions and features

specified.

B. VFCs will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, surfaces, and substrates to receive VFCs, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine VFC before installation. Reject VFCs that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

C. Examine roughing-in for conduit systems to verify actual locations of conduit connections before VFC installation.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of VFCs with other construction including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.



B. Wall-Mounting Controllers: Install VFCs on walls with tops at uniform height and with disconnect operating handles not higher than 79 inches (2000 mm) above finished floor unless otherwise indicated, and by bolting units to wall or mounting on lightweight structural-steel channels bolted to wall. For controllers not on walls, provide freestanding racks complying with Section 16073 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

C. Floor-Mounting Controllers: Install VFCs on 4-inch (100-mm) nominal thickness concrete base. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in Division 3, Section 03301 "Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete."





D. Seismic Bracing: Comply with requirements specified in Section 16074 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

E. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

F. Install fuses in each fusible-switch VFC.

G. Install fuses in control circuits if not factory installed. Comply with requirements in Section 16491 "Fuses."

H. Install heaters in thermal-overload relays. Select heaters based on actual nameplate full-load amperes after motors have been installed.

I. Install, connect, and fuse thermal-protector monitoring relays furnished with motor-driven equipment.

J. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify VFCs, components, and control wiring. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 16075 "Electrical Identification."

1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs.

2. Label each VFC with engraved nameplate. 3. Label each enclosure-mounted control and pilot device.



3.4 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Install wiring between VFCs and remote devices and facility's central-control system. Comply with requirements in Section 16123 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables."

B. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.

C. Connect selector switches and other automatic control devices where applicable.

1. Connect selector switches to bypass only those manual- and automatic control devices that have no safety functions when switches are in manual-control position.

2. Connect selector switches with control circuit in both manual and automatic positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors.



B. Perform tests and inspections.


C. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each VFC element, bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.

D. Tests and Inspections:

1. Inspect VFC, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. Test and adjust controllers, components, and equipment.

2. Test insulation resistance for each VFC element, component, connecting motor supply, feeder, and control circuits.

3. Test continuity of each circuit. 4. Verify that voltages at VFC locations are within 10 percent of motor nameplate rated

voltages. If outside this range for any motor, notify ATST POC before starting the motor(s).

5. Test each motor for proper phase rotation. 6. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in

NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 7. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate

compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 8. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and

malfunctioning controls and equipment.



E. VFCs will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies the VFC and describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations made after remedial action.

3.6 STARTUP SERVICE


1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.7 ADJUSTING

A. Program microprocessors for required operational sequences, status indications, alarms, event recording, and display features. Clear events memory after final acceptance testing and prior to Substantial Completion.

B. Set the taps on reduced-voltage autotransformer controllers.

C. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges.

D. Set field-adjustable pressure switches.

3.8 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions until controllers are ready to be energized and placed into service.

B. Replace VFCs whose interiors have been exposed to water or other liquids prior to Substantial Completion.

3.9 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, reprogram, and maintain VFCs.



SURGE PROTECTION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS 16289 - 1

SECTION 16289 - SURGE PROTECTION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes field-mounted SPDs for low-voltage (120 to 600 V) power distribution and control equipment.


1. Section 16441 "Switchboards" for factory-installed SPDs. 2. Section 16442 "Panelboards" for factory-installed SPDs.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Inominal: Nominal discharge current.

B. MCOV: Maximum continuous operating voltage.

C. Mode(s), also Modes of Protection: The pair of electrical connections where the VPR applies.

D. MOV: Metal-oxide varistor; an electronic component with a significant non-ohmic current-voltage characteristic.

E. OCPD: Overcurrent protective device.

F. SCCR: Short-circuit current rating.

G. SPD: Surge protective device.

H. VPR: Voltage protection rating.






2. Copy of UL Category Code VZCA certification, as a minimum, listing the tested values for VPRs, Inominal ratings, MCOVs, type designations, OCPD requirements, model numbers, system voltages, and modes of protection.



B. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For SPDs to include in maintenance manuals.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to replace or replace SPDs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. ABB France. 2. Advanced Protection Technologies Inc. (APT). 3. Eaton Corporation. 4. Emerson Electric Co. 5. GE Zenith Controls. 6. LEA International; Protection Technology Group. 7. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. 8. PowerLogics, Inc. 9. Schneider Electric Industries SAS. 10. Siemens Industry, Inc.

2.2 GENERAL SPD REQUIREMENTS

A. SPD with Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.















D. MCOV of the SPD shall be at least 125 percent of the nominal system voltage.

2.3 SERVICE ENTRANCE AND TRANSFER SWITCH SUPPRESSOR

A. SPDs: Comply with UL 1449, Type 2.

1. SPDs with the following features and accessories:

a. Internal thermal protection that disconnects the SPD before damaging internal suppressor components.

b. Indicator light display for protection status. c. Form-C contacts rated at 5 A and 250-V ac, one normally open and one normally

closed, for remote monitoring of protection status. d. Surge counter.

B. Comply with UL 1283.

C. Peak Surge Current Rating: The minimum single-pulse surge current withstand rating per phase shall not be less than 240 kA. The peak surge current rating shall be the arithmetic sum of the ratings of the individual MOVs in a given mode.

D. Protection modes and UL 1449 VPR for grounded wye circuits with 480Y/277 V and 208Y/120 V, three-phase, four-wire circuits shall not exceed the following:

1. Line to Neutral: 1200 V for 480Y/277 V and 700 V for 208Y/120 V. 2. Line to Ground: 1200 V for 480Y/277 V and 1200 V for 208Y/120 V. 3. Line to Line: 2000 V for 480Y/277 V and 1000 V for 208Y/120 V.

E. SCCR: Equal or exceed 65 kA.

F. Inominal Rating: 20 kA.

2.4 PANEL SUPPRESSORS

A. SPDs: Comply with UL 1449, Type 2.

1. Include LED indicator lights for power and protection status. 2. Internal thermal protection that disconnects the SPD before damaging internal suppressor

components. 3. Include Form-C contacts rated at 5 A and 250-V ac, one normally open and one normally

closed, for remote monitoring of protection status.

B. Peak Surge Current Rating: The minimum single-pulse surge current withstand rating per phase shall not be less than 120 kA. The peak surge current rating shall be the arithmetic sum of the ratings of the individual MOVs in a given mode.




D. Protection modes and UL 1449 VPR for grounded wye circuits with 480Y/277 V and 208Y/120 V, three-phase, four-wire circuits shall not exceed the following:

1. Line to Neutral: 1200 V for 480Y/277 V and 700 V for 208Y/120 V. 2. Line to Ground: 1200 V for 480Y/277 V and 700 V for 208Y/120 V. 3. Neutral to Ground: 1200 V for 480Y/277 V and 700 V for 208Y/120 V. 4. Line to Line: 2000 V for 480Y/277 V and 1200 V for 208Y/120 V

E. SCCR: Equal or exceed 65 kA.

F. Inominal Rating: 20 kA.

2.5 ENCLOSURES

A. Indoor Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1.

B. Outdoor Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 3R.


A. Power Wiring: Same size as SPD leads, complying with Section 16120 "Conductors and Cables."

B. Class 2 Control Cables: Multiconductor cable with copper conductors not smaller than No. 18 AWG, complying with Section 16120 "Conductors and Cables."

C. Class 1 Control Cables: Multiconductor cable with copper conductors not smaller than No. 14 AWG, complying with Section 16120 "Conductors and Cables."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Install an OCPD or disconnect as required to comply with the UL listing of the SPD.

C. Install SPDs with conductors between suppressor and points of attachment as short and straight as possible, and adjust circuit-breaker positions to achieve shortest and straightest leads. Do not splice and extend SPD leads unless specifically permitted by manufacturer. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended lead length. Do not bond neutral and ground.

D. Use crimped connectors and splices only. Wire nuts are unacceptable.

E. Wiring:

1. Power Wiring: Comply with wiring methods in Section 16120 "Conductors and Cables."



2. Controls: Comply with wiring methods in Section 16120 "Conductors and Cables."


A. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative.

1. Compare equipment nameplate data for compliance with Drawings and Specifications. 2. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and clearances. 3. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's written installation

requirements.

B. An SPD will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.3 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Complete startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Do not perform insulation-resistance tests of the distribution wiring equipment with SPDs installed. Disconnect SPDs before conducting insulation-resistance tests, and reconnect them immediately after the testing is over.

C. Energize SPDs after power system has been energized, stabilized, and tested.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to operate and maintain SPDs.



ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 16410 - 1

SECTION 16410 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs). 2. Enclosures.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. NC: Normally closed.

B. NO: Normally open.

C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.


A. Seismic Performance: Enclosed switches and circuit breakers shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.



A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.

1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Current and voltage ratings. 3. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate). 4. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices.



5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components.

6. Include time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.

B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.



A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.





1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with

requirements.

D. Manufacturer's field service report.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 01782 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit breakers.





1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.

2. Fuse Pullers: Two for each size and type.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.


B. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.



A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F (minus 30 deg C) and not exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C).

2. Altitude: Not exceeding 10,200 feet (3109 m).

B. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by ATST POC or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify ATST POC no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service.

2. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service. 3. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without ATST POC's written

permission. 4. Comply with NFPA 70E.



1.11 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS


1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. General Requirements: Comply with UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents.

C. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

D. Adjustable, Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.

E. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Field-replaceable rating plug, rms sensing, with the following field-adjustable settings:

1. Instantaneous trip. 2. Long- and short-time pickup levels. 3. Long- and short-time time adjustments.

F. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller, and let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.

G. Integrally Fused Circuit Breakers: Thermal-magnetic trip element with integral limiter-style fuse listed for use with circuit breaker and trip activation on fuse opening or on opening of fuse compartment door.

H. Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupter (GFCI) Circuit Breaker: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground fault protection (6-mA trip).

I. Ground-Fault, Equipment-Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: With Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip).

J. Features and Accessories:







1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. 2. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material. 3. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent

lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge lighting circuits.

4. Ground-Fault Protection: Comply with UL 1053; remote-mounted and powered type with mechanical ground-fault indicator; relay with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, internal memory, and shunt trip unit; and three-phase, zero-sequence current transformer/sensor.

5. Communication Capability: Circuit-breaker-mounted communication module with functions and features compatible with power monitoring and control system specified in Section 16215 "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control."

6. Shunt Trip: Trip coil energized from separate circuit, with coil-clearing contact. 7. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit-breaker operation; key shall be

removable only when circuit breaker is in off position. 8. Electrical Operator: Provide remote control for on, off, and reset operations. 9. Accessory Control Power Voltage: Integrally mounted, self-powered.

2.2 MOLDED-CASE SWITCHES



B. General Requirements: MCCB with fixed, high-set instantaneous trip only, and short-circuit withstand rating equal to equivalent breaker frame size interrupting rating.

C. Features and Accessories:

1. Standard frame sizes and number of poles. 2. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material. 3. Ground-Fault Protection: Comply with UL 1053; remote-mounted and powered type

with mechanical ground-fault indicator; relay with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, internal memory, and shunt trip unit; and three-phase, zero-sequence current transformer/sensor.

4. Shunt Trip: Trip coil energized from separate circuit, with coil-clearing contact. 5. Alarm Switch: One NO contact that operates only when switch has tripped. 6. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit switch operation; key shall be

removable only when switch is in off position. 7. Electrical Operator: Provide remote control for on, off, and reset operations. 8. Accessory Control Power Voltage: Integrally mounted, self-powered.







2.3 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.

1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. 3. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4. 4. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:

NEMA 250, Type 12.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated.

B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Section 16074 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

D. Install fuses in fusible devices.

E. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Section 16075 "Electrical Identification."


2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.






B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.


C. Tests and Inspections:


2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:

a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

c. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

4. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken and observations after remedial action.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.



TRANSFER SWITCHES 16415 - 1

SECTION 16415 - TRANSFER SWITCHES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes transfer switches rated 600 V and less, including the following:

1. Automatic transfer switches.


1. Division 16, Section 16231 "Packaged Engine Generators" for automatic-starting and stopping signal/control interface requirements.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, weights, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details showing minimum clearances, conductor entry provisions, gutter space, installed features and devices, and material lists for each switch specified.

1. Single-Line Diagram: Show connections between transfer switch, power sources, and load.


A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer.

B. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that transfer switches accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Section 16074 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following:









A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1, Section 01782 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Features and operating sequences, both automatic and manual. 2. List of all factory settings of relays; provide relay-setting and calibration instructions,

including software, where applicable.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Maintain a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs within a response period of less than eight hours from time of notification.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain automatic transfer switches through one source from a single manufacturer.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

D. Comply with NEMA ICS 1.


F. Comply with NFPA 110.

G. Comply with UL 1008 unless requirements of these Specifications are stricter.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Contractor Transfer Switches:

a. Caterpillar; Engine Div. b. Emerson; ASCO Power Technologies, LP. c. Generac Power Systems, Inc. d. GE Zenith Controls. e. Kohler Power Systems; Generator Division. f. Onan/Cummins Power Generation; Industrial Business Group. g. Russelectric, Inc. h. Spectrum Detroit Diesel.

2.2 GENERAL TRANSFER-SWITCH PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

A. Indicated Current Ratings: Apply as defined in UL 1008 for continuous loading and total system transfer, including tungsten filament lamp loads not exceeding 30 percent of switch ampere rating, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Tested Fault-Current Closing and Withstand Ratings: Adequate for duty imposed by protective devices at installation locations in Project under the fault conditions indicated, based on testing according to UL 1008.

C. Solid-State Controls: Repetitive accuracy of all settings shall be plus or minus 2 percent or better over an operating temperature range of minus 20 to plus 70 deg C.

D. Resistance to Damage by Voltage Transients: Components shall meet or exceed voltage-surge withstand capability requirements when tested according to IEEE C62.41. Components shall meet or exceed voltage-impulse withstand test of NEMA ICS 1.

E. Electrical Operation: Accomplish by a nonfused, momentarily energized solenoid or electric-motor-operated mechanism, mechanically and electrically interlocked in both directions.

F. Switch Characteristics: Designed for continuous-duty repetitive transfer of full-rated current between active power sources.

1. Limitation: Switches using molded-case switches or circuit breakers or insulated-case circuit-breaker components are not acceptable.

2. Switch Action: Double throw; mechanically held in both directions. 3. Contacts: Silver composition or silver alloy for load-current switching. Conventional

automatic transfer-switch units, rated 225 A and higher, shall have separate arcing contacts.











G. Neutral Terminal: Solid and fully rated, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Heater: Equip switches exposed to outdoor temperatures and humidity, and other units indicated, with an internal heater. Provide thermostat within enclosure to control heater.

I. Factory Wiring: Train and bundle factory wiring and label, consistent with Shop Drawings, either by color-code or by numbered or lettered wire and cable tape markers at terminations. Color-coding and wire and cable tape markers are specified in Section 16075 "Electrical Identification."

1. Designated Terminals: Pressure type, suitable for types and sizes of field wiring indicated.

2. Power-Terminal Arrangement and Field-Wiring Space: Suitable for top, side, or bottom entrance of feeder conductors as indicated.

3. Control Wiring: Equipped with lugs suitable for connection to terminal strips.

J. Enclosures: General-purpose NEMA 250, Type 1, complying with NEMA ICS 6 and UL 508, unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES

A. Comply with Level 1 equipment according to NFPA 110.

B. Switching Arrangement: Double-throw type, incapable of pauses or intermediate position stops during normal functioning, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Manual Switch Operation: Unloaded. Control circuit automatically disconnects from electrical operator during manual operation.

D. Signal-Before-Transfer Contacts: A set of normally open/normally closed dry contacts operates in advance of retransfer to normal source. Interval is adjustable from 1 to 30 seconds.

E. Automatic Transfer-Switch Features:

1. Undervoltage Sensing for Each Phase of Normal Source: Sense low phase-to-ground voltage on each phase. Pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of nominal, and dropout voltage is adjustable from 75 to 98 percent of pickup value. Factory set for pickup at 90 percent and dropout at 85 percent.

2. Adjustable Time Delay: For override of normal-source voltage sensing to delay transfer and engine start signals. Adjustable from zero to six seconds, and factory set for one second.

3. Voltage/Frequency Lockout Relay: Prevent premature transfer to generator. Pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of nominal. Factory set for pickup at 90 percent. Pickup frequency shall be adjustable from 90 to 100 percent of nominal. Factory set for pickup at 95 percent.

4. Time Delay for Retransfer to Normal Source: Adjustable from 0 to 30 minutes, and factory set for 10 minutes to automatically defeat delay on loss of voltage or sustained undervoltage of emergency source, provided normal supply has been restored.

5. Test Switch: Simulate normal-source failure.



6. Switch-Position Pilot Lights: Indicate source to which load is connected. 7. Source-Available Indicating Lights: Supervise sources via transfer-switch normal- and

emergency-source sensing circuits.

a. Normal Power Supervision: Green light with nameplate engraved "Normal Source Available."

b. Emergency Power Supervision: Red light with nameplate engraved "Emergency Source Available."

8. Unassigned Auxiliary Contacts: Two normally open, single-pole, double-throw contacts for each switch position, rated 10 A at 240-V ac.

9. Transfer Override Switch: Overrides automatic retransfer control so automatic transfer switch will remain connected to emergency power source regardless of condition of normal source. Pilot light indicates override status.

10. Engine Starting Contacts: One isolated and normally closed, and one isolated and normally open; rated 10 A at 32-V dc minimum.

11. Engine Shutdown Contacts: Instantaneous; shall initiate shutdown sequence at remote engine-generator controls after retransfer of load to normal source.

12. Engine-Generator Exerciser: Solid-state, programmable-time switch starts engine generator and transfers load to it from normal source for a preset time, then retransfers and shuts down engine after a preset cool-down period. Initiates exercise cycle at preset intervals adjustable from 7 to 30 days. Running periods are adjustable from 10 to 30 minutes. Factory settings are for 7-day exercise cycle, 20-minute running period, and 5-minute cool-down period. Exerciser features include the following:

a. Exerciser Transfer Selector Switch: Permits selection of exercise with and without load transfer.

b. Push-button programming control with digital display of settings. c. Integral battery operation of time switch when normal control power is not

available.


A. Factory test and inspect components, assembled switches, and associated equipment. Ensure proper operation. Check transfer time and voltage, frequency, and time-delay settings for compliance with specified requirements. Perform dielectric strength test complying with NEMA ICS 1.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Design each fastener and support to carry load indicated by seismic requirements and according to seismic-restraint details. See Division 16, Section 16074 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

B. Floor-Mounting Switch: Anchor to floor by bolting.



1. Concrete Bases: 4 inches (100 mm) high, reinforced, with chamfered edges. Extend base no more than 4 inches (100 mm) in all directions beyond the maximum dimensions of switch, unless otherwise indicated or unless required for seismic support. Construct concrete bases according to Division 16, Section 16073 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

C. Identify components according to Division 16, Section 16075 "Electrical Identification."

D. Set field-adjustable intervals and delays, relays, and engine exerciser clock.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment according to Division 16, Section 16060 "Grounding and Bonding."

B. Connect wiring according to Division 16, Section 16120 "Conductors and Cables."


A. Manufacturer’s Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Report test results in writing.

1. After installing equipment and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.


3. Measure insulation resistance phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with insulation-resistance tester. Include external annunciation and control circuits. Use test voltages and procedure recommended by manufacturer. Comply with manufacturer's specified minimum resistance.

a. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits. b. Inspect for physical damage, proper installation and connection, and integrity of

barriers, covers, and safety features. c. Verify that manual transfer warnings are properly placed. d. Perform manual transfer operation.

4. After energizing circuits, demonstrate interlocking sequence and operational function for each switch at least three times.

a. Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer switches and of emergency source with normal source available.

b. Simulate loss of phase-to-ground voltage for each phase of normal source. c. Verify time-delay settings. d. Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or inspection of control

settings.



e. Verify proper sequence and correct timing of automatic engine starting, transfer time delay, retransfer time delay on restoration of normal power, and engine cool-down and shutdown.

B. Coordinate tests with tests of generator and run them concurrently.

C. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured insulation and contact resistances and time delays. Attach a label or tag to each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.

D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train ATST POC's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain transfer switches and related equipment as specified below. Refer to Division 1, Section 01820 "Demonstration and Training."

B. Coordinate this training with that for engine generator equipment.



ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 16420 - 1

SECTION 16420 - ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes the following enclosed controllers rated 600 V and less:

1. Full-voltage manual. 2. Full-voltage magnetic. 3. Reduced-voltage solid state.

B. Related Section:

1. Section 16269 "Variable Frequency Controllers" for general-purpose, ac, adjustable-frequency, pulse-width-modulated controllers for use on variable torque loads in ranges up to 200 hp.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CPT: Control power transformer.

B. MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker.

C. MCP: Motor circuit protector.

D. N.C.: Normally closed.

E. N.O.: Normally open.

F. OCPD: Overcurrent protective device.

G. SCR: Silicon-controlled rectifier.


A. Seismic Performance: Enclosed controllers shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.



1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."


A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed controller. Include manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and enclosure types and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each enclosed controller. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, details, and required clearances and service spaces around controller enclosures.

1. Show tabulations of the following:

a. Each installed unit's type and details. b. Factory-installed devices. c. Nameplate legends. d. Short-circuit current rating of integrated unit. e. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual OCPDs in

combination controllers.



A. Data: For qualified testing agency.

B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosed controllers, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.





D. Load-Current and Overload-Relay Heater List: Compile after motors have been installed, and arrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual motor nameplate full-load currents.

E. Load-Current and List of Settings of Adjustable Overload Relays: Compile after motors have been installed, and arrange to demonstrate that switch settings for motor running overload protection suit actual motors to be protected.




A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed controllers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 01782 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Routine maintenance requirements for enclosed controllers and installed components. 2. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable overload relays.

1.8 MATERIALS MAINTENANCE SUBMITTALS


1. Fuses for Fused Switches: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.

2. Control Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than two of each size and type.

3. Indicating Lights: Two of each type and color installed. 4. Auxiliary Contacts: Furnish one spare for each size and type of magnetic controller

installed. 5. Power Contacts: Furnish three spares for each size and type of magnetic contactor

installed.




C. IEEE Compliance: Fabricate and test enclosed controllers according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in Section 16074 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."


A. Store enclosed controllers indoors in clean, dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation. Protect enclosed controllers from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical damage.


A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:



1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F (minus 30 deg C) and not exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C).

2. Altitude: Not exceeding 10,200 feet (3109 m).

1.12 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of enclosed controllers with other construction including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete.

C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FULL-VOLTAGE CONTROLLERS

A. General Requirements for Full-Voltage Controllers: Comply with NEMA ICS 2, general purpose, Class A.

B. Motor-Starting Switches: "Quick-make, quick-break" toggle or push-button action; marked to show whether unit is off or on.


a. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. b. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. c. Rockwell Automation, Inc.; Allen-Bradley brand. d. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. e. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

2. Configuration: Nonreversing. 3. Surface mounting. 4. Red pilot light.

C. Fractional Horsepower Manual Controllers: "Quick-make, quick-break" toggle or push-button action; marked to show whether unit is off, on, or tripped.


a. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. b. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. c. Rockwell Automation, Inc.; Allen-Bradley brand.











d. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. e. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

2. Configuration: Nonreversing. 3. Overload Relays: Inverse-time-current characteristics; NEMA ICS 2, Class 10 tripping

characteristics; heaters matched to nameplate full-load current of actual protected motor; external reset push button; bimetallic type.

4. Surface mounting. 5. Red pilot light.

D. Magnetic Controllers: Full voltage, across the line, electrically held.



2. Configuration: Nonreversing. 3. Contactor Coils: Pressure-encapsulated type with coil transient suppressors.

a. Operating Voltage: Depending on contactor NEMA size and line-voltage rating, manufacturer's standard matching control power or line voltage.

4. Power Contacts: Totally enclosed, double-break, silver-cadmium oxide; assembled to allow inspection and replacement without disturbing line or load wiring.

5. Control Circuits: 120-V ac; obtained from integral CPT, with primary and secondary fuses, with CPT of sufficient capacity to operate integral devices and remotely located pilot, indicating, and control devices.

a. CPT Spare Capacity: 100 VA.

6. Solid-State Overload Relay:

a. Switch or dial selectable for motor running overload protection. b. Sensors in each phase. c. Class 10/20 selectable tripping characteristic selected to protect motor against

voltage and current unbalance and single phasing. d. Class II ground-fault protection, with start and run delays to prevent nuisance trip

on starting. e. Analog communication module.

7. N.O., isolated overload alarm contact. 8. External overload reset push button.

E. Combination Magnetic Controller: Factory-assembled combination of magnetic controller, OCPD, and disconnecting means.












2. Auxiliary Contacts: N.O./N.C., arranged to activate before switch blades open.

3. MCP Disconnecting Means:

a. UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents, instantaneous-only circuit breaker with front-mounted, field-adjustable, short-circuit trip coordinated with motor locked-rotor amperes.

b. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed position.

c. Auxiliary contacts "a" and "b" arranged to activate with MCP handle. N.O. alarm contact that operates only when MCP has tripped.

d. Current-limiting module to increase controller short-circuit current (withstand) rating to 100 kA.

2.2 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosed Controllers: NEMA ICS 6, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.

1. Dry and Clean Indoor Locations: Type 1. 2. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R. 3. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: Type 4 gasketed.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. General Requirements for Control Circuit and Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5; factory installed in controller enclosure cover unless otherwise indicated.

1. Push Buttons, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: Heavy-duty type.

a. Push Buttons: Covered, Lockable types; maintained as indicated. b. Pilot Lights: LED types; colors as indicated. c. Selector Switches: Rotary type.

B. Reversible N.C./N.O. auxiliary contact(s).








C. Phase-Failure, Phase-Reversal, and Undervoltage and Overvoltage Relays: Solid-state sensing circuit with isolated output contacts for hard-wired connections. Provide adjustable undervoltage, overvoltage, and time-delay settings.

D. Breather and drain assemblies, to maintain interior pressure and release condensation in Type 4 enclosures installed outdoors or in unconditioned interior spaces subject to humidity and temperature swings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and surfaces to receive enclosed controllers, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine enclosed controllers before installation. Reject enclosed controllers that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Wall-Mounted Controllers: Install enclosed controllers on walls with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated, and by bolting units to wall or mounting on lightweight structural-steel channels bolted to wall. For controllers not at walls, provide freestanding racks complying with Section 16073 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

B. Seismic Bracing: Comply with requirements specified in Section 16074 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

D. Install fuses in control circuits if not factory installed. Comply with requirements in Section 16491 "Fuses."

E. Install heaters in thermal overload relays. Select heaters based on actual nameplate full-load amperes after motors have been installed.

F. Install, connect, and fuse thermal-protector monitoring relays furnished with motor-driven equipment.

G. Install power factor correction capacitors. Connect to the load side of overload relays. If connected to the load side of overload relays, adjust overload heater sizes to accommodate the reduced motor full-load currents.

H. Comply with NECA 1.



3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify enclosed controllers, components, and control wiring. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 16075 "Electrical Identification."


2. Label each enclosure with engraved nameplate. 3. Label each enclosure-mounted control and pilot device.

3.4 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Install wiring between enclosed controllers and remote devices and facility's central control system. Comply with requirements in Section 16123 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables."

B. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.

C. Connect selector switches and other automatic-control selection devices where applicable.

1. Connect selector switches to bypass only those manual- and automatic-control devices that have no safety functions when switch is in manual-control position.

2. Connect selector switches with enclosed-controller circuit in both manual and automatic positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors.


A. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed controller, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.



1. Inspect controllers, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. Test and adjust controllers, components, and equipment.

2. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed-controller element, component, connecting motor supply, feeder, and control circuits.

3. Test continuity of each circuit. 4. Verify that voltages at controller locations are within plus or minus 10 percent of motor

nameplate rated voltages. If outside this range for any motor, notify ATST POC before starting the motor(s).

5. Test each motor for proper phase rotation. 6. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in

NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.





C. Enclosed controllers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports including a certified report that identifies enclosed controllers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time-delay relays, timers, and overload-relay pickup and trip ranges.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions until enclosed controllers are ready to be energized and placed into service.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain enclosed controllers.



SWITCHBOARDS 16441 - 1

SECTION 16441 - SWITCHBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Service and distribution switchboards rated 600 V and less. 2. Surge Protection devices. 3. Disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices. 4. Instrumentation. 5. Control power. 6. Accessory components and features. 7. Identification.


A. Seismic Performance: Switchboards shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7.



A. Product Data: For each type of switchboard, overcurrent protective device, transient voltage suppression device, ground-fault protector, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each switchboard and related equipment.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required clearances and service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.

2. Detail enclosure types for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 4. Detail short-circuit current rating of switchboards and overcurrent protective devices.



5. Detail utility company's metering provisions with indication of approval by utility company.

6. Detail Customer Power Energy Management (PEM) customer metering provisions. Coordinate with Section 16215 "Electrical Power Monitoring and Controls."

7. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components.

8. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device included in switchboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.

9. Include schematic and wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.



B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: Submit certification that switchboards, overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Section 16074 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following:




C. Field Quality-Control Reports:


requirements.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For switchboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 01782 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Routine maintenance requirements for switchboards and all installed components. 2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective

devices. 3. Time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective

device included in switchboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.





1. Potential Transformer Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than two of each size and type.

2. Control-Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than two of each size and type.

3. Fuses and Fusible Devices for Fused Circuit Breakers: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.

4. Indicating Lights: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than one of each size and type.


A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers qualified as defined in NEMA PB 2.1 and trained in electrical safety as required by NFPA 70E.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.


C. Source Limitations: Obtain switchboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories from single source from single manufacturer.

D. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for switchboards including clearances between switchboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

F. Comply with NEMA PB 2.


H. Comply with UL 891.


A. Deliver switchboards in sections or lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path.

B. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside switchboards and install temporary electric heating (250 W per section) to prevent condensation.

C. Handle and prepare switchboards for installation according to NECA 400 and NEMA PB 2.1.




A. Installation Pathway: Remove and replace access fencing, doors, lift-out panels, and structures to provide pathway for moving switchboards into place.

B. Environmental Limitations:

1. Do not deliver or install switchboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above switchboards is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:

a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C). b. Altitude: Project Site altitude is 10,200 feet (3,100 m).

C. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 2, usual service conditions, as follows:

1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified. 2. Altitude not exceeding 10,200 feet (3,100 m).

1.11 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switchboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete.

1.12 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS



B. Front-Connected, Front-Accessible Switchboards:

1. Main Devices: Fixed, individually mounted. 2. Branch Devices: Panel mounted. 3. Sections front and rear aligned.

C. Nominal System Voltage: 480Y/277 V.

D. Main-Bus Continuous: As indicated on drawings.

E. Seismic Requirements: Fabricate and test switchboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in Section 16074 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

F. Indoor Enclosures: Steel, NEMA 250, Type 1.

G. Enclosure Finish for Indoor Units: Factory-applied finish in manufacturer's standard gray finish over a rust-inhibiting primer on treated metal surface.

H. Barriers: Between adjacent switchboard sections.

I. Utility Metering Compartment: Fabricated, barrier compartment and section complying with utility company's requirements; hinged sealed door; buses provisioned for mounting utility company's current transformers and potential transformers or potential taps as required by utility company. If separate vertical section is required for utility metering, match and align with basic switchboard. Provide service entrance label and necessary applicable service entrance features.

J. Customer Metering Compartment: A separate customer metering compartment and section with front hinged door, for indicated metering, and current transformers for each meter. Current transformer secondary wiring shall be terminated on shorting-type terminal blocks. Include potential transformers having primary and secondary fuses with disconnecting means and secondary wiring terminated on terminal blocks.

K. Bus Transition and Incoming Pull Sections: Matched and aligned with basic switchboard.

L. Hinged Front Panels: Allow access to circuit breaker, metering, accessory, and blank compartments.







M. Buses and Connections: Three phase, four wire unless otherwise indicated.

1. Phase- and Neutral-Bus Material: Hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity, silver-plated, with tin-plated copper feeder circuit-breaker line connections.

2. Load Terminals: Insulated, rigidly braced, runback bus extensions, of same material as through buses, equipped with mechanical connectors for outgoing circuit conductors. Provide load terminals for future circuit-breaker positions at full-ampere rating of circuit-breaker position.

3. Ground Bus: 1/4-by-2-inch- (6-by-50-mm-) hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity, equipped with mechanical connectors for feeder and branch-circuit ground conductors. For busway feeders, extend insulated equipment grounding cable to busway ground connection and support cable at intervals in vertical run.

4. Main Phase Buses and Equipment Ground Buses: Uniform capacity for entire length of switchboard's main and distribution sections. Provide for future extensions from both ends.

5. Neutral Buses: 100 percent of the ampacity of phase buses unless otherwise indicated, equipped with mechanical connectors for outgoing circuit neutral cables. Brace bus extensions for busway feeder neutral bus.

N. Future Devices: Equip compartments with mounting brackets, supports, bus connections, and appurtenances at full rating of circuit-breaker compartment.

2.2 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES



B. Surge Protection Device Description: IEEE C62.41-compliant, integrally mounted, wired-in, solid-state, parallel-connected, non-modular type, with sine-wave tracking suppression and filtering modules, UL 1449, second edition, short-circuit current rating matching or exceeding the switchboard short-circuit rating, and with the following features and accessories:

1. Fuses, rated at 200-kA interrupting capacity. 2. Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring. 3. Integral disconnect switch. 4. Redundant suppression circuits. 5. Redundant replaceable modules. 6. Arrangement with wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and ground bus. 7. LED indicator lights for power and protection status. 8. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed. 9. Form-C contacts rated at 5 A and 250-V ac, one normally open and one normally closed,

for remote monitoring of system operation. Contacts shall reverse position on failure of any surge diversion module or on opening of any current-limiting device. Coordinate with building power monitoring and control system.







10. Six-digit, transient-event counter set to totalize transient surges.

C. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 120 kA per mode/240 kA per phase.

D. Withstand Capabilities: 12,000 IEEE C62.41, Category C3 (10 kA), 8-by-20-mic.sec. surges with less than 5 percent change in clamping voltage.

E. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for grounded wye circuits with 480Y/277-V, three-phase, four-wire circuits shall be as follows:

1. Line to Neutral: 800 V for 480Y/277. 2. Line to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277. 3. Neutral to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277.

2.3 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Switchboard main and feeder circuit breakers, 100 amperes and larger, shall be fully adjustable, electronic trip. These breakers shall have at least 5 levels of adjustment, namely instantaneous, long and short pickup levels and time adjustments (LSI), equal to Cutler-Hammer "Digitrip Optim." Where 5 levels are not sufficient for CLEAN coordination, the 10 levels of adjustability of the "Digitrip Optim-1050" is required. Non-adjustable or enhanced thermal magnetic breakers are not to be used and will not be considered. Main circuit breaker rated at 1000A or larger shall be provided with ground fault pickup level, time delay, and I2T settings.

B. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 100 A and larger.

2. Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or field-replicable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings:

a. Instantaneous trip. b. Long- and short-time pickup levels. c. Long- and short-time time adjustments. d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.

3. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip).

4. Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip).

5. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:

a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. b. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor

material.



c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits.

d. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.

e. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking ground-fault protection function.

f. Communication Capability: Circuit-breaker-mounted Integral communication module with functions and features compatible with power monitoring and control system specified in Section 16215 "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control."

g. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 55 percent of rated voltage.

h. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage without intentional time delay.

C. Insulated-Case Circuit Breaker (ICCB): 100 percent rated, sealed, insulated-case power circuit breaker with interrupting capacity rating to meet available fault current.

1. Fixed circuit-breaker mounting. 2. Two-step, stored-energy closing. 3. Full-function, microprocessor-based trip units with interchangeable rating plug, trip

indicators, and the following field-adjustable settings:

a. Instantaneous trip. b. Long- and short-time time adjustments. c. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.

4. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking ground-fault protection function.

5. Remote trip indication and control. 6. Communication Capability: Integral communication module with functions and features

compatible with power monitoring and control system specified in Division 16, Section 16215 "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control."

7. Control Voltage: 120-V ac.

2.4 INSTRUMENTATION

A. Instrument Transformers: IEEE C57.13, NEMA EI 21.1, and the following:

1. Potential Transformers: IEEE C57.13; 120 V, 60 Hz, tapped secondary; disconnecting type with integral fuse mountings. Burden and accuracy shall be consistent with connected metering and relay devices.

2. Current Transformers: IEEE C57.13; 5 A, 60 Hz, secondary; bar or window type; double secondary winding and secondary shorting device. Burden and accuracy shall be consistent with connected metering and relay devices.

3. Control-Power Transformers: Dry type, mounted in separate compartments for units larger than 3 kVA.



B. Multifunction Digital-Metering Monitor: Microprocessor-based unit suitable for three- or four-wire systems and with the following features:

1. Switch-selectable digital display of the following values with maximum accuracy tolerances as indicated:

a. Phase Currents, Each Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent. b. Phase-to-Phase Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent. c. Phase-to-Neutral Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent. d. Megawatts: Plus or minus 2 percent. e. Megavars: Plus or minus 2 percent. f. Power Factor: Plus or minus 2 percent. g. Frequency: Plus or minus 0.5 percent. h. Accumulated Energy, Megawatt Hours: Plus or minus 2 percent; accumulated

values unaffected by power outages up to 72 hours. i. Megawatt Demand: Plus or minus 2 percent; demand interval programmable from

five to 60 minutes. j. Contact devices to operate remote impulse-totalizing demand meter.

2. Mounting: Display and control unit flush or semiflush mounted in instrument compartment door.

C. Ammeters, Voltmeters, and Power-Factor Meters: ANSI C39.1.

1. Meters: 4-inch (100-mm) diameter or 6 inches (150 mm) square, flush or semiflush, with antiparallax 250-degree scales and external zero adjustment.

2. Voltmeters: Cover an expanded-scale range of nominal voltage plus 10 percent.

D. Instrument Switches: Rotary type with off position.

1. Voltmeter Switches: Permit reading of all phase-to-phase voltages and, where a neutral is indicated, phase-to-neutral voltages.

2. Ammeter Switches: Permit reading of current in each phase and maintain current-transformer secondaries in a closed-circuit condition at all times.

E. Feeder Ammeters: 2-1/2-inch (64-mm) minimum size with 90- or 120-degree scale. Meter and transfer device with off position, located on overcurrent device door for indicated feeder circuits only.

F. Watt-Hour Meters and Wattmeters:

1. Comply with ANSI C12.1. 2. Three-phase induction type with two stators, each with current and potential coil, rated

5 A, 120 V, 60 Hz. 3. Suitable for connection to three- and four-wire circuits. 4. Potential indicating lamps. 5. Adjustments for light and full load, phase balance, and power factor. 6. Four-dial clock register. 7. Integral demand indicator. 8. Contact devices to operate remote impulse-totalizing demand meter.



9. Ratchets to prevent reverse rotation. 10. Removable meter with drawout test plug. 11. Semiflush mounted case with matching cover. 12. Appropriate multiplier tag.

G. Impulse-Totalizing Demand Meter:

1. Comply with ANSI C12.1. 2. Suitable for use with switchboard watt-hour meter, including two-circuit totalizing relay. 3. Cyclometer. 4. Four-dial, totalizing kilowatt-hour register. 5. Positive chart drive mechanism. 6. Capillary pen holding a minimum of one month's ink supply. 7. Roll chart with minimum 31-day capacity; appropriate multiplier tag. 8. Capable of indicating and recording 15-minute integrated demand of totalized system.

2.5 CONTROL POWER

A. Control Circuits: 120-V ac, supplied through secondary disconnecting devices from control-power transformer.

2.6 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES

A. Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from switchboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing switchboard meters and switchboard class relays.

2.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for switchboards with one or more service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store switchboards according to NECA 400 and NEMA PB 2.1.

B. Examine switchboards before installation. Reject switchboards that are moisture damaged or physically damaged.

C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive switchboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.




3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install switchboards and accessories according to NECA 400 and NEMA PB 2.1.

B. Equipment Mounting: Install switchboards on concrete base, 4-inch (100-mm) nominal thickness. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in Division 16, Section 03301 "Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete."




4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to switchboards.

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from switchboard units and components.

D. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Section 16074 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

E. Operating Instructions: Frame and mount the printed basic operating instructions for switchboards, including control and key interlocking sequences and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished wood or metal and cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of switchboards.

F. Install filler plates in unused spaces of panel-mounted sections.

G. Install overcurrent protective devices, transient voltage suppression devices, and instrumentation.

1. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges per Project’s overcurrent protection device coordination study.


3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 16075 "Electrical Identification."

B. Switchboard Nameplates: Label each switchboard compartment with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 16075 "Electrical Identification."



C. Device Nameplates: Label each disconnecting and overcurrent protective device and each meter and control device mounted in compartment doors with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 16075 "Electrical Identification."



B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each switchboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.






a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each switchboard. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each switchboard 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

c. Instruments and Equipment:

1) Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.


D. Switchboard will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies switchboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.



B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated per Project’s overcurrent protective device coordination study.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat, to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions, until switchboard is ready to be energized and placed into service.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train ATST POC's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain switchboards, overcurrent protective devices, instrumentation, and accessories, and to use and reprogram microprocessor-based trip, monitoring, and communication units. Make allowable for one (1) eight (8) hour work day at Project Site, schedule to be determined by ATST POC.



PANELBOARDS 16442 - 1

SECTION 16442 - PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Distribution panelboards. 2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. SVR: Suppressed voltage rating.

B. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.


A. Seismic Performance: Panelboards shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7.



A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device, transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.

2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.



4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. 5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices and auxiliary components. 6. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 7. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent

protective device included in panelboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: Submit certification that panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Section 16074 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following:




C. Field Quality-Control Reports:


requirements.

D. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load balancing.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 01782 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices.

2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device that allows adjustments.





1. Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock. 2. Circuit Breakers Including GFCI and Ground Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Types:

Two spares for each panelboard. 3. Fuses for Fused Switches: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and

type, but no fewer than three of each size and type. 4. Fuses for Fused Power-Circuit Devices: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for

each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories from single source from single manufacturer.


C. Comply with NEMA PB 1.



A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporary electric heating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation.

B. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NECA 407 and NEMA PB 1.


A. Environmental Limitations:

1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:

a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding minus 22 deg F (minus 30 deg C) to plus 104 deg F (plus 40 deg C).

b. Altitude: Not exceeding 10,200 feet (3109 m).

B. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows:



1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified. 2. Altitude not exceeding 10,200 feet (3109 m).

C. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by ATST POC or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify ATST POC no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without ATST POC's written permission.

3. Comply with NFPA 70E.

1.12 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

1.13 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS

A. Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in Section 16074 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

B. Enclosures: Flush- and surface-mounted cabinets.

1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.

a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. c. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.

2. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim cover.



3. Finishes:

a. Panels and Trim: Galvanized steel, factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat.

b. Back Boxes: Same finish as panels and trim.

4. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in transparent card holder.

C. Incoming Mains Location: Top and bottom.

D. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding

conductors; bonded to box. 3. Isolated Ground Bus: Adequate for branch-circuit isolated ground conductors; insulated

from box. 4. Extra-Capacity Neutral Bus: Neutral bus rated 200 percent of phase bus and UL listed as

suitable for nonlinear loads.

2.2 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS



B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type.

C. Mains: Circuit breaker.

D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Bolt-on circuit breakers.

E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolt-on circuit breakers; plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device requires mechanical release for removal.

2.3 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS


1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.









3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.

C. Mains: Circuit breaker.

D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units.

E. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

2.4 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES



B. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.

3. Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or field-replicable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings:

a. Instantaneous trip. b. Long- and short-time pickup levels. c. Long- and short-time time adjustments.

4. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.

5. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip).

6. Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip).

7. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:

a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. b. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor

materials.









c. Ground-Fault Protection: Remote-mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.

d. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 75 percent of rated voltage.

e. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage with field-adjustable 0.1- to 0.6-second time delay.

f. Multipole units enclosed in a single housing or factory assembled to operate as a single unit.

g. Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment for locking circuit-breaker handle in on or off position.

h. Handle Clamp: Loose attachment for holding circuit-breaker handle in on position.

2.5 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES

A. Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.

B. Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from panelboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing panelboard meters and switchboard class relays.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NECA 407 and NEMA PB 1.1.

B. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or have been subjected to water saturation.

C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NECA 407 and NEMA PB 1.1.

B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Section 16074 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

C. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 16 Section 16073 "Hangars and Supports for Electrical Systems."



D. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.

E. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.

1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.

F. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

G. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing load balancing.


3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with Section 16075 "Electrical Identification."

B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads; incorporate ATST POC's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.

C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 16075 "Electrical Identification."



B. Manufacturer’s Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist testing.

C. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.


D. Tests and Inspections:






a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each panelboard. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each panelboard 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

c. Instruments and Equipment:

1) Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

E. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports including a certified report that identifies panelboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken and observations after remedial action.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.

C. Load Balancing: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes.

1. Measure as directed during period of normal system loading. 2. Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working schedule of

the facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24-hour services such as fax machines and on-line data processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment.

3. After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all load readings before and after changes and submit test records.

4. Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a panelboard, is not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this minimum requirement.



LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 16461 - 1

SECTION 16461 - LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following types of dry-type transformers rated 600 V and less, with capacities up to 1000 kVA:

1. Distribution transformers.


A. Product Data: Include rated nameplate data, capacities, weights, dimensions, minimum clearances, installed devices and features, and performance for each type and size of transformer indicated.




A. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that transformers, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Section 16074 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following:







B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.




A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For transformers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each transformer type through one source from a single manufacturer.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

D. Comply with IEEE C57.12.91, "Test Code for Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers."


A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat according to manufacturer's written instructions within the enclosure of each ventilated-type unit, throughout periods during which equipment is not energized and when transformer is not in a space that is continuously under normal control of temperature and humidity.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with actual transformer provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete.

B. Coordinate installation of wall-mounting and structure-hanging supports with actual transformer provided.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. ACME Electric Corporation; Power Distribution Products Division. 2. Challenger Electrical Equipment Corp.; a division of Eaton Corp. 3. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Products. 4. General Electric Company. 5. Hammond Co.; Matra Electric, Inc. 6. Magnetek Power Electronics Group. 7. Myers Power Products, Inc. 8. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 9. Sola/Hevi-Duty. 10. Square D; Schneider Electric.

2.2 GENERAL TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, air-cooled units for 60-Hz service.

B. Cores: Grain-oriented, non-aging silicon steel.

C. Coils: Continuous windings without splices except for taps.

1. Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type. 2. Coil Material: Copper.

2.3 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS

A. Comply with NEMA ST 20, and list and label as complying with UL 1561.

B. Provide transformers that are constructed to withstand seismic forces specified in Section 16074 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

C. Cores: One leg per phase.

D. Enclosure: Ventilated, NEMA 250, Type 2.

1. Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound, sealing out moisture and air.

E. Transformer Enclosure Finish: Comply with NEMA 250.

1. Finish Color: Gray.

F. Taps for Transformers Smaller than 3 kVA: None.














G. Taps for Transformers 7.5 to 24 kVA: One 5 percent tap above and one 5 percent tap below normal full capacity.

H. Taps for Transformers 25 kVA and Larger: Two 2.5 percent taps above and two 2.5 percent taps below normal full capacity.

I. Insulation Class: 220 deg C, UL-component-recognized insulation system with a maximum of 115 deg C rise above 40 deg C ambient temperature.

J. Energy Efficiency for Transformers Rated 15 kVA and Larger:

1. Complying with NEMA TP 1, Class 1 and Electronic Code of Federal Regulation (ECFR), Title 10, Part 431, Subpart K efficiency levels.

2. Tested according to NEMA TP 2. 3. All transformers shall have the Energy Star Label.

K. K-Factor Rating: Transformers indicated to be K-Factor Rated shall comply with UL 1561 requirements for nonsinusoidal load current-handling capability to the degree defined by designated K-Factor.

1. Unit shall not overheat when carrying full-load current with harmonic distortion corresponding to designated K-Factor.

2. Indicate value of K-Factor on transformer nameplate. 3. Specific transformer K-Factor rating shall be as specified on Project Drawings. 4. Transformer K-Factor shall be K-4 minimum unless otherwise noted.

L. Electrostatic Shielding: Each winding shall have an independent, single, full-width copper electrostatic shield arranged to minimize interwinding capacitance.

1. Arrange coil leads and terminal strips to minimize capacitive coupling between input and output terminals.

2. Include special terminal for grounding the shield. 3. Shield Effectiveness:

a. Capacitance between Primary and Secondary Windings: Not to exceed 33 picofarads over a frequency range of 20 Hz to 1 MHz.

b. Common-Mode Noise Attenuation: Minimum of minus 120 dBA at 0.5 to 1.5 kHz; minimum of minus 65 dBA at 1.5 to 100 kHz.

c. Normal-Mode Noise Attenuation: Minimum of minus 52 dBA at 1.5 to 10 kHz.

M. Wall Brackets: Manufacturer's standard brackets.

N. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for coil and core.

O. Low-Sound-Level Requirements: Minimum of 3 dBA less than NEMA ST 20 standard sound levels when factory tested according to IEEE C57.12.91.

P. Low-Sound-Level Requirements: Maximum sound levels, when factory tested according to IEEE C57.12.91, as follows:



1. 9 kVA and less: 40 dBA. 2. 30 to 50 kVA: 45 dBA. 3. 51 to 150 kVA: 50 dBA. 4. 151 to 300 kVA: 55 dBA. 5. 301 to 500 kVA: 60 dBA. 6. 501 to 700 kVA: 62 dBA. 7. 701 to 1000 kVA: 64 dBA.

2.4 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

A. Nameplates: Engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate for each distribution and buck-boost transformer, mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. Nameplates and label products are specified in Section 16075 "Electrical Identification."


A. Test and inspect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.91.

B. Factory Sound-Level Tests: Conduct sound-level tests on equipment for this Project.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions for compliance with enclosure- and ambient-temperature requirements for each transformer.

B. Verify that field measurements are as needed to maintain working clearances required by NFPA 70 and manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable mounting conditions where transformers will be installed.

D. Verify that ground connections are in place and requirements in Section 16060 "Grounding and Bonding" have been met. Maximum ground resistance shall be 5 ohms at location of transformer.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install wall-mounting transformers level and plumb with wall brackets fabricated by transformer manufacturer.

1. Brace wall-mounting transformers as specified in Section 16074 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."



B. Construct concrete bases and anchor floor-mounting transformers according to manufacturer's written instructions, seismic codes applicable to Project, and requirements in Section 16073 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment according to Section 16060 "Grounding and Bonding."

B. Connect wiring according to Section 16120 "Conductors and Cables."



B. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.




D. Remove and replace units that do not pass tests or inspections and retest as specified above.

E. Infrared Scanning: Two months after Substantial Completion, perform an infrared scan of transformer connections.

1. Use an infrared-scanning device designed to measure temperature or detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide documentation of device calibration.

2. Perform 2 follow-up infrared scans of transformers, one at 4 months and the other at 11 months after Substantial Completion.

3. Prepare a certified report identifying transformer checked and describing results of scanning. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and scanning observations after remedial action.

F. Test Labeling: On completion of satisfactory testing of each unit, attach a dated and signed "Satisfactory Test" label to tested component.



3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Record transformer secondary voltage at each unit for at least 48 hours of typical occupancy period. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at secondary terminals. Optimum is defined as not exceeding nameplate voltage plus 10 percent and not being lower than nameplate voltage minus 3 percent at maximum load conditions. Submit recording and tap settings as test results.

B. Output Settings Report: Prepare a written report recording output voltages and tap settings.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.



FUSES 16491 - 1

SECTION 16491 - FUSES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Cartridge fuses rated 600-V ac and less for use in control circuits, enclosed switches, and enclosed controllers.

2. Plug fuses rated 125-V ac and less for use in plug-fuse-type enclosed switches and fuseholders.

3. Spare-fuse cabinets.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material, dimensions, descriptions of individual components, and finishes for spare-fuse cabinets. Include the following for each fuse type indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature Adjustment Information: If ratings of fuses have been adjusted to accommodate ambient temperatures, provide list of fuses with adjusted ratings.

a. For each fuse having adjusted ratings, include location of fuse, original fuse rating, local ambient temperature, and adjusted fuse rating.

b. Provide manufacturer's technical data on which ambient temperature adjustment calculations are based.

2. Dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, and ratings.

3. Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics. 4. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) and current-limitation curves

(instantaneous peak let-through current) for each type and rating of fuse. 5. Coordination charts and tables and related data. 6. Fuse sizes for elevator feeders and elevator disconnect switches.


FUSES 16491 - 2


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuses to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 01782 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Ambient temperature adjustment information. 2. Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics. 3. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) and current-limitation curves

(instantaneous peak let-through current) for each type and rating of fuse. 4. Coordination charts and tables and related data.



1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than two of each size and type.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain fuses, for use within a specific product or circuit, from single source from single manufacturer.


C. Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses.



A. Where ambient temperature to which fuses are directly exposed is less than 40 deg F (5 deg C) or more than 100 deg F (38 deg C), apply manufacturer's ambient temperature adjustment factors to fuse ratings.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate fuse ratings with utilization equipment nameplate limitations of maximum fuse size and with system short-circuit current levels.


FUSES 16491 - 3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Cooper Bussmann, Inc. 2. Edison Fuse, Inc. 3. Ferraz Shawmut, Inc. 4. Littelfuse, Inc.

2.2 CARTRIDGE FUSES

A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuses with voltage ratings consistent with circuit voltages.

2.3 SPARE-FUSE CABINET

A. Characteristics: Wall-mounted steel unit with full-length, recessed piano-hinged door and key-coded cam lock and pull.

1. Size: Adequate for storage of spare fuses specified with 15 percent spare capacity minimum.

2. Finish: Gray, baked enamel. 3. Identification: "SPARE FUSES" in 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high letters on exterior of

door. 4. Fuse Pullers: For each size of fuse, where applicable and available, from fuse

manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine fuses before installation. Reject fuses that are moisture damaged or physically damaged.

B. Examine holders to receive fuses for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance, such as rejection features.

C. Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Install fuses of sizes and with characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment.







FUSES 16491 - 4

D. Evaluate ambient temperatures to determine if fuse rating adjustment factors must be applied to fuse ratings.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 FUSE APPLICATIONS

A. Cartridge Fuses:

1. Feeders: Class RK1, fast acting. 2. Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK5, time delay. 3. Other Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time delay. 4. Control Circuits: Class CC, fast acting.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without removing fuse.

B. Install spare-fuse cabinet(s).

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 16075 "Electrical Identification" and indicating fuse replacement information on inside door of each fused switch and adjacent to each fuse block and holder.



INTERIOR LIGHTING 16511 - 1

SECTION 16511 - INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. This specification is for the purchase of solid state lighting (SSL) Luminaires (herein referred to as Luminaires) applied to the illumination of interior spaces. Luminaires shall listed in accordance with national recognized testing laboratories (NRTLs) approved by the United States Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) under the requirements of 29CFR1910.7.

2. The system shall be capable of turning lighting loads on/off as well as dimming lights (if lighting load is required to be dimmed)

3. System devices shall be capable of being networked together enabling digital communi-cation and shall be individually addressable.

4. The system architecture shall be capable of enabling stand-alone groups (rooms) of devices to function in some default capacity shall the network connectivity to the greater system be lost.

5. The system architecture shall be capable of facilitating a remote operation via a computer connection.

6. The system shall not require any centrally hardwired switching equipment. 7. Lighting fixture supports.


1. Section 13845 "Lighting Controls" for manual or programmable control systems with low-voltage control wiring or data communication circuits.

2. Section 16145 "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting, including time switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipole lighting relays and contactors.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CALiPER: Commercially Available LED Product Evaluation and Reporting ‘A’ US DOE program for the testing and monitoring of commercially available LED Luminaires and lights.

B. CCT: Correlated Color Temperature: Visible light characteristic of comparing a light source to a theoretical, heated black body radiator; measured in Kelvin.



C. Cd: Candela: Unit of measurement of light intensity.

D. Chromaticity: The property of color of light.

E. Fc: Foot-candle. Unit of illuminance.

F. IES-LM-79-08: Illuminating Engineering Society – Approved Methods: Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Solid-State Lighting Products.

G. IES-LM-80-08: Illuminating Engineering Society – Approved Methods: Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources.

H. IES-TM-21: Method for determining an LED luminaire or integral replacement lamp’s expected operating life, based on initial performance data collected per IES-LM-80.

I. L80: The extrapolated life in hours of the luminaire when the luminous output depreciates 20 percent from initial values.

J. LED: Light Emitting Diode.

K. METS: Material Engineering and Testing Services of the Translab.

L. NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturers Association.

M. NVLAP: National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program. A program under the US DOE to accredit independent testing laboratories to qualify.

N. Power Factor: The ratio of the real power component to the total (complex) power component.

O. Rated Power: Power consumption that the luminaire was designed and tested for at ambient temperature (70 deg F or 21 deg C).

P. SPD: Surge Protection Device. A subsystem or component(s) that can protect the unit against short duration voltage and current surges.

Q. SSL: Solid-State Lighting.

R. THD: Total Harmonic Distortion. The amount of higher frequency power on the power line.

S. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating.

T. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.

U. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including power supply housing if provided.


A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:



1. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions. 2. Energy-efficiency data. 3. Life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data for lamps. 4. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying with

IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing & Calculation Guides, of each lighting fixture type. The adjustment factors shall be for lamps, ballasts, and accessories identical to those indicated for the lighting fixture as applied in this Project.

a. Manufacturer Certified Data: Photometric data shall be certified by a manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

B. Installation instructions.


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Lighting fixtures. 2. Suspended ceiling components. 3. Partitions and millwork that penetrate the ceiling or extends to within 12 inches

(305 mm) of the plane of the luminaires. 4. Structural members to which suspension systems for lighting fixtures will be attached. 5. Other items in finished ceiling including the following:

a. Air outlets and inlets. b. Speakers. c. Smoke and fire detectors. d. Occupancy sensors. e. Access panels.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of ballast for bi-level and dimmer-controlled fixtures, from manufacturer.


D. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers' codes.





1. Lamps: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.

2. Plastic Diffusers and Lenses: One for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.

3. LED Power Supply: One for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.

4. Globes and Guards: One for every 20 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.


A. The luminaires shall be manufactured in accordance with a manufacturer quality assurance (QA) program. The QA program shall include two types of quality assurance: (1) design quality assurance and (2) production quality assurance. The production quality assurance shall include statistically controlled routine tests to ensure minimum performance levels of the modules built to meet this specification, and a documented process of how problems are to be resolved.

B. QA process and test results documentation shall be kept on file for a minimum period of seven years.

C. LED luminaire designs not satisfying design qualification testing and the production quality assurance testing performance requirements described below shall not be labeled, advertised, or sold as conforming to this specification.

D. Design Qualification Testing:

1. Design Qualification Testing shall be performed by a National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) testing facility. Such testing may be performed by the manufacturer or an independent testing lab hired by the manufacturer on new luminaire designs, and when a major design change has been implemented on an existing design. A major design change is defined as a design change (electrical or physical) which changes any of the performance characteristics of the luminaire, results in a different circuit configuration for the power supply, or changes the layout of the individual LED's in the module.

2. A quantity of two units for each design shall be submitted for Design Qualification Testing.

a. Product submittals shall be accompanied by product specification sheets or other documentation that includes the designed parameters as detailed in this specification. These parameters include (but not limited to):

1) Maximum power in Watts. 2) Maximum Designed Junction Temperature.



3) L70 in hours, when extrapolated for the average operating temperature (Section 2.2).

b. Product submittals shall be accompanied by performance data that is derived in accordance with appropriate IESNA testing standards and tested in a laboratory that is NVLAP accredited for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

c. Product submittals shall be accompanied by a test report showing surge protection performance as tested per the definitions and procedures in ANSI/IEEE C62.41 1991.

d. Thermal testing data and reporting shall be provided based in the sensor input as defined below:

1) Temperature sensors shall me mounted on the LED solder pads as close to the LED as possible.

3. Burn-In: Before any customer design qualification testing is performed, the sample Luminaires shall be energized for a minimum of 24 hours, at 100 percent on-time duty cycle, at a temperature of +70 deg F (+21 deg C).

4. Any failure of the luminaire, which renders the unit non-compliant with the specification after burn-in, shall be cause for rejection.

5. The luminaire shall be tested as described herein.

a. Luminaire performance shall be judged against the specified minimum illuminance in the specified pattern for a particular application.

b. The luminaire lighting performance shall be adjusted (depreciated) for the minimum life expectancy (Section 2.2).

1) The performance shall be adjusted (depreciated) by using the LED manufacturer’s data or the data from the IESNA Standard LM-80-08 test report, which ever one results in a higher level of lumen depreciation.

c. The luminaire may be determined to be compliant photometrically, if:

1) The initial minimum illuminance level is achieved in 100 percent of the area of the specified lighting pattern, and

2) The depreciated minimum illuminance is maintained in at least 95 percent of the area of the specified lighting pattern, and

3) The minimum length of the depreciated iso-footcandle curve is equal or greater than the length of the specified iso-footcandle curve.

E. Quality Assurance Testing (random sample testing)

1. Random sample testing may be performed on all shipments. 2. Testing shall be completed within than 30 days after. 3. All parameters of the specification may be tested on the shipment sample.

F. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.




1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. The manufacturer shall provide a warranty against loss of performance and defects in materials and workmanship for the Luminaires for a period of 5 years after acceptance of the Luminaires. Replacement Luminaires shall be provided promptly after receipt of Luminaires that have failed at no cost to the customer. All warranty documentation shall be provided to customer prior to random sample testing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings.

2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS

A. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures.

B. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

C. Sheet Metal Components: Steel unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.

D. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.

E. Diffusers and Globes:

1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.

a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch (3.175 mm) minimum unless otherwise indicated.

b. UV stabilized.

2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated.

F. Each luminaire shall consist of an assembly that utilizes LEDs as the light source. In addition, a complete luminaire shall consist of a housing, LED array, and electronic driver (power supply).



G. Each luminaire shall be rated for a minimum operational life of 50,000 hours as defined by IES LM-80 and TM-21.

H. Each luminaire shall be designed to operate at an average operating temperature of 25 deg C.

1. The operating temperature range shall be -10 deg C to +25 deg C. 2. Some parameters and tests (such as IESNA standard LM-80-08) shall be conducted at

different ambient temperatures.

I. Each luminaire shall meet all parameters of this specification throughout the minimum operational life when operated at the average operating temperature.

J. The individual LEDs shall be connected such that a catastrophic loss or the failure of one LED will not result in the loss of the entire luminaire.

K. Each luminaire shall be listed with a nationally recognized testing laboratory (including but not limited to UL, CSA, ETL) under UL 1598 and UL 8750, or an equivalent standard from a recognized testing laboratory.

2.3 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Electrical:

1. Operation Voltage:

a. The luminaire shall operate from a 60 HZ ±3 HZ AC line over a voltage ranging from 110 VAC to 277 VAC. The fluctuations of line voltage shall have no visible effect on the luminous output.

b. The standard operating voltages are 120 VAC, 277 VAC.

2. Power Factor: The luminaire shall have a power factor of 0.90% or greater at all standard operating voltages

3. THD: Total harmonic distortion (current and voltage) induced into an AC power line by a luminaire shall not exceed 20 percent at any standard input voltage.

4. Surge Suppression: The luminaire shall include surge protection to withstand high repeti-tion noise and other interference.

a. The surge protection which may reside within the driver shall protect the luminaire from damage and failure for transient voltages and currents as defined in ANSI/IEEE C64.41 1991 for Location Category A Low. Where failure does not mean a momentary loss of light during the transient event.

b. Surge protection performance shall be tested per the procedures in ANSI/IEEE C62.45 based on ANSI/IEEE C62.41 1991 definitions for standard and optional waveforms for Location Category A-Low

5. Operational Performance: The LED circuitry shall prevent perceptible flicker to the un-aided eye over the voltage range specified above.

6. RF Interference: The luminaire and associated on-board circuitry must meet Class A emission limits referred in Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Title 47, Subpart B, Section 15 regulations concerning the emission of electronic noise.



7. Dimming: The luminaire shall be capable of continuous dimming without perceivable flicker over a range of 100% to 5% of rated lumen output. Dimming shall be controlled by a 0-10V signal.

8. Lumen Management: The luminaire shall be capable of continuously monitoring system performance to allow for constant lumen management / compensation function.

B. Photometric Requirements:

1. Light Output:

a. The minimum initial lumen output of the luminaire shall be 3294 lumens exiting the luminaire in the 0-90 degree zone - as measured by IESNA Standard LM-79-08.

b. The lumen output shall not decrease by more than 30% over the minimum opera-tional life of Section 2.2 (or L70 shall be at least the minimum number of hours as specified in Section 2.2).

c. The measurements shall be calibrated to standard photopic calibrations.

2. Light Color/Quality:

a. Corrected Color temperature (CCT) range between 3,500K and 4,100K shall be correlated to chromaticity as defined by the absolute (X,Y) coordinates on the 2-D CIE chromaticity chart .

b. The color rendition index (CRI) shall be 80 or greater.

C. Thermal Management:

1. The thermal management (of the heat generated by the LEDs) shall be of sufficient capacity to assure proper operation of the luminaire over the expected useful life (section 2.2).

a. The LED manufacturer’s maximum junction temperature for the expected life (Section 2.2) shall not be exceeded at the average operating ambient.

b. The LED manufacturer’s maximum junction temperature for the catastrophic failure shall not be exceeded at the maximum operating ambient.

2. The Driver manufacturer’s maximum case temperature shall not be exceeded at the max-imum operating ambient. Thermal management shall be passive by design.

a. The use of fans or other mechanical devices shall not be allowed.

D. Physical and Mechanical Requirements:

1. The luminaire shall be a single, self-contained device, not requiring on-site assembly for installation. The power supply for the luminaire shall be integral to the unit. The LED board and driver should have quick-disconnect plugs for individual replacement.

2. The assembly and manufacturing process for the SSL luminaire shall be designed to as-sure all internal components are adequately supported to withstand mechanical shock and vibration.



3. The optical assembly of the luminaire shall consist of a ribbed metal reflector system and extruded refracting optical lens with high-transmission internal diffusion film applied to the inside of the refracting lens. No individual LED images shall be visible to the occu-pant.

4. The electronics/power supply enclosure shall be internal to the SSL luminaire and be ac-cessible per UL requirements

5. Each mounted luminaire must be equipped with two (2) digital RJ45 ports and interface with other digital control equipment.

a. If a digital manual wall control is utilized, it must integrate with the SSL luminaire via CAT5E cable and self-commission.

b. If a digital occupancy sensor is utilized, it must integrate with the SSL luminaire via CAT5E cable and self-commission.

c. If a digital photocell is utilized, it must integrate with the SSL luminaire via CAT5E cable and self-commission.

d. Each luminaire shall be supplied with a unique network address. This address shall be printed on two identification labels. One label shall be permanently affixed to the luminaire and one label shall be easily removed for network control commis-sioning purposes. Both labels shall be in a location which is easily accessible by the installing contractor.

6. The circuit board and power supply shall be contained inside the luminaire. 7. Electrical connections between normal power, driver and LED boards must be modular

utilizing a snap fit connector. All electrical components must be easily accessible after in-stallation from the room side and all electrical components must to be able to be replaced without removing the fixture from the ceiling.

E. Materials:

1. Housings shall be fabricated from post or pre-painted cold rolled steel. 2. Each refractor or lens shall be made from UV inhibited high impact plastic (such as

acrylic or polycarbonate) or heat and impact resistant glass, 3. Polymeric materials (if used) of enclosures containing either the power supply or elec-

tronic components of the luminaire shall be made of UL94VO flame retardant materials. The lenses (lens) of the luminaire are excluded from this requirement.

F. Luminaire Identification:

1. Each luminaire shall have the manufacturer's name, trademark, model number, serial number, date of manufacture (month-year), and lot number as identification permanently marked inside the each unit and the outside of each packaging box.

2. The following operating characteristics shall be permanently marked inside each unit: rated voltage and rated power in Watts and Volt-Ampere.

2.4 EXIT SIGNS

A. General Requirements for Exit Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction.



B. Internally Lighted Signs:

1. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 50,000 hours minimum rated lamp life.

2.5 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Comply with Section 16073 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel- and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as fixture.

C. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single fixture. Finish same as fixture.

D. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage (2.68 mm).

E. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch (5-mm) minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.

F. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Lighting fixtures:

1. Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install lamps in each luminaire.

B. Temporary Lighting: If it is necessary, and approved by Architect, to use permanent luminaires for temporary lighting, install and energize the minimum number of luminaires necessary. When construction is sufficiently complete, remove the temporary luminaires, disassemble, clean thoroughly, install new lamps, and reinstall.

C. Lay-in Ceiling Lighting Fixtures Supports: Use grid as a support element.

1. Install ceiling support system rods or wires, independent of the ceiling suspension devices, for each fixture. Locate not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from lighting fixture corners.

2. Support Clips: Fasten to lighting fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each fixture corner with clips that are UL listed for the application.

3. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least two 3/4-inch (20-mm) metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees.



4. Install at least one independent support rod or wire from structure to a tab on lighting fixture. Wire or rod shall have breaking strength of the weight of fixture at a safety factor of 3.

D. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support:

1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches (1200 mm), brace to limit swinging. 2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. 3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for

suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end. 4. Do not use grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods to

building structure.

E. Connect wiring according to Section 16120 "Conductors and Cables."

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels with panel and circuit numbers on concealed junction and outlet boxes. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 16075 "Electrical Identification."


A. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal.

B. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards.

3.4 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Burn-in all lamps that require specific aging period to operate properly, prior to occupancy by ATST POC.



PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 16711 - 1

SECTION 16711 - PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Metal conduits and fittings. 2. Optical-fiber-cable pathways and fittings. 3. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters. 4. Surface pathways. 5. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.


1. Section 16130 "Raceways and Boxes" for conduits, wireways, surface raceways, boxes, enclosures, cabinets, handholes, and faceplate adapters serving electrical systems.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical Metallic Tubing.

B. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.

C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.


A. Product Data: For surface pathways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.

B. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.




A. Coordination Drawings: Pathway routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items involved:

1. Structural members in paths of pathway groups with common supports. 2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups with

common supports.

B. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.

C. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For pathway racks, enclosures, cabinets, equipment racks and their mounting provisions, including those for internal components, from manufacturer.



3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which certification is based and their installation requirements.

4. Detailed description of conduit support devices and interconnections on which certification is based and their installation requirements.

D. Source quality-control reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUITS AND FITTINGS


1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co. 3. Alpha Wire Company. 4. Anamet Electrical, Inc. 5. Electri-Flex Company. 6. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group. 7. Picoma Industries; Subsidiary of Mueller Water Products, Inc. 8. Republic Conduit. 9. Robroy Industries. 10. Southwire Company. 11. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 12. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation. 13. Wheatland Tube Company; a division of John Maneely Company.

















B. General Requirements for Metal Conduits and Fittings:


2. Comply with TIA-569-B.

C. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.

D. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242.

E. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.

F. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.

1. Fittings for EMT:

a. Material: Die cast. b. Type: Compression.

2. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL-467, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper.

3. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inch (1 mm), with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.

G. Joint Compound for IMC or GRC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.

2.2 OPTICAL-FIBER-CABLE PATHWAYS AND FITTINGS


1. Alpha Wire Company. 2. Arnco Corporation. 3. Endot Industries Inc. 4. IPEX. 5. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.

B. Description: Comply with UL 2024; flexible-type pathway, approved for riser or general-use installation unless otherwise indicated.











2.3 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS


1. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2. Hoffman; a Pentair company. 3. Mono-Systems, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1 unless otherwise indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70.

1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.


C. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

D. Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type unless otherwise indicated.

E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

2.4 SURFACE PATHWAYS

A. General Requirements for Surface Pathways:



B. Surface Metal Pathways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers complying with UL 5. Manufacturer's standard enamel finish in color selected by Architect.


a. Mono-Systems, Inc. b. Niedax-Kleinhuis USA, Inc. c. Panduit Corp. d. Wiremold / Legrand.













2.5 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS


1. Adalet. 2. Cooper Technologies Company; Cooper Crouse-Hinds. 3. EGS/Appleton Electric. 4. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company. 5. Hoffman; a Pentair company. 6. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Division. 7. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 8. Milbank Manufacturing Co. 9. Molex; Woodhead Brand. 10. Mono-Systems, Inc. 11. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group. 12. RACO; a Hubbell company. 13. Robroy Industries. 14. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company. 15. Stahlin Non-Metallic Enclosures; a division of Robroy Industries. 16. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 17. Wiremold / Legrand.

B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets:

1. Comply with TIA-569-B. 2. Boxes, enclosures and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet

locations.

C. Sheet-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.

D. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with gasketed cover.

E. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box.

F. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

G. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, galvanized, cast iron with gasketed cover.

H. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep (100 mm square by 60 mm deep).

I. Gangable boxes are allowed.





















J. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1 with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated.

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.

K. Cabinets:

1. NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PATHWAY APPLICATION

A. Indoors: Apply pathway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: IMC. 2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT. 3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC. Pathway locations include the

following:

a. Equipment staging and storage areas. b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling units. c. Mechanical rooms. d. Electrical, electronic, and instrument lab areas.

4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. 5. Damp or Wet Locations: IMC. 6. Pathways for Optical-Fiber or Communications Cable in Spaces Used for Environmental

Air: Plenum-type, optical-fiber-cable pathway and Plenum-type, communications-cable pathway.

7. Pathways for Optical-Fiber or Communications-Cable Risers in Vertical Shafts: Riser-type, optical-fiber-cable pathway and Riser-type, communications-cable pathway.

8. Pathways for Concealed General-Purpose Distribution of Optical-Fiber or Communications Cable: General-use, optical-fiber-cable pathway, Riser-type, optical-fiber-cable pathway, General-use, communications-cable pathway, and Riser-type, communications-cable pathway.

9. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250 Type 1.

B. Minimum Pathway Size: 3/4-inch (21-mm) trade size. Minimum size for optical-fiber cables is 1 inch (27 mm).



C. Pathway Fittings: Compatible with pathways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

2. EMT: Use compression fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

D. Install surface pathways only where indicated on Drawings.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, NECA 101, and TIA-569-B for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of pathways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors.

B. Keep pathways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal pathway runs above water and steam piping.

C. Complete pathway installation before starting conductor installation.

D. Comply with requirements in Section 16073 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports.

E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.

F. Install no more than the equivalent of two 90-degree bends in any pathway run. Support within 12 inches (300 mm) of changes in direction. Utilize long radius ells for all optical-fiber cables.

G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

H. Support conduit within 12 inches (300 mm) of enclosures to which attached.

I. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:

1. Use EMT, IMC, or GRC for pathways. 2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or

in an enclosure.

J. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of pathway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.

K. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install insulated bushings on conduits terminated with locknuts.

L. Install pathways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.

M. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path.



N. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits of 2-inch (53-mm) trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to ensure cut is straight and perpendicular to the length.

O. Install pull wires in empty pathways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb (90-kg)tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm)of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground pathways designated as spare above grade alongside pathways in use.

P. Surface Pathways:

1. Install surface pathway for surface telecommunications outlet boxes only where indicated on Drawings.

2. Install surface pathway with a minimum 2-inch (50-mm) radius control at bend points. 3. Secure surface pathway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not

exceeding 48 inches (1200 mm) and with no less than two supports per straight pathway section. Support surface pathway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue are not acceptable support methods.

Q. Pathways for Optical-Fiber and Communications Cable: Install pathways, metal, rigid and flexible, as follows:

1. 3/4-Inch (21-mm) Trade Size and Smaller: Install pathways in maximum lengths of 50 feet (15 m).

2. 1-Inch (27-mm) Trade Size and Larger: Install pathways in maximum lengths of 75 feet (23 m).

3. Install with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of pathway unless Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes or terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with these requirements.

R. Install pathway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed pathways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install pathway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70.

S. Install devices to seal pathway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all pathways at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces.

2. Where an underground service pathway enters a building or structure. 3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

T. Expansion-Joint Fittings:

1. Install in each run of aboveground RMC and EMT conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 100 deg F (55 deg C) and that has straight-run length that exceeds 100 feet (30 m).



2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of the following locations:

a. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F (70 deg C) temperature change.

3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F (0.0115 mm per meter of length of straight run per deg C) of temperature change for metal conduits.

4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints.

5. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.

U. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box unless otherwise indicated.

V. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surface to provide a flat surface for a raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box.

W. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel.

X. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.

Y. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits.

Z. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.

3.3 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS PENETRATIONS


3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 07841 "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."



3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage or deterioration.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.



COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS 16714 - 1

SECTION 16714 - COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Telecommunications mounting elements. 2. Backboards. 3. Telecommunications equipment racks and cabinets. 4. Grounding.


1. Section 16136 "Cable Trays for Communications Systems" for cable trays and accessories.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International.

B. LAN: Local area network.

C. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for equipment racks and cabinets.


B. Shop Drawings: For communications equipment room fittings. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.



1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

2. Equipment Racks and Cabinets: Include workspace requirements and access for cable connections.

3. Grounding: Indicate location of grounding bus bar and its mounting detail showing standoff insulators and wall mounting brackets.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer, qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field inspector.

B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For equipment frames from manufacturer.


2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. Base certification on the maximum number of components capable of being mounted in each rack type. Identify components on which certification is based.



A. Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff.

1. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings shall be under the direct supervision of RCDD.

2. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of Level 2 Installer, who shall be present at all times when Work of this Section is performed at Project site.

3. Field Inspector: Currently registered by BICSI as RCDD to perform the on-site inspection.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Seismic Performance: Equipment frames shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.




2.2 BACKBOARDS

A. Backboards: Plywood, fire-retardant treated, 3/4 by 48 by 96 inches (19 by 1220 by 2440 mm). Comply with requirements for plywood backing panels specified in Section 06100 "Rough Carpentry."

2.3 EQUIPMENT FRAMES


1. ADC. 2. Belden Inc. 3. Cooper B-Line. 4. Emerson Network Power Connectivity Solutions. 5. Hubbell Premise Wiring. 6. Leviton Commercial Networks Division. 7. Middle Atlantic Products, Inc. 8. Ortronics, Inc. 9. Panduit Corp. 10. Siemon Co. (The). 11. Tyco Electronics Corporation; AMP Products.

B. General Frame Requirements:

1. Distribution Frames: Freestanding and wall-mounting, modular-steel units designed for telecommunications terminal support and coordinated with dimensions of units to be supported.

2. Module Dimension: Width compatible with EIA 310-D standard, 19-inch (480-mm) panel mounting.

3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard, baked-polyester powder coat.

C. Floor-Mounted Racks: Modular-type, steel or aluminum construction.

1. Vertical and horizontal cable management channels, top and bottom cable troughs, grounding lug, and a power strip.

2. Baked-polyester powder coat finish.

D. Modular Freestanding Cabinets:

1. Removable and lockable side panels. 2. Hinged and lockable front and rear doors. 3. Adjustable feet for leveling. 4. Screened ventilation openings in the roof and rear door. 5. Cable access provisions in the roof and base. 6. Grounding bus bar. 7. Rack-mounted, 550-cfm (260-L/s) fan with filter. 8. Power strip.














9. Baked-polyester powder coat finish. 10. All cabinets keyed alike.

E. Modular Wall Cabinets:

1. Wall mounting. 2. Steel or aluminum construction. 3. Treated to resist corrosion. 4. Lockable front and rear doors. 5. Louvered side panels. 6. Cable access provisions top and bottom. 7. Grounding lug. 8. Rack-mounted, 250-cfm (118-L/s) fan. 9. Power strip. 10. All cabinets keyed alike.

F. Cable Management for Equipment Frames:

1. Metal, with integral wire retaining fingers. 2. Baked-polyester powder coat finish. 3. Vertical cable management panels shall have front and rear channels, with covers. 4. Provide horizontal crossover cable manager at the top of each relay rack, with a

minimum height of two rack units each.

2.4 POWER STRIPS

A. Power Strips: Comply with UL 1363.


2. Rack mounting. 3. Six, 20-A, 120-V ac, NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R receptacles. 4. LED indicator lights for power and protection status. 5. LED indicator lights for reverse polarity and open outlet ground. 6. Circuit Breaker and Thermal Fusing: Unit continues to supply power if protection is lost. 7. Close-coupled, direct plug-in line cord. 8. Rocker-type on-off switch, illuminated when in on position. 9. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 26 kA per phase. 10. Protection modes shall be line to neutral, line to ground, and neutral to ground. UL 1449

clamping voltage for all three modes shall be not more than 330 V.

2.5 GROUNDING

A. Comply with requirements in Section 16060 "Grounding and Bonding" for grounding conductors and connectors.



B. Telecommunications Main Bus Bar:

1. Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless exothermic-type wire terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar.

2. Ground Bus Bar: Copper, minimum 1/4 inch thick by 4 inches wide (6 mm thick by 100 mm wide) with 9/32-inch (7.14-mm) holes spaced 1-1/8 inches (28 mm) apart.

3. Stand-Off Insulators: Comply with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V. Lexan or PVC, impulse tested at 5000 V.

C. Comply with J-STD-607-A.

2.6 LABELING

A. Comply with TIA/EIA-606-A and UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Comply with BICSI TDMM for layout and installation of communications equipment rooms.

C. Bundle, lace, and train conductors and cables to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Install lacing bars and distribution spools.

D. Coordinate layout and installation of communications equipment with Owner's telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers. Coordinate service entrance arrangement with local exchange carrier.

1. Meet jointly with telecommunications and LAN equipment suppliers, local exchange carrier representatives, and Owner to exchange information and agree on details of equipment arrangements and installation interfaces.

2. Record agreements reached in meetings and distribute them to other participants. 3. Adjust arrangements and locations of distribution frames, cross-connects, and patch

panels in equipment rooms to accommodate and optimize arrangement and space requirements of telephone switch and LAN equipment.

4. Adjust arrangements and locations of equipment with distribution frames, cross-connects, and patch panels of cabling systems of other communications, electronic safety and security, and related systems that share space in the equipment room.

E. Coordinate location of power raceways and receptacles with locations of communications equipment requiring electrical power to operate.



3.2 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS


3.3 FIRESTOPPING

A. Comply with requirements in Section 07841 "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."

B. Comply with TIA-569-B, Annex A, "Firestopping."

C. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article.

3.4 GROUNDING

A. Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter.

B. Comply with J-STD-607-A.

C. Locate grounding bus bar to minimize the length of bonding conductors. Fasten to wall allowing at least 2-inch (50-mm) clearance behind the grounding bus bar. Connect grounding bus bar with a minimum No. 4 AWG grounding electrode conductor from grounding bus bar to suitable electrical building ground.

D. Bond metallic equipment to the grounding bus bar, using not smaller than No. 6 AWG equipment grounding conductor.

1. Bond the shield of shielded cable to the grounding bus bar in communications rooms and spaces.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-A. Comply with requirements in Section 16075 "Electrical Identification."

B. Comply with requirements in Section 09912 "Interior Painting" for painting backboards. For fire-resistant plywood, do not paint over manufacturer's label.

C. Paint and label colors for equipment identification shall comply with TIA/EIA-606-A for Class 2 level of administration including optional identification requirements of this standard.

D. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type.


ATST Support and Operations Facilities Completion Package ...

Documents

Transcript of ATST Support and Operations Facilities Completion Package ...